GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 30i-Model A
Series 300i-Model A
Series 300is-Model A

Maintenance Manual

GFZ-63945EN/01 June 2003

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 2003 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B-63945EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of
CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users
to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit
(all descriptions in this section assume this configuration).
CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must
be undertaken only by a qualified technician.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool
builder.
Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become
familiar with the manuals provided by the machine tool builder and
FANUC.

Contents

1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

1.2 WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION
1.3 WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT
1.4 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
1.5 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY
MAINTENANCE

s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/01

1.1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the

maintenance personnel (herein referred to as the user) and preventing
damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and
Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary
information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and
Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-2
B-63945EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.2 WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION

WARNING
1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover
removed
(1) The user's clothing could become caught in the spindle or
other components, thus presenting a danger of injury. When
checking the operation, stand away from the machine to
ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the
spindle or other components.

(2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation

without workpiece. When a workpiece is mounted in the
machine, a malfunction could cause the workpiece to be
dropped or destroy the tool tip, possibly scattering
fragments throughout the area. This presents a serious
danger of injury. Therefore, stand in a safe location when
checking the operation.

2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics

cabinet door opened
(1) The power magnetics cabinet has a high-voltage section
(carrying a mark). Never touch the high-voltage section.
The high-voltage section presents a severe risk of electric
shock. Before starting any check of the operation, confirm
that the cover is mounted on the high-voltage section. When
the high-voltage section itself must be checked, note that
touching a terminal presents a severe danger of electric
shock.
(2) Within the power magnetics cabinet, internal units present
potentially injurious corners and projections. Be careful
when working inside the power magnetics cabinet.

3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the

operation of the machine. Before starting a production run,
ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a
trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override,
or machine lock function or by operating the machine with
neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

4. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.

Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result
in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage
to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/01

5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended

operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum
allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the
machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a
machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.

6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the

direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine
with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

s-4
B-63945EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.3 WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT

WARNING
1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the
power magnetics cabinet. If only the power to the CNC is turned
off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section. In
such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also
presenting a danger of electric shock.

2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken

by two persons or more. If the replacement is attempted by only
one person, the replacement unit could slip and fall, possibly
causing injury.

3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle
amplifier may retain voltages for a while, such that there is a
danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off.
Allow at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for
these residual voltages to dissipate.

4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same
parameter and other settings as the old unit. (For details, refer to
the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise,
unpredictable machine movement could damage the workpiece
or the machine itself, and present a danger of injury.

s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/01

1.4 WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNING
1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a
parameter, close the machine cover. Never use the automatic
operation function immediately after such a modification.
Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using functions
such as the single block function, feedrate override function, and
machine lock function, or by operating the machine without
mounting a tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before
confirming that it operates normally, the machine may move
unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and
presenting a risk of injury.

2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so
that those parameters usually need not be modified. When a
parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you
fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting
to modify it. If a parameter is set incorrectly, the machine may
move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or
workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.

s-6
B-63945EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.5 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY

MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to
the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to
the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-
voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory,
because it must retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters
even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed
on the machine operator's panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries
within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be
lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.8 of
this manual.

s-7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/01

WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to
the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to
the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-
voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute
position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed
on the machine operator's panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries
within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse
coder will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.10 of
this manual.

s-8
B-63945EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate
and remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to
touch the high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an
insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

s-9
B-63945EN/01 PREFACE

PREFACE
The manual consists of the following chapters:

Description of this manual

1. Display and operation
This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are
related to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also
provided at the end of this chapter.
2. LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
3. LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE
4. STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Chapters 2 to 5 describes the configuration of the hardware, lists
the hardware units, and explains how to replace printed-circuit
boards.
6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
This chapter describes the input/output of data, including
programs, parameters, and tool compensation data, aswell as the
input/output procedures for conversational data.
7. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system
configuration, and the signals used by the PMC.
8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This chapter describes the embedded Ethernet.
9. DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust
the reference position return position.
10. AC SPINDLE
This chapter describes the spindle tuning screen.
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event
of certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot
be turned on or if manual operation cannot be performed.
Countermeasures to be applied in the event of alarms being
output are also described.

APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
C. BOOT SYSTEM
D. MEMRY CARD SLOT
E. LED DISPLAY
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

p-1
PREFACE B-63945EN/01

This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to

the separate PARAMETER MANUAL.

Applicable models
This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.

Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A 30i -A Series 30i
FANUC Series 300i-MODEL A 300i-A Series 300i
FANUC Series 300is-MODEL A 300is-A Series 300is

NOTE
Some function described in this manual may not be
applied to some products.For details, refer to the
DESCRIPTIONS manual (B-63942EN).

p-2
B-63945EN/01 PREFACE

Related manuals of Series 30i/300i-MODEL A

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i, Series 300i,
Series 300is-MODEL A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name Specification
number
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (Common to T series/M series) B-63944EN
USER’S MANUAL (T series) B-63944EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (M series) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN *

Related manuals of Servo Motor αis/α

αi series and Spindle Motor αi series
The following table lists the manuals related to Servo Motor αis/αi
series and Spindle Motor αi series.
Table 2 Related manuals
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series B-65262EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series B-65270EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65272EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Either of the following servo motors and spindle motors can be

connected to the CNC covered in this manual.
• FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
• FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
• FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
This manual mainly assumes that the servo motor or spindle motor is
used. For servo motor and spindle motor information, refer to the
manuals for the servo motor and spindle motor that are actually
connected.

p-3
B-63945EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................... s-1
PREFACE.................................................................................................. p-1
1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION..................................................................1
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ............................................................2
1.1.1 Soft Keys ................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .............................................................................20
1.2.1 Displaying Diagnosisc Screen ............................................................................... 20
1.2.2 Contents Displayed................................................................................................ 20
1.3 CNC STATE DISPLAY ................................................................................30
1.4 OPERATING MONITOR..............................................................................32
1.4.1 Display Method ..................................................................................................... 32
1.4.2 Parameters ............................................................................................................. 33
1.5 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY...........................................................34
1.5.1 Parameter Setting................................................................................................... 35
1.5.2 Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen ................................................................ 46
1.5.3 Drawing Waveform Diagnosis Data...................................................................... 51
1.5.4 Sampling Waveform Diagnosis Data .................................................................... 53
1.5.5 Output of Waveform Diagnosis Data .................................................................... 53
1.5.6 Input of Waveform Diagnosis Data....................................................................... 54
1.5.7 Notes ..................................................................................................................... 54
1.6 COLOR SETTING SCREEN........................................................................55
1.6.1 Screen Display....................................................................................................... 55
1.6.2 Operations for Color Setting ................................................................................. 56
1.6.3 Parameter ............................................................................................................... 57
1.6.4 Notes ..................................................................................................................... 58

2 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 30i HARDWARE...............................59

2.1 STRUCTURE...............................................................................................60
2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE .....................................................................61
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................62
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS
AND CARDS................................................................................................65
2.4.1 Main Board ............................................................................................................ 65
2.4.2 Inverter PCBs and Connector Units ...................................................................... 82
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS...................................86

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/01

2.5.1 Basic Unit .............................................................................................................. 86

2.5.2 Display Unit........................................................................................................... 86
2.5.3 MDI Unit ............................................................................................................... 86
2.5.4 Printed Circuit Boards ........................................................................................... 86
2.5.5 I/O ..................................................................................................................... 88
2.5.6 Other Units ............................................................................................................ 88
2.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD ................................................................89
2.7 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT ...................................................91
2.8 REPLACING BATTERY...............................................................................93
2.9 REPLACING FAN MOTORS .......................................................................98
3 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 300is HARDWARE.........................101
3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION...............................................................102
3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .........................................................................103
3.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..........................................................104
3.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS
AND CARDS..............................................................................................105
3.4.1 Main Board .......................................................................................................... 105
3.5 GUI CARD .................................................................................................109
3.6 LOCATION OF THE ROTARY SWITCH ...................................................115
3.7 JUMPER PLUG SETTING.........................................................................116
3.8 INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS, AND FAN ADAPTER PCBS...117
3.9 DETAILS OF THE INVERTER...................................................................118
3.10 INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS, AND FAN ADAPTER PCBS...119
3.11 CONVERSION CABLE FOR THE INVERTER ..........................................120
3.12 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS.................................121
3.12.1 List of Printed Circuit Boards ............................................................................. 121
3.12.2 List of Units......................................................................................................... 121
3.12.3 Others................................................................................................................... 121
3.13 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD ..............................................................122
3.13.1 Replacement Procedure ....................................................................................... 122
3.14 REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT ....................................................................124
3.15 REPLACING THE BATTERY ....................................................................125
3.16 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR ...............................................................126
3.17 REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION SHEET ......................127
3.17.1 Replacing Method................................................................................................ 127
3.18 BACKUP UNIT...........................................................................................128

c-2
B-63945EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4 STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE ................................129

4.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION...............................................................130
4.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .........................................................................131
4.2.1 Series 30i/300i/300is ........................................................................................... 131
4.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..........................................................132
4.4 CONNECTOR AND CARD CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARDS....................................................................................................136
4.4.1 Main CPU Board of Series 30i/300i/300is.......................................................... 136
4.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS.................................142
4.5.1 Basic Units........................................................................................................... 142
4.5.2 Printed Circuit Boards of Control Unit ............................................................... 142
4.5.3 Other units ........................................................................................................... 143
4.6 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT .................................144
4.7 REPLACING THE BATTERY ....................................................................145
4.8 REPLACING A FAN UNIT .........................................................................149
5 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND
STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) ...............................................152
5.1 OPTIONAL BOARD ...................................................................................153
5.1.1 Fast Data Server................................................................................................... 153
5.1.2 Additional Axis Board......................................................................................... 157
5.1.3 Additional Spindle Board .................................................................................... 159
5.2 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB........................................160
5.2.1 Method of Extraction........................................................................................... 160
5.2.2 Method of Insertion ............................................................................................. 160
5.3 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS........................................162
5.3.1 Method of Extraction........................................................................................... 163
5.3.2 Method of Insertion ............................................................................................. 165
5.4 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES ................................166
5.4.1 Demounting a DIMM Module............................................................................. 167
5.4.2 Mounting a DIMM Module................................................................................. 167
5.5 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT FLASH CARD ON
THE DISPLAY CONTROL CARD ..............................................................168
5.5.1 Method of Extraction........................................................................................... 169
5.5.2 Method of Insertion ............................................................................................. 169
5.6 OTHER UNITS...........................................................................................170
5.6.1 Separate Detector Interface Unit ......................................................................... 170
5.7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)...........................................................172
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/01

5.8 DISTRIBUTED I/O SETTING.....................................................................174

5.9 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS ..............................................177
5.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE CABINET ...........................180
5.11 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE ................................................182
5.11.1 Separation of Signal Lines................................................................................... 182
5.11.2 Grounding............................................................................................................ 184
5.11.3 Signal Ground (SG) Connection of Control Unit................................................ 187
5.11.4 Noise Suppressor ................................................................................................. 189
5.11.5 Cable Clamping and Shielding ............................................................................ 190
5.12 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS.........................................193
6 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA ........................................................199
6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT......................................200
6.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA............................................................202
6.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output........................................ 202
6.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters................................................................................ 203
6.2.3 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount ................................................... 204
6.2.4 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values ........................................................ 204
6.2.5 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount ............................................................. 204
6.2.6 Outputting Part Program...................................................................................... 205
6.2.7 Inputting CNC Parameters................................................................................... 205
6.2.8 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount...................................................... 207
6.2.9 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values........................................................... 207
6.2.10 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount................................................................ 207
6.2.11 Inputting Part Programs....................................................................................... 208

7 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC ..........................................209

7.1 WHAT IS PMC?.........................................................................................210
7.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC ............................................................................... 210
7.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC ............................................................................................. 210
7.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses ........................................................................................ 211
7.2 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION ...........................................................................214
7.2.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage............................................... 216
7.2.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link ......................................................................... 218
7.2.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC....................................................................... 219
7.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R) ...................................................... 221
7.3 PMC SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................227
7.3.1 Basic Specifications............................................................................................. 227

c-4
B-63945EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.3.2 Addresses............................................................................................................. 230

7.4 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN.............................................................232
7.4.1 Transition of the PMC Screens ........................................................................... 234
7.5 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) ....235
7.5.1 Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen) .......................................... 235
7.5.2 Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen).............................................. 237
7.5.3 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen)............................... 238
7.5.4 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen)............................ 240
7.5.5 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)......................... 242
7.5.6 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)....................................... 243
7.5.7 Sequence Program And PMC Parameter I/O ([I/O] Screen)............................... 248
7.5.8 Displaying I/O Link Connection Status ([I/O LINK] Screen)............................. 250
7.5.9 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) .......................................................... 252
7.5.10 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen).................................... 253
7.5.11 Execution of Trace .............................................................................................. 258
7.5.11.1 Operation after execution of trace ....................................................................259
7.5.11.2 Automatic start of trace setting.........................................................................261
7.6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS
([PMC LADDER]) .......................................................................................262
7.6.1 Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen) ........................................................ 264
7.6.2 Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen)............................................ 266
7.6.3 Editing Ladder Programs..................................................................................... 269
7.6.3.1 NET EDITOR screen .......................................................................................272
7.6.4 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen..................................................................... 274
7.6.5 Collective Monitor Function ............................................................................... 275
7.6.5.1 COLLECTIVE MONITOR function ...............................................................276
7.7 LIST OF ADDRESSES ..............................................................................279
8 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION................................................315
8.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ........316
8.2 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ..............................317
8.2.1 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function......................................... 317
8.2.2 Setting Parameters for The FTP File Transfer Function ..................................... 322
8.2.3 Setting the DNS and DHCP Functions................................................................ 326
8.2.3.1 DNS settings.....................................................................................................326
8.2.3.2 DHCP settings..................................................................................................328
8.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES.........332
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS..................................................333
8.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function ................................................................................. 333
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/01

8.5 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ..........................................337

8.6 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN ...............................338
8.7 ERROR LOG SCREEN FOR THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ...................343
9 DIGITAL SERVO................................................................................344
9.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS...............................................345
9.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN........................................................................364
9.2.1 Parameter Setting................................................................................................. 364
9.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen......................................................................... 364
9.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) .........................372
9.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 372
9.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING........................................375
9.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 375
9.4.2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 375
9.4.3 Related Parameters .............................................................................................. 376
9.5 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE ..........................................................377
9.6 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ........................................................378

10 AC SPINDLE ......................................................................................382
10.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE ..........................................................383
10.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control .................................................................................. 383
10.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for M series (Parameter No. 3705#2=0) ................384
10.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for M series (Parameter No. 3705#2=1) .................384
10.1.1.3 T series .............................................................................................................384
10.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen ..................................................................... 385
10.1.2.1 Display method ................................................................................................385
10.1.2.2 Spindle setting screen.......................................................................................386
10.1.2.3 Spindle tuning screen .......................................................................................387
10.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen.....................................................................................389
10.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle
tuning screen ....................................................................................................391
10.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters.......................................................... 393
10.1.4 Warning Interface for the αi Spindle................................................................... 394
10.1.5 αi Spindle Information Screen ............................................................................ 396
10.2 ANALOG INTERFACE AC SPINDLE ........................................................400
10.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control .................................................................................. 400
10.2.1.1 Block diagram ..................................................................................................400
10.2.1.2 Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters...................................401
10.2.1.3 Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter) ........................................................403

11 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................405
c-6
B-63945EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

11.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES..................................................406

11.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred............................... 406
11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE
EXECUTED ...............................................................................................408
11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ....................................................412
11.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE .............................................416
11.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ......................................420
11.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF....................................427
11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE POWER IS
TURNED ON..............................................................................................429
11.8 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE
PERFORMED INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED
PROPERLY ...............................................................................................431
11.9 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT TO AN
UNEXPECTED ADDRESS ........................................................................433
11.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS OUTPUT TO
AN EXPANSION UNIT...............................................................................434
11.11 ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087
(READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) ............................................435
11.12 ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL)....439
11.13 ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) ..441
11.14 ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF)..............................................................442
11.15 ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON) ...............................................................444
11.16 ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED)
ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED).......................................445
11.17 ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL).................446
11.18 ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) ....................................447
11.19 ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR)..........................................448
11.20 ALARM SV5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)
ALARM SV5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT)..............................................449
11.21 ALARM SV5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) ........................450
11.22 SERVO ALARMS.......................................................................................451
11.23 SPC ALARMS............................................................................................454
11.24 SPINDLE ALARMS....................................................................................455
11.25 SYSTEM ALARMS ....................................................................................456

c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/01

APPENDIX
A ALARM LIST ......................................................................................459
A.1 ALARM LIST (CNC)...................................................................................460
A.2 ALARM LIST (PMC)...................................................................................505
A.2.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen........................... 505
A.2.2 PMC System Alarm Messages ............................................................................ 508
A.2.3 Operation Errors .................................................................................................. 510
A.2.4 I/O Communication Error Messages ................................................................... 521
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) .............................................................525
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE)........................................................532
B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS......................................................534
C BOOT SYSTEM .................................................................................535
C.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................536
C.1.1 Displaying the Power ON Sequence ................................................................... 537
C.1.2 Starting the Boot System ..................................................................................... 538
C.1.3 System Files and User Files................................................................................. 538
C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE ..............539
C.2.1 USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen ........................ 540
C.2.2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen....................................................................... 542
C.2.3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen ..................................................................... 545
C.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen .......................................................................... 547
C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen......................................................................... 549
C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Screen.................................................................. 552
C.2.7 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM..................................................................................... 553
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS ...................................554
D MEMRY CARD SLOT ........................................................................556
D.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................557
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS)...................................................558
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION...............................................................560
E LED DISPLAY ....................................................................................561
E.1 OVERIVIEW ..............................................................................................562
E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) .....................................563
E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING)..........................................565
F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) .....................566
F.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................567
c-8
B-63945EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES ...........................................................569

F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS .................................................................570
F.3.1 BOOT Screen ............................................................................................570
F.3.1.1 System data manipulation.................................................................................... 571
F.3.1.2 SRAM operation.................................................................................................. 572
F.3.1.3 File operation....................................................................................................... 573
F.3.2 IPL Screen .................................................................................................574
F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL screen ................................................................................ 575
F.4 OTHER SCREENS ....................................................................................576
F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen .............................................................................................. 576
F.4.2 Status Screen (Series 300i only).......................................................................... 577
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen.......................................................................................... 578
F.4.3.1 Option setting screen (Series 300i) ..................................................................578
F.4.3.2 Option setting screen (Series 300is) .................................................................579

c-9
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION

This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function
keys.
The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ...................................... 2

1.2 DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ...................................................... 20
1.3 CNC STATE DISPLAY ............................................................ 30
1.4 OPERATING MONITOR ......................................................... 32
1.5 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY .................................... 34
1.6 COLOR SETTING SCREEN .................................................... 55

-1-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS

Operations and soft key display status for each function key are
described below:

1.1.1 Soft Keys

To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a

soft key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.
The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by
pressing each function key.

The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :

Indicates screens

Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a function key *1)

[ ] Indicates a soft key *2)

( ) Indicates input from the MDI panel.

[ ] Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).

Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key) *3)

*1) Press function keys to switch between screens that are used
frequently.

*2) Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option
configuration.

*3) In some cases, the continuous menu key is omitted when the 12
soft keys type is used.

-2-
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

POSITION SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS

-3-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the
MEM mode
1/2

-4-
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2

-5-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in
the EDIT mode
1/2

-6-
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2

-7-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the MDI mode

-8-
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
in
the TJOG or THDL mode

-9-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG
(When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed in all modes)
1/2

- 10 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2

- 11 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

Soft key transition triggered by the function

OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (T series)
key OFFSET
SETTING

1/2

- 12 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2

- 13 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (M series)

Soft key transition triggered by the function key OFFSET
SETTING

1/2

- 14 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2

- 15 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

SYSTEM SCREEN
Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM

1/3

- 16 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/3

- 17 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

3/3

- 18 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE

- 19 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.2 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

1.2.1 Displaying Diagnosisc Screen

(1) Press key.

SYSTEM

(2) Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnosis screen is displayed.

1.2.2 Contents Displayed

• Causes when the machine does not travel in spite of giving a command

000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An auxiliary function is being executed.

001 MOTION Travel command of cycle operation is
being executed.
002 DWELLDWELL Dwell is being executed.
003 IN-POSITION CHECK In-position check is being done.
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.
005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK Interlock or start lock is input.
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waiting for spindle speed arrival signal.
010 PUNCHING Data is being output through
reader/puncher interface.
011 READING Data is being input through reader/puncher
interface.
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP Waiting for the end of index table indexing
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Manual feedrate override is 0%.
014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF
NC is in reset state.
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH
External Program Number Search External
program number search is being done
016 BACKGROUND ACTIVE Background is being used.

• Cause of the cycle start LED turned off

020 CUT SPEED UP /DO 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Input of emergency stop signal

Input of external reset signal
Reset button On of MDI
Input of reset & rewind
Servo alarm generation
Switching to other mode, Feed hold
Single block stop

- 20 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

• State of TH alarm
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM Position of the character that caused TH
alarm. The position is counted from the
head.
031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused TH
alarm.

• Details of serial Pulsecoder

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
OVL: Overload alarm
LV: Insufficient voltage alarm
OVC: Over current alarm
HCA: Abnormal current alarm
HVA: Overvoltage alarm
DCA: Discharge alarm
FBA: Disconnection alarm
OFA: Overflow alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 201 ALD EXP

Overload 0 - - - Motor overheat

alarm
1 - - - Amplifier overheat

Disconnec 1 - - 0 Built-in Pulsecoder (hard)

tion alarm 1 - - 1 Disconnection of separated type
Pulsecoder (hard)
0 - - 0 Disconnection of Pulsecoder
(software)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
CSA: Hardware of serial Pulsecoder is abnormal
BLA: Battery voltage is low (warning)
PHA: Serial Pulsecoder or feedback cable is erroneous.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
RCA: Serial Pulsecoder is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
BZA: Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.
CKA: Serial Pulsecoder is faulty.
Internal block stopped.
SPH: Serial Pulsecoder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 203 DTE CRC STB PRM
DTE: Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
There is no response for communication.
CRC: Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.

- 21 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

Transferred data is erroneous.

STB: Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
PRM: The alarm is detected by the servo, the values specified in the
parameter is not correct.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
OFS: Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital
MCC: Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
LDA: Serial Pulsecoder LED is abnormal
PMS: Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial Pulsecoder C or feedback
cable.

• Details of separate serial Pulsecoder alarms

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 205 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
OHA: Overheat occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
LDA: An LED error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
BLA: A low battery voltage occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
PHA: A phase data error occurred in the separate linear scale.
CMA: A count error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
BZA: The battery voltage for the separate Pulsecoder is zero.
PMA: A pulse error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
SPH: A soft phase data error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 206 DTE CRC STB
DTE: A data error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
CRC: A CRC error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
STB: A stop bit error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.

• Details of invalid servo parameter alarms (on the CNC side)

When servo alarm No. 417 is issued, and diagnosis No. 203#4 = 0, its
cause is indicated.
When diagnosis No. 203#4 = 1, see diagnosis No. 352.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
MOT: The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
PLC: The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution,
specified in parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
PLS: The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution,
specified in parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
DIR: The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in
parameter No. 2022 (the value is other than 111 or -111).

- 22 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

AXS: In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside
the range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For
example, 4 is specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values
specified in the parameter are not consecutive.

• Position error amount

DGN 300 Position error of an axis in detection unit

Feed rate [mm/min] 1

Position error = ×
60 servo loop gain [1/sec] Detection unit

• Machine position

DGN 301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit

• Reference position shift function

DGN 302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] 0.001mm (metric output), 0.0001inch (inch output)
[Valid data range] 0 to ±99999999

• Reference counter

DGN 304 Reference counter amount in each axis

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999

• Details of invalid servo parameter setting alarms (on the servo side)

DGN 352 Detail number for invalid servo parameter setting alarm
Indicates information that can be used to identify the location
(parameter) and cause of an invalid servo parameter setting alarm
(servo alarm No. 417).
This diagnosis information is valid when the following conditions are
satisfied.
• Servo alarm No. 417 has occurred.
• Bit 4 of diagnosis No. 203 (PRM) = 1
See the following table for the displayed detail numbers and the
corresponding causes. For further detail information that could be
used to take measures, refer to FANUC AC Servo Motor αi series
Parameter Manual (B-65270EN).

- 23 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

• Detailed descriptions about invalid servo parameter setting alarms

Parameter
Detail number Cause Measure
number
A value specified as the number of velocity pulses Decrease the value specified as the number of
0233 2023
is greater than 13100 when initialization bit 0 = 1. velocity pulses to within 13100.
A value specified as the number of position pulses Decrease the value specified as the number of
0243 2024
is greater than 13100 when initialization bit 0 = 1. position pulses to within 13100.
0434 The internal value of the velocity loop integration Decrease the value specified in the velocity loop
2043
0435 gain has overflowed. integration gain parameter.
0444 The internal value of the velocity loop proportional Use a function for changing the internal format of
2044
0445 gain has overflowed. the velocity loop proportional gain.
0474 The internal value of the observer parameter
2047 Change the setting to: (-1) × (desired setting)/10
0475 (POA1) has overflowed.
0534 The internal value of the dead zone compensation Decrease the setting until the invalid parameter
2053
0535 parameter has overflowed. setting alarm will not occur any longer.
0544 The internal value of the dead zone compensation Decrease the setting until the invalid parameter
2054
0545 parameter has overflowed. setting alarm will not occur any longer.
0686
The internal value of the feedforward coefficient
0687 2068 Use the position gain magnification function.
has overflowed.
0688
0694
0695 The interval value of the velocity feedforward
2069 Decrease the velocity feedforward coefficient.
0696 coefficient has overflowed.
0699
0754 The setting of the parameter listed at the left has This parameter is presently not in use. Specify 0
2075
0755 overflowed. in it.
0764 The setting of the parameter listed at the left has This parameter is presently not in use. Specify 0
2076
0765 overflowed. in it.
The conversion coefficient parameter listed at the
0783 2078 left has not been set up for a full-closed loop linear Set a value in this parameter.
motor (for the Series 9080 only).
The conversion coefficient parameter listed at the
0793 2079 left has not been set up for a full-closed loop linear Set a value in this parameter.
motor (for the Series 9080 only).
Specify a positive value as the flexible feed gear
No positive value has been set for the flexible feed numerator.
gear numerator. Alternatively, satisfy the following condition: Feed
0843 2084
Alternatively, the following condition exists: Feed gear numerator ≤ denominator
gear numerator > denominator (except for phase A-/B-specific stand-alone type
detector).
No positive value has been set as the flexible feed Specify a positive value as the flexible feed gear
0853 2085
gear denominator. denominator.
Decrease the machine velocity feedback
0884
The internal value of the machine velocity coefficient.
0885 2088
feedback coefficient has overflowed. Alternatively, use the damping control function,
0886
which has an equivalent effect.
The maximum allowable value for the machine
A value of 100 or greater was specified in the
velocity feedback coefficient for axes with a serial
0883 2088 machine velocity feedback coefficient for an axis
stand-alone type detector is 100. Decrease the
with a serial stand-alone type detector.
setting to within 100.
0926
The interval value of the advance feedforward
0927 2092 Use the position gain magnification function.
coefficient has overflowed.
0928
The internal value for suppressing N pulses has Decrease the setting of the parameter listed at the
0996 2099
overflowed. left.
No value has been entered for the AMR
1123 2112 conversion coefficient parameter when a linear Specify the AMR conversion coefficient.
motor is in use.

- 24 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Parameter
Detail number Cause Measure
number
No value has been specified in the semi-/full-
Specify a semi-/full-closed loop error threshold
1183 2118 closed loop error threshold parameter for a full-
value for the parameter listed at the left.
closed loop linear motor (for the Series 9080 only).
If the value specified as the number of velocity Decrease the value for the parameter listed at the
1284
2128 pulses is small, the internal value of the current left to within a range where no alarm will occur
1285
control parameter overflows. any longer.
If the value specified as the number of velocity Reset "a" to a smaller value when the setting of
1294
2129 pulses is large, the internal value of the current the parameter listed at the left is broken up into: a
1295
control parameter overflows. × 256 + b
The setting of the linear motor AMR offset has Decrease the setting of the parameter listed at the
1393 2139
exceeded ±45. left to within ±45.
1446 The cutting feedforward coefficient for the cutting-
1447 2144 /rapid traverse-specific FAD function has Use the position gain magnification function.
1448 overflowed.
1454
The cutting velocity feedforward coefficient for the
1455
2145 cutting-/rapid traverse-specific FAD function has Decrease the velocity feedforward coefficient.
1456
overflowed.
1459
No positive value has been set in the reference Specify a positive value in the parameter listed at
8213 1821
counter capacity parameter. the left.
8254
The internal value of the position gain has
8255 1825 Use the position gain magnification function.
overflowed.
8256
10016 The internal value of a parameter used to detect Do not use the runaway detection function
2200bit0
10019 runaway has overflowed. (specify bit 0 = 1).
1815#1 A full-closed loop has been set up for a linear A full-closed loop cannot be specified for linear
10043
2010#2 motor (except for the Series 9080). motors.
The scale reverse connection bit has been set up The scale reverse connection bit cannot be used
10053 2018#0
for a linear motor. for linear motors.
If you want to use this amplifier, reset the function
The amplifier in use does not support the HC bit listed at the left to 0.
10062 2209#4
alarm avoidance function. If you want to use the HC alarm avoidance
function, use an amplifier that supports it.

• Diagnostic data related to the Inductosyn absolute position detector

DGN 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
M (absolute position of the motor)-S (offset data)
λ (pitch interval)
The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.

DGN 381 Offset data from the Inductosyn

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
Off set data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position.

- 25 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

• Diagnostic data related to rigid tapping

DGN 450 Spindle position error during rigid tapping

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit

DGN 451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit

DGN 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping

[Data type] 2Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit

DGN 455 Instantaneous difference for the move command, calculated in terms of the
spindle, during rigid tapping (signed, accumulated value)
[Data type] 2Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit

DGN 456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error, calculated in terms of the
spindle, during rigid tapping (signed)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit

DGN 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit

• HSSB (Open CNC)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 510
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available
to general users).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 511
This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available
to general users).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 512 THH THL PRA
This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in
Open CNC.
PRA 0: Normal
1: A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM.

- 26 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

THL, THH :
THL THH Status
0 0 A battery alarm has occurred in the PANEL i or CNC
display unit with PC functions.
1 0 A high-temperature condition has occurred in the
PANEL i or CNC display unit with PC functions.
0 1 A low-temperature condition has occurred in the PANEL
i or CNC display unit with PC functions.
1 1 Normal (connected to the PC)

#4 0: Normal
1: An NMI has occurred in HSSB.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 513
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (open CNC).
(Hidden function)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 515
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (channel 2).
(Hidden function)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 516
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (channel 2).
(Hidden function)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 517 THH THL PRA
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (channel 2) as
follows.
PRA 0: Normal
1: A RAM parity error has occurred in shared RAM.
THL, THH:
THL THH Status
0 0 A battery alarm has occurred in the PANEL i or CNC
display unit with PC functions.
1 0 A high-temperature condition has occurred in the
PANEL i or CNC display unit with PC functions.
0 1 A low-temperature condition has occurred in the PANEL
i or CNC display unit with PC functions.
1 1 Normal (connected to the PC)

#4 0: Normal
1: An NMI has occurred in the HSSB.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 518
Indicates the internal information about the HSSB (channel 2).
(Hidden function)

- 27 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

• Diagnostic data related to simple synchronous control

Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple
DGN 540
synchronas control

Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple
DGN 541
synchronas control
DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the
master and slave axes when a single axis pair is subjected to simple
synchronous control. DGN 541 is used when two or more pairs are
subjected to simple synchronous control. The position error is
indicated for the master axis.
DGN 540 and 541 indicate values in detection units. They are
displayed only with the M series.

• Diagnostic data related to the dual position feedback function

DGN 550 Closed loop error

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999

DGN 551 Semi-closed loop error

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999

DGN 552 Error between semi-closed and closed loops

[Data type] Word aixs
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -32768 to +32767

DGN 553 Amount of dual position compensation

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999
The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the
following positions:

- 28 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Semi-closed loop
error (No. 551)

Motor
Command + + +
Σ Kp Speed Machine
control
- + -
Servo amplifier
Ps

Conversion
coefficients

Closed loop error (Parameters No. 2078 and 2079)

(No. 550) Amount of dual
position
+ × Time compensation (No.
constant 553)
+ - +
Σ (Parameter No. 2080)
- +
Error between
semi-closed and
closed loops (No.
552)

• State of high-speed HRV current control

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 700 HOK HON
[Data type] Bit axis
The state of high-speed HRV current control is displayed.
HON: The motor is controlled in the high-speed HRV current control mode.
HOK: This bit is set to 1 when high-speed HRV current control is enabled.
High-speed HRV current control is enabled when the following
conditions are satisfied:
- Bit 0 (HR3) of parameter No. 2013 is set to 1.
- Servo software, servo modules, and servo amplifiers suitable for
high-speed HRV current control are used.
- When a separate detector interface unit is used, the separate
detector interface unit is suitable for high-speed HRV current
control.

- 29 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.3 CNC STATE DISPLAY

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010

X 217.940
Y 363.233
Z 0.000
COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35

[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

- Indicates the current status of the CNC.

- Display example and explanation

MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35

<1> <2> <3> <4> <7> <8>

<5>
<1> Mode selection status
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
MDI : Manual data input/MDI operation
EDIT : Program editing
RMT : Remote operation
JOG : Jog feed
REF : Reference position return
INC : Incremental feed mode = step feed (if no manual pulse
generator is available)
HND : Manual handle feed mode
<2> Automatic operation status
STRT : Automatic operation has started (and program execution
is under way).
HOLD : Automatic operation has been suspended (execution of
a block has been discontinued, and automatic operation
has stopped).
STOP : Automatic operation has stopped (a block has been
finished, and automatic operation has stopped).
MSTR : The tool is returning or being repositioned when the
tool retract and return function is executed.
**** : Other status (when the power is switched on, or automatic
operation has ended)
<3> Automatic operation status
MTN : Program-specified axis movement is under way.
DWL : Program-specified dwell command (G04) is being
executed.
*** : Other status

- 30 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

<4> Auxiliary function status

FIN : The completion signal FIN for an auxiliary function is
being awaited.
*** : Other status
<5> Emergency stop and reset status (displayed at the location of
items mentioned in <3> and <4>)
--EMG-- : Emergency stop status
-RESET- : CNC reset status (The state in which the reset signal or
the MDI RESET key remains active.)
<6> Alarm status
ALM : An alarm condition has been detected.
BAT : The lithium battery (CNC back-up battery) voltage is
low (the battery is to be replaced).
Blank : Other status
<7> Clock display : Hour:minute:second
<8> Program editing/running status
INPUT : Data is being input.
OUTPUT : Data is being output.
SEARCH : A data search is under way.
EDIT : Editing such as insertion or modification is under
way.
LSK : Label skip enabled at data input (until valid
information is read).
RSTR : Program restart state
COMPARE : State where data is being compared
OFST : State where the tool length compensation
measurement mode (for the machining center
system) is set or the tool length compensation
write mode (for the lath system) is set
WOFS : State where the workpiece origin compensation
measurement mode is set
AICC1 : State where operation is being performed in the AI
contour control I mode
AICC2 : State where operation is being performed in the AI
contour control II mode
MEM-CHK : State where a tape memory check is being made
CTMBD : State where operation is being performed under
customer's board control
WSFT : State where the workpiece shift amount write
mode is set
Space : State where edit operation is not performed

- 31 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.4 OPERATING MONITOR

Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed
meter can be displayed.

1.4.1 Display Method

(1) Set a parameter to display operating monitor. (Bit 5 (OPM) of

parameter No.3111)
(2) Press the POS
key to display the position display screen.
(3) Press continuous menu key , then soft key [MONI] is
displayed.
(4) Press the soft key [MONI], then the operating monitor screen is
displayed.

OPERATING MONITOR O1234 N00001

(LOAD METER)
X:*****0% S1 : * * *

Y:*****0%
(SPEED METER RPM)
Z:*****0% S1 : * * * * * ** 0

PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME H M CYCLE TIME H M S
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T 0000
MEM STRT MTN *** 09 : 06 : 35

[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

CAUTION
1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to
200%.
2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio
of the current spindle speed to the maximum
spindle speed (100%). Although the speed meter
normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it
can also be used to indicate the speed of the
spindle by setting bit 6. (OPS) of parameter 3111 to
1.
3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed
are set to parameter No. 3151 to 3153. If
parameters 3151 to 3153 are all zero, the load
meter of the basic axes are displayed.

- 32 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.4.2 Parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 3111 OPS OPM
[Data type] Bit
OPM Operating monitor display is:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
OPS The speedometer on the operating monitor screen displays:
0: Spindle motor speed
1: Spindle speed

DGN 3151 Axis number for which the first servo motor load meter is displayed

DGN 3152 Axis number for which the second servo motor load meter is displayed

DGN 3153 Axis number for which the third servo motor load meter is displayed

DGN 3154 Axis number for which the fourth servo motor load meter is displayed

DGN 3155 Axis number for which the fifth servo motor load meter is displayed

DGN 3156 Axis number for which the sixth servo motor load meter is displayed

DGN 3157 Axis number for which the seventh servo motor load meter is displayed

DGN 3158 Axis number for which the eighth servo motor load meter is displayed
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0, 1, ... number of controlled axes
These parameters specify the numbers of the axes for which load
meters for servo motors are to be displayed. Up to eight load meters
can be displayed. Set 0 for those axes for which no load meter is to be
displayed.

- 33 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.5 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY

Data such as servo positional deviation amounts, torque amounts, and

machine signals is traced, and changes in those amounts are displayed
as waveforms. This function facilitates servo motor and spindle motor
adjustment and fault location when trouble has occurred.

The waveform diagnosis function can trace the following data:

(1) Servo-related data
- Positional deviation amount
- Pulse amount after distribution
- Torque amount
- Pulse amount after acceleration/deceleration
- Current command value
- Heat simulation data
- Composite speed of all axes
(2) Spindle-related data
- Speed of each spindle
- Load meter value
- Spindle-converted positional deviation difference
(3) Machine signal
- ON/OFF state of the external I/O signal specified by a
signal address

Data can be traced under the following three conditions:

(1) Data is acquired at a specified sampling period after an arbitrary
time.
(2) Data is acquired at a specified sampling period immediately after
the occurrence of a specified event.
(3) Data is acquired at a specified sampling period immediately
before the occurrence of a specified event.
When (3) is to be specified as the trace condition, the end of trace
operation can be delayed by a specified time. In this way, data
immediately before and after the occurrence of an event can be
acquired.
As an event, the rising edge of a machine signal, the falling edge of a
machine signal, or the occurrence of an alarm can be specified.
A sampling period can be specified separately for a waveform and
machine signal.

- 34 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.5.1 Parameter Setting

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10600 MEM
MEM 0: The memory trace function in servo waveform diagnosis is
disabled.
1: The memory trace function in servo waveform diagnosis is
enabled.

10601 Trace condition

Set a trace condition.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 3
[Setting data]
1: Arbitrary
2: Immediately after TRG
3: Immediately before TRG

10602 Waveform sampling period

Specify a waveform sampling period.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 2 to 4096 (2 ms unit)
[Setting data] Set a period for sampling waveform data.

10603 Signal sampling period

Specify a signal sampling period.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 4 to 4096 (4 ms unit), or 8 to 4096 (8 ms unit) when the NC system is
of type 3
[Setting data] Set a period for sampling signal state.

10604 Delay time

Set a time for delaying the end of trace operation when trace
condition (3) is specified.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 65528 (8 ms unit)
[Setting data] Set a delay time.

10605 Delay time

Set the time value of one scale division on the horizontal axis (time
axis).
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 10 to 100000000
[Setting data] Set the time value of one scale division on the horizontal axis (time
axis).

- 35 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

10606 Trigger type

Set a trigger type to be used as an event when trace condition (2) or
(3) is specified.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 7
[Setting data]
1: Alarm only
2: Machine signal ON
3: machine signal OFF
4: Machine signal transition
5: Alarm + Machine signal ON
6: Alarm + Machine signal OFF
7: Alarm + Machine signal transition

10607 Alarm type

When trace condition (2) or (3) is specified and the specified trigger
type includes the occurrence of an alarm, specify an alarm type to be
used as a trigger event.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 13
[Setting data]
1: The occurrence of a servo alarm is used as a trigger event.
2: Spindle alarm
3: P/S alarm (other than 000, 100, and 101)
4: P/S alarm in the three thousands (macro alarm)
5: P/S alarm in the five thousands
6: P/S alarm 000
7: P/S alarm 100
8: P/S alarm 101
9: APC alarm
10: Overtravel alarm
11: Overheat alarm
12: Rigid tapping alarm
13: External alarm

10608 Alarm number

When the alarm type specified as a trigger event includes a servo
alarm or spindle alarm, set its alarm number.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
[Setting data] Set the alarm number of a servo alarm or spindle alarm used as a
trigger event.

- 36 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

10609 Axis number

When the alarm type specified as a trigger event includes a servo
alarm or spindle alarm, set a target (physical) axis number.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 32 (1 to 32 servo axes/1 to 8 spindle axes)
[Setting data] Set a target (physical) axis number for a servo alarm or spindle alarm
to be used as a trigger event.

10610 Signal trigger (address)

Set the address of a machine signal to be used as a trigger event.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 0 to 499997 (No address is set when 0 is set.)
[Setting data] Set the address of a machine signal to be used as a trigger event.

10611 Data type 1

Set the data type of trace data (waveform) 1.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 0 to 11 (99: Not disclosed)
[Setting data]
0: (Hidden graph)
1: Servo positional deviation amount
2: Servo pulse amount after distribution
3: Servo torque amount
4: Servo pulse amount after acceleration/deceleration
5: Actual servo speed
6: Servo current command value
7: Servo heat simulation data
8: Composite speed of all axes
9: Spindle speed
10: Spindle load meter
11: Spindle-converted positional deviation difference
99: Memory

10612 Data type 2

Set the data type of trace data (waveform) 2.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
data type 1.

10613 Data type 3

Set the data type of trace data (waveform) 3.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
data type 1.

10614 Data type 4

Set the data type of trace data (waveform) 4.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
data type 1.

- 37 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

10615 Axis number 1

Set the (physical) axis number of trace data (waveform) 1.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 32 (1 to 32 servo axes, 1 to 8 spindle axes, 1 to 10 paths)
[Setting data] Set the (physical) axis number of trace data (waveform) 1.

10616 Axis number 2

Set the (physical) axis number of trace data (waveform) 2.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
axis number 1.

10617 Axis number 3

Set the (physical) axis number of trace data (waveform) 3.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
axis number 1.

10618 Axis number 4

Set the (physical) axis number of trace data (waveform) 4.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
axis number 1.

10619 Vertical axis scale division unit 1

Set the value of one scale division on the vertical axis of trace data
(waveform) 1.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 100000000
[Setting data] Set the value of one scale division on the vertical axis of trace data
(waveform) 1.

10620 Vertical axis scale division unit 2

Set the value of one scale division on the vertical axis of trace data
(waveform) 2.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
vertical axis scale division unit 1.

10621 Vertical axis scale division unit 3

Set the value of one scale division on the vertical axis of trace data
(waveform) 3.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
vertical axis scale division unit 1.

10622 Vertical axis scale division unit 4

Set the value of one scale division on the vertical axis of trace data
(waveform) 4.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
vertical axis scale division unit 1.

- 38 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

10623 Waveform color 1

Set the waveform color of trace data (waveform) 1.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 7
[Setting data]
0: Data display color
1: Alarm display color
2: Title display color
3: Cursor display color
4: Subtitle display color
5: Input key display color
6: Selection window bar display color
7: Background color for data that can be input

10624 Waveform color 2

Set the waveform color of trace data (waveform) 2.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
waveform color 1.

10625 Waveform color 3

Set the waveform color of trace data (waveform) 3.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
waveform color 1.

10626 Waveform color 4

Set the waveform color of trace data (waveform) 4.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
waveform color 1.

10627 Data weight 1

Set data weight 1.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
[Setting data] Specify the weight of data when the diagnosis (analysis) target alarm
is 1.

10628 Data weight 2

Set data weight 2.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
data weight 1.

10629 Data weight 3

Set data weight 3.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
data weight 1.

- 39 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

10630 Data weight 4

Set data weight 4.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
data weight 1.

10631 Measurement item 1

Set measurement item 1.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 1 to 999999999
[Setting data] Set a 32-bit value, which actually consists of four 8-bit data items as
shown below.
[********] [********] [********] [********]

- The lowest 8 bits specify the axis/path/spindle data

corresponding to measurement items (1 to 32).
Type Setting
Servo positional deviation amount Servo (physical) axis
Servo pulse amount after distribution number (1 to 32)
Servo torque amount
Servo pulse amount after acceleration/deceleration
Actual servo speed
Servo current command value
Servo heat simulation data
Composite speed of all axes Path (1 to 10)
Spindle speed Spindle (physical) number
Spindle load meter (1 to 8)
Spindle-converted positional deviation difference None (fixed at 0)

- The second lowest 8 bits specify measurement items (1 to 11).

Type Setting
Servo positional deviation amount 1
Servo pulse amount after distribution 2
Servo torque amount 3
Servo pulse amount after acceleration/deceleration 4
Actual servo speed 5
Servo current command value 6
Servo heat simulation data 7
Composite speed of all axes 8
Spindle speed 9
Spindle load meter 10
Spindle-converted positional deviation difference 11

- The second highest 8 bits specify the setting positions of the

axis/path/spindle data corresponding to measurement items (0 to
9).
Type Setting
Servo axis 0 to 7
Path 0 to 9
Spindle axis 0 to 7

- The highest 8 bits are not used (reserved area) and are set to 0 at
all times.

- 40 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

10632 Measurement item 2

10633 Measurement item 3

10634 Measurement item 4

10635 Measurement item 5

10636 Measurement item 6

10637 Measurement item 7

10638 Measurement item 8

10639 Measurement item 9

10640 Measurement item 10

10641 Measurement item 11

10642 Measurement item 12

10643 Measurement item 13

10644 Measurement item 14

10645 Measurement item 15

10646 Measurement item 16

10647 Measurement item 17

10648 Measurement item 18

10649 Measurement item 19

10650 Measurement item 20

10651 Measurement item 21

10652 Measurement item 22

10653 Measurement item 23

10654 Measurement item 24

- 41 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

10655 Measurement item 25

10656 Measurement item 26

10657 Measurement item 27

10658 Measurement item 28

10659 Measurement item 29

10660 Measurement item 30

10661 Measurement item 31

10662 Measurement item 32

10663 Measurement item 33

10664 Measurement item 34

10665 Measurement item 35

10666 Measurement item 36

10667 Measurement item 37

10668 Measurement item 38

10669 Measurement item 39

10670 Measurement item 40

10671 Measurement item 41

10672 Measurement item 42

10673 Measurement item 43

10674 Measurement item 44

10675 Measurement item 45

10676 Measurement item 46

10677 Measurement item 47

10678 Measurement item 48

- 42 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Set measurement items 2 to 48.

The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
measurement item 1.

10679 Signal 1 (address)

Set the address of signal 1 to be traced.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 0 to 499997 (No trace operation is performed when 0 is set.)
[Setting data] Set the address of signal 1 to be traced.

10680 Signal 2 (address)

10681 Signal 3 (address)

10682 Signal 4 (address)

10683 Signal 5 (address)

10684 Signal 6 (address)

10685 Signal 7 (address)

10686 Signal 8 (address)

10687 Signal 9 (address)

10688 Signal 10 (address)

10689 Signal 11 (address)

10690 Signal 12 (address)

10691 Signal 13 (address)

10692 Signal 14 (address)

10693 Signal 15 (address)

10694 Signal 16 (address)

Set the addresses of signals 2 to 16 to be traced.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
signal 1 (address).

- 43 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

10695 Signal 17 (address)

Set the address of signal 17 to be traced.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 0 to 499997 (No trace operation is performed when 0 is set.)
[Setting data] Set the address of signal 17 to be traced.

10696 Signal 18 (address)

10697 Signal 19 (address)

10698 Signal 20 (address)

10699 Signal 21 (address)

10700 Signal 22 (address)

10701 Signal 23 (address)

10702 Signal 24 (address)

10703 Signal 25 (address)

10704 Signal 26 (address)

10705 Signal 27 (address)

10706 Signal 28 (address)

10707 Signal 29 (address)

10708 Signal 30 (address)

10709 Signal 31 (address)

10710 Signal 32 (address)

Set the addresses of signals 18 to 32 to be traced.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
signal 17 (address).

10711 Memory address 1

Set the memory address of memory address 1 to be traced.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 0 to 999999999
[Setting data] Specify the memory address of memory address 1 to be traced.

- 44 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

10712 Memory address 2

10713 Memory address 3

10714 Memory address 4

Set the memory addresses of memory addresses 2 to 4 to be traced.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
memory address 1.

10715 Memory access size 1

Set the access size of memory access size 1 to be traced.
[Data type] Integer
[Unit of data] (None)
[Valid data range] 0 to 7
[Setting data]
0: No memory trace operation is performed.
1: Signed integer 8 bits
2: Unsigned integer 8 bits
3: Signed integer 16 bits
4: Unsigned integer 16 bits
5: Signed integer 32 bits
6: Unsigned integer 32 bits
7: Floating-point 64 bits

10716 Memory access size 2

10717 Memory access size 3

10718 Memory access size 4

Set the access sizes of memory access sizes 2 to 4 to be traced.
The method of setting and the valid data range are the same as for
memory access size 1.

- 45 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.5.2 Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen

(1) Press the function key to select the system screen for data
SYSTEM

such as parameters.
(2) Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[W.DGNS] soft key is displayed.
(3) Pressing the [W.DGNS] soft key displays the waveform diagnosis
graph screen (default). At the same time, the soft key display
changes to enable [W.GRPH] or [PARAME] to be selected.
(4) Pressing the [PARAME] soft key displays the waveform
diagnosis parameter screen. When setting an item on a page other
than the current page, display the page containing the desired
PAGE

setting item by pressing the page key PAGE

or .
(5) Move the cursor then set necessary data. To set data, key in the
data then press the INPUT key.
Those items that are in an edit box displayed in gray cannot be
set.

(6) Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the soft keys below.
Pressing the continuous menu key displays each of the
following three sets of soft keys sequentially to enable the
operations described below:

[INPUT ] [PARAME] [A.KIND] [D.TYPE] [COLOR ]

[CLEAR ] [A.CLR ] [MEMORY] [ ] [SIGNAL]

[TRACE ] [ WAVE ] [ AXIS ] [A.AXIS] [SPINDLE]

[INPUT] : Inputs a numeric value or character string.

[PARAME] : Displays the parameter screen.
- 46 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

[A.KIND] : Displays the alarm type candidate screen.

[D.TYPE] : Displays the data type candidate screen.
[COLOR] : Displays the waveform color candidate screen.
[CLEAR] : Erases the setting of a displayed measurement
item.
[A.CLR] : Erases the settings of all measurement items.
[MEMORY] : Displays the memory screen.
[SIGNAL] : Displays the signal address setting screen.
[TRACE] : Displays the trace setting screen.
[WAVE] : Displays the trace waveform setting screen.
[AXIS] : Displays the servo-related screen.
[A.AXIS] : Displays the screen related to all axes.
[SPINDLE] : Displays the spindle-related screen.

• Waveform diagnosis parameter data

(1) Trace condition (trace setting)

1 : When the [TRACE] soft key is pressed, data collection
starts. Data collection ends when the measurement buffer
becomes full.
2 : When a specified event occurs after the [TRACE] soft key
is pressed, data collection starts. Data collection ends when
the measurement buffer becomes full.
3 : When the [TRACE] soft key is pressed, data collection
starts. Data collection ends when a specified event occurs.
If the measurement buffer becomes full, older data is
discarded.
(2) Sampling period (trace setting)
Set a waveform sampling period and signal sampling period as
follows:
Valid data range: Waveform: 2 to 4096 (multiple of 2)
Signal: 4 to 4096 (multiple of 4)(*)
(*) 8 to 4096 (multiple of 8) when the NC type is 3
Unit: msec
(3) Delay time (trace setting)
When trace condition 3 is specified, the end of trace operation
can be delayed by a specified time after the occurrence of an
event.
Valid data range: 0 to 65528 (multiple of 8)
Unit: msec
(4) Horizontal axis scale division (trace setting)
Set the value of one scale division on the horizontal axis.
Valid data range: 1 to 100000000
Unit: msec
(5) Trigger type (trigger setting)
When trace condition 2 or 3 is specified, set a type of trigger.
1: Alarm only
2: Specified signal turned on
3: Specified signal turned off
4: Transition of a specified signal
5: Alarm or safety signal turned on

- 47 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

6: Alarm or specified signal turned off

7: Alarm or transition of a specified signal
(6) Alarm type (trigger setting)
When the specified trigger type includes the occurrence of an
alarm (when 1, 5, 6, or 7 is specified) as a trigger, set an alarm
type to be used as a trigger. When no restriction should be
imposed on the type of alarm, specify the AL signal turned on as
a trigger.
1: Servo alarm
2: Spindle alarm
3: Alarm (other than PS0000, PS0100, and PS0101)
4: PS alarm in the three thousands (macro alarm)
5: PS alarm in the five thousands
6: Alarm PS0000
7: Alarm PS0100
8: Alarm PS101
9: APC alarm
10: Overtravel alarm
11: Overheat alarm
12: Rigid tapping alarm
13: External alarm
(7) Alarm number (trigger setting)
When 1 or 2 is specified as the alarm type, input a target alarm
number by using an integer from 1 to 9999.
(8) Axis number/spindle number (trigger setting)
When 1 or 2 is specified as the alarm type, specify a target alarm
axis/spindle by using a number.
(9) Signal address (trigger setting)
When the specified trigger type includes a signal (when 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, or 7 is specified) as a trigger, input the address of a signal to
be used as a trigger in the format "address+number+bit-position"
(Example: F0001.0).
(10) Trace data type (waveform setting)
Set the type number of data to be traced, as described below. In
the composite speed of all axes, the axis specified by the DI
signal ACTFi for axis selection in actual speed display is not
included. A servo torque amount and current command value are
indicated as percentage values relative to the setting of
parameter No. 12279.
Data Description Unit
0 No waveform is displayed. -
1 Servo error amount (positional Pulse (detection unit)
deviation)
2 Pulse distribution amount (move Pulse (detection unit)
command)
3 Torque amount (actual current) % (ratio to maximum current)
4 Pulse amount after Pulse (detection unit)
acceleration/deceleration
5 Actual speed Pulse (detection unit)
6 Current command % (ratio to maximum current)
7 Heat simulation data % (ratio to OVC alarm)
8 Composite speed mm/min or prm

- 48 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Data Description Unit

9 Actual spindle speed % (ratio to maximum speed)
10 Spindle load meter % (ratio to maximum output)
11 Spindle-converted positional deviation Pulse (detection unit)
difference
99 Memory -
(11) Axis number/path number/spindle number (waveform setting)
Specify a path number/axis number according to the type of data
to be traced, as described below.
Data Type of trace data
Servo axis number (1 or later) Servo error amount (positional deviation)
Pulse distribution amount (move command)
Torque amount (actual current)
Pulse amount after acceleration/deceleration
Actual speed
Current command
Heat simulation data
Path (1 or later) Composite speed
Spindle number (1 or later) Actual spindle speed
Spindle load meter
Not specified Spindle-converted positional deviation
difference
(12) Vertical axis scale division (waveform setting)
Set the value of one scale division on the vertical axis. This
setting is valid for servo-related data and spindle-related data.
Valid data range: 1 to 100000000
Unit: Dependent on the type of trace data
(13) Waveform color (waveform setting)
Set a waveform drawing color number as follows:
0: Data display color
1: Alarm display color
2: Title display color
3: Cursor display color
4: Subtitle display color
5: Input key display color
6: Selection window bar display color
7: Background color for data that can be input
(14) Data unit (waveform setting)
Weight when data to be analyzed is 1. This item is automatically
set. This item need not be set unless a different unit is to be used
for display.
Valid data range: 1 to 1000
Unit: 0.001
(15) Axis number (servo-related)
For each item type to be measured, specify up to 8 axes subject
to measurement.
Valid data range: 1 to 32
(16) Path number (related to all axes)
For each item type to be measured, specify up to 10 paths subject
to measurement.
Valid data range: 1 to 10

- 49 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

(17) Spindle number (spindle-related)

For each item type to be measured, specify up to 8 spindles
subject to measurement.
Valid data range: 1 to 8
(18) Check (spindle-related: Positional deviation difference)
Specify whether a spindle-converted positional deviation
difference is to be measured:
0: Not measured
1: Measured
(19) Signal address (signal)
When the on/off state of an I/O signal is traced, set the address
of the signal in the format "address+number+bit-position"
(Example: F0001.0). When no trace operation is to be performed,
input 0. Up to 32 measurements can be made simultaneously.
When a value is input at even one of addresses 1 to 16, one
measurement item is assumed. When a value is input at even one
of addresses 17 to 32, two measurement items are assumed.
(20) Access size (memory)
As access size, specify the access size of a trace target.
1: Signed integer 8 bits
2: Unsigned integer 8 bits
3: Signed integer 16 bits
4: Unsigned integer 16 bits
5: Signed integer 32 bits
6: Unsigned integer 32 bits
7: Floating-point 64 bits
(21) Address (memory)
As address data, specify the address of a trace target.
This function is enabled only when 99 is set for the measurement
item in waveform setting. The data of a specified memory is
traced for display as a graph. This setting corresponds to a
waveform setting from 1 to 4 on a one-to-one basis. For example,
the data of memory 1 cannot be displayed with waveform setting
3. With waveform setting 3, for example, the data of memory 3
is always displayed, thus displaying the results of trace operation
for the same item number.

- 50 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.5.3 Drawing Waveform Diagnosis Data

(1) Press the function key SYSTEM

to select the system screen for data
such as parameters.
(2) Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[W.DGNS] soft key is displayed.
(3) Pressing the [W.DGNS] soft key displays the waveform
diagnosis graph screen (default). At the same time, the soft key
display changes to enable [W.GRPH] or [PARAM] to be
selected.
(4) When the waveform diagnosis graph screen is to be displayed
after the waveform diagnosis parameter screen, press the
[W.GRPH] soft key.

(5) Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the soft keys below.
Pressing the continuous menu key displays each of the
following four sets of soft keys sequentially to enable the
operations described below:

[TRACE ] [CANCEL] [ ] [PUNCH ] [ READ ]

[H-DOBL] [H-HALF] ←TIME ]

[← → ]
[TIME→ [ ]

[ CH-1 ] [ CH-2 ] [ CH-3 ] [ CH-4 ] [ ]

[SIG ↑ ] [SIG ↓ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

[TRACE] : Starts trace operation.

[CANCEL] : Stops trace operation.
[PUNCH] : Outputs measurement data to an external output
device.

- 51 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

[READ] : Inputs measurement data from an external input

device.
[H-DOBL] : Enlarges the time axis for display.
[H-HALF] : Reduces the time axis for display.
[TIME←] : Shifts the time axis to left for display.
[TIME→] : Shifts the time axis to right for display.
[CH-1] : Performs operation on waveform 1 displayed.
[CH-2] : Performs operation on waveform 2 displayed.
[CH-3] : Performs operation on waveform 3 displayed.
[CH-4] : Performs operation on waveform 4 displayed.
[SIG ↑] : Switches the signal display page to the previous
page.
[SIG ↓] : Switches the signal display page to the next page.
[PARAME] : Switches the screen display to the parameter
setting screen.

When one of the [CH-1] to [CH-2] soft keys is pressed, a

selection can be made from the soft keys indicated below as a
submenu to perform the corresponding operation.

↑ ] [WAV.↓
[WAV.EX ] [WAV.RE ] [WAV.↑ ↓ ] [ ]

[WAV.EX] : Enlarges the waveform for display.

[WAV.RE] : Reduces the waveform for display.
[WAV.↑] : Shifts the waveform up for display.
[WAV.↓] : Shifts the waveform down for display.

• Drawing waveform diagnosis data

Waveform diagnosis data displayed is divided into two major types of
data: waveform data and signal data.
Up to four waveform data items can be drawn at a time. When no
waveform data is drawn, up to eight signal data items can be drawn at
a time. When drawn together with waveform data, up to four signal
data items can be drawn at a time.
To display waveform data, a waveform setting must be made on the
waveform diagnosis parameter screen beforehand. If no servo-related
setting, settings related to all axes, and spindle-related settings are
made, the data is handled as temporarily collected data, and is not
preserved (treated in the same way as the conventional one-shot type
of data).
If servo-related data, data related to all axes, and spindle-related data
is set, specify the same item of data for display in a waveform setting
as a set item of servo-related data, data related to all axes, and
spindle-related data. In this case, the data can be preserved (treated in
the same way as the conventional stored type of data).
To display signal data, a desired signal value must be set on the
waveform diagnosis parameter screen.
Press the [TRACE] soft key to start data collection. When a
measurement stop condition is satisfied (when the buffer is filled with
measurement data, the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, or a
measurement stop even occurs), the data is drawn. If measurement

- 52 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

data exists, a waveform is drawn from the next time only by

displaying the waveform diagnosis graph screen.

1.5.4 Sampling Waveform Diagnosis Data

(1) Press the function key to select the system screen for data
SYSTEM

such as parameters.
(2) Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[W.DGNS] soft key is displayed.
(3) Pressing the [W.DGNS] soft key displays the waveform diagnosis
graph screen (default). At the same time, the soft key display
changes to enable [W.GRPH] or [PARAME] to be selected.
(4) When the waveform diagnosis graph screen is to be displayed
after the waveform diagnosis parameter screen, press the
[W.GRPH] soft key.
(5) Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the soft keys below.

[TRACE] [CANCEL] [ ] [PUNCH] [READ]

(6) Pressing the [TRACE] soft key starts sampling. Pressing the
[CANCEL] soft key after sampling is started stops the sampling.

1.5.5 Output of Waveform Diagnosis Data

(1) Press the function key to select the system screen for data
SYSTEM

such as parameters.
(2) Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[W.DGNS] soft key is displayed.
(3) Pressing the [W.DGNS] soft key displays the waveform diagnosis
graph screen (default). At the same time, the soft key display
changes to enable [W.GRPH] or [PARAM] to be selected.
(4) When the waveform diagnosis graph screen is to be displayed
after the waveform diagnosis parameter screen, press the
[W.GRPH] soft key.
(5) Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the soft keys below.

[TRACE] [CANCEL] [ ] [PUNCH] [READ]

(6) Enter a desired file name in the key input buffer, then press the
[PUNCH] and [EXEC] soft keys in this order. For I/O to and from
a FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card, see "Output to the
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE and FANUC FA Card".

- 53 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.5.6 Input of Waveform Diagnosis Data

(1) Press the function key to select the system screen for data
SYSTEM

such as parameters.
(2) Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[W.DGNS] soft key is displayed.
(3) Pressing the [W.DGNS] soft key displays the waveform diagnosis
graph screen (default). At the same time, the soft key display
changes to enable [W.GRPH] or [PARAME] to be selected.
(4) When the waveform diagnosis graph screen is to be displayed
after the waveform diagnosis parameter screen, press the
[W.GRPH] soft key.
(5) Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the soft keys below.

[TRACE ] [CANCEL] [ ] [PUNCH ] [ READ ]

(6) Enter a desired file name in the key input buffer, then press the
[READ] and [EXEC] soft keys in this order. For I/O to and from a
FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card, see "Output to the FANUC
FLOPPY CASSETTE and FANUC FA Card".

1.5.7 Notes

(1) When the memory becomes full, older data is erased.

(2) Set the date and time correctly on the setting screen.

- 54 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.6 COLOR SETTING SCREEN

On the color setting screen, the colors of the VGA screen can be set.

1.6.1 Screen Display

1 Press the function key SYSTEM

.
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[COLOR] soft key is displayed.
3 Pressing the [COLOR] soft key displays the color setting screen.

COLORING O0000 N00000

[1] -ALARM 8 -SELECT WINDOW BAR

2 -TITLE -SOFT KEY 1 9 -NONE

3 -INPUT KEY -O/N NO. 10 -TITLE BAR

-STATUS -INPUT BAR
4 -CURSOR 11 -WINDOW BACKGROUND

5 -RESTART NO. 12 -LIGHT

-ABSOLUTE ORDER
6 -SUB TITLE 13 -ALTER POSSIBLE DATA
-SOFT KEY 2
7 -DATA -TIME 14 -SHADOW

15 -BACKGROUND

RED 00 GREEN 08 BLUE 00

COLOR SELECT NO. 1 (PARAMETER)

MEM **** *** *** *** 12:34:56

COLOR MAINTE M-INFO (OPRT) +

- 55 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

1.6.2 Operations for Color Setting

• Modification to color settings (color palette values)

1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the following operation

soft keys:
RED GREEN BLUE BRIGHT DARK +

2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values

are to be modified.
The current color palette values of the individual color elements
are displayed.
3 Select a color element to be modified, with the [RED], [GREEN],
or [BLUE] operation soft key.
Multiple color elements can be selected at a time.
Each of the [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] soft keys toggles
between selection and deselection each time the soft key is
pressed.
(The [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] soft keys, when not
displayed, can be displayed by pressing the rightmost soft key.)
4 By pressing the [BRIGHT] or [DARK] operation soft key,
modify the brightness of the selected color element.
• Storing color settings (color palette values)

Set color palette values can be stored.

MEMORY RECALL COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 +

1 Select a storage area by pressing the [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or

[COLOR3] operation soft key.
Color 1 Color 1 (standard color) data parameters (Nos. 6581 to
6595)
Color 2 Color 2 data parameters (Nos. 10421 to 10435)
Color 3 Color 3 data parameters (Nos. 10461 to 10475)

2 Press the [STORE] operation soft key. The following operation

soft keys are displayed:
CAN EXEC +

3 Press the [EXEC] operation soft key. The current color palette
values are stored in the selected area.
Pressing the [CAN] operation soft key or the leftmost key does
not store the current color palette values.

- 56 -
B-63945EN/01 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

• Calling color settings (color palette values)

MEMORY RECALL COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 +

1 Select an area for storing color palette values by pressing the

[COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] operation soft key.
(The [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] soft keys, when
not displayed, can be displayed by pressing the rightmost soft
key.)
2 Press the [RECALL] operation soft key. The following operation
soft keys are displayed:
CAN EXEC +

3 Press the [EXEC] operation soft key. Color palette values are
called from the selected area for modification to the color
settings. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are
stored.
Pressing the [CANCEL] operation soft key or the leftmost key
does not call color palette values.

1.6.3 Parameter
6581 Standard color data of character color number 1

6582 Standard color data of character color number 2

6583 Standard color data of character color number 3

6584 Standard color data of character color number 4

6585 Standard color data of character color number 5

6586 Standard color data of character color number 6

6587 Standard color data of character color number 7

6588 Standard color data of character color number 8

6589 Standard color data of character color number 9

6590 Standard color data of character color number 10

6591 Standard color data of character color number 11

6592 Standard color data of character color number 12

6593 Standard color data of character color number 13

6594 Standard color data of character color number 14

6595 Standard color data of character color number 15

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] rrggbb 6-digit number
(rr: Red data, gg: Green data, bb: Blue data)
When a number shorter than 6 digits is specified, the unspecified
higher digit or digits are treated as 0.

- 57 -
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/01

[Valid data range] 00 to 15 for each color data (same as the tone level on the color
setting screen)
When a value equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification
of 15 is assumed.
(Example) When setting the color tone level as red = 1, green = 2, and blue = 3,
specify "10203".

1.6.4 Notes

(1) Immediately after the power is turned on, color 1 (parameter) is

used as the screen color.
If no color palette values are stored in color 1, the FANUC
standard color is used for display.
(2) Do not modify the parameters of the standard color data by
direct MDI key input. When modifying the parameters of the
standard color data, be sure to perform a storage operation on the
color setting screen.
(3) If the screen display becomes invisible because an incorrect
value is input in a standard color data parameter, turn off the
power then turn on the power again while holding down the
+ RESET keys. All stored color data is cleared, and the
DELETE

screen is displayed in the FANUC standard color.

This operation, however, clears all contents of the memory
including parameters and programs. Take special care when
performing this operation.

- 58 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

2 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i

HARDWARE
2.1 STRUCTURE ............................................................................ 60
2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE ................................................ 61
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ..................................... 62
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD CONNECTORS AND CARDS .................................. 65
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS........... 86
2.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD.......................................... 89
2.7 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT ............................. 91
2.8 REPLACING BATTERY.......................................................... 93
2.9 REPLACING FAN MOTORS................................................... 98

- 59 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

2.1 STRUCTURE

Control/LCD unit MDI unit

Optical cable Servo motor

Servo amplifier

I/O Link

Distributed I/O module, I/O Unit MODEL-A

Machine operator’s panel/

Power magnetics circuit etc.

- 60 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE

Main board
- CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
- 2–axis to 24–axis control
- Spindle interface
- LCD/MDI interface
- I/O Link
- PMC control function
- High–speed DI
- RS-232C
- Memory card interface
- PC function (for 300is)

Basic system

Data server board

Data server function

Additional axis board

Additional axis control function
I/O Link

Additional spindle board

Additional spindle control function Options

Profibus master board

Profibus (master function)
Unit without optional slots
or
Unit having two optional slots

On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted.

- 61 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Main board
24V-IN(CPD16A)
LCD

24 VDC power

MDI UNIT
Soft key cable
CK2
MDI(CA55) CK1

R232-1(JD56A) RS-232-C I/O device

5th and 6th serial spindles

R232-2(JD36A) { RS-232-C I/O device

Touch panel
HDI(JA40)
High–peed skip input

Distributed I/O Manual pulse generator

board
DC24V CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD51A) JD1B Operator's
JD1A panel

DC24V CPD1 Distributed

Power
JD1B I/O board,
magnetics
JD1A I/O unit, etc.
cabinet

SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
AC200V
AC reactor AC200V
MCC Circuit breaker
To 3rd, 4th CX1A TB2 CX3
spindle PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder

CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A

JA7B JY2
SPM TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B

To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor

TB1 CX2A JX1A

FSSB(COP10A-1) COP10B TB2
SVM Servo motor
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
FSSB(COP10A-2) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

(In this figure, a 1–axisamplifier is used.)

Separate detector interface unit 1

24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Absolute scale battery
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector interface unit 2
CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1
JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
JF104 Linear scale, axis 4

ETHERNET(CD38A) Ethernet

- 62 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

When optional functions are provided

Additional spindle
Optional slot

board

SPDL(JA41L)

PSM Position coder

7th spindle
SPM

Additional axis board To 8th spindle

FSSB(COP10A-3) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operator’s
panel
JD1A

24VDC CPD1 Distributed

I/O board, I/O Power
JD1B unit, etc. magnetics
JD1A cabinet

- 63 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

When optional functions are provided

Fast data server board

Optional slot

ATA card The user should provide an ATA card.

100BASET(CD38R) Ethernet

Profibus master
board

PROF1(CN1) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)
Profibus slave

- 64 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

CONNECTORS AND CARDS

2.4.1 Main Board

• Specification
Name Specification
Main Board (10.4” LCD) A20B-8100-0980
Main Board (15” LCD) A20B-8101-0022

• Connector mounting location

(1) A20B-8100-0980

Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear of unit

COP10A-1 COP10A-2
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)

CA69A
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41
CD38A
CK20A

CK21A CP1

JD36A JD51A

CA79A
JGM CA87A

CA88A
Main board

CA69A
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41
CD38A
CK20A

CK21A
CPD16A

JD36A JD51A

- 65 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

Connector number Application

COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
CA69A Servo check
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1/serial spindle
JD36A RS-232C serial port 2
JA40 Analog output/high-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle/position coder
CPD16A DC24V-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA79A Video signal interface
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Inverter
CD38A Ethernet

- 66 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

(2) A20B-8101-0022
Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear view
Rear of unit

COP10A-1 COP10A-2 (COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are connectors

installed on the servo card.)

CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
module
COP

CD38S
JD54 JD51A CA75 CA69A
CPD16A

JNA CA78A CN79A CA98

CA88A

Main board

TP2
CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
CPD12 module

CK20A
JD54 JD51A CA75 CA69A
CK21A

CP16A

- 67 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

Connector number Application

COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
CA69A Servo check
JD56A RS-232C SERIAL PORT 1/serial spindle
JD54 RS-232C SERIAL PORT 2
JA40 Analog output/high-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle/position coder
CPD16A DC24V-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA98 Video signal interface
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Fan adapter
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface

- 68 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

• Card and power supply mounting location

(1) A20B-8100-0980

Connector
Connector

(1) Axis control card (2) CPU card

Connector

(3) Power supply unit

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes
HRV2 : Up to 12 axes
Axis control
(1) A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes
card
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes
HRV2 : Up to 16 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
HRV2 : Up to 24 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
A20B-3300-0477 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0474 DRAM 64MB
(2) CPU card
A20B-3300-0473 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0470 DRAM 64MB
Power supply
(3) A20B-8101-0010
unit

- 69 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

(2) A20B-8101-0022

(1) (2) (3)

Axis control card CPU card GUI card

Connector Connector Connector

(4) Power supply unit

Connector

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes
HRV2 : Up to 12 axes
Axis control
(1) A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes
card
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes
HRV2 : Up to 16 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
HRV2 : Up to 24 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
A20B-3300-0477 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0474 DRAM 64MB
(2) CPU card
A20B-3300-0473 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0470 DRAM 64MB
Display control
(3) A20B-3300-0420 For 15" color LCD
card
Power supply
(4) A20B-8101-0010
unit

- 70 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

Configuration of the display control card

In the display control card, a compact flash card is installed.

Compact flash card

Connector

Display control card Compact flash

Connector side

Name Specification Remarks

Compact flash card A87L-0001-0173#032MBA 32MB

- 71 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• DIMM module mounting location

(1) A20B-8100-0980

DIMM DIMM
module module
socket socket

(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM

module

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0160
SRAM 1MB
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0161
SRAM 2MB The FROM
FROM 32MB stores various
A20B-3900-0163
SRAM 1MB control software
FROM 32MB programs, user
A20B-3900-0164
FROM/SRAM SRAM 2MB software
(2)
module FROM 16MB programs, and so
A20B-3900-0180
SRAM 256kB forth.
FROM 16MB The SRAM is a
A20B-3900-0181
SRAM 512kB battery-backed
FROM 32MB memory module.
A20B-3900-0182
SRAM 256kB
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0183
SRAM 512kB

- 72 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

(2) A20B-8101-0022
<1> PMC module <2> FROM/SRAM
module

Connector Connector Connector

Connector

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0160
SRAM 1MB
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0161
SRAM 2MB The FROM
FROM 32MB stores various
A20B-3900-0163
SRAM 1MB control software
FROM 32MB programs, user
A20B-3900-0164
FROM/SRAM SRAM 2MB software
(2)
module FROM 16MB programs, and so
A20B-3900-0180
SRAM 256kB forth.
FROM 16MB The SRAM is a
A20B-3900-0181
SRAM 512kB battery-backed
FROM 32MB memory module.
A20B-3900-0182
SRAM 256kB
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0183
SRAM 512kB

- 73 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• Block diagram
(1) A20B-8100-0980

Main board
CPU card

CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link

software 3,4ch
control

To back panel

Axis control card Display Peripheral Ethernet PMC module

control control control
I/O Link
1,2ch control

DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function

Display
unit

Lithium battery MDI Ethernet I/O Link 24VDC

FSSB
RS232C 1,2,3ch
Memory card
Serial spindle
HDI

: Detachable card or module

- 74 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

(2) A20B-8101-0022

Main board
Display control card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card

Peripheral
control 2 To back panel

Axis control card Peripheral PMC module

control 1
I/O Link
Ethernet 1,2ch control
control

DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function

Display
unit

Ethernet RS232C FSSB Lithium battery MDI I/O Link 24VDC

Memory card Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI

: Detachable card or module

- 75 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• LED display
(1) A20B-8100-0980

Rear of unit
ALM2

ALM3
ALM1

COM
LOW

LINK

Alarm (red) Ethernet status (green) (yellow)

- 76 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

(a) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence

If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
Low battery voltage.
1
The battery may be is running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.

3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.

An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board.
4
The servo card may be faulty, or the FSSB may be
broken.
An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
5
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage
may have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
Abnormal power supply operation.
6 The cause may be noise or a power supply module
failure.
: On : Off

Alarm LED Meaning

Turned on when the voltage inside the CPU card has
LOW dropped.
The CPU card may be faulty.

(b) Ethernet statusLED

Alarm LED Meaning
Turned on when a connection is made with the hub
LINK (green)
correctly
COM (yellow) Turned on when data is transferred

- 77 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

(2) A20B-8101-0022

Rear view
Rear of unit

Power supply
COP module

(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5

DNV4
(green)
(2) Display control status

DNV3
(4) Display control POWER (green)
DNV2

DNV1
(1) CNC alamr (red)

LOW

ALM3

ALM2

ALM1

- 78 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

(a) Alarm LED (CNC al red LED) indication at CNC system

alarm occurrence
If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
Low battery voltage.
1
The battery may be running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.

3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.

An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board.
4
The servo card may be faulty, or the FSSB may be
broken.
An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
5
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage
may have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
Abnormal power supply operation.
6 The cause may be noise or a power supply module
failure.
: On : Off

Alarm LED Meaning

Turned on when the voltage inside the CPU card has
LOW
dropped. The CPU card may be faulty.

(b) Changes in status LED at power-on time (Display control

side status: Green LED)
Status LED
Status
No. (DNV1 to 3)
3 2 1
State where the power is not tuned on, or state where
1 the system was started up successfully and is running
normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
The interface between the CPU card and display control
card is being initialized. If the status does not proceed
3
further beyond this indication, the CPU card, display
card, or main board may be faulty.
Start-up on the display control card side is being
awaited. If the status does not proceed further beyond
4
this indication, the display card or main board may be
faulty.
The CPU card screen is being output to the display
control card, or a RAM error occurred in the interface
between the CPU card and display control card.
5
If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the CPU card, display card, or main board
may be faulty.
: On : Off

- 79 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

(c) LED (red) indication at display control system alarm

occurrence
If the LED lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective.
Alarm LED Meaning
Common RAM error.
DNV4
The main board may be faulty.

(d) Display control POWER (green LED) indicates that power

is supplied to the display control card.

- 80 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

• Jumper plug setting

(1) A20B-8100-0980

TMBB(Short)
Ensure that this is short-circuited.

Main board

(2) A20B-8101-0022

Main board

Power supply
module

TMIBB(Short) RESERVE(OPEN)
Ensure that this is short-circuited. Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)

- 81 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

2.4.2 Inverter PCBs and Connector Units

Name Specification
For 10.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0962
Inverter P.C.B.
For 15” color LCD A14L-0143-0002#A
Fan adapter PCB For 15” color LCD A20B-8100-0969
Conversion cable For 15” color LCD A660-4042-T047
Connector unit A15L-0001-0091

NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.

- 82 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

• Configuration of the inverter

For 10.4”LCD Main board

Inverter (fan adapter as well) CA87A

10.4”LCD CP1 CN1

CPD12(when A20B-8101-002x)

For 15.0”LCD
Fan adapter
CN1

15.0”LCD Inverter
unit CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05

Conversion cable

- 83 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• Locations of the inverter and connector unit for 10.4" LCD

inverter Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear of unit

- 84 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

• Locations of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit for 15" LCD

Fan adaoter PCB Connector unit

Inverter

Rear of unit

COP10A-1

Power supply
COP module

Conversion cable (A660-4042-T047)

Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter. Plug into a matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be connected to either of
the two cables from the inverter.

- 85 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

2.5.1 Basic Unit

Model Name Drawing number Remarks

Basic Unit (No slot) A02B-0303-B500
Basic Unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-B502

Model Name Drawing number Remarks

Case (No slot) A02B-0303-D100#0A
Case (2 slots) A02B-0303-D100#2A

2.5.2 Display Unit

Model Name Drawing number Remarks

10.4” color LCD A02B-0303-D500
10.4” color LCD A02B-0303-D501 With touch panel
15” color LCD A02B-0303-D513
15” color LCD A02B-0303-D514 With touch panel

2.5.3 MDI Unit

Model Name Drawing number Remarks

T series/English/Standard
keyboard A02B-0303-C126#TBR
Vertical type, OGN
M series/English/Standard
keyboard A02B-0303-C126#MBR
Vertical type, OGN
English/Standard keyboard
A02B-0303-C128
QWERTY

2.5.4 Printed Circuit Boards

Name Drawing number ID Remarks

Main board (10.4” LCD) A20B-8100-0980 00301
Main board (15” LCD) A20B-8101-0022 00306
CPU card A1
A20B-3300-0477 0040C
(DRAM 32MB)
CPU card A2
A20B-3300-0474 0040D
(DRAM 64MB)
CPU card B1
A20B-3300-0473 00405
(DRAM 32MB)
CPU card B2
A20B-3300-0470 00406
(DRAM 64MB)
Axis control card B11
A20B-3300-0445 00106
(FSSB 1-path)
Axis control card B12
A20B-3300-0448 0010B
(FSSB 1-path)

- 86 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

Name Drawing number ID Remarks

Axis control card B13
A20B-3300-0447 0010A
(FSSB 1-path)
Axis control card B24
A20B-3300-0442 00103
(FSSB 2-path)
Axis control card B26
A20B-3300-0440 00101
(FSSB 2-path)
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0160
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0161
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0163
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0164
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0180
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 256kB) SRAM: 01
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0181
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 512kB) SRAM: 02
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0182
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 256kB) SRAM: 01
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0183
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 512kB) SRAM: 02
PMC module A20B-3900-0200 00703
Fast data server board A20B-8101-0030 00701
Profibus master board A20B-8101-0050 00705
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070 00121
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320 0030C
Back panel (No slot) A20B-2003-0600 1
Back panel (2 slots) A20B-2003-0610 2
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010 –
Inverter
A20B-8100-0962 –
(for 10.4” color LCD)
Inverter
A14L-0143-0002#A –
(for 15” color LCD)
Touch panel control board A20B-8002-0310 –
* Refer to Chapter 5 for details of Option board.

- 87 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

2.5.5 I/O

Name Drawing number Remarks

DI/DO: 72/56,
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O DI=general 16,
A20B-2002-0470
module A1 matrix 56, with MPG
interface
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O DI/DO: 48/32, with
A20B-2002-0520
module B1 MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O
A20B-2002-0521 DI/DO: 48/32
module B2
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O
A03B-0815-C001 DI/DO: 24/16
basic module
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O DI/DO: 24/16, with
A03B-0815-C002
expansion module A MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O
A03B-0815-C003 DI/DO: 24/16
expansion module B
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O
A03B-0815-C004 DO: 16 (2A output )
expansion module C
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O
A03B-0815-C005 Analog input
expansion module D
Main panel machine operator's panel A02B-0303-C231
Sub panel A machine operator's panel A02B-0236-C232
Sub panel D machine operator's panel A02B-0236-C244
Operator's panel connector unit
A16B-2202-0731 DI/DO: 64/32
(Source type output A)
Operator's panel connector unit
A16B-2202-0730 DI/DO: 96/64
(Source type output B)
Handy machine operator’s panel A02B-0259-C221#A
Interface unit for handy machine
A02B-0259-C220
operator’s panel
FANUC I/O Link-AS-i converter
A03B-0817-C001
(For AS-I Ver.2.0)
FANUC I/O Link-AS-i converter
A03B-0817-C002
(For AS-I Ver.2.1)
I/O Link distributed adapter (2ch) A20B-1007-0680
I/O Link distributed adapter (3ch) A20B-1008-0360

2.5.6 Other Units

Name Drawing number Remarks

Separate detector interface unit (basic
A02B-0303-C205
4 axes)
Separate detector interface unit
A02B-0236-C204
(additional 4 axes)
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001

- 88 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

2.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD

WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.

Replacement procedure
(1) Remove the two screws at the bottom of the case, then remove
the case while pushing down the claws located on the upper side.
At this time, the fan and battery cables need not be detached.

Claw

- 89 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

(2) Detach the cables from the connectors CA88A (PCMCIA

interface connector), CA79A (video signal interface connector),
and CK20A and CK21A (connectors for soft keys) on the main
board. Next, remove the screws used to secure the main board.
The connector CA87A (connector for inverter connection)
directly connects the main board with the inverter PCB. So,
detach the main board by moving the main board downward.

CA79A
CA87A

CA88A
Main board

CK20A

CK21A

(3) When mounting the main board, reverse steps (1) and (2).

- 90 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

2.7 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT

WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove
the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

• Fuse mounting location for 10.4” LCD

Rear of unit

Fuse

Ordering code Rating

A02B-0236-K100 5A

- 91 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• Fuse mounting location for 15” LCD

Rear view
Rear of unit

Power supply
COP module

Fuse

Ordering code Rating

A02B-0236-K101 7.5A

- 92 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

2.8 REPLACING BATTERY

Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is
backed up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the
control unit. The above data is not lost even when the main battery
goes dead. The backup battery is mounted on the control unit at
shipping. This battery can maintain the contents of memory for about
a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message "BAT"
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the
PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as
possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within two or three
weeks, however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no
longer be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this
state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory
are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the
battery.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
• Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
• Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.

NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the
factory.

• Replacement procedure
When a lithium battery is used
Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0200-K102
(FANUC specification: A98L-0031-0012)).
(1) Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off
the power.
(2) Remove the battery from the rear of the CNC unit.
First, pull the battery cables then detach the connector. Next,
remove the battery from the battery case.
When a unit with no slot is used, the battery case is located on
the rear of the unit as shown in the figure below. When a unit
with option slots is used, the battery case is located beside a fan
on the top.
(3) Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
(4) Clamp the battery cables as shown in the figure below.

- 93 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

Connector

Battery
case

Lithium battery
A02B-0236-K102

When a unit with no slot is used

Battery
case

Connector

Lithium battery
A02B-0236-K102

When a unit with option slots is used

Battery cable

Clamping battery cables

- 94 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may
result in the battery exploding. Replace the battery
only with the specified battery (A02B-0200-K102).

CAUTION
Steps 1) to 3) should be completed within 30
minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a
battery for any longer than the specified period.
Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost.
If steps 1) to 3) may not be completed within 30
minutes, save all contents of the SRAM memory to
the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the contents
of the SRAM memory are lost, the contents can be
restored easily.
For the method of operation, refer to Section 4.9 or
Appendix D.

When discarding a battery, observe the applicable ordinances or other

rules of your local government. Also, cover the terminals of the
battery with vinyl tape or the like to prevent a short-circuit.

- 95 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

When using commercial alkaline dry cells (size D)

• Method of connection
Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to
which the lithium battery is connected.
The lithium battery, provided as standard, can be replaced with
external batteries in the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) according to
the battery replacement procedure described above.

Connector

CAUTION
1 Install the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in a
location where the batteries can be replaced even
when the power to the control unit is on.
2 The battery cable connector is attached to the
control unit by means of a simple lock system. To
prevent the connector from being disconnected due
to the weight of the cable or tension within the
cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the
connector.

- 96 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

Replacing commercial alkaline dry cells (size D)

(1) Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available.

(2) Turn on the power to the control unit.
(3) Remove the battery case cover.
(4) Replace the cells, paying careful attention to their orientation.
(5) Reinstall the cover onto the battery case.

CAUTION
When replacing the alkaline dry cells while the
power is off, use the same procedure as that for
lithium battery replacement described above.

Alkaline dry cell × 2

Cover

Connection terminal
on the rear
Mounting hole × 4

Battery case

- 97 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

2.9 REPLACING FAN MOTORS

WARNING
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fan
motor, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

• Fan ordering information

Ordering code Remarks
Unit with no option slot A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2 units
60 mm square, 1 unit
Unit with 2 option slots A02B-0303-K121
40 mm square, 1 unit

- 98 -
B-63945EN/01 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

Replacement procedure

• For units with no expansion slots

1. Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC.
2. Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ((1) of Fig.
a). The connector is latched. So, when unplugging the connector,
hold down the latch placed at the lower part of the connector
with a flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Detach the latch securing the fan motor, then demount the fan
motor ((2) of Fig. a).
4. Insert a new fan motor into the fan case ((3) of Fig. a), then
reconnect the connector.

Fig. a

(1) Connector
(2) Fan (3) Fan case

Caution) Install a fan so that it flows air in the upward

direction. (Face the label upward.)

- 99 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• For units with 2 expansion slots

1. Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC.
2. Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ((1) of Fig.
b). The connector is latched. So, when unplugging the connector,
hold down the latch placed at the lower part of the connector
with a flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Detach the latch securing the fan cover ((3) of Fig. b), then
demount the fan cover from the unit.
4. The fan is secured to the fan cover. Detach the latch, then
demount the fan motor ((2) of Fig. b).
5. Install a new fan motor onto the fan cover. Then, reinstall the fan
cover onto the unit, and reconnect the connector.

(3) Fan cover (1) Connector

Fig. b

(2) Fan

Cation) Install a fan so that it flows air in the upward

direction. (Face the label upward.)

- 100 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is

HARDWARE
This chapter describes the LCD-mounted type Series 300is hardware.

3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION......................................... 102

3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .................................................... 103
3.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ................................... 104
3.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
CONNECTORS AND CARDS ............................................... 105
3.5 GUI CARD .............................................................................. 109
3.6 LOCATION OF THE ROTARY SWITCH............................. 115
3.7 JUMPER PLUG SETTING ..................................................... 116
3.8 INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS, AND FAN
ADAPTER PCBS .................................................................... 117
3.9 DETAILS OF THE INVERTER ............................................. 118
3.10 INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS, AND FAN
ADAPTER PCBS .................................................................... 119
3.11 CONVERSION CABLE FOR THE INVERTER.................... 120
3.12 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS......... 121
3.13 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD........................................ 122
3.14 REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT ............................................... 124
3.15 REPLACING THE BATTERY ............................................... 125
3.16 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR .......................................... 126
3.17 REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION SHEET127
3.18 BACKUP UNIT....................................................................... 128

- 101 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

See section 2.1 for hardware configuration of Series 300is.

- 102 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW

See section 2.2 for hardware overview of Series 300is.

- 103 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

For the 300is, the following connection is required, in addition to the connection common to the 30i/300is.

Backup unit
Backup(CA75)
(CN9)

RS-232-C(JD54) RS-232-C
USB I/O device

USB
keyboard
printer

See Section 2.3, "TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS" for connection other than the above.

- 104 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

CONNECTORS AND CARDS

3.4.1 Main Board

• Specification
Name Specification
Series 300is main board (for 10.4" LCD) A20B-8101-0020
Series 300is main board (for 15" LCD) A20B-8101-0021

- 105 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• Connector mounting location

Connector unit

Fan motor Fan motor

Battery

Rear view
Rear of unit

(COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are

COP10A-1 COP10A-2 connectors installed on the servo card.)

CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41
Power
COP supply unit

CD38S
JD54 JD51A CA75 CA69A

CPD16A

CA98
JNA CA78A CN79A

CA88A

Main board

TP2 CD46L

CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41
Power
CPD12
supply unit

CK20A
JD54 JD51A CA75
CK21A

CP16A

- 106 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

Connector number Application

COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
CA69A Servo check
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1/serial spindle
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2/USB
JA40 Analog output/high-speed DI
JD51A I/O link
JA41 Serial spindle/position coder
CPD16A DC24V-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA79A Video signal interface (10.4" LCD only)
CA98 Video signal interface (15" LCD only)
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CD46L USB interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Inverter (for 10.4" LCD)
Fan adapter (for 15" LCD)
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface (15" LCD only)
CA75 Bach-up unit interface

- 107 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• Card and power supply mounting location

(1) (2) (3)
Axis control card CPU card
GUI card

Connector Connector Connector

(4) Power supply unit

Connector

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes
HRV2 : Up to 12 axes
(1) Axis control card A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes
HRV2 : Up to 16 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
HRV2 : Up to 24 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
A20B-3300-0477 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0474 DRAM 64MB
(2) CPU card
A20B-3300-0473 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0470 DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0420 DRAM 64MB
(3) GUI card
A20B-3300-0421 DRAM 128MB
(4) Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010

- 108 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.5 GUI CARD

Confuguration of GUI card

Compact flash card

Connector

GUI card Compact flash

(connector side)

Name Specification Remarks

A20B-3300-0420 DRAM 64MB
GUI card 1
A20B-3300-0421 DRAM 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#032MBA 32MB
A87L-0001-0173#064MB 64MB
Compact flash card
A87L-0001-0173#128MB 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MB 256MB

- 109 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• DIMM module mounting location

(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM

module

Connector Connector Connector

Connector

Main board

No. Name Specification Function Remarks

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0160
SRAM 1MB
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0161
SRAM 2MB
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0163
SRAM 1MB
FROM 32MB Various control software programs
A20B-3900-0164
FROM/SRAM SRAM 2MB are stored in the FROM module.
(2)
module FROM 16MB The SRAM is a battery-backed
A20B-3900-0180
SRAM 256kB memory module.
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0181
SRAM 512kB
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0182
SRAM 256kB
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0183
SRAM 512kB

- 110 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

• Block diagram

Main board
Display control card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card

Peripheral
control 2 To back panel

Axis control card Peripheral PMC module

control 1
I/O Link
USB Ethernet 1,2ch control
control control

DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function

Display
unit

USB Lithium battery MDI I/O Link 24VDC

Ethernet RS232C FSSB
Memory card Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI

: Detachable card or module

- 111 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• LED display

Rear view
Rear of unit

(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5

DNV4
(2) GUI status (green)

DNV3
(4) GUI POWER (green)
DNV2

DNV1
(1) CNC alarm (red)

LOW

ALM3

ALM2

ALM1

- 112 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

(1) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC system
alarm occurrence
If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
CNC alarm
No. LED Status
3 2 1
Low battery voltage.
1
The battery may be is running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.
3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.
An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board.
4
The servo card may be faulty, or the FSSB may be
broken.
An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
5
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage
may have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
Abnormal power supply operation.
6 The cause may be noise or a power supply module
failure.
: On : Off

Alarm LED Meaning

Turned on when the voltage inside the CPU card has
LOW dropped.
The CPU card may be faulty.

(2) hanges in status LED (GUI side status: Green LED) indication at
power-on time
Status LED
No. (DNV1 to 3) Status
3 2 1
State where the power is not tuned on, or state where
1 the system was started up successfully and is running
normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
The interface between the CPU card and GUI card is
being initialized.
3 If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the CPU card, GUI card, or main board
may be faulty.
Start-up on the GUI card side is being awaited.
4 If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the GUI card or main board may be faulty.
The CPU card screen is being output to the GUI card,
or a RAM error occurred in the interface between the
5 CPU card and GUI card. If the status does not
proceed further beyond this indication, the CPU card,
GUI card, or main board may be faulty.
: On : Off

- 113 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

(3) Alarm LED (red) indication at GUI system alarm occurrence

If the LED lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective.
Alarm LED Meaning
Common RAM error.
DNV4
The main board may be faulty.
: On : Off

(4) GUI POWER (green LED) indicates that power is supplied to

the GUI card (at the time of back-up operation as well).

- 114 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.6 LOCATION OF THE ROTARY SWITCH

Rear view
Rear of unit

COP

Rotary switch

- 115 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.7 JUMPER PLUG SETTING

Main board

Power
supply unit

TMIBB(Short) RESERVE(OPEN)
Ensure that this is short-circuited. Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)

- 116 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.8 INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS, AND FAN

ADAPTER PCBS

Name Specification
For 10.4” color LCD
A20B-8100-0962
(Used also as the fan adapter)
Inverter PCB
For 15” color LCD
A14L-0143-0002#A
(With an inverter main board cable)
Fan adapter For 10.4” color LCD Used also as the inverter
PCBs (Used also as the fan adapter) above
Inverter PCB For 15” color LCD A20B-8100-0969
Conversion
For 15” color LCD A660-4042-T047
cable
Connector unit A15L-0001-0091

NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.

- 117 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.9 DETAILS OF THE INVERTER

For 10.4”LCD 300is main PCB

(A20B-8101-002x)
10.4”LCD Inverter (fan adapter as well) CA87A
unit CP1 CN1

CPD12

For 15.0”LCD
Fan adapter
CN1

15.0”LCD Inverter
unit CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05

Conversion cable

- 118 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.10 INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS, AND FAN

ADAPTER PCBS

For 10.4” LCD

Inverter PCB Connector unit

Rear view
Rear of unit

COP

For 15” LCD

Fan adapter PCB Connector unit
Inverter

Rear view
Rear of unit

COP

- 119 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.11 CONVERSION CABLE FOR THE INVERTER

When a 15" LCD is used, a conversion cable needs to be run between

the LCD backlight cable and the inverter connector.
Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter PCB. Plug into a
matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be
connected to either of the two cables from the inverter.

Conversion cable (A660-4042-T047)

- 120 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.12 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

3.12.1 List of Printed Circuit Boards

Name Ordering code

For 10.4"LCD A20B-8101-0020
Main board
For 15"LCD A20B-8101-0021
64MB A20B-3300-0420
GUI card
128MB A20B-3300-0421
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
For 10.4"LCD A20B-8100-0962
Inverter printed circuit board
For 15"LCD A14L-0143-0002#A
Fan adapter For 15"LCD A20B-8100-0969
Backup unit printed circuit board A20B-2100-0820

3.12.2 List of Units

Name Ordering code

Without touch panel A02B-0303-D505
10.4"LCD
With touch panel A02B-0303-D506
LCD unit
Without touch panel A02B-0303-D515
15"LCD
With touch panel A02B-0303-D516
No slot A02B-0303-C500
Case unit
2 slots A02B-0303-C502

3.12.3 Others

Name Ordering code

32MB A87L-0001-0173#032MBA
64MB A87L-0001-0173#064MB
Compact flash card
128MB A87L-0001-0173#128MB
256MB A87L-0001-0173#256MB
Conversion cable (for 15" LCD backlight) A660-4042-T047
Cable for backup unit A02B-0281-K801

- 121 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.13 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD

WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.

3.13.1 Replacement Procedure

(1) Remove the two screws at the bottom of the case, then remove
the case while pushing down the claws located on the upper side.
At this time, the fan and battery cables need not be detached.

Craw

- 122 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

(2) Detach the cables from the connectors CA88A (PCMCIA

interface connector), CD46L (USB interface connector), and
CK20A and CK21A (connectors for soft keys) on the main
board.
When the 10.4" LCD is used, remove CA79A (video signal
interface connector). When the 15" LCD is used, remove CA98
(video signal interface connector) and CPD12. When a touch
panel is provided, remove TP2 (connector for the touch panel) as
well.
(3) Next, remove the screws used to secure the main board. The
connector CA87A (connector for inverter connection) directly
connects the main board with the inverter PCB. So, detach the
main board by moving the main board downward.

CA79A CA98

CA87A

CA88A
Main board

TP2

CD46L

CDP12
CK20A

CK21A

(4) When mounting the main board, reverse steps (1) through (3).

- 123 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.14 REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT

WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove
the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

• Ordering codes of fuses

A02B-0236-K101

• Fuse mounting location

Rear view
Rear of unit

Power
COP supply unit

Fuse

- 124 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.15 REPLACING THE BATTERY

See Section 2.8, "REPLACING THE BATTERY" for replacing the

battery.

- 125 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.16 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR

See Section 2.9, "REPLACING A FAN UNIT" for replacing the fan
motor.

- 126 -
B-63945EN/01 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE

3.17 REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION SHEET

For the LCD display unit with a touch panel, the surface of the touch
panel is covered with the protection sheet to protect it. When there are
flaws and contamination on this protection sheet that make the screen
hard to read, replace the protection sheet. Prepare the following items.

Name Ordering code

For 10.4” LCD A02B-0236-K110
Touch panel protection sheet
For 15.0” LCD A08B-0082-K020

3.17.1 Replacing Method

See Section 5.6.

- 127 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

3.18 BACKUP UNIT

• Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
Backup unit cable A02B-0281-K801

• Mounting positions of connectors

CN9

Backup unit PCB

Front view

Connector name Function

CN9 Supplying the backup power

When the LED (PC POWER) on the main printed circuit board lights,
do not touch any parts in the basic unit and backup unit. The Series
300is operates for about 12 seconds after the main power is turned
off.

- 128 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

4 STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i

HARDWARE
This chapter describes the printed circuit boards of the CNC control
unit of the stand-alone type Series 30i and card PCB functions on the
printed circuit boards. The chapter also describes procedures for
replacing consumable items.

4.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION......................................... 130

4.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .................................................... 131
4.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ................................... 132
4.4 CONNECTOR AND CARD CONFIGURATIONS
OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS......................................... 136
4.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS......... 142
4.6 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT .......... 144
4.7 REPLACING THE BATTERY ............................................... 145
4.8 REPLACING A FAN UNIT.................................................... 149

- 129 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

4.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

Display unit MDI unit

Control unit

Servo motor

Servo amplifier

Optical cable

Distributed I/O module, I/O unit MODEL-A, etc.

I/O Link

Machine operator's panel,

power magnetic circuit, etc.

- 130 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

4.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW

4.2.1 Series 30i/300i/300is

Main board
- CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
- 2–axis to 24–axis control
- Spindle interface
- DISPLAY interface
- I/O Link
- PMC control function
- High–speed DI
- RS-232-C
- Memory card interface
Basic system

Data server board

Data server function

Additional axis board

Additional axis control function Options

Slot 1
Additional spindle board
Additional spindle control function

Profibus master board

Profibus (master function) Slot 2

On a stand–alone type control unit, two optional boards can be mounted in as many slots.

- 131 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

4.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Stand–alone type control unit

Main board
Slot 1

24V-IN(CPD19A) 24 VDC power supply

24V-OUT(CPD19B) To I/O device
Optical fiber ccable
LCD UNIT MDI UNIT
COP21* CK2
DISPLAY(COP21A)
24VDC CP1A CA55 CK1
CP1B
Memory card
(Touch panel)
CNC display unit with PC or
personal computer
HDI(JA40) High–peed skip input

Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD51A) JD1B Operator's
JD1A panel

24VDC CPD1 Distributed

Power
I/O board,
JD1B magnetics
I/O unit,
JD1A etc. cabinet

JD1B Servo motor

β amplifier
JD1A with I/O

R232-1(JD56A)
RS–232C I/O device
To 5th, 6th spindle
R232-2(JD36A)
RS–232C I/O device

SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 JX1B
Position coder

To 3rd, 4th
spindle CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
JA7B SPM JY2
TB2
JA7A TB1 CX2B JX1B

Servo card To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor

Optical fiber cable TB1 CX2A JX1A

COP10B TB2 Axis 1
FSSB(COP10A-1)
SVM servo motor
COP10A JF1
TB1 CX2B JX1B
FSSB(COP10A-2)
Axis 2
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A

Axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A

COP10B Axis 4
SVM servo motor
COP10A

(In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)

Separate detector interface unit 1

24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4

ETHERNET(CD38A) CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute scale

(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector
interface unit 2

Ethernet

- 132 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

When optional functions are provided

Additional spindle board

Optional slot

SPDL(JA41L)

PSM Position coder

7th spindle
SPM

Additional axis board To 8th spindle

FSSB(COP10A-3) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operator's
panel
JD1A

24VDC CPD1 Distributed I/O

board, I/O unit, Power
JD1B etc. magnetics
JD1A cabinet

- 133 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

When optional functions are provided

Fast data server board

Optional slot

ATA card The user should provide an ATA card.

100BASET(CD38R) Ethernet

Profibus master
board

PROF1(CN1) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)
Profibus slave

- 134 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

For the is series CNC display unit, the additional connection shown below is required on the unit.

24VDC power
DC24V- IN(CP1) supply

MDI unit
MDI cable dedicated
to PCs
MDI(CA55) CK1

Backup (CA75) Backup unit

PC side Ethernet
(CD38S) Hub, etc.

USB RS-232-C
PC side RS-232-C-2 I/O device
(JD54)
USB
Keyboard
Printer

PC side RS-232-C-1 RS-232-C

(JD36) I/O device

- 135 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

4.4 CONNECTOR AND CARD CONFIGURATIONS OF PRINTED

CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.4.1 Main CPU Board of Series 30i/300i/300is

• Specifications
Item Ordering code
Main CPU board of Series 30i/300i/300is A16B-3200-0520

• Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc.

Battery case BAT1 : Battery

JD56A : RS232C serial port/serial spindle

JD36A : RS232C serial port

CNM1B : Memory card JD51A : I/O Link

JA40 : High-speed DI
JA41 : Serial spindle
LINK,COM : LED for embedded Ethernet
CD38A : Embedded Ethernet
FUSE ALM : Fuse burn-out
CPD19A(right) : 24VDC IN
CPD19B(left) : 24VDC OUT

COP21A : Connection to LCD unit

COP10A-2 : FSSB STATUS : 7-Segment LED

ALARM : Alarm LED

COP10A-1 : FSSB MTSW : Rotary SW
PSW : Push SW

GND : SG connection terminal

- 136 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

STATUS 7-segment LED: This LED usually indicates the state of

the CNC. This LED is used also for
setting and maintenance using the rotary
switch MTSW and the push switch PSW.
MTSW rotary switch: This rotary switch is used for setting and
maintenance operations, in combination
with the STATUS 7-segment LED and
the PSW push switch.
PSW push switch: This push switch is used for setting and
maintenance operations, in combination
with the STATUS 7-segment LED and
the MTSW rotary switch.

• Mounting positions of cards and DIMM modules

(5) FROM/SRAM module

(3) Power supply unit

(2) CPU card

(1) Axis control card

(4) PMC module

• Method of detaching the main CPU board

The main CPU board is secured to the control unit by the fan unit.
So, when the fan unit is attached to the control unit, the main CPU
board cannot be detached.
When attaching or detaching the main CPU board, be sure to detach
the fan unit.
For the method of detaching the fan unit, see Section 4.8.

- 137 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

No. Item Ordering code Function Remarks

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes
HRV2 : Up to 12 axes
(1) Axis control card A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes
HRV2 : Up to 16 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
HRV2 : Up to 24 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
A20B-3300-0477 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0474 DRAM 64MB
(2) CPU card
A20B-3300-0473 DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0470 DRAM 64MB
(3) Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
(4) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0160
SRAM 1MB
FROM stores
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0161 various control
SRAM 2MB
software products.
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0163 SRAM is backed up
SRAM 1MB
by a battery.
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0164
FROM/SRAM SRAM 2MB
(5)
module FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0180
SRAM 256kB
FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0181
SRAM 512kB
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0182
SRAM 256kB
FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0183
SRAM 512kB

- 138 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

• Block diagram

Main board
CPU card

CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link

software 3,4ch
control

To back panel

Axis control card Display Peripheral Ethernet PMC module

control control control
I/O Link
1,2ch control

DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function

Display
unit

Lithium battery MDI Ethernet I/O Link 24VDC

FSSB
RS232C 1,2,3ch
Memory card
Serial spindle
HDI

: Detachable card or module

- 139 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• LED display

LED for embedded Ethernet

LINK (Upper, green)
COM (Lower, yellow)

FUSE ALM : Fuse burn-out detection LED

STATUS : 7-Segment LED

ALARM : Alarm LED

1 4
2 3

- 140 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

(1) Alarm LED (red) display when a system alarm occurs

If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
Low battery voltage.
1
The battery may be running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.

3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.

An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board.
4
The servo card may be faulty, or the FSSB may be
broken.
An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
5
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage
may have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
Abnormal power supply operation.
6 The cause may be noise or a power supply module
failure.
: On : Off

Alarm LED Meaning

Turned on when the voltage inside the CPU card has
4 (LOW)
dropped. The CPU card may be faulty.

(2) Ethernet status LED

Alarm LED Meaning
LINK (green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub
correctly
COM (yellow) Turned on when data is transferred

- 141 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

4.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.5.1 Basic Units

Type Item Ordering code Remarks

30i/300i/300is Basic unit with 2 slots A02B-0303-B802

4.5.2 Printed Circuit Boards of Control Unit

Item Ordering code ID Remarks

Main board A16B-3200-0520 00308
CPU card A1
A20B-3300-0477 0040C
(DRAM 32MB)
CPU card A2
A20B-3300-0474 0040D
(DRAM 64MB)
CPU card B1
A20B-3300-0473 00405
(DRAM 32MB)
CPU card B2
A20B-3300-0470 00406
(DRAM 64MB)
Axis control card B11
A20B-3300-0445 00106
(FSSB 1 path)
Axis control card B12
A20B-3300-0448 0010B
(FSSB 1 path)
Axis control card B13
A20B-3300-0447 0010A
(FSSB 1 path)
Axis control card B24
A20B-3300-0442 00103
(FSSB 2 path)
Axis control card B26
A20B-3300-0440 00101
(FSSB 2 path)
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0160
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0161
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0163
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0164
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0180
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 256kB) SRAM: 01
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C1
A20B-3900-0181
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 512kB) SRAM: 02
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0182
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 256kB) SRAM: 01
FROM/SRAM module FROM: C2
A20B-3900-0183
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 512kB) SRAM: 02
PMC module A20B-3900-0200 00703
Fast data server board A20B-8101-0030 00701
Profibus master board A20B-8101-0050 00705
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070 00121
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320 0030C

- 142 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

Item Ordering code ID Remarks

Back panel (2 slots) A20B-2003-0580 1
Fan connection board A20B-9002-0350 -
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010 -
* Refer to Chapter 5 for details of Option board.

4.5.3 Other units

Item Ordering code Remarks

Separate detector interface unit (4
A02B-0303-C205
basic axes)
Separate detector interface unit (4
A02B-0236-C204
additional axes)
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001
Fan unit for 2 slots A02B-0303-C101

- 143 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

4.6 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT

WARNING
Before starting the replacement of a fuse, remove
the cause of the fuse burn-out.
Accordingly, the replacement should be performed
by a person fully trained in maintenance and safety.
If the cabinet is opened to replace the fuse, take
extreme care not to touch any high-voltage area
(marked with and covered by a shock prevention
cover). If the area is uncovered, direct contact with
this area will result in an electric shock.

• Mounting position of the fuse of the control unit

The fuse of the control unit is mounted on the main board.

CPD19A
CPD19B

CPU card

Main board

Fuse

• Ordering code of the fuse

Ordering code Rating Individual information
A02B-0265-K100 7.5A A60L-0001-0046#7.5

- 144 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

4.7 REPLACING THE BATTERY

Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is
backed up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the
control unit. The above data is not lost even when the main battery
goes dead. The backup battery is mounted on the control unit at
shipping. This battery can maintain the contents of memory for about
a year.

When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message "BAT"
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the
PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as
possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within one or two
weeks, however, this depends on the system configuration.

If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no

longer be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this
state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory
are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the
battery.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
• Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
• Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.

NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the
factory.

• Replacing the battery

If a lithium battery is used, have A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC internal
code: A98L-0031-0012) handy.
(1) Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off.
(2) Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit.
Disconnect the connector first. Then, remove the battery from
the battery case.
The battery case is provided in the top area of the face plate of
the main CPU board.
(3) Replace the battery, then connect the connector.

- 145 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

Battery case

Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Connector

WARNING
The incorrect mounting of the battery may cause an
explosion. Avoid using any battery other than the
one specified here (A02B-0200-K102).

CAUTION
Complete steps (1) to (3) within 30 minutes.
If the battery is left removed for a long time, the
memory would lose the contents.
If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be
completed within 30 minutes, save the whole
contents of the CMOS memory to a memory card.
The contents of the memory can be easily restored
with the memory card in case the memory loses the
contents.

Discard the dead battery, observing appropriate municipal rules and

regulations. When discarding the battery, insulate the terminal with a
tape so that no short-circuit would occur.

- 146 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

When using commercial D-size alkaline dry cells

• General method
Use the connector connected to the lithium battery for an external
battery.
Following the battery replacement procedure described above, replace
the standard lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
(A02B-0236-C281).

CAUTION
1 Place the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in such a
position that the battery can be replaced even while
the control unit is active.
2 The connector of the battery cable uses a simple
lock system. Fix the cable within an area of 50 cm
from the connector, removing tension on the cable.
This is required to prevent the connector from
coming off because of the weight of the cable or
tension on the cable.

- 147 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• Replacing the battery

(1) Have commercial D-size alkaline dry cells handy.
(2) Turn the CNC on.
(3) Remove the lid from the battery case.
(4) Replace the old dry cells with new ones. Mount the dry cells in
a correct orientation.
(5) Replace the lid on the battery case.

CAUTION
In the power-off state, the battery should be
replaced as in the case of the lithium battery, which
is descried above.

2 dry cells

Lid

Connection terminal
on the back

4 mounting holes

Case

- 148 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

4.8 REPLACING A FAN UNIT

WARNING
If the cabinet is opened to replace a fan unit, take
extreme care not to touch any high-voltage area
(marked with and covered by a shock prevention
cover). If the area is uncovered, direct contact
with this area will result in an electric shock.

• Ordering code of fan units

Ordering code Quantity
For 2-slot cabinet A02B-0303-C101 1

- 149 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/01

• Replacing a fan unit

Detaching a fan unit
<1> When replacing the fan motor, be sure to turn off the power to
the machine (CNC).
<2> Push up the latch at the top of the unit until the latch is
disengaged.
Push up the latch.

Latched Unlatched

CAUTION
Just disengage the latch. Do not push up the latch
after the latch is disengaged. If you continue
pushing up the latch forcibly, the latch can break.

<3> Place a finger at the bottom of the front of the fan unit then push
up the fan unit.

Push up the fan unit.

<4> Push up the fan unit until the fan unit is slanted by about 30
degrees.
<5> Pull out the fan unit toward you in the slanted direction.

<4> Push up the fan unit until it <5> Pull out the fan unit toward
is slanted by about 30 you in the slanted direction.
degrees.

- 150 -
B-63945EN/01 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE

Attaching a fan unit

<1> Insert a fan unit deeply into the main unit at a slanted angle of
about 30 degrees until the fan unit touches the wall of the main
unit.
<2> Lower the fan unit slowly on the main unit.
<3> Push down the fan unit on the near side to couple the fan unit
with the top of the main unit.

<1> Insert the fan unit at <2> Lower the fan unit. <3> Push down the fan unit to
an angle of about 30 couple it with the main
degrees. unit.

CAUTION
The fan unit and main unit are coupled directly with
each other by a connector. The coupling section of
the connector can break if the units are coupled
incorrectly.

<4> Push down the latch at the top of the fan unit for latching.
Push down the latch.

Unlatched Latched

<5> Turn on the power, then check that no fan alarm is issued and
that both fans are rotating.

NOTE
1 If the power is turned on when the fan unit and the
main unit are not coupled correctly, the fans do not
rotate or a fan alarm is issued even through the fans
are rotating.
2 When a large amount of force is required to couple
the fan unit with the main unit, check if pins of the
connector of the base printed circuit board are bent
and if the base printed circuit board is inserted
correctly.

- 151 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-

MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE
TYPE (HARDWARE)
5.1 OPTIONAL BOARD............................................................... 153
5.2 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB ................ 160
5.3 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS ............... 162
5.4 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES...... 166
5.5 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT
FLASH CARD ON THE DISPLAY CONTROL CARD........ 168
5.6 OTHER UNITS ....................................................................... 170
5.7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) ................................... 172
5.8 DISTRIBUTED I/O SETTING................................................ 174
5.9 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS ........................ 177
5.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE CABINET . 180
5.11 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE .......................... 182
5.12 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS................... 193

- 152 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.1 OPTIONAL BOARD

5.1.1 Fast Data Server

• Specification
Item Ordering code
Fast data server A20B-8101-0030

• Connector mounting location

JG2
S-BUS back-plane connector

CNH6

CD38R

Connector number Use

CNH6 ATA card interface
CD38R 100BASE-TX Ethernet interface

- 153 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

• LED indications
The board incorporates the following LEDs: Four green STATUS
LEDs and one red ALARM LED for indicating the status. Three
green LEDs and one red LED for indicating the communication status.
The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below
explains the LED lighting states.
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed
as follows:
o: Off n: On ¶: Blinking à: Don't care

Detailed view of LEDs

CD38R
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)

LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(STASUS) (green)

3(STATUS) (green)
2(STATUS) (green)
1(STATUS) (green)

- 154 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

LED lighting sequence at power on

No. LED indication 1234 Board state

1 STATUS Power off
2 STATUS Initial state after power on
3 STATUS MPU initialized.
4 STATUS Firmware downloaded.
5 STATUS Control migration to OS
6 STATUS OS PHASE1
7 STATUS OS PHASE2
8 STATUS OS PHASE3
9 STATUS OS PHASE4
10 STATUS Startup completed.
The system enters the No.10 status when the Fast Ethernet/Fast data
server starts normally. This status is maintained until an error occurs.

STATUS LED indications if an error occurs

If an error occurs, the LEDs repeatedly flash "LONG" then
"SHORT." (For "LONG," the LED lights for a long time. For
"SHORT," the LED lights for a short time.)

STATUS LED indication

No. LONG SHORT Board state
4321 4321
1 SDRAM parity alarm
Failure caused
2 General invalid instruction
by this board
3 Invalid slot instruction
Failure caused
4 by another NMI of another module
board

NOTE
If an error, indicated by repeatedly flashing a
LONG and SHORT combination other than the
above, occurs, contact FANUC.

ALARM LED indications if an error occurs

STATUS LED
No. Board state
indication
1 ALM Parity error occurred in memory.

- 155 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

LED indications related to communication status

STATUS LED
No. Board state
indication
1 COM Lights when data is sent.
Lights when the Fast Ethernet/Fast data server is
2 LIL
successfully connected to the hub.
3 COL Lights if a data collision occurs.
Lights when a connection is made with
4 BTX
100BASE-TX.

NOTE
LIL :
Communication is not performed while this LED is
not lit. A probable reason for this is that the Fast
Ethernet/Fast data server is not properly
connected to the hub, or that the hub is off. This
LED should be lit at all times while the Fast
Ethernet/Fast data server is properly connected to
the hub.
COL :
This LED lights frequently if there is excessive
traffic on the communication line or if there is
excessive peripheral electrical noise.

- 156 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.1.2 Additional Axis Board

• Specification
Item Ordering code
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070

• Connector mounting location

JGP
JD1A

COP10A

CA69A

Connector number Use

COP10A FSSB
JD1A I/O LINK
CA69A Servo check

• Block diagram

Servo control
FSSB I/F

I/O Link (4th ch)

DV/RV

BACKPLANE

- 157 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

• LED display

JGP
JD1A

COP10A

CA69A

FSSB_OP

LED name Meaning

FBBS_OP ON: FSSB connected (FSSB OPEN)

- 158 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.1.3 Additional Spindle Board

• Specification
Item Ordering code
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320

• Connector mounting location

JGP

JA41L

Connector number Use

JA41L Serial spindle and position coder

• Block diagram

Spindle control
Serial
spindle

BACKPLANE

- 159 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.2 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB

5.2.1 Method of Extraction

<1> Detach the cable connected to the option board and the cable that
interferes when the option board is extracted.
<2> Pinch handles A and B for extraction.
<3> Pinch handle A, and extract the printed circuit board while
disengaging the latch.

NOTE
The mini-slot option board can be extracted without
extracting the main CPU board and full-size option
board.

5.2.2 Method of Insertion

<1> Pinch handles A and B for extraction, then insert the option
board until the option board plugs into the connector of the back
panel.
<2> Plug the detached cables again correctly.

For LCD-mounted type control unit

- 160 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

For stand-alone type control unit

- 161 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.3 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS

WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a card
PCB, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

CAUTION
1 Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.
2 If the SRMA data check method (parity check or
ECC check) has been changed after the
replacement, a parity or ECC alarm may occur at
power-on, possibly causing damage to the SRAM
data. Back up the SRAM data before starting
replacement, and restore the data after completing
the replacement.

- 162 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.3.1 Method of Extraction

<1> Pull up the spacer metal fitting.

<2> A molded cover is attached to a corner of the servo card and
CPU card although the shapes of the covers attached to the cards
differ from each other. Insert a finger into the rear of the cover
and pull up the cover slowly in the arrow direction shown in the
figure below. (Note: At this time, hold the neighborhood of the
main board on the opposite side with the other hand whenever
possible. A force of 7 to 8 kgf is required for extraction. Be
careful not to drop the card board due to the momentum of
extraction.)
<3> When one side of the card board is raised slightly by pulling up
the cover, do not fully extract the card board, but push back the
cover softly.
<4> When the card board is pushed back to be parallel with the main
board, pinch two sides of the card board and pull up the card
board. This completes the extraction of the card board.

- 163 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

For extraction, insert a finger into the rear

of this cover, then pull up the cover in the
arrow direction. Push back the
cover softly.

Please put a finger

in the reverse of
this part and pull
up this part when
removing this PCB.
Connector side

240-pin

Spacer side
connector on
the back

Top view of the servo card Step 2-2 Step 2-3

Side view
Connector side

240-pin
Spacer side

connector
on the back

Top view of the CPU card

- 164 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.3.2 Method of Insertion

<1> Check that the metal fittings of the spacers are raised.
<2> To align the card board insertion position, touch the spacer
fixing end faces of the card board with the spacers as shown in
the figure below. (At this time, the board can be touched with the
spacers for easier position alignment by slightly holding up the
connector side and lowering the spacer side only.)
<3> While aligning the card board with the spacers, lower the
connector side slowly then cause the connectors to touch each
other.
<4> The mating position can be determined more easily by moving
the card board back and forth slightly in the arrow direction.
<5> Push the connector side of the card board slowly. At this time,
push the card board against the board on the rear side of the
connector. The force required for connector insertion is about 10
kgf. If the connector cannot be mated by a force of about 10 kgf
or more, the card board may be aligned incorrectly, and the
connector can break. In this case, realign the card board. (Note:
Do not press the radiation fin installed on a CPU and LSI chip.
Otherwise, the radiation fin can break.)
<6> Push in the spacer metal fittings.

Spacer

Please put a finger

in the reverse of this
part and pull up this
part when removing
Spacer fixing
this PCB.
end face
Connector side

Spacer side

240-pin
connector on
the back

Spacer

- 165 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.4 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES

WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a module,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.
Before replacing an SRAM module, be sure to back
up the contents of the SRAM module.

- 166 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.4.1 Demounting a DIMM Module

(1) Open the claw of the socket outward. (See Fig. a.)

(2) Extract the module slantly upward. (See Fig. b.)

5.4.2 Mounting a DIMM Module

(1) Insert the module slantly into the module socket, with side B
facing upward. (See Fig. b.)

(2) Push the module downward until it is locked. (See Fig. c.)
At this time, push it down with pushing two points of (*) in the
figure.

Fig. a

Fig. b

Fig. c
(*)

(*)

- 167 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.5 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT FLASH CARD

ON THE DISPLAY CONTROL CARD

WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the
module, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover). Touching the uncovered high-voltage
circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric
shock hazard.

CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.
Be sure to back up the contents of the SRAM
module before replacing the SRAM module.

- 168 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.5.1 Method of Extraction

<1> Face side B of the display control card upward, then pull up the
retainer of the socket.
<2> Turn the latch toward the far side, then extract the compact flash
card.

5.5.2 Method of Insertion

<1> Pull up the retainer, then insert a compact flash card into the
socket.
<2> Push the card until it is locked.
<3> Lower the retainer to hold the card.

Display control Latch

card (side B)

Retainer

Compact flash card

- 169 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.6 OTHER UNITS

5.6.1 Separate Detector Interface Unit

• Specification
Name Specification
Basic unit A02B-0303-C205
Additional unit A02B-0236-C204

• Connector mounting location

CNF1 (CNF2)

JF101(JF105)
JF102(JF106)
JF103(JF107)
JF104(JF108)
JA4A

The parenthesized connector names are for the additional unit.

Connector number Application

CP11A 24 VDC power input
CP11B 24 VDC power output
COP10A Back stage of the FSSB interface
COP10B Front stage of the FSSB interface
JF101 to JF104 (JF105 to JF108) Separate detector interface
JA4A Connection of a battery for the absolute
detector
CNF1 (CNF2) Connection of the additional unit
The parenthesized connector names are for the additional unit.

- 170 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

• LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit
case. Two green LEDs (POWER and OPEN) and two red LEDs
(ERR1 and ERR2) are provided. The locations and meanings of the
LEDs are indicated below.

POWER

ERR1,ERR2 OPEN

LED indication

No. LED Meaning

1 POWER Turned on when the power is on
Turned on when FSSB communication is
2 OPEN
performed
Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is
3 ERR1
disconnected
Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is
4 ERR2
disconnected

- 171 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)

LCD with a touch panel

The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For
this operation, be sure to use a FANUC-supplied pen (A02B-0236-
K111) dedicated to the touch panel. If a sharp-pointed pen is used, for
example, to touch the LCD screen, the LCD surface may be flawed or
damaged. Moreover, do not touch the LCD screen directly with a
finger. Otherwise, the operability of the LCD
may deteriorate, and the LCD screen may get dirty.

Protection sheet for the touch panel

A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel
to protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection
sheet is damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a
consumable part.)

Replacing the protection sheet

• Materials used
1) Protection sheet
A02B-0236-K110 : For 10.4" LCD with touch panel
A08B-0082-K020 : For 15.0" LCD with touch panel
2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off =
detergent for kitchen can be used)
3) Soft cloth (such as towel)

• Replacement procedure
1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the
touch panel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface
of the touch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still
left on the surface. Remove oil completely.
If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch
panel, the protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel
completely and will sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.

2) Applying the protection sheet

<1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the
backing sheet).

- 172 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

Fold

<2> Peel off the backing sheet.

<3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower sides of
the sheet first. Check that the sides of the protection sheet
do not touch the escutcheon.

OK NG

<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet while
pushing out air between the touch panel and protection
sheet.
With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the
touch panel, do not attempt to correct the position of
the protection sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the
entire sheet completely.
Check that the four corners and four sides of the
protection sheet do not float.

3) Checks after replacement

<1> Check that there is no wrinkle on the surface of the
protection sheet.
<2> After power-on, check that there is no touch panel portion
kept pressed.
<3> Press the touch panel, and check that correct operation
takes place.

- 173 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.8 DISTRIBUTED I/O SETTING

By changing the setting (rotary switch) on an expansion module, a

connection can be made to skip an expansion module or expansion
modules as shown below.
Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 3

Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 3

Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 3
Basic module

Basic module

Basic module
When expansion module 1 is When expansion module 2 is When expansion modules 1
skipped skipped and 2 are skipped

Method of setting (control and setting method)

A control (rotary switch) is provided on the location shown below of
each expansion module. When changing the setting, turn the rotary
switch with a flat-blade screwdriver with a tip diameter of about 2.5
mm.

- 174 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

Each setting position of the rotary switch has the meaning as

indicated below.
Setting
Indication Meaning of setting
position
Standard setting. The rotary switch is set to this position at
0 0 the time of shipment from FANUC.
This setting is not skipped an expansion module.
Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this position
1 -
when the one preceding expansion module is skipped.
Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this position
2 2
when the two preceding expansion modules are skipped.
3 - Setting prohibited
4, 8, or C has the effect of 0.
4, -, 6, -,
5, 9, or D has the effect of 1.
4 to F 8, -, A, -,
6, A, or E has the effect of 2.
C, -, E, -,
7, B, or F has the effect of 3. (u setting prohibited)

Examples of setting

(When expansion module 1 is skipped)

Set the rotary switch of expansion module 2
Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 3

to setting position = 1. Do not change the

setting (setting position = 0) of expansion
Basic module

module 3.

(When expansion module 2 is skipped)

Set the rotary switch of expansion module 3
Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 3

to setting position = 1. Do not change the

setting (setting position = 0) of expansion
module 1.
Basic module

(When expansion module 1 and expansion

module 2 are skipped)
Set the rotary switch of expansion module 3
Expansion module 1

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 3

to setting position = 2.
Basic module

- 175 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

This function was not available initially, but was recently added. This
function became available, depending on the type of module, as
indicated below.

Expansion module B (DI/DO = 24/16, A03B-0815-C003 Available starting with

without a manual pulse generator shipment in June 1998 and
interface) later
Expansion module C (DO = 16, 24A A03B-0815-C004 Available starting with
output) shipment in August 1998
and later
Expansion module D (analog input) A03B-0815-C005 Available starting with
shipment in August 1998
and later

NOTE
To expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with a
manual pulse generator interface) (A03B-0815-
C002), a rotary switch is added as the other
modules are modified. However, expansion module
A is always installed at the location of expansion
module 1, so that the setting of expansion module
A need not be changed.

- 176 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.9 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS

WARNING
Before replacement of a blown fuse, the cause of
the blown fuse must be corrected. So, fuse
replacement work must be done only by a person
who is trained in the related maintenance and
safety requirements. When opening the cabinet
and replacing a fuse inside, be careful not to touch
the high-voltage circuits (marked with and fitted
with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered
high-voltage circuits presents an extremely
dangerous electric shock hazard.

For the specification of the fuse of each unit, see the list of
consumables in Appendix B.

- 177 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

• Fuse mounting location on the connector panel I/O modules

Fuse

Expansion module 3

Expansion module 2

Expansion module 1

Basic module
Cable for the I/O Link (A03B-0815-C001)

Cable for a manual pulse generator

NOTE
No fuse is provided on the expansion modules. A
fuse is provided on the basic module only.

- 178 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

• Fuse mounting location on the operator's panel I/O modules

I/O connector

JD1A

JD1B

JA3

Fuse
Power supply connector
This drawing is for A20B-2002-0470, A20B-2002-0520, and A20B-2002-
0521.

• Fuse mounting location on the separate detector interface unit

Power supply
connector
Optical
Fuse connector

- 179 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE CABINET

The control units and various peripheral units supplied from FANUC
are designed assuming that those units are accommodated in enclosed
cabinets. The cabinets mentioned here include:

• Cabinet that is manufactured by a machine tool builder to house

control units and peripheral units
• Operation pendant that is manufactured by a machine tool
builder to house control units and an operator's panel
• Similar products

The table below indicates the environment conditions for installing

control units in these cabinets.

Display LCD-mounted type

Display stand-
control unit and display
Condition alone type control
unit (excluding units with
unit
a data server)
Operating 0 °C to 58 °C 0 °C to 55 °C
Ambient Storage and
-20 °C to 60 °C
temperature transportation
of units Change in
0.3 °C/minute max.
temperature
Relative humidity: 75% or less
Normal
No condensation
Humidity
Short term (not Relative humidity: 95% or less
exceeding 1 month) No condensation
0.5 G or less
The evaluation test is performed under the
following conditions.
Operating
Vibration 10 to 58Hz : 0.075 mm (amplitude)
58 to 500Hz : 1 G
The test conforms to IEC68–2–6.
Non-operating 1.0 G or less
Height above Operating Up to 1000m (Note)
sea level Non-operating Up to 12000m
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the
Atmosphere cabinets are in a location where the density of
dust, coolant, organic solvent, and/or corrosive
gas is relatively high.)

- 180 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

NOTE
When the CNC is installed at a height of more than
1000 m above the sear level, a restriction is
imposed on the maximum allowable ambient
temperature for the CNC inside the cabinet.
For every 100 m rise from 1000 m above the sea
level, decrease the maximum allowable ambient
temperature for the CNC by 1.0°C.
Example: The maximum allowable ambient
temperature for the CNC inside the
cabinet installed at a height of 1750 m
above the sea level is determined as
follows:
55°C - 1750/100 × 1.0°C = 47.5°C
So, the allowable ambient temperature
range is 0°C to 47.5°C.
When a hard disk is used, the following restrictions
are imposed on the height of installation:
Height above the sea level for operation:
-60 m to 3000 m
Height above the sea level for non-operation:
-60 m to 12000 m

- 181 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.11 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE

The CNC is becoming increasingly smaller as the surface mount

technology and custom LSI technology advance.
In many cases, as the CNC becomes more compact, the mounting
locations of its constituent units become closer to a noise source in
the power magnetics cabinet.
In general, noise is generated by electrostatic coupling,
electromagnetic induction, or a grounding loop, and is induced into
the CNC.
The CNC incorporates sufficient countermeasures against external
noise. However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of
noise quantitatively, and many unknown factors are involved. So, to
improve the operation stability of a CNC machine tool system, noise
generation must be minimized, and the induction of generated noise
into the CNC must be suppressed.
For design of equipment including a power magnetics cabinet, take
these countermeasures on the machine side against noise into
consideration.

5.11.1 Separation of Signal Lines

The cables used with a CNC machine tool are classified as indicated
below. Handle the cables of each group according to the descriptions
in the "Action" column.

Group Signal Action

A Primary side AC power line Bind the cables of this group separately from the cables of
Secondary side AC power line groups B and C(*1), or electromagnetically shield the cables of
AC/DC power lines (including servo motor and this group from the cables of groups B and C(*2). According to
spindle motor power lines) the descriptions of noise suppressors in Section 5.8.4, attach a
AC/DC solenoid spark killer or diode to the solenoid and relay.
AC/DC relay
B DC solenoid (24 VDC) Attach a diode to the DC solenoid and relay.
DC relay (24 VDC) Bind the cables of this group separately from the cables of
DI-DO cable between I/O unit power group A, or electromagnetically shield the cables of this group
magnetics cabinets from the cables of group A.
DI-DO cable between I/O unit machines Separate the cables of this group from the cables of group C
24-VDC input power cables for the control unit as far as possible. Shielding is recommended.
and its peripherals
C CNC-I/O unit cable Bind the cables of this group separately from the cables of
Cables for position loopback and velocity group A, or electromagnetically shield the cables of this group
loopback from the cables of group A.
CNC-spindle amplifier cable Separate the cables of this group from the cables of group B
Position coder cable as far as possible.
Manual pulse generator cable Shielding according to Section 5.8.5 is required.
CNC-MDI cable (*3)
RS-232C and RS-422 cables
Battery cable
Other cables whose shielding is specified

- 182 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

NOTE
1 Separate binding is to separate the bound cables of
one group at least 10 cm from the bound cables of
another group.
2 Electromagnetic shielding is to shield the bound
cables of one group from the bound cables of
another group with a grounded metal (iron) plate.
3 If the CNC-MDI cable is not longer than 30 cm,
shielding is not required.

Power magnetics cabinet

Operator's panel cabinet

24 VDC Spindle Servo I/O unit CNC

power amplifier amplifier control
supply unit
To motor,
etc. Duct

Cables of group A Cables of groups B and C

Cross-sectional
view of the duct

Group A Groups B and C

Shield

- 183 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.11.2 Grounding

With a CNC machine tool, three ground systems are used.

• Signal ground system (SG)
Signal ground (SG) provides a reference voltage (0 V) for the
electric signal system.
• Frame ground system (FG)
The purposes of frame ground (FG) are to ensure safety and to
provide shielding from external and internal noises. Specifically,
the frames of equipment, unit cases, panels, inter-unit interface
cables, and so forth are shielded.
• Protective earth (PE)
The protective earth (PE) is designed so that the protective
grounds provided between the units are connected to ground at
one point from a system point of view.

Two CNC grounding methods are available for choice.

(1) One-point grounding method

Pendant box
Distributed αi amplifier
I/O
CNC

ÌÚ°Ñ
Frame
AC power
supply
24 V power Operator's
supply panel
ÌÚ°Ñ
AC input
Frame

PE (Cabinet earth plate) Machine cabinet

Connection line for grounding

Connection line for protective

earth (PE)

- 184 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

(2) Method of grounding to a near plate

Units

Connection line A

PE

Connection line B
Connection line for grounding

Connection line for protective earth (PE)

Notes on ground system wiring

• The grounding resistance of the protective earth (PE) must be
100 ohms or less (class-D grounding).
• The connection cable for the protective earth (PE) needs to have
a cross-sectional area sufficient for flowing an accidental
current that flows to the protective earth (PE) when an accident
such as a short circuit occurs. (In general, a cross-sectional area
equal to or greater than that of the AC power line is required.)
• As a connection cable for the protective earth (PE), use a cable
integrated with an AC power line so that power is not fed when
the ground wire is disconnected.
• A line for connecting a unit to a near plate (line A in the figure
above) must be connected to the plate along the shortest path,
and its cross-sectional area must satisfy the IEC condition
described below. If the input current is limited by a circuit
breaker, however, satisfaction of the current capacity of the
circuit breaker is sufficient. If a cross-sectional area is specified
in the manual of each unit, observe the specified value.
• For plate-to-plate connection, connect the metal plate to which
the PE is connected with the metal plate to which units are
connected, by using connection line B (as shown above). In this
case, the thickness of the cable is determined by the AC input
current capacity of each unit connected to the plate. If a cross-
sectional area is specified in the manual of each unit, observe the
specified value. If no cross-sectional area is specified, follow the
table below. If the table indicates a thickness greater than the
cross-sectional area of the connection cable for the protective

- 185 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

earth (PE), however, use the cross-sectional area of the

connection cable for the protective earth (PE).

Guideline for selecting a cross-sectional area of protective copper wire

Rated current of the fuse for protecting a Cross-sectional area
circuit, or rated current of the overcurrent of protective copper
protective device wire
2
[A] [mm ]
30 2 or more
50 3.5 or more
100 5.5 or more
150 8 or more
225 14 or more
400 22 or more
600 38 or more
800 50 or more
1000 60 or more
1200 80 or more
1600 100 or more
2000 125 or more
2500 150 or more
3200 200 or more
4000 250 or more

If the current is limited by a circuit breaker, satisfaction of the current

capacity of the circuit breaker is sufficient. A connection made by
welding is acceptable as long as the connection satisfies the current
requirement.

* According to the IEC60204 requirement, a protective earth line

must satisfy the following condition:
Let S be the cross-sectional area of a connected power input line.
S≤16 mm2 S
16 mm2<S≤35 mm2 16 mm2
2
35 mm <S S/2

- 186 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.11.3 Signal Ground (SG) Connection of Control Unit

LCD-mounted type control unit

Rear of unit

M4 stud

Ground cable
Wire of 2 mm2 or more

Connect the 0 V line inside the control unit to the ground plate of the
cabinet through the signal ground terminal (shown above).
For the ground terminal locations of other units, see the external unit
views in the appendix.

- 187 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

LCD stand-alone type control unit

Ground terminal for signals

(Faston terminal)

Ground cable
Wire of 2 mm2 or more

Ground plate of the

PE cabinet

Connect the 0V line of the electronic circuitry in the control unit to

the ground plate of the cabinet via the ground terminal for signals.
Use a Faston terminal of the FANUC specification A02B-0166-K330.

- 188 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.11.4 Noise Suppressor

With a power magnetics cabinet, components such as an AC/DC

solenoid and AC/DC relay are used. When turned on and off, these
components generate a high-energy pulse voltage due to coil
inductance.
Such a pulse voltage is induced into cables, for example, and can
interfere with electric circuitry.

Notes on spark killer selection

• Select a CR-type spark killer (for use with AC circuitry) (A
varistor has a function for clamping the peak voltage of a pulse
voltage, but cannot suppress a spike-like voltage. For this reason,
the use of a CR-type spark killer is recommended.)
• As the CR values of a spark killer, use the following with the
steady-state coil current (I (A)) and DC resistance used as
references:
1) Resistance (R): Coil DC resistance
2 2
2) Electrostatic capacitance (C): I to I (F)
10 20
I : Coil steady-state current (A)

R C
Equivalent circuit of spark killer

Spark killer
AC relay

Motor

Spark killer

Install a spark killer near a motor, relay, and coil.

NOTE
Use a CR-type noise suppressor. A varistor has a
function for clamping the peak voltage of a pulse
voltage, but cannot suppress a spike-like voltage.

Diode (used for DC circuitry)

Diode

As a guideline, select a diode which has a

DC relay breakdown voltage about two times greater
than an applied voltage, and allows the flow of
a current about two times higher.

- 189 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

5.11.5 Cable Clamping and Shielding

According to the figure below, clamp all cables that require shielding
and are run to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, and so
forth. This clamping method not only secures cables, but also shields
cables. Cable clamping and shielding are a key to stable system
operation. Always perform cable clamping and shielding according to
the method described here.
As shown below, peel off a part of the outer sheath of each cable so
that the shield cover is exposed, then press and retain the exposed part
of the shield against the ground plate with a clamp.
Install a ground plate manufactured by the machine tool builder, as
shown below.

Ground plate

Cable
ƒP [ƒuƒ‹

Clamp
40mm to 80mm

Fig. 5.11.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)

- 190 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

Mounting plate
of the machine

Control unit

Ground plate

Clamp

Shield cover

Fig. 5.11.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare a ground plate as shown below.

Ground terminal
(to be connected to
ground)

Clamp mounting hole

Mounting hole

Fig. 5.11.5 (c) Ground plate

For a ground plate, use an iron plate that is as thick as 2 mm or more

and is plated with nickel.

- 191 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

Ground plate
8

12

20

Fig. 5.11.5 (d) Ground plate hole diagram

Reference: Outline drawing of the clamp

Up to 55

28

17

Fig. 5.11.5 (e) Outline drawing of clamp

Ordering code of the clamp:

A02B-0124-K001 (set of 8 clamps)

- 192 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

5.12 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS

(1) When the voltage of the battery for absolute Pulsecoders

becomes low, DS alarms 306 to 308 occur.
(2) When DS alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery
becomes low) occurs, replace the battery as soon as possible. In
general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the number of Pulsecoders used.
(3) If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, DS alarm 306
(battery zero alarm) occurs. In this case, the current positions for
the Pulsecoders can no longer be maintained.
In this state, DS alarm 300 (reference position return request
alarm) occurs. Return the tool to the reference position after
replacing the battery.
(4) The service life of the batteries is about two years if they are
used in a six-axis configuration with αi/αis/βis series servo
motors and one year if they are used in a six-axis configuration
with α/β series servo motors. FANUC recommends that you
replace the batteries periodically according to the battery service
life.
(5) To connect the battery, use the battery case or incorporate the
battery into the servo amplifier. Note that the attachment method
of the battery depends on the connection method and the type of
servo amplifier.

• Replacing batteries
To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders
from being lost, turn on the machine power before replacing the
battery. The replacement procedure is described below. (Note: The
turning-on step is not required when the αi or αis series servo motor
or βis series servo motor (β0.4is to β22is) is used.)

(1) Turn the servo unit (machine) on.

(2) Place the machine in the emergency stop state.
(3) Confirm that servo motors are not active.
(4) Make sure the DC link charge LED is off.
(5) Remove the old battery and then attach a new one.
(6) Now, replacement has been completed. The system power can be
turned off.

- 193 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

NOTE
The absolute Pulsecoder of the αi/αis/βis (β0.4is to
β22is) series servo motor is incorporated with a
backup capacitor as standard. This backup
capacitor enables an absolute position detection to
be continued for about 10 minutes. Therefore, no
zero point return need be performed if the time
during which servo amplifier power is kept off for
battery replacement is within 10 minutes. If battery
replacement takes 10 minutes or more, the power
must remain turned on.

CAUTION
1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch
bare metal parts in the panel. In particular, be
careful not to touch any high-voltage circuits due to
the electric shock hazard.
2 Before replacing the battery, make sure the DC link
charge LED is off. Otherwise, an electric shock may
be received.
3 Be sure to use the specified battery. If another type
of battery is used, it may overheat, blow out, or
catch fire.
4 Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery
is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat,
blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position
information in absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
5 During attachment of the battery, insert the factory-
attached protection socket into the CX5X or CX5Y
connector, whichever is not used. If the +6 V pin
and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may
overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute
position information in absolute Pulsecoders may
be lost.

- 194 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

• Replacing D-size alkaline dry cells in the battery case

Replace four D-size alkaline batteries (A06B-6050-K061) in the
battery case installed in the machine.
(1) Have four D-size alkaline batteries on hand.
(2) Loosen the screws on the battery case. Remove the cover.
(3) Replace the alkaline batteries in the case. Pay careful attention to
the polarity of the alkaline batteries.
(4) Attach the cover.

Screws

Cover

CAUTION
Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery
is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat,
blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position
information in absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.

- 195 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

• Attaching the built-in battery (α

αi series servo amplifier)

Attach the lithium battery (A06B-6073-K001) to the servo amplifier.

[Attachment procedure]
(1) Remove a battery cover from the servo amplifier.
(2) Attach the battery as shown below.
(3) Re-attach the cover.
(4) Connect the connector of battery with CX5X of the servo
amplifier.

SVM
Inserting way

Cable side

Red: +6V

Connector Black: 0V

Battery
CX5X, CX5Y
Battery cover
+6V

0V

CAUTION
Attaching the battery from the cable outlet applies
tension to the cable. Therefore, attach the cable
from another place to prevent the cable from being
stretched. If this cable is connected on a stretch
condition, a bad conductivity may be occurred.

• Attaching the built-in battery (β

β series servo amplifier)

Attach the lithium battery (A06B-6093-K001) to the servo amplifier.

[Attachment procedure]
(1) In case of SVU-12 or SVU-20, remove the battery cover under
the servo amplifier grasping its left and right sides. In case of
SVU-40 or SVU-80, remove the cover attached on right side of
the servo amplifier grasping its upper and lower sides.
(2) Remove the connector of battery. (Connector CX5X or CX5Y)
(3) Replace the battery and connect the connector.
(4) Mount the battery cover.

- 196 -
B-63945EN/01 5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)

Battery

Battery cover

SVU-12, SVU-20

Battery Battery cover

Pass the battery cable to this slit.

SVU-40, SVU-80

CAUTION
1 The connector of the battery can be connected with
either of CX5X and CX5Y.
2 Attaching the battery from the cable outlet applies
tension to the cable. Therefore, attach the cable
from another place to prevent the cable from being
stretched. If this cable is connected on a stretch
condition, a bad conductivity may be occurred.

- 197 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/01

• Used batteries
Old batteries should be disposed as "INDUSTRIAL WASTES"
according to the regulations of the country or autonomy where your
machine has been installed.

- 198 -
B-63945EN/01 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

6 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again.
This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the
parameters, the part programs and the tool offset values.

6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT ............... 200

6.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA...................................... 202

- 199 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/01

6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT

Setting procedure of parameters

Parameter writing is enabled with following steps 1 to 3.

1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.

2 Press key several times or press soft key [SETING] to
OFFSET
SETTING

display SETTING (HANDY) screen.

3 Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press 1 and
INPUT keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.
4 Press SYSTEM
key several times to display the following screen.

PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234 N12345

0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 RMV MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL To make the cursor
display in bit unit,
S 0 T0000 press the cursor key
REF **** *** *** 10: 15: 30 or .
[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]

5 Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is

displayed.
<1> Soft key [NO. SRH] :
Searched by number.
Examination) Parameter number → [NO. SRH].
<2> Soft key [ON : 1] :
Item with cursor position is set to 1 (bit parameter)
<3> Soft key [OFF : 0] :
Item with cursor position is set to 0 (bit parameter)
<4> Soft key [+INPUT] :
Input value is added to the value at cursor (word type)
<5> Soft key [INPUT] :
Input value is replaced with the value at cursor (word type)
<6> Soft key [READ] :
Parameters are input from reader/puncher interface.
<7> Soft key [PUNCH] :
Parameters are output to reader/puncher interface.

- 200 -
B-63945EN/01 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

6 After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE

on the SETTING screen to 0. Press RESET
to release alram 100.
7 Convenient method
<1> To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or
, then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set
parameters bit by bit (Bit parameter only).
<2> To set data consecutively, use EOB key.

(Ex.1) 1 2 3 4 EOB 4 5 6 7 EOB 9

9 9 9 INPUT

This key sequence sets data as follows:

0 1234
0 Þ 4567
0 9999
0 0
(Ex.2) 1 2 3 4 EOB EOB 9 9 9 9 INPUT

This key sequence sets data as follows:

0 1234
0 Þ 0
0 9999
0 0
<3> To set the same data sequentially, press = .
(Ex.1) 1 2 3 4 EOB = EOB = INPUT

This key sequence sets data as follows:

0 1234
0 Þ 1234
0 1234
0 0

<4> Bit parameters can be set as follows:

(Ex.1) 1 1 EOB = EOB = INPUT
This key sequence sets data as follows:
00000000 00011000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Þ0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
00000000 00011000
00000000 00000000
8 After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE
to 0.

- 201 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/01

6.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA

The main CPU memorized the following data.

Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally.
(1) CNC paramter
(2) PMC parameter
(3) Pitch error compensation amount
(4) Custom macro variable values
(5) Tool compensation amount
(6) Part program (machining program, custom macro program)

6.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output

Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.

Parameters required for output are as follows :
In addition, (*) indicates the standard setting for input/output devices
made by FANUC. Change these settings according to the unit you
actually use.
(Parameter can be changed in MDI mode or emergency stop status.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO
ISO 0: Output with EIA code
1: Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)

0020 Selection of I/O channel

(*) 0 : Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
1: Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
2: Channel 2 (JD36A of mother board)
4: Memory card interface

NOTE
An operation example shown here assumes that
data input/ output is performed with an input/output
unit connected to the JD56A. (I/O channel = 0)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
#7 (NFD) 0: Feed is output when data is output.
1: Feed is not output when data is output.
#3 (ASI) (*) 0: EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.
1: ASCII code is used.
#0 (SB2) 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
(*) 1: No. of stop bits is 2.

- 202 -
B-63945EN/01 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

0102 Pecification number of input/output device

Set value Input/output device

0 RS-232-C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS-232-C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
6
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

0103 Baud Rate

1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 (*)10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12:19200 [BPS]

6.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters

1 Enter EDIT mode or the emergency stop condition.

2 Press SYSTEM
key and soft key [PRGRM] to select a program text.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key .
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are
started to be output.

- 203 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/01

6.2.3 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount

1 Select EDIT mode.

2 Press the function key and
SYSTEM
several times, then press
[PITCH] to select the pitch error compensation setting screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and .
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error
compensation amount is started to be output.

6.2.4 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values

When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable No. 500

and later are output.
1 Press OFFSET
SETTING key.
2 Press key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro
variable screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key .
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro
variable values are output.

6.2.5 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount

1 Select EDIT mode.

2 Press key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
OFFSET
SETTING

compensation amount screen.

3 Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool
compensation amount is started to be output.

- 204 -
B-63945EN/01 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

6.2.6 Outputting Part Program

1 Confirm the following parameters. If this parameter is set to 1,

rather than the value indicated by l, change to MDI mode and
then reset to 0.
However, if you changed the parameter setting, restore the
original value after finishing this work.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9 (*) 0: Programs of 9000s are edited.
1: Programs of 9000s can be protected.
(Protected programs are not output.)
NE8 (*) 0: Programs of 8000s are edited.
1: Programs of 8000s can be protected.
(Protected programs are not output.)
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program
text.
4 Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key .
5 Input a program number to be output. To output all programs
input as:
O ¯ 9 9 9 9
6 Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.

6.2.7 Inputting CNC Parameters

1 Set to the emergency stop state.

2 Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.
In addition, (*) indicates the standard setting for input/output
devices made by FANUC. Change these settings according to the
unit you actually use.
<1> Press key several times, and press [SETING] to
OFFSET
SETTING

display SETTING screen.

<2> Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
<3> Press SYSTEM
key to select the parameter screen.
<4>
0020 Selectionof I/O channel
(*) 0: Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
1: Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
2: Channel 2 (JD36A of mother board)
4: Memory card interface

- 205 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/01

<5>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
NFD 0: Feed is output when punching out.
1: Feed is not output when punching out.
ASI 0: EIA or ISO code is used.
1: ASCII code is used.
SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
(*)1: No. of stop bits is 2.

<6>
0102 Specification number of I/O device

Set value Input/output device

0 RS-232-C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS-232-C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
6
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

<7>
0103 Baud rate
1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 (*)10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]

3 Press soft key .

4 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters
are started.
5 Upon completion of parameter input, turn off the power then
turn on the power again.
6 Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse
coder. In such a case, perform reference position return again.

- 206 -
B-63945EN/01 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

6.2.8 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount

1 Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode.

2 Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen.
3 Press PROG key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program
contents.
4 Press key several times, soft key [PARAM],
SYSTEM
and
[PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation
amount.
5 Press the function key SYSTEM
and several times, then press
[PITCH] to select the pitch error compensation setting screen.
6 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.
8 After data has been input, press key twice to display the
OFFSET
SETTING

SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.

6.2.9 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values

* If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input

the variable values.

1 Select EDIT mode.

2 Press PROG key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program
contents.
3 Press the function key and press
SYSTEM
several times, then
press [PITCH] to select the pitch error compensation setting
screen.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key .
5 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.

6.2.10 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount

1 Select EDIT mode.

2 Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).
3 Press OFFSET
key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
SETTING

compensation amount screen.

4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
5 Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.

- 207 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/01

6.2.11 Inputting Part Programs

Confirm the following parameters. If the setting is different from the

value indicated by (*), reset to the specified value only during this
work. (Change it in MDI mode).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
NPE When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30
and M99 are:
0: Regarded as the end of program.
(*)1: Not regarded as the end of porgram.
RAL When programs are registered:
(*)0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9 (*)0: Programs of 9000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 9000s are protected.
NE8 (*)0: Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 8000s are protected.
* For PPR, item 4 is not required.
1 Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.
2 Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).
3 Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part
program file.
4 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.

- 208 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.1 WHAT IS PMC?...................................................................... 210
7.2 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION ...................................................... 214
7.3 PMC SPECIFICATIONS......................................................... 227
7.4 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN ........................................ 232
7.5 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS
([PMC MAINTE]) ................................................................... 235
7.6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS
([PMC LADDER]) .................................................................. 262
7.7 LIST OF ADDRESSES ........................................................... 279

- 209 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.1 WHAT IS PMC?

The programmable machine controller (PMC) is a programmable

controller (PC) built into a CNC to perform sequence control for a
machine tool (spindle rotation, tool change, machine operator's panel
control, and so on).
Sequence control is to perform control steps successively in a
predetermined sequence or according to the logic operation.
Programs for performing sequence control for machine tools are
called sequence programs. Generally, sequence programs coded in the
Ladder language are used.

7.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC

The following is the basic configuration of the PMC:

CNC PMC Machine

Internal External
I/O Sequence I/O

program

Signal input to PMC

Internal relay
Signal output from PMC

Fig. 7.1.1 Basic configuration of PMC

The sequence program reads input signals, performs operations, and

outputs results in a predetermined sequence.

7.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC

Input signals of the PMC include signals input from the CNC (such as
M and T function signals) and signals input from the machine (such
as the cycle start button and feed hold signal button). Output signals
of the PMC include signals output to the CNC (such as the cycle start
command and feed hold signal command) and signals output to the
machine (such as turret rotation and spindle stop). The PMC controls
these I/O signals by executing a sequence program to control the
machine tool.

- 210 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses

PMC signal addresses indicate the locations of I/O signals exchanged

with the machine, I/O signals exchanged with the CNC, and signals
for internal relays and data (PMC parameters) in nonvolatile memory.
PMC addresses are roughly classified as shown in Fig. 7.1.3 (a).

F X Signals
Signals to/from
PMC
to/from CNC machine
G Y (MT)

Nonvolatile memory
(1) Variable timer (T)
Internal relay (R) (2) Counter (C)
(3) Keep relay (K)
(4) Data table (D)

Extra relay (E) (5) Extra relay (E)

(NOTE)

Fig. 7.1.3 (a) PMC-related addresses

NOTE
Optionally, extra relays (E) may be assigned to
nonvolatile memory locations.

The PMC signal address format consists of an address number and bit
number (0 to 7) as follows:

Bit number (0 to 7)
Address number (letter followed by decimal
number)

Fig. 7.1.3 (b) PMC address format

The first letter of an address number represents the type of the

signal.
In sequence programs, an address of a byte may be specified. In
the above example, specify X127 to specify a byte address. In
this case, the period "." and bit number are unnecessary.

- 211 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Table 7.1.3 lists the address symbols and corresponding signals.

Table 7.1.3 Address Symbols and signal types

Symbol Signal type
F Input signal from CNC to PMC (CNC → PMC)
G Output signal from PMC to CNC (PMC → CNC)
X Input signal from machine to PMC (MT → PMC)
Y Output signal from PMC to machine (PMC → MT)
R Internal relay
E Extra relay
A Message display
T Variable timer
C Counter
K Keep relay
D Data table
L Label number
P Subprogram number

(1) Addresses of signals between the PMC and CNC (F and G)

These addresses are assigned to interface signals between the
CNC and PMC. The relationships between the signals and
addresses are defined by the CNC.
F indicates an input signal from the CNC to PMC.
G indicates an output signal from the PMC to CNC.

(2) Addresses of signals between the PMC and machine (X and Y)

I/O signals exchanged with an externally connected machine can
be assigned to any addresses within an available range to control
the machine.
X indicates an input signal from the machine to PMC.
Y indicates an output signal from the PMC to machine.

(3) Addresses of internal relays and extra relays (R and E)

These addresses are used to temporarily store operation results
during sequence program execution processing.
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile memory
locations.
The address locations of internal relays also include a reserved
area used by the PMC system software. The signals in the
reserved area cannot be written by sequence programs.

(4) Signal addresses for message display (A)

Instruction “DISPB” used in sequence programs include
instructions to display a message on the CNC screen. These
addresses are used by such instructions.

- 212 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

(5) Nonvolatile memory addresses

The contents of these address locations are not erased even when
the power is turned off.
These addresses are used for management of the data items listed
below. These data items are called PMC parameters.
(a) Variable timer (T)
(b) Counter (C)
(c) Keep relay (K)
A reserved area used by the PMC system software is partly
included.
(d) Data table (D)
(e) Extra relay (E)
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile
memory locations.
These addresses are used to temporarily store operation
results during sequence program execution processing.

(6) Other addresses

(a) Label number (L)
Sequence program instructions include an instruction to
cause a jump to a specified position in the middle of
processing. This address indicates the jump destination
used by this instruction. The contents of L address can not
be read/written in sequence program.
(b) Subprogram number (P)
In sequence programs, a main program can call
subprograms. P addresses indicate the numbers of these
subprograms. The contents of P address can not be
read/written in sequence program.

- 213 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.2 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION

The multi-PMC function allows one PMC system to execute multiple

sequence programs at the same time.

PMC memory for each sequence program is basically independent,

and the same PMC address can be used for different purposes of the
individual PMCs. Extra relays (E addresses) can be shared among
PMCs as shared memory. All PMCs can read from and write to this
area, so the area can be used for the interface between the PMCs.

1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC

X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-,

F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-,
M0-, N0-, M0-, N0-, M0-, N0-,
R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-,
T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-,
K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-,
P1-, L1- P1-, L1- P1-, L1-

Shared memory (E0 and up)

Fig. 7.2 (a) PMC memory of multi-PMC function

A program for each PMC is saved as an independent file and can be

edited, updated, and backed up separately.

The CNC systems and the I/O Link channels to be controlled by

PMCs can be changed by CNC parameter setting. In a parameter-set
configuration, one PMC may control all CNC systems, or each PMC
may control a different CNC system.

- 214 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Fig. 7.2 (b) shows a configuration example.

CNC PMC

Machine 1st PMC Operator's

control group panel for
machine
control, etc.
(1)

Peripheral
2nd PMC equipment,
etc.

Loader
3rd PMC Operator's
control group
panel for
loader, etc.

Fig. 7.2 (b) Multi-PMC function configuration example

If the Series 30i-A system is used to control more than one CNC path,
some paths can be grouped to share data within a group and to stop all
the paths in the group if an alarm condition occurs in one of the paths.
The group is referred to as the machine group.
The system supports up to 3 machine groups. Each group has a
separate emergency stop signal address.
A PMC is basically assigned to each machine group.

- 215 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.2.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage

For the multi-PMC function, the order of PMC execution and

execution time percentages of the PMCs can be set with CNC
parameters.

Execution order
If parameters related to the execution order are not set (0 is set), the
following order sequence is assumed by default:

1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC

Other processing such as

tracing

Fig. 7.2.1 (a) Default execution order of multiple PMCs

Execution time percentage

If parameters related to execution time percentages are not set (0 is

set), the following execution time percentages are assumed by default:

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

1st PMC 2nd 3rd

PMC PMC
(75%)
(15%) (10%)

Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms)

Fig. 7.2.1 (b) Execution time percentages of multiple PMCs

- 216 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

An example of changing the execution order and execution time

percentages by setting CNC parameters is explained below. In the
following, sequence programs are executed in the order from the third
PMC to the first PMC to the second PMC with the execution time
percentage of the third PMC set to 30%, the percentage of the first
PMC to 50%, and the percentage of the second PMC to 20%:

3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC

Other processing such as

tracing

Fig. 7.2.1 (c) Example of setting execution order of multiple PMCs

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC

(30%) (50%) (20%)

Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms)

Fig. 7.2.1 (d) Example of setting execution time percentages of multiple

PMCs

For details of parameter setting, see FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A

PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

- 217 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.2.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link

The I/O addresses of I/O Link channels can be assigned with CNC
parameters.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), all channels are assigned to
the first PMC by default as follows:

1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127

Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327

Channel 3
X/Y400 to X/Y527

Channel 4
X/Y600 to X/Y727

Fig. 7.2.2 (a) Default I/O addresses of I/O Link channels

In the following example, channel 1 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of

the first PMC, channel 2 is assigned to X/Y200 to X/Y327 of the first
PMC, channel 3 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the second PMC,
and channel 4 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the third PMC:

1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127

Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327

2nd PMC
Channel 3
X/Y0 to X/Y127

3rd PMC
Channel 4
X/Y0 to X/Y127

Fig. 7.2.2 (b) Example of I/O address assignment for I/O Link channels

For details of parameter setting, see FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A

PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

- 218 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.2.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC

The PMC to control the interface between the CNC and PMC and
PMC addresses (F/G addresses) can be set with CNC parameters.
With these parameter settings, a desired interface control system can
be built, in which the entire CNC-PMC interface of the CNC may be
controlled by a single PMC or the CNC-PMC interface may be
controlled by multiple PMCs.
For the CNC-PMC interface, a memory area consisting of 10 blocks,
each of which is an addressable, 768-byte DI/DO area, is provided.
When viewed from the ladder program in each PMC, these addresses
begin with 0.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), the initial settings are
assumed, where the F/G addresses of the CNC equals the F/G
addresses of the first PMC as follows:

CNC 1st PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 of CNC F/G0 to F/G767 of 1st PMC
F/G1000 to F/G1767 of CNC F/G1000 to F/G1767 of 1st PMC
F/G2000 to F/G2767 of CNC F/G2000 to F/G2767 of 1st PMC
F/G3000 to F/G3767 of CNC F/G3000 to F/G3767 of 1st PMC
F/G4000 to F/G4767 of CNC F/G4000 to F/G4767 of 1st PMC
F/G5000 to F/G5767 of CNC F/G5000 to F/G5767 of 1st PMC
F/G6000 to F/G6767 of CNC F/G6000 to F/G6767 of 1st PMC
F/G7000 to F/G7767 of CNC F/G7000 to F/G7767 of 1st PMC
F/G8000 to F/G8767 of CNC F/G8000 to F/G8767 of 1st PMC
F/G9000 to F/G9767 of CNC F/G9000 to F/G9767 of 1st PMC

Fig. 7.2.3 (a) Initial settings for CNC-PMC interface

- 219 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

In the following example, F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767

of the CNC are assigned to F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767
of the first PMC, and F/G3000 to F/G3767 of the CNC are assigned to
F/G0 to F/G767 of the second PMC:

CNC 1st PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 of CNC F/G0 to F/G767 of 1st PMC

F/G1000 to F/G1767 of CNC F/G1000 to F/G1767 of 1st PMC

F/G2000 to F/G2767 of CNC

2nd PMC
F/G0 to F/G767 of 2nd PMC

Fig. 7.2.3 (b) Setting example for CNC-PMC interface

- 220 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.2.4 Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R)

Internal addresses (R) 9000s are an area managed by the system

program.

Operation results of functional instructions

This area holds information necessary for individual ladder levels,

such as the operation results of functional instructions. This
information is saved/restored when the task is switched.

(1) R9000 (operation output register for the ADDB, SUBB, MULB,
DIVB, and COMPB functional instructions)

The result is 0.
The result is negative.
The result has
overflowed.

(2) R9000 (error output for the EXIN, WINDR, and WINDW
functional instructions)

The result is erroneous.

(3) R9002 to R9005 (operation output registers for the DIVB

functional instruction)
The remainder of a division performed with the DIVB functional
instruction is output to these addresses.

- 221 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

System timers
Four signals can be used as system timers.
Their specifications are as follows.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9091

Normally OFF signal

Normally ON signal

200 ms cyclic signal

(104 ms ON and 96 ms OFF)

1 s cyclic signal
(504 ms ON and 496 m OFF)

CAUTION
1 Each signal is initially OFF.
2 The signals R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set at the
beginning of the first ladder level on every cycle.
3 Each pulse signal (ON-OFF signal) has an error of
±8 or 4 ms (ladder execution period).

- 222 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Ladder execution start signal

Ladder stop signal
Ladder execution status signal

Using the ladder execution start and stop signals in a ladder program
can detect when the ladder program starts and stops.
Referencing the ladder execution status signal from an external
system or program, such as the network board, C executor program,
FOCAS1 Ethernet, or HSSB library, can detect the execution status of
the ladder program.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9015
R9015.0: "Ladder execution start
signal" (can be referenced
only from the ladder
program)
R9015.1: "Ladder stop signal" (can be
referenced only from the
ladder program)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

R9091

R9091.2: "1st Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed

R9091.3: "2nd Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed

R9091.4: "3rd Ladder execution

status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed

Signal operation

Ladder execution status Execution

Stop

"Ladder execution start

signal"

"Ladder stop signal"

"Ladder execution status

signal"

One ladder One ladder

scan cycle scan cycle

- 223 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

(1) Ladder execution start signal (R9015.0)

When directed to start ladder program execution, the system
software starts executing the ladder program, turns on this signal,
and keeps it on for the first one scan cycle. Like R9000, this
signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding to
each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is
securely turned on for the first one scan cycle after the start of
execution no matter on what execution level the signal is
referenced. This signal is turned on when:
(a) Ladder execution begins at power turn-on.
(b) The [RUN] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(c) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs
the ladder to start.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution has begun, making it possible to program
preprocessing related to ladder execution.

CAUTION
Reference this signal only within a ladder program.
Do not reference it from an external system or
program as it indicates the status of ladder
execution separately for each ladder execution level.

(2) Ladder stop signal (R9015.1)

When directed to stop ladder program execution, the system
software turns off this signal and keeps it off for the last one
scan before stopping ladder program execution. Like R9000, this
signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding to
each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is
securely turned off for the last one scan before the stop of
execution no matter on what execution level the signal is
referenced. This signal is turned off when:
(a) The [EXIT] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(b) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs
the ladder to stop.
(c) On the PMC DATA I/O screen, the ladder program is
loaded to the PMC.
(d) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package stores the
ladder program to the PMC.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution stops, making it possible to program
postprocessing related to ladder execution (that is, preprocessing
for ladder execution stop). Before the ladder is stopped, for
example, it is possible to put signals in an proper state for safety
purposes.

- 224 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

CAUTION
1 Reference this signal only within the ladder program.
Do not reference it from an external system or
program as it indicates the status of ladder
execution separately for each ladder execution level.
2 If the power is turned off or a CNC system alarm
occurs, ladder execution and I/O signal transfer are
immediately stopped for safety purposes. In this
case, therefore, this signal cannot be used.

(3) Ladder execution status signal (R9091.2,R9091.3,R9091.4)

Referencing this signal from an external system or program, such
as the network board, C executor program, FOCAS1 Ethernet, or
HSSB library, can detect the execution status of the ladder
program.

(4) Example of using the signals

(a) Example of calling a subprogram just before the ladder
stops

- 225 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

(b) Example of forcibly turning off an output signal

programmed on the first ladder level just before the ladder
stops

Input Output

(c) Example of sending an execution-in-progress signal to the

outside
Outputting the status of this signal as the DO signal (output
address from the PMC) assigned to the I/O Link causes the
CNC unit to be interlocked with an external system.

CNC unit
Y0.0
R9015.1 Y0.0 I/O Link slave

I/O Link

- 226 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.3 PMC SPECIFICATIONS

7.3.1 Basic Specifications

Table 7.3.1 (a) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Function Second PMC Third PMC Dual Check Safety
First PMC
(option) (option) PMC (Note 1)
Programming language Ladder Ladder Ladder Ladder
Number of ladder levels 3 3 3 2
Level 1 execution period 4 or 8 ms 4 or 8 ms 4 or 8 ms 4 or 8 ms
(Note 2)
Processing power
• Basic instruction 25 ns/step 25 ns/step 25 ns/step 1 µs/step
processing speed
Program capacity (Note 3)
• Ladder Up to about 64,000 Up to about 64,000 Up to about 64,000 Up to about 3,000
steps steps steps steps
• Symbol/comment At least 1 KB At least 1 KB At least 1 KB At least 1 KB
• Message At least 8 KB At least 8 KB At least 8 KB At least 8 KB
Instructions
• Basic instructions 14 14 14 14
• Functional instructions 66 (80) 66 (80) 66 (80) 60 (80)
(Note 4)
• Variable timers 250 pieces 40 pieces 40 pieces 40 pieces
• Fixed timers 500 pieces 100 pieces 100 pieces 100 pieces
• Variable counters 100 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
• Fixed counters 100 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
• DIFUs/DIFDs 1000 pieces 256 pieces 256 pieces 256 pieces
PMC memory
• Internal relay (R)
• User area 8,000 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes
• System area 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes
• Extra relay (E) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) 10,000 bytes (Note 5) 10,000 bytes
• Message display (A)
• Display requests 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points
• Status displays 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points 2,000 points
• Nonvolatile memory
• Timer (T)
• Variable timer 500 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
• Variable timer 500 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
precision (Note 6)
• Counter (C)
• Variable counter 400 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
• Fixed counter 200 bytes 40 bytes 40 bytes 40 bytes
• Keep relay (K)
• User area 100 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes
• System area 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes
• Data table (D) 10,000 bytes 3,000 bytes 3,000 bytes 3,000 bytes

- 227 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Table 7.3.1 (b) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Function First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual Check Safety
(option) (option) PMC (Note 1)
PMC memory
• Subprograms (P) 5,000 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces
• Labels (L) 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces
CNC interface
• Input 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 2 (Note 7)
(Note 7) (Note 7) (Note 7)
• Output 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes ×2 (Note 7)
(Note 7) (Note 7) (Note 7)
DI/DO
• I/O Link
• Inputs Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 64 points
(Note 8) (Note 8) (Note 8)
• Outputs Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 4,096 points Up to 64 points
(Note 8) (Note 8) (Note 8)
Symbol/comment
Number of symbol 16 16 16 16
characters
Number of comment 30 30 30 30
characters
Program storage area Up to 768 KB of flash Up to 768 KB of flash Up to 768 KB of flash Up to 128 KB of flash
(Note 9) ROM ROM ROM ROM

- 228 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

NOTE
1 This PMC is used for dual-check safety. It is used to watch both safety-related signals
and ladder programs. Refer to "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL ADual Check Safety
Operator’s Manual (B-64004EN)" for details.
2 NC parameter No. 11930 is used to specify a level-1 execution period. Refer to
"FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63983EN)" for
details. Note, however, that it is impossible to specify a level-1 execution period for
each PMC separately.
3 The maximum overall program size (including the maximum number of ladder steps,
symbols/ comments, and messages) varies depending on option settings. Refer to
"FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63983EN)" for
details.
4 For the number of functional instructions, each parenthesized number indicates the
number of all functional instructions, and each non-parenthesized number, the
number of valid functional instructions.
5 The extra relay is common memory for the multi-PMC function. To put it another way,
its size covers all of the first, second, and third PMCs.
6 This area is used to specify the precision of the variable timer. Do not use this area in
user programs.
7 It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific CNC system.
Refer to "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-
63983EN)" for details.
8 Each CNC unit can use up to four I/O Link channels (4,096 input points and 4,096
output points). However, only one I/O Link channel (1,024 input points and 1,024
output points) can be used in the standard continuation. Using more than one
channel requires installing an I/O Link point extension option for each additional
channel.
It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific I/O Link channel.
Refer to "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-
63983EN)" for details.
9 The capacity of the program storage area varies depending on option settings. Refer
to "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63983EN)" for
details.

- 229 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.3.2 Addresses
Table 7.3.2 (a) Addresses of the PMCs for the Series 30i-A
30i-A
Dual Check
Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC Safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Signal input to the X X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127 X0 to X127
PMC from the X200 to X327 X200 to X327 X200 to X327
machine X400 to X527 X400 to X527 X400 to X527
X600 to X727 X600 to X727 X600 to X727
X1000 to X1127 (Note 1) X1000 to X1127 (Note 1) X1000 to X1127 (Note 1)

Signal output from Y Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127 Y0 to Y127

the PMC to the Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327 Y200 to Y327
machine Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527 Y400 to Y527
Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727 Y600 to Y727
Y1000 to Y1127 (Note 1) Y1000 to Y1127 (Note 1) Y1000 to Y1127 (Note 1)
Signal input to the F F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767 F0 to F767
PMC from the CNC F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767 F1000 to F1767
F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767 F2000 to F2767
F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767 F3000 to F3767
F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767 F4000 to F4767
F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767 F5000 to F5767
F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767 F6000 to F6767
F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767 F7000 to F7767
F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767 F8000 to F8767
F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767 F9000 to F9767
Signal output from G G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767 G0 to G767
the PMC to the CNC G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767 G1000 to G1767
G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767 G2000 to G2767
G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767 G3000 to G3767
G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767 G4000 to G4767
G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767 G5000 to G5767
G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767 G6000 to G6767
G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767 G7000 to G7767
G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767 G8000 to G8767
G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767 G9000 to G9767
Signal input to the M M0 to M767 M0 to M767 M0 to M767 M0 to M767
PMC (Note 2)
Signal output from N N0 to N767 N0 to N767 N0 to N767 N0 to N767
the PMC (Note 2)
Internal relay R
• User area R0 to R7999 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499 R0 to R1499
• System area R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499 R9000 to R9499
Extra relay E E0 to E9999 E0 to E9999 (Note 3) E0 to E9999 (Note 3) (Note 4)

- 230 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Table 7.3.2 (b) Addresses of PMCs for the Series 30i-A

30i-A
Dual Check
Function Symbol Second PMC Third PMC
First PMC Safety PMC
(option) (option)
(option)
Message display A
• Display request A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249 A0 to A249
• Status display A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249 A9000 to A9249
Timer T
• Variable timer T0 to T499 T0 to T79 T0 to T79 T0 to T79
• Variable-timer precision T9000 to T9499 T9000 to T9079 T9000 to T9079 T9000 to T9079
(Note 2)
Counter C
• Variable counter C0 to C399 C0 to C79 C0 to C79 C0 to C79
• Fixed counter C5000 to C5199 C5000 to C5039 C5000 to C5039 C5000 to C5039
Keep relay K
• User area K0 to K99 K0 to K19 K0 to K19 K0 to K19
• System area K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999 K900 to K999
Data table D D0 to D9999 D0 to D2999 D0 to D2999 D0 to D2999
Subprogram P P1 to P5000 P1 to P512 P1 to P512 P1 to P512
Label L L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999 L1 to L9999

NOTE
1 This area is reserved for PMC management
software. No I/O can be allocated in this area. Do
not use it in user programs.
2 This area is used to specify the precision of a
variable timer. Do not use it in user programs.
3 This area is common memory for the multi-PMC
function. It is possible for each program to read the
same value from, and write it to, the area.
4 No extra relay is available for the Dual Check
Safety PMC.

- 231 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.4 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN

The basic configuration of the PMC screen is described below.

Screen title

Ladder PMC alarm PMC path

execution status

NC status indication
[+]
Soft key page
Key entry line turning key

Message display line

Return key

POS PROG OFFSET

STTING
Function keys
SYSTEM MESSAGE GRAPH

• Screen title: Displays the name of a specific

submenu of the PMC.
• Ladder execution status: Displays the execution status of the
ladder program.
• PMC alarm: Indicates whether any PMC alarm is
occurring.
• NC program number: Displays the number of the currently
selected NC program.
• Key entry line: Line for entering a numerical value or
character key string.
• Message display line: Displays an error or warning message.

- 232 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

• NC status indication: Displays the NC mode, the execution

status of the NC program, the currently
selected NC path number.
• Return key: Used to switch from the PMC operation
menu to a specific PMC submenu or
from a specific PMC submenu to the
main menu of the PMC.
• Soft key page turning key: Used to turn soft key pages.

About the PMC screen

When you click the "SYSTEM" function key and then turn the soft
key page by clicking the [+] soft key, the main menu of the PMC is
displayed.
The PMC main menu offers the following three types of submenus,
which are respectively used for specific purposes.
• PMC maintenance
• PMC ladder
• PMC configuration

Each of these PMC submenus is explained below.

(1) PMC maintenance menu

This menu displays the screens related to the maintenance of the
PMC, such as those for PMC signal status monitoring and traces
and for PMC data display and editing.

(2) PMC ladder menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the ladder program.

(3) PMC configuration menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the data other than the ladder constituting the sequence
program, as well as the screen for setting the PMC functions.

This manual briefly describes the screen of each of the PMC

maintenance and PMC ladder menus. For detailed descriptions and
the PMC configuration menu, refer to "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A
PMC Programming Manual."

- 233 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.4.1 Transition of the PMC Screens

SYSTEM

PMC main menu

PMC maintenance submenu
PMC MAINTE STATUS Signal status screen (See Subsection 7.5.9.)

< I/O LINK I/O link connection status screen (See Subsection 7.5.8.)

PMC ALARM PMC alarm screen (See Subsection 7.5.2.)

I/O Data I/O screen (See Subsection 7.5.7.)

TIMER PMC parameter (timer) screen (See Subsection 7.5.3.)

COUNTR PMC parameter (counter) screen (See Subsection 7.5.4.)

PMC parameter (keep relay) (See Subsection 7.5.5.)

KEEP RELAY screen

DATA PMC parameter (data table) screen (See Subsection 7.5.6.)

TRACE Signal trace screen (See Subsection 7.5.9.)

Signal trace (parameter setting) (See Subsection 7.5.10.)

TRACE SETING
screen

PMC ladder submenu

PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen (See Subsection 7.6.1.)

Ladder display/editing screen (See Subsection 7.6.2.)

< LADDER

PMC configuration submenu

PMC CONFIG TITLE Title display/editing screen

< CONFIG PARAM Configuration parameter screen

Setting screens (general, message shift, I/O

SETING link assignment data selection, override)

PMC STATUS PMC status screen (multi-PMC switch)

SYSTEM PARAM
System parameter display/editing
screen

MODULE I/O module display/editing screen

Symbol and comment display/editing

SYMBOL screen

MESAGE Message display/editing screen

Online monitoring parameter setting

ONLINE
screen

- 234 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.5 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC

MAINTE])

7.5.1 Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen)

The SIGNAL STATUS screen displays the data at all addresses

specified in the program. The data of each address consists of a bit
pattern (0s and/or 1s) and a hexadecimal or decimal number at the
rightmost position on a byte-by-byte basis.

Signal status display area

Additional information line

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment
are displayed.

Address Symbol Comment

Table contents
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• 0 to 7: Data at each bit position
• HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal
• DEC: Display of each byte in decimal

Operation procedure
(1) Press the [STATUS] soft key. The screen shown above appears.
(2) Key in an address whose data to be displayed, then press the
[SEARCH] soft key.

- 235 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

(3) The data starting at the input address is displayed as a bit pattern.
(4) To display the data at another address, press the cursor keys,
page keys, or [SEARCH] soft key.
(5) To modify the status of a signal, switch to the forced I/O screen
by pressing the [FORCE] soft key.

NOTE
The [FORCE] soft key is displayed and usable when
the forced I/O function is enabled. For details, see
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

(6) On the forced I/O screen, an overridden X signal or Y signal is

prefixed by a greater-than sign (>) to indicate the setting of
override.

Soft keys on the Signal Status screen

Address search Switching to the forced I/O screen PMC path switching

Switching to display in decimal

Switching to display in hexadecimal

Fig. 7.5.1 (a) Soft keys on the SIGNAL STATUS screen

- 236 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.5.2 Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen)

On this screen, an alarm message output from the PMC is displayed.

To move to the PMC alarm screen, press the [PMC ALARM] soft
key.

Page display

Alarm message display area

In the alarm message display area, an alarm message output from the
PMC is displayed. When many alarm messages are output to two or
more pages, the page keys can be used to switch from one page to
another.
In the page display area to the right of the title, the number of the
page currently displaying messages is indicated.

For information about messages displayed, see Appendix A “Alarm

List.”

- 237 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.5.3 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen)

This screen is used to set and display timer values for functional
instruction variable timers (TMR:SUB 3). This screen can be used in
one of two modes: the simple display mode and the comment display
mode. To move to the TIMER screen, press the [TIMER] soft key.

Page display

Key input line

Message
display line
Additional information
line

Simple display mode

Comment display
area

Comment display mode

- 238 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Table contents
• NO.: Timer number specified for a functional instruction
timer.
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• PRESET: Timer setting value
• ACC: Timer accuracy
• COMMENT: T address comment

In the PRESET column, timer setting values are displayed. When the
timer accuracy is 8, 48, 1, 10, or 100 ms, only a numeric value is
displayed. When the timer accuracy is the second or minute, a time
value is displayed using H, M, and S with the separator "_" used to
delimit one unit from another as follows:
aaH_bbM_ccS

In the ACC column, timer accuracy values are displayed. The table
below indicates the time setting values and notation of each accuracy
value.

Timer No. Accuracy Minimum time Maximum time

notation setting setting
1 to 8 48 (initial value) 48 ms 1572.8 seconds
9 to 250 8 (initial value) 8 ms 262.1 seconds
1 to 250 1 1 ms 32.7 seconds
1 to 250 10 10 ms 327.7 seconds
1 to 250 100 100 ms 54.6 minutes
1 to 250 S 1 second 546 minutes
1 to 250 M 1 minute 546 hours

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.

Soft keys on the TIMER screen

Switching the display mode T address search PMC path switching

Switching to the soft keys for accuracy setting

Setting accuracy to 100 ms

Setting accuracy to 1 second

Setting accuracy to 10 ms Setting accuracy to an initial value

Setting accuracy to 1 ms Setting accuracy to 1 minute

- 239 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.5.4 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen)

This screen is used to set and display the maximum and minimum
counter values for functional instruction counters (SUB 5). This
screen can be used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and
the comment display mode. To move to the COUNTER screen, press
the [COUNTR] soft key.

Page display

Key input line Message display line

Additional information line

Simple display mode

Comment display
area

Comment display mode

- 240 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Table contents
• NO.: Counter number specified for a functional
instruction counter
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• PRESET: Maximum counter value (a minimum counter value
is specified by a counter instruction)
• CURRENT: Current counter value
• COMMENT: Comment on the C address of a setting value

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
If the cursor is placed on a PRESET value, the symbol and comment
of the address of the PRESET value are displayed. If the cursor is
placed on a CURRENT value, the symbol and comment of the
address of the CURRENT value are displayed.

Counter types and maximum values

Counter type PRESET maximum value CURRENT maximum value
BINARY 32767 32767
BCD 9999 9999

Soft keys on the COUNTER screen

Display mode switching C address search PMC path switching

- 241 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.5.5 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)

This screen is used for setting and displaying the Keep Relays. To
move to the KEEP RELAY screen, press the [KEEP RELAY] soft
key.

Page display

Key input line Message display line

Additional information line

Contents of the table

• ADDRESS: Address refered by sequence Program
• 0 to 7: Contents of each bit
• HEX: Value of the byte data in hexadecimal notation

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment
are displayed.
Since Keep Relay is nonvolatile memory, the contents are not lost
even if you turn off the power.
The Keep Relay area for Series 30i-A consists of parts as follows.
30i-A
First PMC Second PMC Third PMC Dual check
(option) (option) safety PMC
User area K0–K99 K0–K19 K0–K19 K0–K19
Area for management software K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999

CAUTION
If the area for the PMC management software is
protected by the programmer protection function,
the area is not displayed on the KEEP RELAY
screen. For details, see FANUC Series 30i-MODEL
A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

- 242 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.5.6 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)

There are two data table types (data table control data table and data
table). To move to the data screen, press the [DATA] soft key.

(1) DATA TABLE CONTROL screen ([List] screen)

Pressing the [DATA] soft key displays the DATA TABLE
CONTROL screen for data table management. This screen can
be used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and the
comment display mode.
Display of the
number of groups

Page display

Key input line

Message display line
Additional information line

Simple display mode

Comment
display area

Comment display mode

- 243 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Table contents
• GROUP TABLE COUNT: Number of data items in the data
table
• NO.: Group number
• ADDRESS: Data table start address
• PARAMETER: Data table control parameter
• TYPE: Data length (0 = 1 byte, 1 = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes, 3
= bit)
• DATA: Number of data items in each data table
• COMMENT: Comment on the start D address of each group

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on the PARAMETER, TYPE, or DATA
column, the current setting is displayed.

The ADDRESS column displays the start address of a data table.

Multiple groups may share an address. When the [SYMBOL] soft key
is pressed, the symbol of the start address is displayed.

NOTE
The data table control parameters have the following meanings:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0: Binary format
1: BCD format (Bits 2 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Without input protection
1: With input protection
0: Binary or BCD format (Bit 0 is valid.)
1: Hexadecimal format (Bits 0 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Signed (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
1: Unsigned (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)

NOTE
1 When data table control data is protected by the
programmer protection function, the data table
control data screen is not displayed. For details, see
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
2 When PMC parameters are output using the I/O
screen (see Subsection 7.5.7), only the data of an
address D area set in the data table control data is
output from the data table screen. The data of an
address D area not set in the data table control data
is not output.

- 244 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen

Display mode switching Data table control data initialization

Switching to the zoom screen Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting

Input of the number Symbol display Switching to the soft keys for data size
of groups switching setting

Group number search Address display PMC path switching

switching

Soft keys for parameter setting

Setting for signed decimal Setting for hexadecimal

Setting for unsigned Setting for BCD Protection state modification

decimal

Soft keys for data size setting

Setting for byte Setting for bit

Setting for word Setting for double word

- 245 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

(2) DATA TABLE screen ([ZOOM] screen)

If the data table control data is specified, clicking the [ZOOM]
soft key on the data table control data screen displays the data
table setting screen. This screen can be used in one of three
modes: the simple display mode, the comment display mode, and
the bit display mode.
Group
information line

Page display

Key input line Message display line

Additional information line

Simple display mode

Comment display area

Comment display mode

- 246 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Bit display mode

Table contents
• NO.
• ADDRESS: Address used by the sequence program
• DATA: Data value of data table
• COMMENT: Comment on the D address
• 0 to 7: Data of each bit
• HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal

The group information line at the top of the screen displays a group
number, group start address, settings, and comment on the start
address.

The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
In the bit display mode, a bit symbol and comment, or a byte symbol
and comment are displayed, depending on the cursor position.

Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen

Display mode switching Address search

Switching to the list screen Group number search

- 247 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.5.7 Sequence Program And PMC Parameter I/O ([I/O] Screen)

To move to the I/O screen, press the [I/O] soft key.

On this screen, sequence programs and PMC parameters can be

written to the specified device, read from the device, and compared.
The query selection cursor, which moves vertically from one question
to another, is displayed, as is the option selection cursor, which moves
horizontally from one option to another.

The following types of devices can be used for input/output. The

desired device type can be selected by positioning the query selection
cursor to "DEVICE" and moving the option selection cursor to that
type.

• MEMORY CARD: Data can be output to and input from a

memory card.
• FLASH ROM: Data can be output to and input from flash
ROM.
• FLOPPY: Data can be output to and input from handy
files or floppy cassettes.
• OTHERS: Data can be output to and input from other
general-purpose RS-232C input/output
devices.

The multi-path PMC system enables an I/O target PMC to be selected.

In STATUS in the lower part of the screen, a detailed explanation of
execution and the execution status are displayed. During write, read,
and comparison, the size of the data already transferred is indicated as
the execution (intermediate) result.

- 248 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

The following gives a display example shown when PMC parameters

are written to a memory card:

Soft keys on the I/O screen

Execution Switching to the port setting screen

Switching to the list screen

Cancellation

- 249 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.5.8 Displaying I/O Link Connection Status ([I/O LINK] Screen)

I/O LINK MONITOR screen shows the types and the ID codes of I/O
Units that are connected to I/O Link in order of Group number.
To switch the screen display to the I/O LINK MONITOR screen,
press the [I/O LINK] soft key.

Channel number
I/O Unit type

Group number I/O Unit ID code

Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
CONNECTION UNIT 80 Connection Unit
OPERATOR PANEL 82 Connection Unit for Operators
Panel
I/O-B3 83 I/O B3
IO UNIT-MODEL A 84 I/O Unit-MODEL A
86
87
PLC SERIES 90-30 45 PLC SERIES 90-30
POWER MATE / I/O LINK BETA 4A Power Mate or I/O Link β
SERIES 0 50 Series 0
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG1) 53 Machine Operators Panel
Interface
LINK CONNECTION UNIT 96 I/O Link Connecting Unit
I/O UNIT-MODEL B 9E I/O Unit-MODEL B
R-J MATE 61 R-J Mate
CONNECTOR PANEL MODULE A9 I/O module for connector panel
OPERATOR PANEL A1 AA I/O module for operator's panel
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG3) 6B Operator Interface(with MPG)
LOADER I/O AF I/O Board for Loader

- 250 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
FRC DIF B0 DIF Board for ROBOCUT
FRC MIF B1 MIF Board for ROBOCUT
I/O CARD B2 I/O board
ROBOSHOT I/O CARD A B3 I/O for ROBOSHOT
LOADER I/O (MATRIX) B4 I/O Board for Loader(Matrix)
PROCESS I/O FA B5 Process I/O for robot controller
PROCESS IO 89 Process I/O for robot controller
I/O LINK ADAPTER 8B I/O Link adapter
ROBOT CONTROLLER 52 Controller for robot
GE Fanuc PLC 54 GE Fanuc PLC
OPERATOR PANEL 95 I/O for Series 0
LASER OSCILLATOR 97 Laser Oscillator
FIXED I/O TYPE A 98 I/O for Robot Type A
FIXED I/O TYPE B 99 I/O for Robot Type B
AS-I CONVERTER 77 AS-i Converter
OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module(for Operator Panel
48/32)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL A A8 I/O Module(for Machine Operator
Panel of 0 Type)
CONNECTION UNIT C1 (MPG) A8 Connection Unit C1(with MPG)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module (for Machine Operator
Panel)
I/O MODULE WITH LCD A8 LCD display embedded I/O
UNKNOWN UNIT - Unknown I/O Unit

CAUTION
1 IDs other than those for the I/O units listed in Table
7.5 represent undefined units.
2 I/O Units not for Series FS30i are written in Table
7.5.

Soft keys

Displays connection status of the Displays connection status of

previous channel the next channel

- 251 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.5.9 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen)

SIGNAL TRACE screen (initial screen)

Before trace operation can be executed, the trace parameters must be

set. Press the [TRACE SETING] soft key to switch the screen display
to the trace parameter setting screen.
By setting the PMC setting screen, the trace function can be
automatically started after the power is turned on. In this case as well,
the trace parameters must be set beforehand.

NOTE
For the setting to automatically start the trace
function after the power is turned on, see
Subsection 7.5.11.2.

- 252 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.5.10 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen)

On the trace parameter setting screen, a sampling condition can be set.

The screen consists of two pages. Use the page keys to switch
between the pages.

Trace parameter setting screen (first page)

(a) SAMPLING/ MODE

Determines the sampling mode.
• TIME CYCLE: Samples at every specified cycle
time.
• SIGNAL TRANSITION: Monitors the signal at a set cycle
and samples when the signal
makes a transition.
(b) SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION
The resolution of sampling is inputted. The default value is the
minimum sampling resolution (msec), which varies depending
on the CNC.
Setting range: Minimum sampling resolution to 1000 (msec)
An input value is rounded off to a multiple of the minimum
sampling resolution (msec) which is closest to but not greater
than the input value.
(c) SAMPLING/ TIME
This parameter is displayed when "TIME CYCLE" is set on
"SAMPLING/ MODE". The execution time of trace is inputted.
The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the number of
specified signal address changes the range of the value that is
able to input. The range is displayed on the right side.

- 253 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

(d) SAMPLING/ FRAME

This parameter is displayed when "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is
set on SAMPLING/ MODE". The number of sampling is
inputted. The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the
number of specified signal addresses changes the range of the
value that is able to input. The range is displayed on the right
side.
(e) STOP CONDITION
Determines the condition to stop the trace.
• NONE: Does not stop the tracing automatically.
• BUFFER FULL: Stops the tracing when the buffer becomes
full.
• TRIGGER: Stops the tracing by trigger.
(f) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
stop trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.
(g) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE
When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Determine the trigger mode when the trace
is stopped.
• RISING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up of the trigger signal.
• FALLING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by falling
down of the trigger signal.
• BOTH EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up or falling down of the trigger signal.
h) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ POSITION
When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or
number which specifies the position where specified trigger
condition is on. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal before the trigger condition, you should set a big value
in this parameter. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal after the trigger condition, you should set a small
value in this parameter.
Example: The case that sampling time is 10 seconds and trigger
position is set as "10%".

Trigger position

← 1 sec →← 9 sec →

- 254 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

(i) SAMPLING CONDITION

When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
this parameter is enabled.
Determine the sampling condition.
• TRIGGER: Samples the status of specified signals
when the specified sampling condition is
on.
• ANY CHANGE: Samples the status of specified signals
when the signals change.
(j) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
sampling trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.
(k) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the
condition of specified trigger.
• RISING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up of the trigger signal.
• FALLING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
falling down of the trigger signal.
• BOTH EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up or falling down of the trigger
signal.
• ON: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is on.
• OFF: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is off.

- 255 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

In page 2 of the PARAMETER SETTING screen, you can set the

addresses or symbols that should be sampled.

Trace parameter setting screen (second page)

(a) Setting addresses

In case of inputting discrete bit addresses, any bit address can be
inputted.
Moreover, when you input byte address, all bits of the address
(bits 0 to 7) are set automatically. Maximum 32 points of signal
address can be inputted.
With the multi-PMC system, an address can be set for a desired
PMC by specifying its PMC number.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.
When no PMC number is specified, the specification of the
currently selected PMC is assumed. In this case, "PMC number"
+ ":" is automatically prefixed to a specified address.
When only one PMC is used as in the standard PMC system, no
PMC number needs to be specified.

- 256 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

NOTE
1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 7.2.
2 If there is not “:” key in your keyboard, use “;” or “/”.
3 The signals of the PMC for dual check safety cannot
be traced.
4 Increasing the number of the signal address
changes the capacity of "SAMPLING/ TIME" or
"SAMPLING/ FRAME" in page 1. If the capacity is
changed, the following warning message is
displayed. (The "n" on the message means the
maximum value that is able to input.)
a) In case of "TIME CYCLE" mode
"SAMPLING TIME IS REDUCED TO n SEC."
b) In case of "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode
"SAMPLING FRAME IS REDUCED TO n."

b) Soft keys
Soft keys on the setting screen of sampling address are as
follows
• DELETE: Clears the value of the edit box on the
cursor.
• SYMBOL/ Changes the address display to the symbol
ADDRESS: display. However, display of the address
that is not defined the symbol does not
change. This soft key also changes to
"ADDRESS". The following soft keys are
displayed.
• MOVE UP: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal above one line.
• MOVE DOWN: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal below one line.
• DELETE ALL: Clears all of the value of the edit box.

c) Trigger setting
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE" and
"ANY CHANGE" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", it can
be set whether to use the setting address as the signals that
should trigger the sampling in the setting signals. As for the
signal address where the trigger was set, "ü" is displayed right.
Soft keys on the Trigger setting screen are as follows:
• TRGON: Sets the Trigger on.
• TRGOFF: Sets the Trigger off.
The default setting is trigger on for all signals.

- 257 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.5.11 Execution of Trace

After the trace parameters are set, a trace operation can be started by
pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key and the [RUN] soft key on the
SIGNAL TRACE screen. The following is the screen examples of the
trace execution by "TIME CYCLE" mode and "SIGNAL
TRANSITION" mode.

Execution of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)

Execution of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)

The result of trace is immediately displayed during execution of the
trace.
When the stop conditions that is set in parameter setting screen is
satisfied the execution is finished. Pushing [STOP] soft key aborts the
execution. In "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode, graphic display is not
refreshed until any signal for sampling trigger changes.

- 258 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.5.11.1 Operation after execution of trace

When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The
followings are the screen examples of trace by "TIME CYCLE" and
"SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode.

Result of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)

Result of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)

The cursor indicating current position is initially displayed on the

original point (0 point). The position of the cursor is displayed in
"CURSOR POSITION" in the upper of the screen. The cursor can
move horizontally with the <←> or <→> key. After the execution,
following operation is enabled.

- 259 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

a) Scroll of screen
• Cursor up/down key and Page up/down key
Enables the vertical scroll for the specified signal
• Cursor right/left key, [NEXT>>] soft key and [<< PREV] soft
key
Enables the horizontal scroll of the graph.
b) Automatic calculation of the selected range
Pushing [MARK] soft key marks the current position and
displays the mark cursor.
If the mark cursor duplicates with the current position cursor, the
current position cursor has priority of display. The "MARK
POSITION" that shows the position of the mark cursor and
"RANGE" that shows the range between the mark cursor and the
current position cursor are displayed in the upper of screen.
Moving the current position cursor changes these values.
Pushing [MARK] again releases the select range mode.

Result of trace screen (Mark cursor display)

c) Zoom in/Zoom out of waveform

Pushing [ZOOM IN] soft key magnifies the display of chart.
Pushing [ZOOM OUT] soft key reduces the display of chart.
Pushing these soft keys also change the scale value of the
graduation on the graph. When trace is just finished, the default
zooming level was the most magnified level. In [ZOOM OUT]
mode, "X" is displayed as following screen example when the
transitions of signal cannot be expressed accurately enough. The
limitation of [ZOOM OUT] displays all of result of the trace in
one page.

- 260 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Result of trace screen (Zoom out display)

d) Exchange of sampling signal

Pushing [MOVE UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by
the signal cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MOVE
DOWN] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal
cursor for the signal one line below. The result of the operation
is cancelled by the execution of trace or putting the power off.
When you would like to preserve the order of displayed signals
against the executing or powering off, please change the order on
"SAMPLING ADDRESS" screen.

7.5.11.2 Automatic start of trace setting

Trace execution is automatically started after power-on by setting a
PMC setting data.

• TRACE START = MANUAL/AUTO

NOTE
For details of the method of setting PMC setting
data, see FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

- 261 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS

([PMC LADDER])

The PMC LADDER menu contains the screens related to PMC

Ladder diagrams, such as the program list screen and the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screens.
You can switch to the PMC LADDER menu by operating on the
"SYSTEM" key and then the [PMC LADDER] soft key.

SYSTEM

PMC main menu

PMC LADDER menu
PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen

LADDER LADDER DIAGRAM

< MONITOR/EDITOR screen

Clicking the [LADDER] soft key causes the sequence program to be

dynamically displayed, allowing you to monitor operation. The editor
screen allows you to make changes to relay and functional
instructions in the sequence program to change the operation of the
sequence program.
The ladder diagram display/editor functions consist of the following
screens:
(1) Ladder diagram display screen (LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen)
Displays ladder diagrams to monitor the current states of relays,
coils, and so on.
(2) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Displays only a selected ladder net to monitor the current states
of relays, coils, and so on.
(3) LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a ladder diagram in units of nets.
(4) NET EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a single net in a ladder diagram.
(5) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
Allows you to select the subprogram to be displayed on the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
(6) PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a ladder program in units of subprograms.
Also allows you to select the subprogram to be edited on the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

- 262 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

The following screens can be called from the LADDER DIAGRAM

EDITOR screen:
(7) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER
screen
Allows you to view the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.
(8) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR
screen
Allows you to edit the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.

NOTE
You can protect these screens by using the
programmer protection function. For details, see
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING
MANUAL.
You can change between screens as shown in the figure below.

PMC main menu

[<] [PMC LADDER]

PMC LADDER menu
[<] [<]
[LADDER] [LIST]

[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
MONITOR screen VIEWER screen
[LIST]
Display function
(monitor)
[SWITCH] [LIST] [ZOOM]
[EXIT] [EDIT]
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
Edit function EDITOR screen EDITOR screen
[LIST]

[EXIT] [CREATE NET] [ZOOM]

NET EDITOR screen

Fig. 7 Changes between screens

NOTE
The [EDIT] soft key on the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen is displayed so that it is available if
the programmer protection function is enabled. While
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. (To
stop the online monitor function, change the settings of
"RS-232C" and "HIGH SPEED" to "NOT USE".

- 263 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.6.1 Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen)

The PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen shows program information

such as the program size.

SP area

Size area

Ladder preview display area

Program number area

Key input line Message display line

(1) Screen structures

(a) A program list is displayed on the left side of the screen; on
the right side, the ladder diagram of the program currently
indicated by the cursor on the program list is displayed.
(b) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages
will be displayed depending on the situation.
(c) The program list displays up to 18 programs at a time in the
list display area.

- 264 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

(2) Area of program list

(a) In the "SP area", the protect information for subprograms is
displayed, so are their program types.
(Key): Ladder program, cannot be viewed,
cannot be edited
(Magnifying glass): Ladder program, can be viewed,
cannot be edited
(Pencil): Ladder program, can be viewed,
can be edited
(b) Program name is displayed in the "PROG NO." field for
each program.
There are three kinds of program names.
COLLECT: It means the collective program.
GLOBAL: It means the whole program.
LEVELn (n = 1, 2, 3): It means the Ladder level 1, 2 and 3.
Pm (m = subprogram number):
It means subprogram.
By changing the "ADDRESS NOTATION" item on the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Setting screen to
"SYMBOL", you can display symbols.
(c) The program size is displayed in the "SIZE" field for each
program.
If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown
in byte.
If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte
with "K".
Ex.) The case that program size is not over 1024 byte.
1023 bytes: "1023" is shown.
Ex.) The case that program size is over 1024 byte.
20000 bytes: "19K" is shown.
(Sizes are rounded off to whole
numbers before being displayed.)

Soft key of PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen

Switch PMC paths
Search for program

Display the contents

of program

- 265 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.6.2 Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen)

LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen shows the on/off status of

contacts and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter
of functional instructions.
From the PMC LADDER menu, you can switch to the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen by using the [LADDER] soft key. You
can use following operation at this screen, including "Forced I/O
function (Forcing mode)", by which you can force the relay or the
address parameters of functional instructions to a new status or value.
• Switch subprogram to show [LIST]
• Search for address or others [SEARCH MENU]
• Show data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
• Go to COLLECTIVE MONITOR Screen [SWITCH]
• Forced I/O function (Forcing mode) "number" + INPUT key

Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram

Area for LADDER Diagram

Additional information line

Key input line

Message line
(1) Screen structures
(a) Title information (REMARKS) of the LADDER Program,
the current subprogram, and the current position
information of the Diagram displayed in this screen, are
displayed above the LADDER Diagram.
When you select a subprogram to be displayed, range for
search function is indicated at right of the top line as
"LOCAL" or "GLOBAL". In case of "LOCAL", the range
for search function is restricted within the current
subprogram. In case of "GLOBAL", on the other hand,
search function searches whole of LADDER program, and
switch current subprogram automatically according to the
result of searching.

- 266 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

(b) In the additional information line near the bottom of the

screen, the following information of the address under the
cursor when the cursor is shown.
• Net number of the net with the cursor
• Address and its symbol and comment information
• Current value
(c) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages
will be displayed depending on the situation.
(d) In the area for LADDER diagrams, 8 × 8, 8 × 6, 8 × 4, 6 × 8,
6 × 6, and 6 × 4 relays can be displayed (horizontally and
vertically). For details, see FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(e) The gage indicating the current display position in relation
to the whole Ladder program is displayed at the right end of
the screen.

(2) LADDER diagram

(a) Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as
"Continuous Net" using continuous marks (">A1>"). Same
continuous marks mean they are connected with each other.

(3) Monitor
(a) Contacts and coils are displayed in different colors
according to the status of the signal. The status of power
flow is not displayed.
(b) Usually, the parameters of functional instructions are
monitored and displayed. You can suppress the monitor and
display by an appropriate setting. For details, see FANUC
Series 30i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

- 267 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

(4) Displaying Symbols and Comments

(a) Usually, addresses are displayed above contacts and coils.
For an address with a symbol assigned, you can change the
setting so that the symbol is displayed instead of the
address. You can add colors to addresses. For details, see
Subsection “Setting the Display Format of the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen” in the FANUC Series 30i-
MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(b) If the address of a contact has a comment attached, the
comment is displayed below the contact. You can change
its display mode by changing the setting. You can add
colors to comments. For details, see Subsection “Setting the
Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
Screen” in the FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(c) If the address used with coil has a comment string assigned,
the comment strings will be displayed at the right margin
beside the coil. You can use this margin area to display an
additional relay instead of the comment string by setting: at
this setting, one more relay can be displayed in each
diagram line. You can add colors to comments. For details,
see Subsection “Setting the Display Format of the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen” in the FANUC
Series 30i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.

Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen Switch PMC paths

LADDER Diagram Editor Switch to COLLECTIVE Screen Settings

Program List
MONITOR screen

Display Data Table

Exit

Search soft keys Search Write Coil Search previous Search next

Jump to Search Functional Pick up a Ladder

Top/Bottom Search Address or Net Instruction Diagram net Switch range

- 268 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.6.3 Editing Ladder Programs

At LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen you can edit LADDER

program to change its behavior.
To switch LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, press [EDIT] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
Following operations are available at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen.

• Delete by net [DELETE]

• Move by net [CUT] & [PASTE]
• Copy by net [COPY] & [PASTE]
• Change address of contacts and coils
"bit address" + INPUT key
• Change parameters of functional instructions
"number" or "byte address"
+ INPUT key
• Add new net [CREATE NET]
• Change construction of net [ZOOM]
• Make changes effective [UPDATE]
• Abandon changes [RESTRE]
• Cancel edit [CANCEL EDIT]

LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen

- 269 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

CAUTION
1 You can edit ladder programs regardless of whether
they are active or not. To execute a ladder program
with the results of editing being reflected, you must
update the ladder program. To do this, click the
[UPDATE] soft key, or update the program when
exiting from the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. For details of the method of protecting
editing, see “FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.”
2 After you have edited a sequence program, the
results of editing will be lost if the power is turned off
without first writing the edited sequence program to
flash ROM.
Write the sequence program to flash ROM on the I/O
screen. If you set "WRITE TO F-ROM(EDIT)" to
"YES" on the general functions' setting parameter
screen, a confirmation message will be displayed,
prompting you to ask whether to write a sequence
program to flash ROM after the end of editing. For
details of this setting, see “FANUC Series 30i-
MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.”

(1) Screen structures

(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, except that no monitor displays of relays and
parameters of functional instructions are displayed.
(b) At right side of LADDER Diagram area, a position bar is
always displayed, which indicates screen position within
current subprogram: in LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, this position bar is exclusively displayed with
comments of write coil. Sometimes, this position bar hides
a part of write coil comments.

(2) LADDER Diagram

(a) Style of LADDER Diagram is basically same with
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, except that
functional instructions are drawn always in "COMPACT"
format that has no monitor displays.
(b) Cursor is shown always. And the net, which will be an
object of following editing operations, is emphasized in
screen.

- 270 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor screen

Program List
Change to Search soft keys Select net Copy net

Edit new net Delete net Cut net Paste net

Automatic input
Add net
Make changes
effective Exit
Change address Setting screen Cancel edit

Abandon changes Run/stop LADDER

Display address
map display
screen

WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program in
wrong way, or update LADDER program with the
machine in improper status, it may cause unexpected
reaction of the machine. You have to make it sure
that modifications you make on LADDER program is
appropriate, machine is in proper status, and nobody
is near the machine, when you update LADDER
program.

- 271 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.6.3.1 NET EDITOR screen

At NET EDITOR screen, you can create new net, and modify existing
net.

• Changing existing nets

If you move a net with the [ZOOM] soft key, you will enter a mode
(Modify mode) in which you can add changes to the net currently
indicated by the cursor.
• Adding a new net
When [CREATE NET] soft key is used, this screen is in "New
mode" to create new net from nothing.

Following operations are available at this screen:

• Place new contacts and coils "bit address" + [ ], [ ],
etc.
• Change type of contacts and coils [ ], [ ], etc.
• Place new functional instructions [FUNC]
• Change type of functional instructions [FUNC]
• Erase contacts, coils, and functional instructions [ ]
• Draw/erase connecting lines [ ], [ ], [ ]
• Edit data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
• Insert line/column [INSERT LINE], [INSERT COLUMN],
[APPEND COLUMN]
• Change address of contacts and coils "bit address" + INPUT key
• Change parameters of functional instructions "number" or "byte
address" + INPUT key
• Abandon modifications [CANCEL EDIT]
• Restore the net to the state it was before editing [RESTRE]

Fig. 7.6.3 (a) Structure of the NET EDITOR screen

- 272 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

(1) Screen structures

(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen, except that only one net is in this screen, and that
position bar at right edge of screen does not appear at this
screen.
(b) Current edit mode is indicated at right of the top line as
"NEW MODE" or "MODFY MODE". When [ZOOM] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is used to
reach NET EDITOR screen, the screen is in Modify mode,
and when [CREATE NET] soft key is used, it is in New
mode.
(c) Current net number is displayed at right of the top line. The
net number is same with the net number in previous
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
(d) NET EDITOR screen expands image of net horizontally for
a wider net according to its width, while LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen folds nets wider
than screen width. When net width is expanded over screen
width, attempt to move cursor out of screen will scroll net
image to the direction.
The net of maximum size occupies area of 1024 elements,
but actually available area may be little less for internal use
according to the internal condition: "element" means the
space that is occupied by single relay.

Soft keys of Net Editor screen

Horizontal Automatic
A contact Normal coil connection Delete input

B contact Inverted coil Functional Left vertical Right vertical

instructions connection connection

Set coil Data table Edit next net Insert column Cancel edit

Reset coil Abandon changes Insert line Add column Exit

- 273 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.6.4 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen

At PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen you can create new program

and delete a program in addition to the function of PROGRAM LIST
VIEWER screen. To reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Following operations are
available at PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen. For more detail of
these operations, see the descriptions of each key to operate.
• Create new program [NEW]
• Delete a program [DELETE]

Fig. 7.6.4 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen

On the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen, a preview of the editor

screen for the ladder program currently positioned by the cursor on
the program list is displayed on the right of the screen.

Soft keys of Program List Editor screen

Display the contents of program Add new program

Search for program Delete a program

- 274 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.6.5 Collective Monitor Function

The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen allows you to specify the

ladder net containing the coils to be monitored, so that you can
monitor only the necessary ladder net.
The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen can be called in either of the
following ways:
(1) Calling from the PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
On the program list screen, move the cursor to the "COLLECT"
program position, then click the [ZOOM] soft key.

Fig. 7.6.5 (a) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen

(2) Calling from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

On the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click the
[SWITCH] soft key.

Fig. 7.6.5 (b) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

- 275 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

7.6.5.1 COLLECTIVE MONITOR function

The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is such as that shown below.

At first, it does not display any ladder diagram. Ladder nets will be
added to this screen as they are selected with coil search and pickup
operations. Up to 128 nets can be added to the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. If an attempt is made to add more, the most
recently added 128 nets will be displayed.

Fig. 7.6.5 (a) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen (initial screen)

(1) Operations using the soft keys

Soft keys of Collective Monitor screen

Initialization of COLLECTIVE
Program List Jump to the ladder diagram net MONITOR screen

Pick up a ladder Switches to LADDER Delete a net Screen setting

diagram net DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

Fig. 7.6.5 (b) Soft keys of COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

(2) Specifying the ladder diagram to monitor

The operation for picking up ladder nets which you want to
monitor on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is as follows.
(a) Specification of ladder nets on COLLECTIVE MONITOR
screen
• Specify the address by key input
Pick up a ladder net by keying in the address used by a
coil.

- 276 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

• Indication from a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE

MONITOR screen
Indicate a relay on an already picked up ladder net, with
the cursor, to pick up the net that uses the relay address
for the coil.
(b) Specifying a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen
Specify a net from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen to pick it and load it into the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.

(3) Picking up a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

You can pick up a ladder net from the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) Address specification
(i) Enter the address to monitor (for example, R10.1).
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen.
(b) Specification of an address from a ladder net on the screen
(i) Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net that uses
the address you want to monitor.
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen, and the cursor moves to the specified coil
position.

Fig. 7.6.5 (c) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

- 277 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

(4) Picking up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM

MONITOR screen
You can pick up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) From the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click
the [SEARCH] soft key to display the soft keys for search.
(b) Move the cursor to the ladder net to pick up.
(c) Click the [PICKUP] soft key to pick up and load the net
specified in (b) at the beginning of the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.
(d) For the ladder net picked up and loaded into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen, the "•" mark is
displayed at the left end of the net.

Fig. 7.6.5 (d) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen (search soft keys)

- 278 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

7.7 LIST OF ADDRESSES

Interface addresses among CNC and PMC are as follows:

[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]

G0000~ X000~

CNC PMC Machine tool

F0000~ Y000~

[Example of controlling three path using one PMC]

CNC G0000~ X000~

Path 1 F0000~ Y000~

PMC Machine tool
G1000~

Path 2 F1000~

G2000~
Path 3
F2000~

NOTE
1 For multipath control, one of the following
superscripts is attached to the top right of a symbol
depending on the signal type.
- Path type (for path 1) : #1
- Path type (for path 2) : #2
- Path type (for path 3) : #3
- Path type : #P
- Controlled axis type : #SV
- Spindle type : #SP
- PMC axis control group type: #PX
Refer to Appendix “List of Addresses“ for details
2 For the signals, a single data number is assigned
to 8 bits. Each bit has a different meaning.

- 279 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

[Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system]

CNC Signal PMC

I/F
G0000~ G0000~
Path 1 X000~
F0000~ F0000~

Y000~ I/O device

G1000~ G1000~ First for first
PMC machine
Path 2 F1000~ F1000~

First G2000~ G2000~

machine Path 3
group F2000~ F2000~

G3000~ G3000~
Path 4 F3000~ F3000~

G4000~ G4000~
Path 5 F4000~ F4000~

G5000~ G0000~
Path 6 F5000~ F0000~ X000~
Second I/O device
G6000~ G1000~ PMC for second
Y000~
machine
Path 7
F6000~ F1000~
Second
machine
group G7000~ G2000~
Path 8 F7000~ F2000~

G8000~ G3000~
Path 9 F8000~ F3000~

X000~
G9000~ G0000~
Third Third I/O device
machine Path 10 F9000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for third
group machine

NOTE
Each PMC of a multipath PMC system has an
independent signal area. The F, G, X, and Y signal
addresses of each PMC begin with 0. On the other
hand, the F and G signal addresses from the
viewpoint of the CNC are fixed for each path
number. Note that the F and G signal addresses
used in programming of each ladder are different
from those from the viewpoint of the CNC.

- 280 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

In an item where both lathe system and machining center system are
described, some signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal
address figure as shown below. This means either lathe system or
machining center system does not have this signal. Upper part is for
lathe system and lower part is for machining center system.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn053 *CDZ ROVLP UINT TMRON
M series

[Example 1]
The figure above indicates *CDZ is provided only for the lathe
system while the other signals for both the lathe system and
machining system.

In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal for each signal
is *ESP<X008.4>, *ESP<X008.0>, and *ESP<X008.1>, respectively.
In addition, #1, #2 or #3 attached to a signal indicates the signal is
provided only for path 1, 2, or 3, respectively.
In G and F addresses in the table, #P, #SV, or #SP attached to a signal
indicates the signal is provided for each path, each control axis, or
each spindle, respectively. #PX attached to a signal indicates the
signal is provided for each PMC axis control group.

- 281 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

MT → CNC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X000

X001

X002

X003

X004 ESKIP
#1
T series SKIP #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

X004 ESKIP
#1 #1 #1 #1
M series SKIP #1 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 #1 #1 #1
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

X005

X006

X007 *DEC8#2 *DEC7#2 *DEC6#2 *DEC5#2 *DEC4#2 *DEC3#2 *DEC2#2 *DEC1#2

X008 *ESP (*ESP) (*ESP)

X009 *DEC8#1 *DEC7#1 *DEC6#1 *DEC5#1 *DEC4#1 *DEC3#1 *DEC2#1 *DEC1#1

X010 *DEC8#3 *DEC7#3 *DEC6#3 *DEC5#3 *DEC4#3 *DEC3#3 *DEC2#3 *DEC1#3

#3
X011 ESKIP
#3
T series SKIP #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3 #3
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

#3
X011 ESKIP
#3 #3 #3 #3
M series SKIP #3 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 #3 #3 #3
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

X012

#2
X013 ESKIP
#2
T series SKIP #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2 #2
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

#2
X013 ESKIP
#2 #2 #2 #2
M series SKIP #2 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 #2 #2 #2
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

- 282 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

PMC → CNC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn000

Gn001

Gn002

Gn003

#P #P #P
Gn004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN

#P #P #P #P #P
Gn005 BFIN AFL TFIN SFIN MFIN

#P #P #P
Gn006 SKIPP OVC *ABSM#P SRN

#P #P
Gn007 RLSOT#P EXLM *FLWU#P RLSOT3#P ST

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *BSL *CSL *IT

Gn009

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0

#P #P
Gn014 ROV2 ROV1

Gn015

#P
Gn016 F1D

Gn017

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn019 RT MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A

Gn020

- 283 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn021

Gn022

#P #P
Gn023 ALNGH#P GRHTH HCLP

Gn024

Gn025

Gn026 *SSTP4#SP SWS4#SP PC4SLC#P PC3SLC#P

#P
Gn027 CON *SSTP3#SP *SSTP2#SP *SSTP1#SP SWS3#SP SWS2#SP SWS1#SP

#SP #SP
Gn028 PC2SLC#P SPSTPA#SP *SCPFA#SP *SUCPFA#SP GR2 GR1

#P #P #P #SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn029 *SSTP SOR SAR GR32 GR31 GR22 GR21

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

#SP #SP
Gn031 PKESS2#P PKESS1#P GR42 GR41

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2

#SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn035 SIND2#SP SSIN2#SP SGN2#SP R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn036 R08I3 R07I3 R06I3 R05I3 R04I3 R03I3 R02I3 R01I3

#SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn037 SIND3#SP SSIN3#SP SGN3#SP R12I3 R11I3 R10I3 R09I3

#P
Gn038 SPPHS#P SPSYC#P SBRT *PLSST#P

#P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn039 GOQSM #P WOQSM #P OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0

#P #P #P #P
Gn040 OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA

#P #P #P #P #P
Gn042 DMMC HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA

- 284 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P
Gn043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

#P #P
Gn044 MLK BDT1

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

#P #P
Gn046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

Gn047

Gn048 TLRST#P TLRSTI#P TLSKP#P

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0

#P #P
Gn050 *TLV9 *TLV8

Gn051

Gn052

#P
ROBLP#P
#P TMRON#
Gn053 *CDZ UINT P

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn056 UI023 UI022 UI021 UI020 UI019 UI018 UI017 UI016

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn057 UI031 UI030 UI029 UI028 UI027 UI026 UI025 UI024

Gn058

Gn059 NSYNCA#P TRRTN#P TRESC#P

#P
Gn060 *TSB

Gn061 RGTSP4#SP RGTSP3#SP RGTSP2#SP RGTSP1#SP RGTAP#P

#P
Gn062 HEAD2 RTNT

Gn063 NMWT#P NOZAGC#P SLSPB#P SLSPA#P NOWT HEAD

Gn064 ESRSYC#P SLPCB#P SLSPA#P

- 285 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn065

Gn066 EKSET IGNVRY#P

Gn067 HCREQ HCABT

Gn068

Gn069

#SP
Gn070 MRDYA#SP ORCMA#SP SFRA SRVA#SP CTH1A#SP CTH2A#SP TLMHA#SP TLMLA#SP

#SP
Gn071 RCHA#SP RSLA INTGA#SP SOCNA#SP MCFNA#SP SPSLA#SP *ESPA#SP ARSTA#SP

Gn072 RCHHGA#SP MFNHGA#SP INCMDA#SP OVRIDA#SP DEFMDA#SP NRROA#SP ROTAA#SP INDXA#SP

#SP
Gn073 MPOFA#SP SLVA MORCMA
#SP

#SP
Gn074 MRDYB#SP ORCMB#SP SFRB SRVB#SP CTH1B#SP CTH2B#SP TLMHB#SP TLMLB#SP

#SP
Gn075 RCHB#SP RSLB INTGB#SP SOCNB#SP MCFNB#SP SPSLB#SP *ESPB#SP ARSTB#SP

Gn076 RCHHGB#SP MFNHGB#SP INCMDB#SP OVRIDB#SP DEFMDB#SP NRROB#SP ROTAB#SP INDXB#SP

#SP
Gn077 MPOFB#SP SLVB MORCMB
#SP

Gn078 SH07A#SP SH06A#SP SH05A#SP SH04A#SP SH03A#SP SH02A#SP SH01A#SP SH00A#SP

Gn079 SH11A#SP SH10A#SP SH09A#SP SH08A#SP

Gn080 SH07B#SP SH06B#SP SH05B#SP SH04B#SP SH03B#SP SH02B#SP SH01B#SP SH00B#SP

Gn081 SH11B#SP SH10B#SP SH09B#SP SH08B#SP

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn082 EUI07 EUI06 EUI05 EUI04 EUI03 EUI02 EUI01 EUI00

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn083 EUI15 EUI14 EUI13 EUI12 EUI11 EUI10 EUI09 EUI08

Gn084

Gn085

Gn086

- 286 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn087

Gn088

Gn089
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
G2SLC G2Y G2Z G2X G2RVY G2RVZ G2RVX
Gn090

Gn091

Gn092

Gn093

Gn094

Gn095

#P
Gn096 HROV *HROV6#P *HROV5#P *HROV4#P *HROV3#P *HROV2#P *HROV1#P *HROV0#P

Gn097

Gn098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0

Gn099

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1

Gn101 *+ED28#SV *+ED27#SV *+ED26#SV *+ED25#SV *+ED24#SV *+ED23#SV *+ED22#SV *+ED21#SV

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn102 -J8 -J7 -J6 -J5 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1

Gn103 *-ED28#SV *-ED27#SV *-ED26#SV *-ED25#SV *-ED24#SV *-ED23#SV *-ED22#SV *-ED21#SV

Gn104 +EXL8#SV +EXL7#SV +EXL6#SV +EXL5#SV +EXL4#SV +EXL3#SV +EXL2#SV +EXL1#SV

Gn105 -EXL8#SV -EXL7#SV -EXL6#SV -EXL5#SV -EXL4#SV -EXL3#SV -EXL2#SV -EXL1#SV

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1

Gn107 *+ED38#SV *+ED37#SV *+ED36#SV *+ED35#SV *+ED34#SV *+ED33#SV *+ED32#SV *+ED31#SV

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1

- 287 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn109 *-ED38#SV *-ED37#SV *-ED36#SV *-ED35#SV *-ED34#SV *-ED33#SV *-ED32#SV *-ED31#SV

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1

Gn111

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn112 -LM8 -LM7 -LM6 -LM5 -LM4 -LM3 -LM2 -LM1

Gn113

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1

Gn115

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn116 *-L8 *-L7 *-L6 *-L5 *-L4 *-L3 *-L2 *-L1

Gn117

Gn118 *+ED8#SV *+ED7#SV *+ED6#SV *+ED5#SV *+ED4#SV *+ED3#SV *+ED2#SV *+ED1#SV

Gn119

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn120 *-ED8 *-ED7 *-ED6 *-ED5 *-ED4 *-ED3 *-ED2 *-ED1

Gn121
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV
Gn122 PK8 PK7 PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1
#P #P
PKESS2 PKESS1

Gn123

Gn124 DTCH8#SV DTCH7#SV DTCH6#SV DTCH5#SV DTCH4#SV DTCH3#SV DTCH2#SV DTCH1#SV

Gn125 IUDD8#SV IUDD7#SV IUDD6#SV IUDD5#SV IUDD4#SV IUDD3#SV IUDD2#SV IUDD1#SV

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1

Gn127

Gn128

Gn129

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1

- 288 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn131

Gn132

Gn133

Gn134

Gn135

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn136 EAX8 EAX7 EAX6 EAX5 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1

Gn137

Gn138 SYNC8#SV SYNC7#SV SYNC6#SV SYNC5#SV SYNC4#SV SYNC3#SV SYNC2#SV SYNC1#SV

Gn139

Gn140 SYNCJ8#SV SYNCJ7#SV SYNCJ6#SV SYNCJ5#SV SYNCJ4#SV SYNCJ3#SV SYNCJ2#SV SYNCJ1#SV

Gn141

Gn142 EBUF#PX ECLR#PX ESTP#PX ESOF#PX ESBK#PX EMBUF#PX ELCKZ#PX EFIN#PX

#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX

Gn143 EMSBK#PX EC6 EC5 EC4 EC3 EC2 EC1 EC0

Gn144 EIF7#PX EIF6#PX EIF5#PX EIF4#PX EIF3#PX EIF2#PX EIF1#PX EIF0#PX

Gn145 EIF15#PX EIF14#PX EIF13#PX EIF12#PX EIF11#PX EIF10#PX EIF9#PX EIF8#PX

Gn146 EID7#PX EID6#PX EID5#PX EID4#PX EID3#PX EID2#PX EID1#PX EID0#PX

Gn147 EID15#PX EID14#PX EID13#PX EID12#PX EID11#PX EID10#PX EID9#PX EID8#PX

Gn148 EID23#PX EID22#PX EID21#PX EID20#PX EID19#PX EID18#PX EID17#PX EID16#PX

Gn149 EID31#PX EID30#PX EID29#PX EID28#PX EID27#PX EID26#PX EID25#PX EID24#PX

#P #P
Gn150 EDRN ERT EOVC#P EROV2#P EROV1#P

Gn151 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P

Gn152

- 289 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn153

Gn154 EBUF#PX ECLR#PX ESTP#PX ESOF#PX ESBK#PX EMBUF#PX ELCKZ#PX EFIN#PX

#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX

Gn155 EMSBK#PX EC6 EC5 EC4 EC3 EC2 EC1 EC0

Gn156 EIF7#PX EIF6#PX EIF5#PX EIF4#PX EIF3#PX EIF2#PX EIF1#PX EIF0#PX

Gn157 EIF15#PX EIF14#PX EIF13#PX EIF12#PX EIF11#PX EIF10#PX EIF9#PX EIF8#PX

Gn158 EID7#PX EID6#PX EID5#PX EID4#PX EID3#PX EID2#PX EID1#PX EID0#PX

Gn159 EID15#PX EID14#PX EID13#PX EID12#PX EID11#PX EID10#PX EID9#PX EID8#PX

Gn160 EID23#PX EID22#PX EID21#PX EID20#PX EID19#PX EID18#PX EID17#PX EID16#PX

Gn161 EID31#PX EID30#PX EID29#PX EID28#PX EID27#PX EID26#PX EID25#PX EID24#PX

Gn162 EOVC#PX

Gn163 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P

Gn164

Gn165

Gn166 EBUF#PX ECLR#PX ESTP#PX ESOF#PX ESBK#PX EMBUF#PX ELCKZ#PX EFIN#PX

#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX

Gn167 EMSBK#PX EC6 EC5 EC4 EC3 EC2 EC1 EC0

Gn168 EIF7#PX EIF6#PX EIF5#PX EIF4#PX EIF3#PX EIF2#PX EIF1#PX EIF0#PX

Gn169 EIF15#PX EIF14#PX EIF13#PX EIF12#PX EIF11#PX EIF10#PX EIF9#PX EIF8#PX

Gn170 EID7#PX EID6#PX EID5#PX EID4#PX EID3#PX EID2#PX EID1#PX EID0#PX

Gn171 EID15#PX EID14#PX EID13#PX EID12#PX EID11#PX EID10#PX EID9#PX EID8#PX

Gn172 EID23#PX EID22#PX EID21#PX EID20#PX EID19#PX EID18#PX EID17#PX EID16#PX

Gn173 EID31#PX EID30#PX EID29#PX EID28#PX EID27#PX EID26#PX EID25#PX EID24#PX

Gn174 EOVC#PX

- 290 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn175 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P

Gn176

Gn177

Gn178 EBUF#PX ECLR#PX ESTP#PX ESOF#PX ESBK#PX EMBUF#PX ELCKZ#PX EFIN#PX

#PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX #PX

Gn179 EMSBK#PX EC6 EC5 EC4 EC3 EC2 EC1 EC0

Gn180 EIF7#PX EIF6#PX EIF5#PX EIF4#PX EIF3#PX EIF2#PX EIF1#PX EIF0#PX

Gn181 EIF15#PX EIF14#PX EIF13#PX EIF12#PX EIF11#PX EIF10#PX EIF9#PX EIF8#PX

Gn182 EID7#PX EID6#PX EID5#PX EID4#PX EID3#PX EID2#PX EID1#PX EID0#PX

Gn183 EID15#PX EID14#PX EID13#PX EID12#PX EID11#PX EID10#PX EID9#PX EID8#PX

Gn184 EID23#PX EID22#PX EID21#PX EID20#PX EID19#PX EID18#PX EID17#PX EID16#PX

Gn185 EID31#PX EID30#PX EID29#PX EID28#PX EID27#PX EID26#PX EID25#PX EID24#PX

Gn186 EOVC#PX

Gn187 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P

Gn188

Gn189

Gn190 OVLS8#SV OVLS7#SV OVLS6#SV OVLS5#SV OVLS4#SV OVLS3#SV OVLS2#SV OVLS1#SV

Gn191

Gn192 IGVRY8#SV IGVRY7#SV IGVRY6#SV IGVRY5#SV IGVRY4#SV IGVRY3#SV IGVRY2#SV IGVRY1#SV

Gn193

Gn194

Gn195

Gn196 *DEC8#SV *DEC7#SV *DEC6#SV *DEC5#SV *DEC4#SV *DEC3#SV *DEC2#SV *DEC1#SV

- 291 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn197

Gn198

Gn199

Gn200 EASIP8#SV EASIP7#SV EASIP6#SV EASIP5#SV EASIP4#SV EASIP3#SV EASIP2#SV EASIP1#SV

Gn201

Gn202 NDCAL8#SV NDCAL7#SV NDCAL6#SV NDCAL5#SV NDCAL4#SV NDCAL3#SV NDCAL2#SV NDCAL1#SV

Gn203

Gn204 MRDYC#SP ORCMC#SP SFRC#SP SRVC#SP CTH1C#SP CTH2C#SP TLMHC#SP TLMLC#SP

#SP
Gn205 RCHC#SP RSLC INTGC#SP SOCNC#SP MCFNC#SP SPSLC#SP *ESPC#SP ARSTC#SP

Gn206 RCHHGC#SP MFNHGC#SP INCMDC#SP OVRIDC#SP DEFMDC#SP NRROC#SP ROTAC#SP INDXC#SP

#SP
Gn207 MPOFC#SP SLVC MORCMC
#SP

Gn208 SH07C#SP SH06C#SP SH05C#SP SH04C#SP SH03C#SP SH02C#SP SH01C#SP SH00C#SP

Gn209 SH11C#SP SH10C#SP SH09C#SP SH08C#SP

Gn210

Gn211

Gn212

Gn213

Gn214

Gn215

Gn216

Gn217

Gn218

- 292 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn263

Gn264 ESSYC4#SP ESSYC3#SP ESSYC2#SP ESSYC1#SP

Gn265 PKESE4#SP PKESE3#SP PKESE2#SP PKESE1#SP

Gn266 MRDYD#SP ORCMD#SP SFRD#SP SRVD#SP CTH1D#SP CTH2D#SP TLMHD#SP TLMLD#SP

#SP
Gn267 RCHD#SP RSLD INTGD#SP SOCND#SP MCFND#SP SPSLD#SP *ESPD#SP ARSTD#SP

Gn268 RCHHGD#SP MFNHGD#SP INCMDD#SP OVRIDD#SP DEFMDD#SP NRROD#SP ROTAD#SP INDXD#SP

MPOFD# #SP MORCM

Gn269 SP SLVD
D#SP

Gn270 SH07D#SP SH06D#SP SH05D#SP SH04D#SP SH03D#SP SH02D#SP SH01D#SP SH00D#SP

Gn271 SH11D#SP SH10D#SP SH09D#SP SH08D#SP

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn272 R08I4 R07I4 R06I4 R05I4 R04I4 R03I4 R02I4 R01I4

#SP #SP #SP #SP

Gn273 SIND4#SP SSIN4#SP SGN4#SP R12I4 R11I4 R10I4 R09I4

Gn274 CONS4#SP CONS3#SP CONS2#SP CONS1#SP

Gn275

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn276 UI107 UI106 UI105 UI104 UI103 UI102 UI101 UI100

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn277 UI115 UI114 UI113 UI112 UI111 UI110 UI109 UI108

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn278 UI123 UI122 UI121 UI120 UI119 UI118 UI117 UI116

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn279 UI131 UI130 UI129 UI128 UI127 UI126 UI125 UI124

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn280 UI207 UI206 UI205 UI204 UI203 UI202 UI201 UI200

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn281 UI215 UI214 UI213 UI212 UI211 UI210 UI209 UI208

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn282 UI223 UI222 UI221 UI220 UI219 UI218 UI217 UI216

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn283 UI231 UI230 UI229 UI228 UI227 UI226 UI225 UI224

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn284 UI307 UI306 UI305 UI304 UI303 UI302 UI301 UI300

- 293 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn285 UI315 UI314 UI313 UI312 UI311 UI310 UI309 UI308

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn286 UI323 UI322 UI321 UI320 UI319 UI318 UI317 UI316

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn287 UI331 UI330 UI329 UI328 UI327 UI326 UI325 UI324

Gn288 SPSYC4#SP SPSYC3#SP SPSYC2#SP SPSYC1#SP

Gn289 SPPHS4#SP SPPHS3#SP SPPHS2#SP SPPHS1#SP

Gn290

Gn291

Gn292

Gn293

Gn294

Gn295

Gn296

Gn297 AOFS3#P AOFS2#P AOFS1#P CHGAO#P

#P
Gn298 RNDH TB_BASE
#P

Gn299

Gn300

Gn301

Gn302

Gn303

Gn304

Gn305

Gn306

- 294 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn307

Gn308

Gn309

Gn310

Gn311

Gn312

Gn313

Gn314

Gn315

Gn316

Gn317

Gn318

Gn319

Gn320

Gn321

Gn322

Gn323

Gn324

Gn325

Gn326

Gn327

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn328 TLRSTI4 TLRSTI3 TLRSTI2 TLRSTI1 TLRST4 TLRST3 TLRST2 TLRST1

- 295 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn329 TLNCT4 TLNCT3 TLNCT2 TLNCT1 TLSKP4 TLSKP3 TLSKP2 TLSKP1

Gn330

Gn331

Gn332

Gn333

Gn334

Gn335

Gn336

Gn337

Gn338

Gn339

Gn340

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn341 *+ED48 *+ED47 *+ED46 *+ED45 *+ED44 *+ED43 *+ED42 *+ED41

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn342 *-ED48 *-ED47 *-ED46 *-ED45 *-ED44 *-ED43 *-ED42 *-ED41

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn343 *+ED58 *+ED57 *+ED56 *+ED55 *+ED54 *+ED53 *+ED52 *+ED51

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Gn344 *-ED58 *-ED57 *-ED56 *-ED55 *-ED54 *-ED53 *-ED52 *-ED51

Gn345

Gn346

Gn347

Gn348

Gn349

Gn350

- 296 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn395

Gn396

Gn397

Gn398

Gn399

Gn400 *SUCPFD#SP *SUCPFC#SP *SUCPFB#SP

Gn401 *SCPFD#SP *SCPFC#SP *SCPFB#SP

Gn402 SPSTPD#SP SPSTPC#SP SPSTPB#SP

Gn403 SLPCD#P SLPCC#P SLSPD#P SLSPC#P

Gn404

Gn405

Gn406 ITF08#P ITF07#P ITF06#P ITF05#P ITF04#P ITF03#P ITF02#P ITF01#P

Gn407 ITF10#P ITF09#P

Gn408 HEAD4 HEAD3 STCHK#P

Gn409

Gn410

Gn411 HS4IE#P HS3IE#P HS2IE#P HS1IE#P HS4E#P HS3E#S HS2E#P HS1E#P

Gn412

Gn413

Gn414

Gn415

Gn416

- 297 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn417

Gn418

Gn419

Gn420

Gn421

Gn422 SKIP4#P SKIP3#P SKIP2#P

Gn423

Gn424

Gn425

Gn426

Gn427

Gn428

Gn429

Gn430

Gn431

Gn432

Gn433

Gn434

Gn435

Gn436

to

Gn767

- 298 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

CNC → PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

#P #P #SP #P #P #P #P
Fn001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

#P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn002 MDRN CUT SRNMV#P THRD CSS RPDO INCH

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn003 MEDT MMEM MRMT MMDI MJ MH MINC

#P #P #P #P #P
Fn004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABS MMLK MBDT1#P

Fn005 MBDT9#P MBDT8#P MBDT7#P MBDT6#P MBDT5#P MBDT4#P MBDT3#P MBDT2#P

Fn006

#P #P #P #P
Fn007 BF TF SF MF

#P #P
Fn008 MF3 MF2

#P #P #P #P
Fn009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308

Fn018

Fn019

Fn020

- 299 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn021

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn031 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn032 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24

#P #P #P
Fn034 SRSRDY#P SRSP1R#SP SRSP2R#SP SRSP3R#SP SRSP4R#SP GR3O GR2O GR1O

Fn035

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Fn036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

#SP #SP #SP #SP

Fn037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

#SP #SP
Fn038 ENB3 ENB2 SUCLPA#SP SCLPA#SP

#SP
Fn039 ENB4 MSPOSA#SP

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Fn040 AR07 AR06 AR05 AR04 AR03 AR02 AR01 AR00

#SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP #SP

Fn041 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR09 AR08

Fn042

- 300 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn043 SYCAL4#SP SYCAL3#SP SYCAL2#SP SYCAL1#SP

Fn044 SYCAL#P FSPPH#P FSPSYC#P FSCSL#P

#SP #SP #SP

Fn045 ORARA#SP TLMA LDT2A#SP LDT1A#SP SARA#SP SDTA SSTA ALMA#SP

SLVSA#S CFINA#SP CHIPA#SP

Fn046 MORA2A#SP MORA1A#SP PORA2A#SP P RCFNA#SP RCHPA#SP

Fn047 INCSTA#SP PC1DEA#SP

Fn048

#SP #SP #SP

Fn049 ORARB#SP TLMB LDT2B#SP LDT1B#SP SARB#SP SDTB SSTB ALMB#SP

SLVSB#S CFINB#SP CHIPB#SP

Fn050 MORA2B#SP MORA1B#SP PORA2B#SP P RCFNB#SP RCHPB#SP

Fn051 INCSTB#SP PC1DEB#SP

Fn052

Fn053 EKENB PRGDPL INHKY

#P
Fn054 UO007#P UO006 UO005#P UO004#P UO003#P UO002#P UO001#P UO000#P

#P
Fn055 UO015#P UO014 UO013#P UO012#P UO011#P UO010#P UO009#P UO008#P

#P
Fn056 UO107#P UO106 UO105#P UO104#P UO103#P UO102#P UO101#P UO100#P

#P
Fn057 UO115#P UO114 UO113#P UO112#P UO111#P UO110#P UO109#P UO108#P

#P
Fn058 UO123#P UO122 UO121#P UO120#P UO119#P UO118#P UO117#P UO116#P

#P
Fn059 UO131#P UO130 UO129#P UO128#P UO127#P UO126#P UO125#P UO124#P

Fn060

Fn061 HCEXE HCAB2

#P
Fn062 PRTSF#P AICC

#P #P #P
Fn063 PSYN#P WATO#P COSP2#P COSP1#P PSAR PSE2 PSE1

Fn064 TIALM#P TICHK#P COSP#P TLCHB#P TLCHI#P TLCH#P

- 301 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P
Fn065 RSMAX#P RSPM RSPP

#P
Fn066 RTPT

Fn067

Fn068

Fn069

Fn070 PSW08#P PSW07#P PSW06#P PSW05#P PSW04#P PSW03#P PSW02#P PSW01#P

Fn071

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

#P #P #P #P
Fn073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

#P #P
Fn074 OUT15#P OUT14#P OUT13#P OUT12#P OUT11#P OUT10#P OUT9 OUT8

#P #P #P #P #P
Fn075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO

#P #P #P
Fn076 ROV2O#P ROV1O#P RTAP MP2O MP1O

#P
Fn077 RTO HS1DO#P HS1CO#P HS1BO#P HS1AO#P

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

#P #P
Fn080 *JV15O#P *JV14O#P *JV13O#P *JV12O#P *JV11O#P *JV10O#P *JV9O *JV8O

#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn081 -J4O +J4O -J3O +J3O -J2O +J2O -J1O +J1O

Fn082

Fn083

Fn084 EUO07#P EUO06#P EUO05#P EUO04#P EUO03#P EUO02#P EUO01#P EUO00#P

Fn085 EUO15#P EUO14#P EUO13#P EUO12#P EUO11#P EUO10#P EUO09#P EUO08#P

Fn086

- 302 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn087

Fn088

Fn089

Fn090 ABTSP3 SP
ABTSP2 SP
ABTSP1 SP
ABTQSV#P

Fn091 ABTSP4 SP

Fn092 TRSPS#P TRACT#P

Fn093 SVWRN4#P SVWRN3#P SVWRN2#P SVWRN1#P

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1

Fn095

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn096 ZP28 ZP27 ZP26 ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21

Fn097

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn098 ZP38 ZP37 ZP36 ZP35 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31

Fn099

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41

Fn101

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn102 MV8 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1

Fn103

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1

Fn105

Fn106 MVD8#SV MVD7#SV MVD6#SV MVD5#SV MVD4#SV MVD3#SV MVD2#SV MVD1#SV

Fn107

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn108 MMI8 MMI7 MMI6 MMI5 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1

- 303 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn109

Fn110 MDTCH8#SV MDTCH7#SV MDTCH6#SV MDTCH5#SV MDTCH4#SV MDTCH3#SV MDTCH2#SV MDTCH1#SV

Fn111

Fn112 EADEN8#SV EADEN7#SV EADEN6#SV EADEN5#SV EADEN4#SV EADEN3#SV EADEN2#SV EADEN1#SV

Fn113

TRQL8#S TRQL7#S TRQL6#S TRQL5#S TRQL4#S TRQL3#S TRQL2#S TRQL1#S

Fn114 V V V V V V V V

Fn115

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn116 FRP8 FRP7 FRP6 FRP5 FRP4 FRP3 FRP2 FRP1

Fn117

SYN80#S SYN70#SV SYN60#S SYN50#S SYN40#S SYN30#S SYN20#S SYN10#S

Fn118 V V V V V V V

Fn119

#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn120 ZRF8 ZRF7 ZRF6 ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1

Fn121

Fn122

Fn123

Fn124

Fn125

Fn126

Fn127

Fn128

Fn129 *EAXSL#P EOV0#P

Fn130 EBSYA#PX EOTNA#PX EOTPA#PX EGENA#PX EDENA#PX EIALA#PX ECKZA#PX EINPA#PX

- 304 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn131 EMF3A#PX EMF2A#PX EABUFA#PX EMFA#PX

Fn132 EM28A#PX EM24A#PX EM22A#PX EM21A#PX EM18A#PX EM14A#PX EM12A#PX EM11A#PX

Fn133 EBSYB#PX EOTNB#PX EOTPB#PX EGENB#PX EDENB#PX EIALB#PX ECKZB#PX EINPB#PX

Fn134 EMF3B#PX EMF2B#PX EABUFB#PX EMFB#PX

Fn135

Fn136 EBSYC#PX EOTNC#PX EOTPC#PX EGENC#PX EDENC#PX EIALC#PX ECKZC#PX EINPC#PX

Fn137 EMF3C#PX EMF2C#PX EABUFC#PX EMFC#PX

Fn138

Fn139 EBSYD#PX EOTND#PX EOTPD#PX EGEND#PX EDEND#PX EIALD#PX ECKZD#PX EINPD#PX

Fn140 EMF3D#PX EMF2D#PX EABUFD#PX EMFD#PX

Fn141

Fn142

Fn143

Fn144

Fn145

Fn146

Fn147

Fn148

Fn149

Fn150

Fn151

Fn152

- 305 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn153

Fn154

Fn155

Fn156

Fn157

Fn158

Fn159

Fn160 MSP07#P MSP06#P MSP05#P MSP04#P MSP03#P MSP02#P MSP01#P MSP00#P

Fn161 MSP15#P MSP14#P MSP13#P MSP12#P MSP11#P MSP10#P MSP09#P MSP08#P

Fn162

Fn163

Fn164

Fn165

Fn166

Fn167

#SP #SP
Fn168 ORARC#SP TLMC LDT2C#SP LDT1C#SP SARC#SP SDTC#SP SSTC ALMC#SP

Fn169 MORA2C#SP MORA1C#SP PORA2C#SP SLVSC#SP RCFNC#SP RCHPC#SP CFINC#SP CHIPC#SP

Fn170 INCSTC#SP PC1DEC#SP

Fn171

Fn172 PBATL#P PBATZ#P

Fn173

Fn174

- 306 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn175

Fn176

Fn177

Fn178

Fn179

Fn180

Fn181

Fn182 EACNT8#SV EACNT7#SV EACNT6#SV EACNT5#SV EACNT4#SV EACNT3#SV EACNT2#SV EACNT1#SV

Fn183

Fn184 ABDT8#SV ABDT7#SV ABDT6#SV ABDT5#SV ABDT4#SV ABDT3#SV ABDT2#SV ABDT1#SV

Fn185

Fn186

Fn187

Fn188 AMRST8#SV AMRST7#SV AMRST6#SV AMRST5#SV AMRST4#SV AMRST3#SV AMRST2#SV AMRST1#SV

Fn189

Fn190 TRQM8#SV TRQM7#SV TRQM6#SV TRQM5#SV TRQM4#SV TRQM3#SV TRQM2#SV TRQM1#SV

Fn191

Fn192

Fn193

Fn194

Fn195

Fn196

- 307 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn197

Fn198

Fn199

Fn200 R08O2#SP R07O2#SP R06O2#SP R05O2#SP R04O2#SP R03O2#SP R02O2#SP R01O2#SP

Fn201 R12O2#SP R11O2#SP R10O2#SP R09O2#SP

Fn202 AR072#SP AR062#SP AR052#SP AR042#SP AR032#SP AR022#SP AR012#SP AR002#SP

Fn203 AR152#SP AR142#SP AR132#SP AR122#SP AR112#SP AR102#SP AR092#SP AR082#SP

Fn204 R08O3#SP R07O3#SP R06O3#SP R05O3#SP R04O3#SP R03O3#SP R02O3#SP R01O3#SP

Fn205 R12O3#SP R11O3#SP R10O3#SP R09O3#SP

Fn206 AR073#SP AR063#SP AR053#SP AR043#SP AR033#SP AR023#SP AR013#SP AR003#SP

Fn207 AR153#SP AR143#SP AR133#SP AR123#SP AR113#SP AR103#SP AR093#SP AR083#SP

Fn208

Fn209

Fn210 SYNMT8#P SYNMT7#P SYNMT6#P SYNMT5#P SYNMT4#P SYNMT3#P SYNMT2#P SYNMT1#P

Fn211 SYNOF8#P SYNOF7#P SYNOF6#P SYNOF5#P SYNOF4#P SYNOF3#P SYNOF2#P SYNOF1#P

Fn212

Fn213

Fn214

Fn215

Fn216

Fn217

Fn218

- 308 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn241

Fn242

Fn243

Fn244

Fn245

Fn246

Fn247

Fn248

Fn249

Fn250

Fn251

Fn252

Fn253

#P #P #P #P #P
Fn254 ALR12 ALR11 ALR10 ALR9 ALR8

Fn255

Fn256

Fn257

Fn258

Fn259

Fn260

Fn261

Fn262

- 309 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn263

Fn264 SPWRN8
#P
SPWRN7
#P
SPWRN6
#P
SPWRN5
#P
SPWRN4
#P
SPWRN3
#P
SPWRN2
#P
SPWRN1
#P

Fn265 SPWRN9
#P

#SP #SP
Fn266 ORARD#SP TLMD LDT2D#SP LDT1D#SP SARD#SP SDTD#SP SSTD ALMD#SP

Fn267 MORA2D#SP MORA1D#SP PORA2D#SP SLVSD#SP RCFND#SP RCHPD#SP CFIND#SP CHIPD#SP

Fn268 INCSTD#SP PC1DED#SP

Fn269

Fn270 R08O4#SP R07O4#SP R06O4#SP R05O4#SP R04O4#SP R03O4#SP R02O4#SP R01O4#SP

Fn271 R12O4#SP R11O4#SP R10O4#SP R09O4#SP

Fn272 AR074#SP AR064#SP AR054#SP AR044#SP AR034#SP AR024#SP AR014#SP AR004#SP

Fn273 AR154#SP AR144#SP AR134#SP AR124#SP AR114#SP AR104#SP AR094#SP AR084#SP

Fn274 FCSS4#SP FCSS3#SP FCSS2#SP FCSS1#SP

Fn275

Fn276 UO023#P UO022#P UO021#P UO020#P UO019#P UO018#P UO017#P UO016#P

Fn277 UO031#P UO030#P UO029#P UO028#P UO027#P UO026#P UO025#P UO024#P

Fn278

Fn279

Fn280 UO207#P UO206#P UO205#P UO204#P UO203#P UO202#P UO201#P UO200#P

Fn281 UO215#P UO214#P UO213#P UO212#P UO211#P UO210#P UO209#P UO208#P

Fn282 UO223#P UO222#P UO221#P UO220#P UO219#P UO218#P UO217#P UO216#P

Fn283 UO231#P UO230#P UO229#P UO228#P UO227#P UO226#P UO225#P UO224#P

Fn284 UO307#P UO306#P UO305#P UO304#P UO303#P UO302#P UO301#P UO300#P

- 310 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn285 UO315#P UO314#P UO313#P UO312#P UO311#P UO310#P UO309#P UO308#P

Fn286 UO323#P UO322#P UO321#P UO320#P UO319#P UO318#P UO317#P UO316#P

Fn287 UO331#P UO330#P UO329#P UO328#P UO327#P UO326#P UO325#P UO324#P

Fn288 FSPSY4#SP FSPSY3#SP FSPSY2#SP FSPSY1#SP

Fn289 FSPPH4#SP FSPPH3#SP FSPPH2#SP FSPPH1#SP

Fn290

Fn291

Fn292

Fn293 HPS08#P HPS07#P HPS06#P HPS05#P HPS04#P HPS03#P HPS02#P HPS01#P

Fn294 HPS16#P HPS15#P HPS14#P HPS13#P HPS12#P HPS11#P HPS10#P HPS09#P

Fn295

Fn296

Fn297 MCHAO#P

Fn298

Fn299

Fn300

Fn301

Fn302

Fn303

Fn304

Fn305

Fn306

- 311 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn307

Fn308

Fn309

Fn310

Fn311

Fn312

Fn313

Fn314

#P
Fn315 TLMEM#P TMFNFD#P TLMOT#P TLSG10#P TLMSRH#P TLSKF

Fn316

Fn317

Fn318

Fn319

Fn320

Fn321

Fn322

Fn323

Fn324

Fn325

Fn326

Fn327

Fn328 TLCHI4#P TLCHI3#P TLCHI2#P TLCHI1#P TLCH4#P TLCH3#P TLCH2#P TLCH1#P

- 312 -
B-63945EN/01 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn329 TLCHB4#P TLCHB3#P TLCHB2#P TLCHB1#P TLSKF4#P TLSKF3#P TLSKF2#P TLSKF1#P

Fn330

Fn331

Fn332

Fn333

Fn334

Fn335

Fn336

Fn337

Fn338

Fn339

Fn340

Fn341 SYCM8#SV SYCM7#SV SYCM6#SV SYCM5#SV SYCM4#SV SYCM3#SV SYCM2#SV SYCM1#SV

Fn342 SYCS8#SV SYCS7#SV SYCS6#SV SYCS5#SV SYCS4#SV SYCS3#SV SYCS2#SV SYCS1#SV

Fn343 MIXO8#SV MIXO7#SV MIXO6#SV MIXO5#SV MIXO4#SV MIXO3#SV MIXO2#SV MIXO1#SV

Fn344 OVLM8#SV OVLM7#SV OVLM6#SV OVLM5#SV OVLM4#SV OVLM3#SV OVLM2#SV OVLM1#SV

Fn345 OVLS8#SV OVLS7#SV OVLS6#SV OVLS5#SV OVLS4#SV OVLS3#SV OVLS2#SV OVLS1#SV

Fn346 SMPK8#SV SMPK7#SV SMPK6#SV SMPK5#SV SMPK4#SV SMPK3#SV SMPK2#SV SMPK1#SV

Fn347

Fn348

Fn349

Fn350

- 313 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/01

Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn395

Fn396

Fn397

Fn398

Fn399

Fn400 SUCLPD#SP SUCLPC#SP SUCLPB#SP

Fn401 SCLPD#SP SCLPC#SP SCLPB#SP

Fn402 MSPOSD#SP MSPOSC#SP MSPOSB#SP

Fn403 SYNER#P

Fn404 COSP4#P COSP3#P

Fn405

Fn406

Fn407

Fn408

Fn409

Fn410

Fn411

Fn412

Fn413

Fn414

to

Fn767

- 314 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

8 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet
function for Series 30i-A.

8.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD................................................................. 316
8.2 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...... 317
8.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
DEVICES................................................................................. 332
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS............................ 333
8.5 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET .................... 337
8.6 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN ....... 338
8.7 ERROR LOG SCREEN FOR THE EMBEDDED
ETHERNET............................................................................. 343

- 315 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

8.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET

CARD

The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two

types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet
card.
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into card slot for
temporary communication.

CAUTION
When using the embedded Ethernet function for the
first time, set an IP address and other items carefully
as instructed by the network administrator, then
perform a sufficient communication test.
Note that an incorrect IP address or other setting
may cause a communication failure on the entire
network.

NOTE
1 Be sure to use the PCMCIA Ethernet card specified
by FANUC. Do not use general commercial
products.
2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used for the FANUC
LADDER-III or Servo Guide.
3 Do not use the PCMCIA Ethernet card for continuous
communication because it is provided for temporary
communication above.
4 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the
slot. This means that some part of the card is
projected. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet card,
be careful not to damage the card by hitting the card
with an object.
After using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, remove the
card immediately to prevent the card from being
damaged.

- 316 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

8.2 SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embedded
Ethernet function.

8.2.1 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function

This subsection describes the settings required to operate the

FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

Notes on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the first time

NOTE
1 For an application created by the user using the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function, the embedded Ethernet
port must be used.
2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function allows up to five
FOCAS2/Ethernet clients to be connected to one
CNC.
3 Concurrent access by multiple applications or
personal computers may overload the CNC,
reducing the communication speed.

Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for

operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 Soft keys [EMBE PORT] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet
port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBE PORT]
or [PCMCIA], respectively.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter
parameters for the items that appear.

NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port
and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card
are independent of each other.
2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for
the PCMCIA Ethernet card are made when a
connection to the Servo Guide and FANUC
LADDER-III is established.

- 317 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

Settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function

Settings on the Common screen

Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the
network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP Specify the IP address of the router.
ADDRESS Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display items on the Common screen

Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
DEVICE Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA
Ethernet card is displayed.

COMMON screen

- 318 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

FOCAS2/Ethernet setting items

Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the
(TCP) FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid input range is
5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER Set this item to 0 when it is used as the
(UDP) FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0 when it is used as the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

FOCAS2 screen

NOTE
1 When a connection to the i CELL is established, set
the UDP port number and time interval above as
described in the FANUC CIMPLICITY i CELL
Operator's Manual (B-75074EN).
2 The unit of the time interval is 10 ms. The allowable
range is between 10 and 65535. A time interval less
than 100ms cannot be set.
3 A shorter time interval makes the communication
load heavier and may degrade the network
performance.
Example) If the interval is set to 100 (100 x 10 ms
= 1 second), broadcast data is sent
every 1 second.

- 319 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

Initial settings for the PCMCIA Ethernet card

The factory default values are set for the PCMCIA Ethernet card to
make a connection to the Servo Guide or FANUC LADDER-III
easier.
IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0
ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) :0
TIME INTERVAL :0
Even when the default values were changed, setting the IP address to
0 restores the default.
The embedded Ethernet port has no default value.

- 320 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function

The following shows a setting example required for the

FOCAS2/Ethernet function to operate.
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs
through FOCAS2/Ethernet.

HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX

CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
TCP port number 8193 8193 setting.
UDP port number 0 0
Time interval 0 0

PC 1
IP address 192.168.0.200 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is
Default gateway None used for setting.
CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.0.100
NC TCP port number 8193 The arguments of the data window library
CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.0.101 function cnc_allclibhndl3 are used for
NC TCP port number 8193 setting.

- 321 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

8.2.2 Setting Parameters for The FTP File Transfer Function

This section describes the settings required for the FTP file transfer
function to operate using the embedded Ethernet function.

Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time

NOTE
1 The embedded Ethernet port must be used when
the FTP file transfer function is used
2 The number of FTP communications to which one
CNC can be connected using the FTP file transfer
function is one.

Operation on the FTP transfer setting screen

On the Ethernet setting screen, set the parameters for operating the
FTP file transfer function.

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 Soft key [EMBE PORT] appears. (When there is no soft keys,
press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBE PORT] to display the Ethernet Setting
screen for the embedded Ethernet port.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter
parameters for the items that appear.

NOTE
The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port
and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card
are independent of each other.
Pressing soft key [PCMCIA] enables the setting of
the PCMCIA Ethernet card. However, this setting is
not required normally because it is provided for
maintenance.

- 322 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Settings for the FTP file transfer function

Settings on the COMMON screen

Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the
network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP Specify the IP address of the router.
ADDRESS Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display items on the COMMON screen

Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
DEVICE Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA
Ethernet card is displayed.

COMMON screen

- 323 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

Settings on the FTP transfer screen

PAGE

Page keys PAGE

can be used to make settings for the three host
computers for connection destinations 1 to 3.
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file
transfer function. An FTP session is used, so that "21"
is to be specified usually.
USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the
host computer with FTP.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above.
Be sure to set a password.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the
host computer.
(Up to 127 characters can be specified.)

FTP TRANS screen (1st page) FTP TRANS screen (2nd page)

Related NC parameters

The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are

described below.

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 9 : Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.

- 324 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Example of setting the FTP file transfer function

The following shows a setting example required for the FTP file
transfer function to operate.
(WindowsXP Professional is used as the OS for the personal
computer.)
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs
through the FTP file transfer function.
• On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server function operates.
• On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file
transfer function.

HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX

CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None
Connection Port number 21 21 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
host 1 IP address 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200 setting.
User name user user
Password user user
Login DIR None None The parameter screen is used for setting.
NC parameter No. 20 9 9

PC 1 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer

IP address 192.168.0.200 (WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway None "User acount of the personal computer (WindowsXP) is
User name user used for setting.
Password user
Login DIR Default "Internet service manager" of the personal computer
(WindowsXP) is used for setting.

- 325 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

8.2.3 Setting the DNS and DHCP Functions

The DHCP and DNS functions are set using the Common screen
(detailed) and NC parameters.

8.2.3.1 DNS settings

The procedure for operating DNS is described below.

Procedure
1 Enable the DNS function as described in "Related NC
parameters" later.
2 Set up the DNS server on the host computer.
3 Make a connection to the host computer (called the DNS server
later) on which the DNS server operates, restart the CNC, and
then press function key SYSTEM
.
4 Press soft key [EMBE PORT] and then press [COMMON] to
display the Common screen (detailed).
5 Enter the IP address of the DNS server as the DNS IP address.

COMMON screen

PAGE

Press soft key [COMMON] and then press page keys PAGE
to
display the data server common setting screen (detailed). Set the DNS
IP addresses.

COMMON screen (detailed)

- 326 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Setting item
Item Description
DNS IPADDRESS The IP addresses of up to two DNS servers can be set.
1,2 The CNC searches the DNS servers in the order of DNS
IP address 1 followed by DNS IP address 2.

- 327 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

8.2.3.2 DHCP settings

The procedure for operating DHCP is described below.

Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP function as described in "Related NC
parameters" later.
2 Set up the DHCP server on the host computer.
3 Make a connection to the host computer (called the DNS server
later) on which the DHCP server operates, restart the CNC, and
then press function key SYSTEM
.
4 Press soft key [EMBE PORT] and then press [COMMON] to
display the Common screen.
5 When a connection to the DHCP server is established, if the
DHCP function for the CNC is enabled, the following items are
automatically set by the DHCP server.
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Router IP address
• DNS IP address
• Domain
When a connection to the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR"
appears for each item.

6 When the DNS function is also enabled, if the DHCP server

cooperates with the DNS server (when the DNS server uses
dynamic DNS), enter the host name.

- 328 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

COMMON screen

PAGE

Press soft key [COMMON] and then press page keys PAGE
to
display the data server common setting screens (normal and detailed).
When a connection to the DHCP server was established and the
settings were obtained, the screens as shown below appear.

When a connection to the DHCP server is established

When the host name is not set, the CNC automatically set it in the
form "NC-<MAC-address>".

Example of a host name to be set automatically

When a connection to the DHCP server fails, the screens as shown

below appear.

When a connection to the DHCP server fails

- 329 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

Check item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS When a connection to the DHCP server is
SUBNET MASK established, data obtained from the DHCP server
ROUTER IP ADDRESS is displayed.
DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2 When a connection to the DHCP server fails,
DOMAIN "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.

Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter a CNC host name.
When the DHCP server cooperates with the DNS
server, the DNS server is notified of this host name.

If the host name is blank, it is automatically set in the

form "NC-<MAC-address>".
Example of a host name to be set automatically:
NC-080019123456

Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of a embedded Ethernet

- 330 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Related NC parameters

For the embedded Ethernet port

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 DHCP DNS D1ET

[Data type] Bit

DHCP DHCP function is :

1: Used.
0: Not used.
DNS DNS function is :
1: Used.
0: Not used.
D1ET When the DHCP function is used:
1: The default parameters for the i CELL are set.
TCP port number 8193
UDP port number 8192
Time interval 50
0: The default parameters for the FOCAS1/Ethernet function are
set.
TCP port number 8193
UDP port number 0
Time interval 0

When any of these parameters are changed, the power must be turned
off or a reset must be performed on the embedded Ethernet
maintenance screen.

- 331 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

8.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

DEVICES

There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded

Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.
Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of
devices.

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 Soft keys [EMBE PORT] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBE PORT] or [PCMCIA], press soft key
[COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to display soft key
[EMB/PCMCIA].
4 Pressing soft key [EMB/PCMCIA] switches between enabled
devices.

NOTE
Information on a switched device is stored in
nonvolatile memory.
On the next power-up, the device last selected can
be used as is.

- 332 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS

8.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function

The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.

Host file list display

A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed.

Procedure
1 Press the function key PROG .
2 Press the [FOLDER] soft key. The program list screen appears.
(If the soft key does not appear, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key.
4 Press the [DEVICE CHANGE] soft key. And the displayed
device will be changed. Until the host file list screen appears,
press the key a few times.

- 333 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

NOTE
When using the FTP file transfer function, check that
the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port.
The two conditions below determine a connection
destination on the host file list screen:
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded
Ethernet port. Make a selection in "DEVICE
SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen.
(2) A host computer can be selected from
connection destinations 1, 2, and 3. Make a
selection according to the [HOST] soft key
described later.

5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display
PAGE

can be switched using the page keys PAGE

.
6 Press the [REFRESH] soft key to update the screen display.
7 Press the [DETAIL OFF] soft key to display the host file list
(file names only) screen. Press the [DETAIL ON] to display the
host file list (detail) screen.
8 When selecting a folder with cursor and pressing the MDI key
INPUT
, the selected folder is changed to the new current folder.

Display item

DEVICE
The currently selected device is displayed.
Check that the embedded Ethernet port is selected currently.

CONNECT HOST
The currently selected host number is displayed.

ENTRY PROG NUM

The number of programs in the current folder.

CURRENT FOLDER
The current folder name of the connected host is displayed.
If the folder-path is long compared with the display-item, characters:
“…” and only the last ten letters of the folder name are displayed.

FILE LIST
A file name / folder name is up to 127 letters.

- 334 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Operation list

DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF

The screen display can be switched between the display of file names
only and the display of details.

REFRESH
Display data can be updated.

READ
A file can be input from the host computer to the part program storage
memory of the CNC. This item is displayed only when 9 is set as the
I/O device number of the CNC and the CNC is set to the EDIT mode.

PUNCH
A file can be output from the part program storage memory of the
CNC to the host computer. This item is displayed only when 9 is set
as the I/O device number of the CNC and the CNC is set to the EDIT
mode.

DELETE FILE
A file can be deleted from the host computer.

RENAME
A file or folder on the host computer can be renamed.

DELETE FOLDER
A folder can be deleted from the host computer.

CREATE FOLDER
A folder can be created on the host computer.

HOST
A host can be selected from the host number 1, 2, and 3.

NC program input

A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into the
part program storage memory.

Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the host file list screen.
3 Select a file to be input, with the cursor.
4 Press the [READ] soft key.
5 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
6 During input, "INPUT" blinks in the lower-right corner of the
screen.

- 335 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

NC program output

A file (NC program) stored in the part program storage memory can
be output to the host computer.

Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the host file list screen.
3 Through the MDI keyboard, enter an NC program to be output.
4 Press the [PUNCH] soft key.
5 Press the [EXEC] soft key.
6 During output, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower-right corner of
the screen.

- 336 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

8.5 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

Communication using the embedded Ethernet can be restarted.

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 Soft keys [EMBE PORT] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBE PORT] or [PCMCIA], press soft key
[COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to display soft key
[EMB/PCMCIA].
4 Pressing soft key [RSTART] resets embedded Ethernet
communication and then restarts it.

NOTE
Pressing soft key [RSTART] forcibly interrupts
communication even when it is in progress.

- 337 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

8.6 EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN

With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance

screen is available.
The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the
embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally.

Displaying and operating the PING screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 Soft keys [EMBE PORT] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [EMBE PORT] or [PCMCIA], press soft key
[COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to display soft key
[EMB/PCMCIA].
4 Press soft key [PING] and then press [(OPRT)].
5 To send the PING command to connection destination 1 for FTP
file transfer, press soft key [PING FTP1]. Similarly, to send the
PING command to connection destination 2 or 3, press [PING
FTP2] or [PING FTP3], respectively.

PING connection status screen

- 338 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

6 To send the PING command to the desired destination, enter the

address of the destination on the PING setting screen. (Page keys
PAGE

PAGE
are used for switching.)

PING setting screen

7 Enter the address and number of executions and then press soft
key [PING EXEC] to send the PING command to the specified
destination the specified number of times.
8 To cancel the PING command currently being sent, press soft
key [PING CANCEL].

- 339 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

Displaying Communication status screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 Soft keys [EMBE PORT] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 By pressing the [EMBE PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting
screen for the embedded Ethernet is displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen
for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.
4 To display the communication status of the embedded Ethernet,
press soft key [COM STATE].
PAGE

Page keys PAGE

can be used to switch between the sending
state and the receiving state.

Communication status screen

- 340 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Displaying Software status screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 Soft keys [EMBE PORT] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the software status screen for the embedded Ethernet
port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBE
PORT] or [PCMCIA], respectively.

Software status screen

- 341 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/01

The above abbreviations have the following meanings.

Symbol and meaning
C : Waiting for a connection from the host
W : Waiting for data to be received
FOCAS2 #0 S : Sending data
K : Starting a child task
N : FOCAS2 cannot be executed
W : Waiting for data to be received
S : Sending data
FOCAS2 #1
D : Processing data
X : Not executed yet.
W : Waiting for data to be received
PMC S : Sending data
X : Not executed yet.
W : Waiting for data to be received
UDP S : Sending data
X : Not executed yet.
W : Waiting for data to be received
FTP D : Processing data
X : Not executed yet.

- 342 -
B-63945EN/01 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

8.7 ERROR LOG SCREEN FOR THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

This screen displays the error log of the embedded Ethernet function.

Displaying the error LOG screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key SYSTEM
.
2 To display the log screen for the embedded Ethernet port or
PCMCIA Ethernet, press soft key [EMBED LOG] or [PCMCIA
LOG], respectively. (When there is no soft keys, press the
continue key.)

LOG screen
The newest error log appears at the top of the screen. The date and
time when an error occurred are displayed at the right end of the line.
The format of date and time data is “dd hhmmss” where dd represents
a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss represents
seconds.
The error log in the above figure indicates that the date is 17 and the
hour is 10:25:00.
The error log for each function can be displayed by using soft keys on
the embedded Ethernet log screen.
(1) Soft key [ALL]
Displays all error log related to the embedded Ethernet.
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
Displays the error log related to the parameter settings of the
embedded Ethernet function and the basic communication
function.
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
Displays the error log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [FTP TRANS]
Displays the error log related to FTP file transfer.

- 343 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

9 DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance
of digital servo and adjustment of reference position.

9.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS........................ 345

9.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN.................................................... 364
9.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) .. 372
9.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING ................... 375
9.5 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE..................................... 377
9.6 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN................................... 378

- 344 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

9.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS

This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is

used for field adjustment of machine tool.

1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.

2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0: Servo tuning screen is not displayed.
1: Servo tuning screen is displayed.

3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.

4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following

operation: SYSTEM
key [SV.PARA].

5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.

SERVO SETTING
X-AXIS Y-AXIS
(1)INITIAL SET BIT 00000000 00000000 PRM 2000
(2)MOTOR ID NO. 47 47 PRM 2020
(3)AMR 00000000 00000000 PRM 2001
(4)CMR 2 2 PRM 1820
(5)FEED GEAR N 1 1 PRM 2084
(6) (N/M) M 125 125 PRM 2085
(7)DIRECTION SET 111 111 PRM 2022
(8)VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 8192 PRM 2023
(9)POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 12500 PRM 2024
(10)REF.COUNTER 8000 8000 PRM 1821

- 345 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

(1) Initial set bit

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 PRMCAL DGPRM PLC01
#3 (PRMCAL) 1: Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done.
#1 (DGPRM) (*) 0: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.
#0 (PLC01) 0: Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are:
1: Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10.

(2) Motor ID No.

Select the motor ID No. of the servo motor to be used, according
to the motor model and drawing number (the middle four digits
of A06B-XXXX-BXXX) listed in the tables on subsequent
pages.

αis series servo motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
α2/5000is 0212 262 A A
α4/5000is 0215 265 A A
α8/4000is 0235 285 A A
α12/4000is 0238 288 A A
α22/4000is 0265 315 A A
α30/4000is 0268 318 A A
α40/4000is 0272 322 A A
α50/3000is FAN 0275-Bx1x 325 A A
α100/2500is 0285 335 A A
α200/2500is 0288 338 A A
α300/2000is 0292 342 A A
α500/2000is 0295 345 A A
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions. The value for an x varies
depending on whether an option is provided or not.

αi series servo motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
α1/5000i 0202 252 A A
α2/5000i 0205 255 A A
α4/4000i 0223 273 A A
α8/3000i 0227 277 A A
α12/3000i 0243 293 A A
α22/3000i 0247 297 A A
α30/3000i 0253 303 A A
α40/3000i 0257 307 A A
α40/3000i FAN 0258-Bx1x 308 A A
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.
The value for an x varies depending on whether an option is provided
or not.
- 346 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

α(HV)is series servo motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
α2/5000HVis 0213 263 A A
α4/5000HVis 0216 266 A A
α8/4000HVis 0236 286 A A
α12/4000HVis 0239 289 A A
α22/4000HVis 0266 316 A A
α30/4000HVis 0269 319 A A
α40/4000HVis 0273 323 A A
α50/3000HVis FAN 0276-Bx1x 326 A A
α100/2500HVis 0286 336 A A
α200/2500HVis 0289 339 A A
α300/2000HVis 0293 343 A A
α500/2000HVis 0296 346 A A
α1000/2000HVis 0298 348 A A
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions. The value for an x varies
depending on whether an option is provided or not.

α(HV)i series servo motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
α4/4000HVi 0225 275 A A
α8/3000HVi 0229 279 A A
α12/3000HVi 0245 295 A A
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.

αCi series servo motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
αC4/3000i 0221 271 A A
αC8/2000i 0226 276 A A
αC12/2000i 0241 291 A A
αC22/2000i 0246 296 A A
αC30/1500i 0251 301 A A
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.

- 347 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

βis series servo motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
β0.2/5000is 0210 260 A A
β0.3/5000is 0211 261 A A
β0.4/5000is 0114 280 A A
β0.5/5000is 0115 281 A A
β1/5000is 0116 282 A A
β2/4000is 0061 253 - -
β4/4000is 0063 256 - -
β8/3000is 0075 258 - -
β12/3000is 0078 272 - -
β22/2000is 0085 274 - -
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.
The hyphen “-” indicates that loading is not possible as of April 2003.

Linear motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
L300A1/4is(200V) 0441-B200 351 - -
L300A1/4is(400V) 0441-B200 352 - -
L600A1/4is(200V) 0442-B200 353 - -
L600A1/4is(400V) 0442-B200 354 - -
L900A1/4is(200V) 0443-B200 355 - -
L900A1/4is(400V) 0443-B200 356 - -
L1500B1/4is(200V) 0444-B210 357 - -
L1500B1/4is(400V) 0444-B210 358 - -
L3000B2/2is(200V) 0445-B110 359 - -
L3000B2/2is(400V) 0445-B110 360 - -
L3000B2/4is(200V) 0445-B210 361 - -
L4500B2/2HVis(400V) 0446-B010 362 - -
L4500B2/2is(200V) 0446-B110 363 - -
L4500B2/2is(400V) 0446-B110 364 - -
L6000B2/2is(200V) 0447-B110 366 - -
L6000B2/2is(400V) 0447-B110 367 - -
L6000B2/4is(200V) 0447-B210 368 - -
L7500B2/2HVis(400V) 0448-B010 369 - -
L7500B2/2is(200V) 0448-B110 370 - -
L7500B2/2is(400V) 0448-B110 371 - -
L9000B2/2is(200V) 0449-B110 373 - -
L9000B2/2is(400V) 0449-B110 374 - -
L9000B2/4is(200V) 0449-B210 375 - -
L3300C1/2is(200V) 0451-B110 376 - -
L3300C1/2is(400V) 0451-B110 377 - -
L9000C2/2is(200V) 0454-B110 379 - -
L9000C2/2is(400V) 0454-B110 380 - -
L9000C2/4is(200V) 0454-B210 381 - -
L11000C2/2is(200V) 0455-B110 382 - -
L11000C2/2is(400V) 0455-B110 383 - -
L15000C2/3HVis(400V) 0456-B010 385 - -

- 348 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
L15000C2/2is(200V) 0456-B110 386 - -
L15000C2/2is(400V) 0456-B110 387 - -
L15000C2/3is(200V) 0456-B210 388 - -
L15000C2/3is(400V) 0456-B210 389 - -
L10000C3/2is(200V) 0457-B110 390 - -
L10000C3/2is(400V) 0457-B110 391 - -
L17000C3/2is(200V) 0459-B110 392 - -
L17000C3/2is(400V) 0459-B110 393 - -
300D/4(200V) 0421-B801 124 (*) A A
600D/4(200V) 0422-B801 125 (*) A A
900D/4(200V) 0423-B801 126 (*) A A
1500A/4(200V) 0410-B901 90 (*) A A
3000B/2(200V) 0411-B911 91 (*) A A
3000B/4(200V) 0411-B811 120 (*) A A
6000B/2(200V) 0412-B911 92 (*) A A
6000B/4(200V, 160A) 0412-B811 127 (*) A A
9000B/2(200V, 160A) 0413-B911 128 (*) A A
9000B/4(200V, 360A) 0413-B811 129 (*) A A
15000C/2(200V, 160A) 0414-B911 130 (*) A A
15000C/3(200V) 0414-B811 123 (*) A A
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.
The hyphen “-” indicates that loading is not possible as of April 2003.
A motor type number marked with (*) is used to load parameters for
HRV1. The servo software for the Series 30i supports only HRV2 or
later. So, perform initialization with the motor type numbers above,
then make the following changes before use:
No.2004=00000011
No.2040=(loaded value)×0.8
No.2041=(loaded value)×1.6

(3) Arbitrary AMR function

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 2001 AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0 (Axis)
* Set "00000000".

(4) CMR

PRM 1820 Command multiply ratio

1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27

Set value=1/CMR+100
2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48
Set value=2×CMR

(5) Turn off the power then back on.

- 349 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

(6) N/M of feed gear (F⋅FG)

PRM 2084 n for flexible feed gear

PRM 2085 m for flexible feed gear

Setting for the α Pulsecoder in the semi-closed mode

Necessary position
F⋅FG numerator (≤ 32767) feedback pulses per
motor revolution (as irreducible
= fraction)
F⋅FG denominator (≤ 32767) 1,000,000 (Note 2)
(Note 1)

NOTE
1 For both F⋅FG number and denominator, the
maximum setting value (after reduced) is 32767.
2 αi Pulsecoders assume one million pulses per motor
revolution, irrespective of resolution, for the flexible
feed gear setting.
3 If the calculation of the number of pulses required
per motor revolution involves p, such as when a rack
and pinion are used, assume π to be approximately
355/113.

[Example] For detection in 1 mm units, specify as follows:

Number of necessary
Ball screw lead
position pulses F⋅FG
(mm/rev)
(pulses/rev)
10 10000 1/100
20 20000 2/100 or 1/50
30 30000 3/100

[Example]
If the machine is set to detection in 1,000 degree units with
a gear reduction ratio of 10:1 for the rotation axis, the table
rotates by 360/10 degrees each time the motor makes one
turn.
1000 position pulses are necessary for the table to rotate
through one degree.
The number of position pulses necessary for the motor to
make one turn is:
360/10 × 1000 = 36000 with reference counter =36000
F⋅FG numerator 36000 36
= =
F⋅FG denominator 1,000,000 1000

- 350 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

Setting for use of a separate detector (full-closed)

Number of position pulses

corresponding to a
F⋅FG numerator (≤ 32767) predetermined amount of travel (as
F⋅FG denominator (≤ 32767) = Number of position pulses irreducible
corresponding to a fraction)
predetermined amount of travel
from a separate detector

[Example]
To detect a distance of 1 µm using a 0.5 µm scale, set the
following:
Numerator of F⋅FG L/1 1
= =
Denominator of F⋅FG L/0.5 2

<<Examples of calculation>>
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
One 8 mm n = 1/m = 125 n = 2/m = 25
revolution of 10 mm n = 1/m = 100 n = 1/m = 10
motor 12 mm n = 3/m = 250 n = 3/m = 25

(7) Direction of travel

PRM 2022 Rotational direction of motor

111 : Normal (clockwise) -111 : Reverse (counterclockwise)

Number of speed pulses, Number of position pulses

Closed loop
Semi-closed
Serial linear
loop Parallel type Serial rotary scale
scale
Command unit (µm) 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1
Initial bit setting b0=0 b0=0 b0=0 b0=0
Number of speed pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192
Number of position pulses 12500(*1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 2)
Set 8192 as the number of speed pulses. For the linear motor, make
settings according to "Linear Motor Parameter Setting" in the αi
series parameter manual.

*1) Setting of the number of position pulses for the semi-closed loop
Set 12500.

- 351 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

*2) Setting of the number of position pulses for the closed loop
As the number of position pulses, set the number of pulses fed back
from a separate detector when the motor makes one revolution. (The
flexible feed gear has no relevance to the calculation of the number of
position pulses.)

Example 1:
When a ball screw (direct connection) with a 10-mm lead and a
separate detector with a resolution of 0.5 µm per pulse are used

When the motor makes one revolution, the following pulses are fed
back from the separate detector:
10/0.0005 = 20,000
Accordingly,
Number of position pulses = 20,000

Example 2:
When a serial rotary scale with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses per
revolution is used, the number of position feedback pulses is
exceptionally calculated by the following:
12500 × (deceleration ratio between the motor and table)
When the deceleration ratio between the motor and table is 10:1, for
example, the number of position pulses is:
12,500 × (1/10) = 1250

*3) When the set number of position pulses is greater than 32767
With the conventional NC, bit 0 (high resolution bit) to be initially set
was changed according to the command unit as required. With the
Series 30i, there is no dependency between the command unit and bit
0 to be initially set.
The conventional way of setting poses no problem, but the method
described below makes the setting much easier.

With a position feedback pulse conversion coefficient, the number of

position pulses is set using the product of two parameters.

PRM 2185 Conversion coefficient for the number of position feedback pulses

(Example of setting)
When a linear scale with a minimum resolution of 0.1 (m is used and
the travel distance per motor revolution is 16 mm:
Ns = (travel distance per motor revolution (mm))/(minimum
resolution of detector (mm))
= 16 mm/0.0001 mm = 160000 (>32767) = 10000 × 16
So, set the following:
A: 10000
B: 16

- 352 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

NOTE
If the detector of the motor is an αi pulse coder (the
number of speed pulses = 8192), select a power of 2
(such as 2, 4, 8, and so on) as a conversion
coefficient whenever possible. (The position gain
value used inside the software becomes more
accurate.)

(9) Reference counter

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis (0 to 99999999)

1) For the semi-closed loop

Reference counter = Number of position pulses required per motor
revolution or the same number divided by an integer

NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the motor and table is
not an integer when a rotation axis is used, a
reference counter capacity needs to be set so that
the point where reference counter = 0 (grid point)
always appears at the same position relative to the
table.

Example of setting
αi Pulsecoder, semi-closed loop (1 µm detection)
Required number of
Lead of ball screw Reference Grid width
position pulses
(mm/revolution) counter (mm)
(pulses/revolution)
10 10000 10000 10
20 20000 20000 20
30 30000 30000 30

If there is an error between the required number of position pulses per

motor revolution and the setting of the reference counter, the
reference position varies, depending on the start point.
Such an error needs to be eliminated by changing the detection unit.
In this case, a reference counter capacity may be set using a fraction.

Example of setting
System with detection unit = 1 µm, ball screw lead = 20
mm/revolution, and deceleration ratio = 1/17

a) Method of setting a reference counter capacity as a fraction

Required number of position pulses per motor revolution =
20000/17
Set the parameters as follows:

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity of each axis (numerator) (0 to 99999999)

- 353 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

PRM 2179 Reference counter capacity of each axis (denominator) (0 to 32767)

The parameter for a denominator is not presently displayed on

the servo screen. So, a denominator needs to be set on the
parameter screen.
In this example, set numerator = 20000, and denominator = 17.

NOTE
The reference counter assumes only an integer. So,
if a fraction is set for a reference counter capacity,
the gap to the point where reference counter = 0 is
compensated for.
(In pulse control theory, a position less than one
pulse cannot be controlled. So, grid interval
compensation is performed so that a grid point error
is less than one detection unit at all times.)

b) Method of changing the detection unit

Required number of position pulses per motor revolution =
20000/17
The values of all of the following parameters are multiplied by
17 to change the detection unit to 1/17 µm:
Parameter to be changed Series 30i
FFG × 17 Servo screen
CMR × 17 Servo screen
Reference counter × 17 Servo screen
Effective area × 17 No. 1826, 1827
Positional deviation limit value during movement × 17 No. 1828
Positional deviation limit value during a stop × 17 No. 1829
Backlash amount × 17 No. 1851, 1852

As the detection unit is changed from 1 µm to 1/17 µm, the values of

all parameters to be set using the detection unit must be multiplied by
17.

CAUTION
In addition to the parameters listed above, there are
parameters to be set using the detection unit.

This change eliminates an error between the required number of

position pulses per motor revolution and the reference counter.
Required number of position pulses per motor revolution = 20000
Reference counter = 20000

- 354 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

2) For the closed loop

Reference counter = Z phase (reference position) interval/detection unit or
the same number divided by an integer

If the reference counter does not assume an integer, see the example
of semi-closed loop.

NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the separate detector
and table is not an integer when a rotation axis is
used, a reference counter capacity needs to be set
so that the point where reference counter = 0 (grid
point) always appears at the same position relative
to the table.

Example of setting
Example 1)
When Z phase interval = 50 mm and detection unit = 1 µm
Reference counter = 50,000/1 = 50,000

Example 2)
When detection unit = 0.001° with a rotation axis
Reference counter = 360/0.001 = 360,000

Example 3)
When there is only one Z phase as in the case of a linear scale
Set a simple number such as 10000 and 50000 for the reference
counter.

6. Turn off the power then back on.

(10) FSSB display and setting screen

Connecting the CNC control unit to servo amplifiers via a high-
speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which
uses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the
amount of cabling in machine tool electrical sections.
Axis settings are calculated automatically according to the
interrelationships between axes and amplifiers entered on the
FSSB setting screen. Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 14340 to
14375, 14376 to 14407, and 1936 to 1939 are specified
automatically according to the results of the calculation.

• Display
The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB-based amplifier and axis
information. This information can also be specified by the operator.

1 Press function key SYSTEM

.
2 To display [FSSB], press continuous menu key several
times.

- 355 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

3 Pressing soft key [FSSB] causes the AMP SET screen (or the
previously selected FSSB setting screen) to appear, with the
following soft keys displayed.

[ AMP ] [ AXIS ] [MAINTE ] [ ] [(OPRT)]

The FSSB setting screens include: AMP SET, AXIS SET, and AMP
MAINTENANCE.

Pressing soft key [AMP] causes the AMP SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [AXIS] causes the AXIS SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [MAINTE] causes the AMP MAINTENANCE
screen to appear.

<1> Amplifier setting screen

The amplifier setting screen consists of two sections: the first
section displays information about the slave, while the second
section displays information about the pulse modules.

- 356 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

The amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:

• NO. (slave number)
Up to 18 slaves (up to 16 amplifiers and up to 2 separate
detector interface units) connected to each FSSB line with
serial numbers assigned starting with the slave closest to
the CNC are displayed.
A slave number on the amplifier setting screen consists of a
number representing an FSSB line (1 or 2) followed by a
hyphen (-) and the number of a slave unit connected to the
FSSB in the order of connections closer to the CNC.
If slaves are connected to the second FSSB line, the slaves
are displayed after the slaves connected to the first FSSB
line.
• AMP (amplifier type)
The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which
stands for "amplifier," a number that indicates the placing
of the amplifier, as counted from that nearest to the CNC,
and a letter such as L (first axis), M (second axis), or N
(third axis) indicating the placing of the axis in the
amplifier.
• AXIS NO. (controlled axis number)
The axis number of each controlled axis stored in the
SRAM is displayed.
If a number specified in these parameters falls outside the
range of between 1 and the maximum number of controlled
axes, 0 is displayed.
• NAME (controlled axis name)
The axis name assigned to a parameter (No. 1020)
corresponding to a particular controlled axis number is
displayed. If an extended axis name is valid, the axis name
in the parameter (No. 1025/1026) is also displayed. If the
controlled axis number is 0, - is displayed.

- 357 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

• The following items are displayed as amplifier information:

- UNIT (servo amplifier unit type)
- SERIES (servo amplifier name)
- CURRENT (maximum rating)
• The following items are displayed as separate detector
interface unit information:
- SEPARATE
This display consists of the letter M, which stands for
"separate detector interface unit" and a number
indicating the placing of the pulse module, as counted
from that nearest to the CNC.
- TYPE
This display is a letter indicating the type of the
separate detector interface unit.
- PCB ID
This display consists of four digits indicating the
separate detector interface unit ID (hexadecimal). The
separate detector interface uni ID is followed by
DETECTOR (8-AXES) for the eight-axis separate
detector module or DETECTOR (4-AXES) for the
four-axis separate detector module.

<2> Axis setting screen

The axis setting screen displays the information shown below:

This axis setting screen displays the following items:

• AXIS (controlled axis number)
This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis.
• NAME (controlled axis name)
• AMP (type of the amplifier connected to each axis)
• M1 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 1)

- 358 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

The connector number for separate detector interface unit 1

stored in the SRAM is displayed.
• M2 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 2)
The connector number for separate detector interface unit 2
stored in the SRAM is displayed.
• M3 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 3)
The connector number for separate detector interface unit 3
stored in the SRAM is displayed.
• M4 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 4)
The connector number for separate detector interface unit 4
stored in the SRAM is displayed.
• 1-DSF
If the number of high-speed current loop axes that can be
controlled by one DSP is limited, the number of axes
controllable by one DSP stored in the SRAM is displayed.
When 0 is displayed, no limitation is imposed.
• Cs (Cs contour controlled axis)
The value stored in the SRAM is displayed. It is 1 for the
Cs contour controlled axis.
• TNDM
The value stored in the SRAM is displayed. Consecutive
odd and even numbers are displayed for the master and
slave axes for tandem control.

<3> Amplifier maintenance screen

The amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance
information for servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the
following two pages, either of which can be selected by pressing
the or key.

- 359 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

The amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:

• AXIS (controlled axis number)
• NAME (controlled axis name)
• AMP (type of amplifier connected to each axis)
• SERIES (servo amplifier series of an amplifier connected to
each axis)
• UNIT (unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each
axis)
• AXES (maximum number of axes controlled by an
amplifier connected to each axis)
• CUR. (maximum rating for amplifiers connected to each
axis)
• EDITION (unit version number of an amplifier connected
to each axis)
• TEST (date of test performed on an amplifier connected to
each axis)
Example) 030123 = January 23, 2003
• MAINTE-NO. (engineering change number for an amplifier
connected to each axis)

• Setting
On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenance
screen), pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the following soft keys:

[ SET ] [ ] [ READ ] [ ] [ INPUT ]

To enter data, place the machine in MDI mode or the emergency stop
state, position the cursor to the point where a desired item is to be

- 360 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

input, then enter the desired data and press soft key [INPUT] (or the
INPUT key on the MDI panel).
When soft key [SET] is pressed after data has been entered, a warning
message is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the
data is satisfactory, the corresponding parameter is set up.
To restore the previous value of a parameter if, for example, an
entered value is incorrect, press soft key [READ].
When the power is turned on, values are read from the parameters (No.
1023, 1905, 14340 to 14375, 14376 to 14407, or 1936 to 1939) and
displayed on the screen.

CAUTION
For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB
setting screen, do not attempt to enter values on the
parameter screen using the MDI or a G10
command. Use only the FSSB screen to enter
values for these parameters.

<1> Amplifier setting screen

The amplifier setting screen displays the following items:

• NO. (controlled axis number)
For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum
number of controlled axes. If a number that falls outside
this range is entered, the warning message "INVALID
FORMAT" appears. If the entered controlled axis number
is duplicate or 0, the warning message "SPECIFIED DATA
IS OUT OF RANGE" appears when soft key [SET] is
pressed to assert the entered value. In this case, no value
can be entered for the parameter.

- 361 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

<2> Axis setting screen

On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:

• M1 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 1)
For an axis that uses separate detector interface unit 1, enter
a connector number using a number in the range of between
1 and the maximum number of axes for separate detector
interface unit 1. When separate detector interface unit 1
need not be used, enter 0. If a number that falls outside the
valid range is entered, the warning message "INVALID
FORMAT" is displayed.
• M2 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 2)
For an axis that uses separate detector interface unit 2, enter
a connector number using a number in the range of between
1 and the maximum number of axes for separate detector
interface unit 2. When separate detector interface unit 2
need not be used, enter 0. If a number that falls outside the
valid range is entered, the warning message "INVALID
FORMAT" is displayed.
• M3 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 3)
For an axis that uses separate detector interface unit 3, enter
a connector number using a number in the range of between
1 and the maximum number of axes for separate detector
interface unit 3. When separate detector interface unit 3
need not be used, enter 0. If a number that falls outside the
valid range is entered, the warning message "INVALID
FORMAT" is displayed.

- 362 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

• M4 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 4)

For an axis that uses separate detector interface unit 4, enter
a connector number using a number in the range of between
1 and the maximum number of axes for separate detector
interface unit 4. When separate detector interface unit 4
need not be used, enter 0. If a number that falls outside the
valid range is entered, the warning message "INVALID
FORMAT" is displayed.
• 1-DSF
If the number of high-speed current loop axes that can be
controlled by one DSP is limited, set the number of axes
controllable by one DSP.
Number of servo HRV3 controlled axes when a multi-axis
servo card is used Setting: 3
Number of servo HRV4 controlled axes Setting: 1
If a value other than 0, 1, and 3 is input, the warning
"INVALID FORMAT" is output.
• Cs (Cs contour controlled axis)
Enter spindle number (1 to 8) for the Cs contour controlled
axis. If a number other than 0 to 8 is entered, the warning
message "INVALID FORMAT" is displayed.
• TNDM
Enter odd and even numbers for the master and slave axes
for tandem control. These numbers must be consecutive and
in the range of between 1 and number of controlled axes. If
a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the
warning message "INVALID FORMAT" is displayed.
When soft key [SET] is pressed on the axis setting screen
after data entry, the warning message "SPECIFIED DATA
IS OUT OF RANGE" is displayed if any of the following
conditions is satisfied.
• The setting disables the connection of controlled axes
with amplifiers and separate detector interface units.
• With an axis, a value other than 0 is set for two or
more of M1, M2, M3, and M3.
• Any two of 1-DSF, Cs, and TND are nonzero for an
axis.
• A duplicate value is specified for M1.
• A duplicate value is specified for M2.
• A duplicate value is specified for M3.
• A duplicate value is specified for M4.
• A duplicate value is specified for Cs.
• A duplicate value is specified for TNDM.
• An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for
TNDM.

- 363 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

9.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN

9.2.1 Parameter Setting

Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0: Servo tuning screen is not displayed.
1: Servo tuning screen is displayed.

9.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen

1 Press SYSTEM
key and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
2 Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.

SERVO TUNING 01234 N12345

X AXIS
(PAMAMETER) (MONITOR)
<1> FUN.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000 <9>
<2> LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00000000 <10>
<3> TURNING SET. 0 ALARM 3 10000000 <11>
<4> SET PERIOD 0 ALARM 4 00000000 <12>
<5> INT.GAIN 113 ALARM 5 00000000 <13>
<6> PROP.GAIN -1015 LOOP GAIN 2999 <14>
<7> FILER 0 POS ERROR 556 <15>
<8> VELOC.GAIN % 125 CURRENT % 10 <16>
CURRENT A <17>
SPEED RPM 100 <18>
SV SET SV TUN (OPRT)

(1) Function bit : PRM 2003

(2) Loop gain : PRM 1825
(3) Tuning start :
(4) Set period :
(5) Integral gain : PRM 2043
(6) Proportional gain : PRM 2044
(7) Filter : PRM 2067
(8) Velocity gain Set value= ((PRM 2021)+256 / 256) × 100
(9) Alarm 1 : DGN 200
(10) Alarm 2 : DGN 201
(11) Alarm 3 : DGN 202
(12) Alarm 4 : DGN 203
(13) Alarm 5 : DGN 204
(14) Loop gain : Actual loop gain
(15) Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300)
(16) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.
(17) Current(A) : Indicate current with A.
(18) Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation

- 364 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm 1 OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
Alarm 2 ALD EXP
Alarm 3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
Alarm 4 DTE CRC STB PRM
Alarm 5 OFS MCC LDM PMS FAN DAL ABF
Alarm 6 SFA
Alarm 7 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
Alarm 8 DTE CRC STB SPD
Alarm 9 FSD SVE IDW NCE IFE

NOTE
The empty fields do not represent alarm codes.

(1) Alarms related to amplifiers and motors

Alarm 1 Alarm 5 Alarm 2 Description Action

OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA MCC FAN ALD EXP
1 0 0 Overcurrent alarm (PSM)
1 0 1 Overcurrent alarm (SVM) 1
1 0 1 Overcurrent alarm 1
(software)
1 Overvoltage alarm
1 Excessive regenerative
discharge alarm
1 0 0 Power supply undervoltage
(PSM)
1 1 0 DC link undervoltage
(PSM)
1 0 1 Control power supply
undervoltage (SVM)
1 1 1 DC link undervoltage
(SVM)
1 0 0 Overheat (PSM) 2
1 1 0 Motor overheat 2
1 MCC welding, precharge
1 0 0 Fan stop (PSM)
1 0 1 Fan stop (SVM)
1 OVC alarm 3

NOTE
For the alarms with no action number, see the
maintenance manual of the servo amplifier.

Action 1: Related to overcurrent alarms

An overcurrent alarm is issued when an excessively large current
flows in the main circuit.
If an overcurrent alarm is always issued after the emergency stop
state is canceled or at the time of gradual acceleration/

- 365 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

deceleration, the cause may be a defective amplifier, cable

connection error, broken cable, or parameter setting error.
First, check if the servo parameters indicated below are set to the
standard values. If the servo parameters are set to the standard
values, check the amplifier and cable connections according to
the maintenance manual of the amplifier.

No.2004 No.2040 No.2041

If an overcurrent alarm is issued only at the time of abrupt

acceleration/deceleration, the use condition is too severe.
Increase the time constant and see what happens.

CAUTION
If the emergency stop state is canceled when the
power line to the motor is disconnected, an
overcurrent alarm (software) may be issued. If this
poses a problem, set the following parameter to 1:
Bit 0 of parameter No. 2207: Ignores an overcurrent
alarm (software).

Action 2: Related to overheat alarms

If an overheat alarm is issued after a long-time continuous
operation, the temperature of the motor or amplifier may be high.
Stop the operation for a while and see what happens. If an
overheat alarm is still issued about 10 minutes after the power is
turned off, the hardware is probably faulty.
If an overheat alarm is issued intermittently, increase the time
constant or increase stop times in the program to suppress an
increase in temperature.

Action 3: Related to an OVC alarm

If an OVC alarm is issued, check if the parameters indicated
below are set to the standard values. If the parameters are set to
the standard values, increase the time constant or increase stop
times in the program to suppress an increase in temperature.

No.1877 No.1878 No.1893

No.2062 No.2063 No.2065

No.2161 No.2162 No.2163 No.2164

- 366 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

(2) Alarms related to the Pulsecoder and separate serial Pulsecoder

(2-1)For the αi Pulsecoder
An alarm is identified from the data of alarms 1, 2, 3, and 5. The
meaning of each bit is indicated below.

Alarm 3 Alarm 5 1 Alarm 2

Description Action
CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH LDM PMS FBA ALD EXP
1 Soft phase alarm 2
1 Battery voltage zero 1
1 1 1 0 Count error alarm 2
1 EEPROM error alarm
1 Battery undervoltage (warning) 1
1 Pulse error alarm
1 LED error alarm

CAUTION
The alarms with no action number are considered to
be caused by a Pulsecoder failure. Replace the
Pulsecoder.

(2-2)For the separate serial detector coder

An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 7. The meaning of
each bit is indicated below.

Alarm 7
Description Action
OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
1 Soft phase alarm 2
Pulse error alarm (serial
1
rotary)
1 Battery voltage zero 1
Count error alarm (serial
1 2
rotary)
1 Phase alarm (serial linear) 2
Battery undervoltage
1 1
(warning)
1 LED error alarm
Separate detector overheat
1
alarm

CAUTION
The alarms with no action number are considered to
be caused by a detector failure. Replace the
detector.

Action 1: Battery-related alarms

Check if a battery is connected. When the power is turned on for
the first time after a battery is connected, a battery voltage zero
alarm is issued. In such a case, turn off the power then turn on
the power again. If a battery voltage zero alarm is still issued,
check the battery voltage. If a battery undervoltage alarm is
issued, check the voltage and replace the battery.
- 367 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

Action 2: Alarms that may be caused by noise

If an alarm is issued intermittently or an alarm is issued after the
emergency stop state is canceled, the cause of the alarm is
probably noise. In this case, provide sufficient noise protection.
If an alarm is issued even after noise protection is provided,
replace the detector.

(3) Alarms related to serial communication

An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 4 and alarm 8.

Alarm 4 Alarm 8
Description
DTE CRC STB PRM DTE CRC STB SPD
1
1 Serial Pulsecoder communication alarm
1
1
1 Separate serial Pulsecoder communication alarm
1

Action:
An error occurred in serial communication. Check if the cable is
connected correctly and also check if the cable is not
disconnected and broken. If a CRC or STB error occurs, the
cause may be noise. In this case, provide noise protection. If an
alarm is always issued after the power is turned on, the
Pulsecoder, amplifier control board (i series), or separate
detector interface unit (i series) may be faulty.

(4) Alarms related to disconnection

An alarm is identified from the data of alarms 1, 2, and 6.

Alarm 1 Alarm 2 6
Description Action
OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA ALD EXP SFA
Hard disconnection
1 1 1 0 (separate A/B phase 1
disconnection)
Soft disconnection (closed
1 0 0 0 2
loop)
Soft disconnection (α
1 0 0 1 3
Pulsecoder)

Action 1:
This alarm is issued when a separate A/B phase scale is used.
Check if the A/B phase detector is connected correctly.

Action 2:
This alarm is issued when the position feedback pulse change is
smaller than the velocity feedback pulse change. This means that
this alarm is not issued in a semi-closed loop. Check if the
separate detector outputs position feedback pulses correctly. If
the separate detector outputs position feedback pulses correctly,
- 368 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

such a situation that only the motor makes turns in the reverse
direction at the start of machine movement because of a large
backlash between the motor position and scale position is
considered to have occurred.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2003 TGAL
TGAL(#1) 1: The parameter-set detection level is used for a soft disconnection
alarm.

2064 Soft disconnection alarm level

Standard setting 4: An alarm is issued when the motor makes a 1/8 revolution.
Increase the setting of this parameter.

Action 3:
This alarm is issued when synchronization between phase data
and absolute position data sent from the built-in Pulsecoder is
lost. While the power to the NC is turned off, unplug the
Pulsecoder cable, then plug the cable once again after about 10
minutes. If this alarm is still issued, replace the Pulsecoder.

(5) Alarm related to invalid parameter settings

An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 4.

Alarm 4
Description
DTER CRC STB PRM
Invalid parameter detected by the
1
servo software

When PRM = 1, an invalid parameter is detected by the servo

software. Read the value indicated by diagnosis 352, and troubleshoot
according to "FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series Parameter
Manual".

When PRM = 0, read the bit value indicated by diagnosis 280, and
determine the cause according to the following:
Diagnosis 280#0 = 1: In parameter No. 2020 used for motor module
specification, a value not within the specifiable range is specified.
Diagnosis 280#2 = 1: In parameter No. 2023, an incorrect value such
as a value equal to or less than 0 is set.
Diagnosis 280#3 = 1: In parameter No. 2024, an incorrect value such
as a value equal to or less than 0 is set.
Diagnosis 280#4 = 1: In parameter No. 2022, a correct value (111 or -
111) is not set.
Diagnosis 280#6 = 1: In parameter No. 2023, an incorrect value is set.

- 369 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

(6) Others
An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 5. The meaning of each
bit is indicated below.

Alarm 5
Description Action
OFS MCC LDM PMS FAN DAL ABF
1 Feedback mismatch alarm 1
1 Semi-closed/closed loop excessive error alarm 2
1 Current offset error alarm 3

Action 1:
This alarm is issued when the move direction of the position
detector becomes opposite to the move direction of the speed
detector. Check the rotation direction of the separate detector. If
the rotation direction of the separate detector is opposite to the
rotation direction of the motor, take the following action:
For the A/B phase detector:
Exchange the connections of A and A with each other.
For the serial detector:
Reverse the signal direction setting of the separate detector.
Even with the A/B phase detector, the signal direction can be
reversed by setting the parameter below. (This method cannot be
used when absolute position communication is required.)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2018 RVRSE
RVRSE(#0) Whether to reverse the signal direction of the separate detector can be
set.
0: Does not reverse the signal direction of the separate detector.
1: Reverses the signal direction of the separate detector.

If there is a large twist between the motor and separate detector, this
alarm may be issued in abrupt acceleration/deceleration. In such a
case, change the detection level.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2201 RNLV
RNLV(#1) The detection level of a feedback mismatch alarm can be changed.
1: Detected at 1000 min-1 or more
0: Detected at 600 mm-1 or more

Action 2:
This alarm is issued when the difference between the motor
position and separate detector position exceeds the semi-
closed/closed loop excessive error level. Check if the dual
position feedback conversion coefficient is set correctly. If the
dual position feedback conversion coefficient is set correctly,
increase the alarm level. If this alarm is still issued after
changing the level, check the connection direction of the scale.

- 370 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

2078 Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (numerator)

2079 Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (denominator)

2118 Dual position feedback semi-closed/closed loop error level

[Setting] Detection unit. When 0 is set, no detection operation is performed.

Action 3:
The current offset value (equivalent to the current value during
an emergency stop) of the current detector becomes abnormally
high. If this alarm is still issued after the power is turned off then
back on, the current detector is considered to be faulty. When
using the αi series, replace the amplifier.

- 371 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

9.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD)

9.3.1 Overview

Speed

Rapid traverse FL rate

(PRM1420α) (PRM1425α)

Time

Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620α)

*DECα

PCZ

Grid

Grid shift amount Reference counter capacity

(PRM1850) (PRM1821)

10mm/rev
10000P
Error Proportion Speed
CMR M
counter gain loop
Command +
- ×4 (Serial)

Reference
counter F⋅FG PC
GRID

Counter capacity 10000P/rev (Flexible feed gear)

10000P

- 372 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

[Related parameters]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1005 DLZ
#1(DLZ) 0: The normal method (dog) is used for reference position return.
1: Reference position setting without dogs is used (axis by axis).

NOTE
A reference position can be set axis by axis by
setting bit 1 of parameter No. 1005. Reference
position setting without dogs cannot be used for a
spindle positioning axis and Cs contour axis. When
these axes are involved, use bit 1 of parameter No.
1005.

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity [P]

No. of feedback pulses or its division by an integer is set.

PRM 1850 Grid shift amount per axis [P]

* When the resolution is 0.0001mm, set the value in the unit ten
times the detection unit.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1815 APC APZ OPT
#5(APC) 0: Position detector is other than absolute Pulsecoder.
1: Position detector is absolute Pulsecoder.

#4(APZ) Zero position of absolute Pulsecoder is :

0: Not established
1: Established
(Turns to 1 after establishment)
To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to 1 without
first returning to the reference position when using serial
Pulsecoder α , follow this procedure: Back up the data with the
battery and give the motor one or more turns.
Turn the power off then on again, then change the APZ bit
setting from 0 to 1.

#1(OPT) 0: Position detection is performed by the Pulsecoder built in the

motor.
1: Separate type Pulsecoder or linear scale is used.

- 373 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

[Separate type Pulsecoder or linear scale is used]

PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]

Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set
to the reference counter capacity.

* When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of

the distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer
may be used as a reference counter capacity:

(Example)

(1µm)
300mm Þ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc

- 374 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

9.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING

When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return,
this function enables the tool to return the reference position that is
set by MTB.
When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position
once set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is
replaced or absolute
position is lost, perform this setting.

9.4.1 Overview

Speed

Reference position return

FL rate (PRM 1425)

Time

JOG

ZRN

+Jα

GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ZP α

9.4.2 Operation

1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual

operation.
2 Select the reference position return mode or switch.
3 Press a button for an axis-and-direction-select-signal + or -, and
the machine moves to the next grid, then stops.
(This position is set as the reference position).

* After the reference position has been set, select the reference
position return mode (ZRN signal is 1) and turn on an axis-and-
direction- select signal, then the tool returns to the reference
position.

- 375 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

9.4.3 Related Parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1005 DLZ
#1(DLZ) 0: The normal method (dog) is used for reference position return.
1: Reference position setting without dogs is used (axis by axis).

NOTE
A reference position can be set axis by axis by
setting bit 1 of parameter No. 1005. Reference
position setting without dogs cannot be used for a
spindle positioning axis and Cs contour axis. When
these axes are involved, use bit 1 of parameter No.
1005.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1006 ZMI
#5(ZMI) 0: Reference position return and backlash initial direction is +.
1: Reference position return and backlash initial direction is -.
* After ZRN signal becomes 1, manual feed direction is always the
direction set by this parameter irrespective of an axis selection
signal.

- 376 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

9.5 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE

Overview
The αi servo system can report the warning status before one of the
following target alarms occurs.
When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued.
For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracting
tools from the time a warning occurs by the time a servo alarm occurs.

Servo warning detail signals

SVWRN1 to 4 <F093#4 to #7>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Reports the warning signal corresponding to the state of the servo
amplifier.
[Output condition] The following table shows the warning statuses of the servo amplifier
and their corresponding warning signals.

Warning status signals (F93) Time from when a warning

Corresponding alarm messages SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1 state signal is issued to
(#7) (#6) (#5) (#4) until an alarm occurs
444 n AXIS: INV. COOLING FAN 1 0 0 0 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
601 n AXIS: INV. RADIATOR FAN 1 0 0 1 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
443 n AXIS: CNV. COOLING FAN 1 1 0 0 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
606 n AXIS: CNV. RADIATOR FAN 1 1 0 1 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
431 n AXIS: CNV. OVERLOAD 1 1 1 0 One minute
607 n AXIS: CNV. SINGLE PHASE 1 1 1 1 PSMR: Five seconds,
FAILURE PSM: One minute

A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below.

Occurrence of a warning
Servo amplifier

SVWRN1-4
(Warning)

PMC Perform deceleration stop or block stop

during this time period with the PMC to
stop the machine without damage. The
time period varies with the warning type.
Activation

Occurrence and stop of the alarm corresponding to a warning

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F093 SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1

- 377 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

9.6 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN

Overview
In the αi servo system, ID information output from each of the
connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
(Remark: Some instances of these units do not have ID information.)

- Servo motor
- Pulsecoder
- Servo amplifier module
- Power supply module

ID information is automatically read from each of the connected units

during first startup of the CNC and then recorded. During the second
or later startup, the ID information recorded during first startup can be
compared with the ID information read this time on the screen to
check whether the configuration of the connected units is changed. (If
there is a difference between them, the alarm mark (*) appears.)
The recorded ID information can be edited. Therefore, the ID
information of an unit that does not have ID information can be
displayed. (However, the alarm mark (*) indicating a difference
between these IDs appears.)

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SVI IDW
[Data type] Bit
IDW The edit of the servo information screen or the spindle information
screen is:
0: Prohibited
1: Allowed
SVI The servo information screen is:
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed

- 378 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

Displaying the servo ID screen

1 Press the SYSTEM

function key, then press the [SYSTEM] soft
key.

2 Press the [SV-INF] soft key to display the screen as shown

below.

* Servo information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a

difference between the servo information in flash ROM and
the actual servo information, the corresponding items are
preceded by *, as shown below.

- 379 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/01

Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such
as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates the
* mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to update
the registered data, as described in the editing
section later.
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Parameter
IDW (No. 13112#0) = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item
from which you want to delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [CHANGE], [INPUT], and
[SAVE] in that order.

Editing the servo ID screen

1 Assume that parameter No.13112#0(IDW) = 1.

2 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator's panel.

3 Follow the steps shown in "Displaying the servo ID screen" to

display the screen as shown below.

4 To move the cursor on the screen, use the and keys.

- 380 -
B-63945EN/01 9.DIGITAL SERVO

Screen operation

Mode Key operation Use

Viewing (*1) Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Editing (*2) Soft key
[INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the cursor
position with the character string in key-in buffer.
[CANCEL] Deletes the character string in key-in buffer.
[CHANGE] Transfers the selected ID information at the
cursor position that was sent by the servo, to
key-in buffer. Only the items preceded by * (*3)
are valid.
[SAVE] Saves the ID information that has been changed
on the servo information screen in flash ROM.
[RELOAD] Cancels the ID information that has been
changed on the servo information screen and
loads ID information from flash ROM.
Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Cursor key Scrolls up or down the selection of ID information.

*1 Viewing mode: when parameter No.13112#0 = 0

*2 Editing mode: when parameter No.13112#0 = 1
*3 Servo information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a difference
between the servo information in flash ROM and the actual
servo information, the corresponding items are preceded by *.

NOTE
For axes that are not used by the αi servo system,
ID information of connected units cannot be
obtained.

- 381 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

10 AC SPINDLE
This chapter outlines the serial interface and analog interface spindle
amplifiers and explains related parameters.

10.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE..................................... 383

10.2 ANALOG INTERFACE AC SPINDLE .................................. 400

- 382 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE

10.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control

S command M command

NC PMC

M03, M04, M05, M19

FIN

*SSTP (Spindle stop)

Motor speed
SOVx (Spindle override)

SF, GR1O, GR2O, GR3O

(For milling machining)
GR1, GR2 (For lathe cutting)

S SOR (Orientation)
(PRM 3735 to 3752)
0

R01O to R12O
1

Orientation speed R01I to R12I

(PRM 3705#1, 3732, 3706#5) 0 1
SIND

Output polarity (PRM 3706#7, 6) SGN (0=+, 1=-)

0 1
SSIN

*ESP, MRDY,
SFR, SRV, ORCM etc.

SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1, LDT2

ORAR, ALM etc.
Communication
function

Communication cable

Serial spindle
Communication
amplifier
function
Spindle
Operator's panel motor PC
Load meter LM

Speedometer
Spindle
SM

- 383 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

10.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for M series

(Parameter No. 3705#2=0)

Output Motor speed

4095 Max
PRM 3736
Gear 2 Gear 3
Gear 1

0 PRM 3735
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743
(min-1)

10.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for M series

(Parameter No. 3705#2=1)

Output Motor speed

4095 Max
PRM 3736
PRM 3752
PRM 3751
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3

PRM 3735
0
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (min-1)

10.1.1.3 T series

Output Motor speed

4095 Max
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Gear 4

S code
(min-1)
0
0
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744

- 384 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen

10.1.2.1 Display method

(1) Confirm the parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SPS
#1(SPS) 0: The spindle tuning screen is not displayed.
(*)1: The spindle tuning screen is displayed.

(2) Press the SYSTEM

key to select the screen for setting parameters
and other data.

(3) Press the continuous menu key .

(4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and
tuning screen appears.

(5) The following screens are provided. These screens can be

selected using soft keys.
<1> [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen
<2> [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen
<3> [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen
PAGE

(6) With the page keys PAGE

, a spindle to be displayed can be
selected (only when multiple serial spindles are connected).

- 385 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

10.1.2.2 Spindle setting screen

SPINDLE SETTING

(1)GEAR SELECT : 1
(2)SPINDLE : S11

(PARAMETER)
(3)GEAR RATIO 50
(4)MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
(5)MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000
(6)MAX C AXIS SPEED 100

• Gear selection
The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.
Indication CTH1 CTH2
1 0 0
2 0 1
3 1 0
4 1 1

• Spindle
Select a spindle for which data is to be set.
S11 : Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S12 : Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S21 : Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
S22 : Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle

• Parameters
S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Gear ratio (HIGH) 4056 4056
4216 4216
Gear ratio (MIDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057
Gear ratio (MIDIUM LOW) 4058 4058
4217 4217
Gear ratio (LOW) 4059 4059
Max. spindle speed (gear1) 3741 3741
Max. spindle speed (gear2) 3742 3742
Max. spindle speed (gear3) 3743 3743
Max. spindle speed (gear4) 3744 3744
Max. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196
Max. C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None

- 386 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.1.2.3 Spindle tuning screen

SPINDLE TUNING

OPERATION : SPEED CONTROL

GEAR SELECT : 1
SPINDLE : S11
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
PROP.GAIN 20 MOTOR SPEED 100
INT.GAIN 50 SPINDLE SPEED 150
LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100
MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 103
TIME CONST 100 SYN.ERR 3
REF. SHIFT 2046

• Operation mode
1 : Normal operation
2 : Orientation
3 : Synchronization control
4 : Rigid tapping
5 : Cs contour control
6 : Spindle positioning control

• Displayed parameters
The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.

Spindle positioning Normal operation Orientation Synchronization Rigid tapping Cs contour control
control control
Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain
Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain
Loop gain Motor voltage Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain
Motor voltage Regenerative power Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%) ORAR gain (%) Acceleration/ ZRN gain ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference Shift spindle stop deceleration constant Shift reference Shift reference
position position (%) position position
Shift reference Shift reference
position position
*1) For the parameter numbers corresponding to the displayed
parameter items, see Section 10.1.2.5.

- 387 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

• Displayed monitoring items

The displayed monitoring items vary depending on the operation
mode.

Spindle positioning Normal operation Orientation Synchronization Rigid tapping Cs contour control
control control
Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed
Feedrate Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed
Position deviation S Position deviation S Position deviation S1 Position deviation S Position deviation S
Position deviation S2 Position deviation Z
Synchronous Synchronous
deviation deviation
*1)
|Spindle data|
Motor speed [min-1] = × Max. motor speed (*)
16383
(*) Parameter No. 4020: Main spindle
Parameter No. 4196: Subspindle
*2) The spindle speed in Cs contour control mode is in degrees/min.

- 388 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen

SPINDLE MONITOR SCREEN

ALARM : AL-27(POSITION CODER DIS.)
OPERATION : Cs AXIS OONTROL
SPINDLE SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM
0 50 100 150 200
LOAD METER (%)
CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESP
CONTROL OUTPUT : SST SDT ORAR

• Spindle alarm

1 : Motor overheat 42 : Position coder one-rotation signal 77 : Axis number found mismatching
2 : Excessive speed deviation undetected 78 : Safety parameter found
3 : DC link fuse blown 46 : Threading position sensor one- mismatching
4 : Input fuse blown rotation signal detection error 79 : Initial test operation error
6 : Temperature sensor disconnection 47 : Position coder signal error 81 : Motor sensor one-rotation signal
7 : Excessive speed 50 : Excessive speed command detection error
9 : Main circuit overload calculation value under spindle 82 : Motor sensor one-rotation signal
11 : DC link overvoltage synchronization undetected
12 : DC link overcurrent 51 : Converter DC link overvoltage 83 : Motor sensor signal error
15 : Output switch/spindle switch alarm 52 : ITP signal error I 84 : Spindle sensor disconnection
18 : Sum check error 53 : ITP signal error II 85 : Spindle sensor one-rotation signal
19 : Excessive U phase current offset 54 : Overload current alarm detection error
20 : Excessive V phase current offset 55 : Power line switch state error 86 : Spindle sensor one-rotation signal
21 : Position sensor polarity setting error 56 : Internal cooling fan stopped undetected
24 : Transfer data error/stop 57 : Excessive converter deceleration 87 : Spindle sensor signal error
27 : Position coder disconnection power 88 : Radiator cooling fan stopped
29 : Short-time overload 58 : Converter main circuit overload 110 : Error in communication between
30 : Input section overcurrent 59 : Converter cooling fan stopped amplifier modules
31 : Speed detection disconnection 66 : Inter-SPM communication alarm 111 : Converter control power supply
32 : Transfer RAM error 69 : Safety speed exceeded undervoltage
33 : DC link charge error 70 : Axis data error 112 : Excessive converter regenerative
34 : Parameter setting error 71 : Safety parameter error power
35 : Gear ratio parameter setting error 72 : Motor speed found mismatching 113 : Converter cooler radiation fan
36 : Error counter overflow 73 : Motor sensor disconnection stopped
37 : Speed detector setting error 74 : CPU test alarm 120 : Communication data alarm
41 : Position coder one-rotation signal 75 : CRC test alarm 121 : Communication data alarm
detection error 76 : Safety function unexecuted 122 : Communication data alarm
123 : Spindle switch circuit error

- 389 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

• Operation
Following 6 modes are available:
a. Normal operation
b. Orientation
c. Synchronous operation
d. Rigid tapping
e. Cs contour cotrol
f. Spindle positioning control

• Load meter
The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.
Load meter data × Max. output value of load
Load meter [%] =
32767 meter (*)
(*) Parameter No. 4127: High-speed main winding
Parameter No. 4274: High-speed sub-winding
Parameter No. 4093: Low-speed main winding
Parameter No. 4279: Low-speed sub-winding

• Control input signal

Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following
signals:

TLML Torque limit command (low) SPSL Spindle selection signal

TLMH Torque limit command (high) MCFN Power line switching
CTH1 Gear signal 1 SOCN Soft start/stop cancel
CTH2 Gear signal 2 RSL Output switching request
SRV Spindle reverse rotation RCH Power line state confirm
SFR Spindle forward rotation INDX Orientation stop pos. change
ORCM Spindle orientation ROTA Rotation direction of ORCM
MRDY Machine ready NRRO Shor-cut of ORCM
ARST Alarm reset signal INTG Speed integral control signal
*ESP Emergency stop DEFM Referencial mode command

• Control output signals

Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following
signals:

ALM Alarm signal TLM5 Torque limitation

SST Speed zero signal ORAR Orientation end signal
SDT Speed detecting signal CHP Power line switched signal
SAR Speed arrival signal CFIN Spindle switch complete
LDT1 Load detecting signal 1 RCHP Output switch signal
LDT2 Load detecting signal 2 RCFN Output switch complete signal

- 390 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on

spindle tuning screen

• Normal operation mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206
Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207
Integral gain (HIGH) 4048 4048
4212 4212
Integral gain (LOW) 4049 4049
Motor voltage 4083 4236 4083 4236
Regenerative power 4080 4231 4080 4231

• Orientation mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4042 4208 4042 4208
Proportional gain (LOW) 4043 4209 4043 4209
Integral gain (HIGH) 4050 4050
4213 4213
Integral gain (LOW) 4051 4051
Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4060
4218 4218
Loop gain (MID.HIGH) 4061 4061
Loop gain (MID.LOW) 4062 4062
4219 4219
Loop gain (LOW) 4063 4063
Motor voltage 4084 4237 4084 4237
Gain change upon
4064 4220 4064 4220
completion of orientation
Stop position shift 4077 4228 4077 4228
PC-type orientation stop
4031 4204 4031 4204
position

• Synchronization control mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain (LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain (HIGH) 4052 4052
4214 4214
Integral gain (LOW) 4053 4053
Loop gain (HIGH) 4065 4065
4221 4221
Loop gain (MID.HIGH) 4066 4066
Loop gain (MID.LOW) 4067 4067
4222 4222
Loop gain (LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
Acc./Dec. time constant 4032 4032
Shift amount 4034 4034

- 391 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

• Rigid tapping mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain (LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain (HIGH) 4052 4052
4214 4214
Integral gain (LOW) 4053 4053
Loop gain (HIGH) 4065 4065
4221 4221
Loop gain (MID.HIGH) 4066 4066
Loop gain (MID.LOW) 4067 4067
4222 4222
Loop gain (LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Grid shift amount at servo
4073 4223 4073 4223
mode

• Cs contour control mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4046 4046
Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047
Integral gain (HIGH) 4054 4054
Integral gain (LOW) 4055 4055
Loop gain (HIGH) 4069 4069
Loop gain (MID.HIGH) 4070 4070
Loop gain (MIDL.OW) 4071 4071
Loop gain (LOW) 4072 4072
Motor voltage 4086 4086
ZRN gain % 4092 4092
Reference position shift 4135 4135

• Spindle positioning control mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain (LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain (HIGH) 4052 4052
4214 4214
Integral gain (LOW) 4053 4053
Loop gain (HIGH) 4065 4065
4221 4221
Loop gain (MID.HIG) 4066 4066
Loop gain (MID.LOW) 4067 4067
4222 4222
Loop gain (LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Reference position shift 4073 4223 4073 4223

- 392 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters

The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set

automatically.
* The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the
specifications defined by the machine tool builder. The
parameters defined by the machine tool builder are set as the
standard values (initial values) by this automatic setting function.
Therefore, when performing automatic operation, always set
parameters properly according to the parameter list (parameters
4000 and later).

1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.

2 Set bit 7 of parameter 4019 to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 LDSP
#7(LDSP) The parameters for the serial interface spindle are:
0: Not set automatically.
(*)1: Set automatically.

3 Set a motor model code.

4133 Motor model code

Code Motor model Amplifier

-1
301 α0.5/10000i (3000/10000min ) SPM-2.2i
-1
302 α1/10000i (3000/10000min ) SPM-2.2i
-1
304 α1.5/10000i (1500/10000min ) SPM-5.5i
-1
306 α2/10000i (1500/10000min ) SPM-5.5i
-1
308 α3/10000i (1500/10000min ) SPM-5.5i
-1
310 α6/10000i (1500/10000min ) SPM-11i
-1
312 α8/8000i (1500/8000min ) SPM-11i
-1
314 α12/7000i (1500/7000min ) SPM-15i
-1
316 α15/7000i (1500/7000min ) SPM-22i
-1
318 α18/7000i (1500/7000min ) SPM-22i
-1
320 α22/7000i (1500/7000min ) SPM-26i
-1
322 α30/6000i (1150/6000min ) SPM-45i
-1
323 α40/6000i (1500/6000min ) SPM-45i
-1
324 α50/4500i (1150/4500min ) SPM-55i
-1
407 α12/6000iP (500/1500, 750/6000min ) SPM-11i
-1
408 α15/6000iP (500/1500, 750/6000min ) SPM-15i
-1
409 α18/6000iP (500/1500, 750/6000min ) SPM-15i
-1
410 α22/6000iP (500/1500, 750/6000min ) SPM-22i
-1
411 α30/6000iP (400/1500, 575/6000min ) SPM-22i
-1
412 α40/6000iP (400/1500, 575/6000min ) SPM-26i
-1
413 α50/6000iP (575/1500, 1200/6000min ) SPM-26i
-1
414 α60/4500iP (400/1500, 750/4500min ) SPM-30i

4 Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.

- 393 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

10.1.4 Warning Interface for the αi Spindle

Overview
For the αi spindle, the warning state can be reported before an alarm
is issued. When the warning state is entered, a report to the PMC is
sent.
For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducing
cutting load from the time a warning occurs by the time an overheat
alarm occurs. In addition, diagnostic information also contains
warning numbers.

Signal

Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <F264#0 to #7, F265#0>

[Classification] Output
[Function] Reports the warning number corresponding to the state of the αi
spindle amplifier.
[Output condition] When the αi spindle is in the warning state, a warning number
consisting of SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 is output as nine-bit binary data.
If warnings occurred on multiple αi spindle amplifiers, the warning
number of the ai spindle having the smallest axis number is output.
The warning numbers and their descriptions are shown below.
Warning Contents Details
number
56 Internal fan stopped If the internal fan stops, the warning
signal is output. Since the spindle
continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal
is output, an alarm occurs.
88 Radiator cooling fan If the radiator cooling fan stops, the
stopped warning signal is output. Since the
spindle continues to operate at this time,
use the PMC to perform processing as
needed.
If the main circuit overheats, an alarm
occurs.
04 Open-phase detected in the If an open-phase is detected in the main
converter main power power supply, the warning signal is
supply output. Since the spindle continues to
operate at this time, use the PMC to
perform processing as needed.
About one minute (for the PSM) or about
five seconds (for the PSMR) after the
warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.
58 Converter main circuit If the main circuit of the PSM is
overloaded overloaded, the warning signal is output.
Since the spindle continues to operate at
this time, use the PMC to perform
processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal
is output, an alarm occurs.

- 394 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

Warning Contents Details

number
59 Converter cooling fan If the PSM cooling fan stops, the warning
stopped signal is output. Since the spindle
continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal
is output, an alarm occurs.
113 Converter radiator cooling If the PSM radiator cooling fan stops, the
fan stopped warning signal is output. Since the
spindle continues to operate at this time,
use the PMC to perform processing as
needed.
If the PSM main circuit overheats, an
alarm occurs.

Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN4 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1

F265 SPWRN9

Diagnosis screen
The status of a warning is displayed on the following diagnostic
screen.

712 Warning status of first spindle

713 Warning status of second spindle

732 Warning status of third spindle

733 Warning status of fourth spindle

The number of a warning caused on each αi spindle is indicated.
If there is no warning, 0 is indicated.

- 395 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

10.1.5 αi Spindle Information Screen

Overview
In the αi spindle system, ID information output from each of the
connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
(Remark: Some instances of these units do not have ID information.)
- Spindle motor
- Spindle amplifier
- Power supply module
ID information is automatically read from each of the connected units
during first startup of the CNC and then recorded. During second or
later startup, the ID information recorded during first startup can be
compared with the ID information read this time on the screen to
check whether the configuration of the connected units is changed. (If
there is a difference between them, the alarm mark (*) appears.)
The recorded ID information can be edited. Therefore, the ID
information of an unit that does not have ID information can be
displayed. (However, the alarm mark (*) indicating a difference
between these IDs appears.)

Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SPI IDW
[Data type] Bit
IDW The edit of the servo information screen or the spindle information
screen is:
0 : Prohibited
1 : Allowed
SPI The spindle information screen is:
0 : Displayed
1 : Not displayed

- 396 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

Displaying the spindle information screen

1 Press the SYSTEM

function key, then press the [SYSTEM] soft key.

2 Press the [SP-INF] soft key to display the screen as shown

below.

* Spindle information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a

difference between the spindle information in flash ROM
and the actual spindle information, the corresponding items
are preceded by *, as shown below.

- 397 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such
as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates the
* mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to update
the registered data, as described in the editing
section later.
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Parameter
IDW (No. 13112#0) = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item
from which you want to delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [CHANGE], [INPUT], and
[SAVE] in that order.

Editing the spindle information screen

1 Assume that parameter No.13112#0(IDW) = 1.

2 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator's panel.

3 Follow the steps shown in "Displaying the spindle ID screen" to

display the screen as shown below.

4 To move key-in buffer on the screen, use the and

keys.

- 398 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

Screen operation on the editing screen

Mode Key operation Use

Viewing Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen
(*1) basis.
Editing (*2) Soft key
[INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the
cursor position with the character string in
key-in buffer.
[CANCEL] Deletes the character string in key-in buffer.
[CHANGE] Transfers the selected ID information at the
cursor position that was sent by the servo,
to key-in buffer. Only the items preceded by
* (*3) are valid.
[SAVE] Saves the ID information that has been
changed on the spindle information screen
in flash ROM.
[RELOAD] Cancels the ID information that has been
changed on the spindle information screen
and loads ID information from flash ROM.
Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen
basis.
Cursor key Scrolls up or down the selection of ID
information.
*1 Viewing mode: when parameter No.13112#0 = 0
*2 Editing mode: when parameter No.13112#0 = 1
*3 Spindle information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a
difference between the spindle information in flash ROM and
the actual spindle information, the corresponding items are
preceded by *.

- 399 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

10.2 ANALOG INTERFACE AC SPINDLE

10.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control

10.2.1.1 Block diagram

S command M command

NC PMC

M03 to M05, M06, M19

CW/CCW command,
Spindle speed orientation, etc.
conversion
FIN Miscellaneous function end
Motor speed
*SSTP
Gear 1 Gear 2 Spindle stop
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
Gear selection (M series)
GR1, GR2
Gear information (T series)
S

Maximum spindle speed and other

parameters
PRM 3714 to 3743, 3735, 3736,
3751 to 3752(M series)
PRM 3741 to 3744(T series)

*ESP, MRDY SAR, LDT

SFR, SRV SST, ORAR
Position coder interface D/A converter ORCM, TLM SDT, ALM

PRM 3730 (gain)

PRM 3731 (offset)

SVC
DV

RV

Spindle amplifier I/O card or I/O unit

Operator's
Spindle panel
PC motor Load meter
LM

Speedometer

Spindle SM

- 400 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.2.1.2 Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters

• M series
1 Gear change method A (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 0)

SVC Motor speed

Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
(4095) 10V Max
PRM 3736

PRM 3735
0V S code
(min-1)
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743

2 Gear change method B (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 1)

SVC Motor speed

Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
(4095) 10V Max
PRM 3736

PRM 3752

PRM 3751

PRM 3735
0V S code
(min-1)
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743

• T series
Constant surface speed control

SVC Motor speed

Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Gear 4

(4095) 10V Max

S code
0V
(min-1)
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744

- 401 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM

TCW CWM Sign of output voltage

0 0 Analog voltage (+) with both M03 and M04
0 1 Analog voltage (-) with both M03 and M04
1 0 (+) with M03, (-) with M04
1 1 (-) with M03, (+) with M04

• M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 SGB
SGB Spindle speed set when gear change is performed is:
0: Maximum speed for each gear.
1: Set by respective parameters. (Parameters No. 3751, No. 3752)

3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

3742 Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

3743 Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

3751 Spindle motor speed at the switch point between gear 1 and gear 2

3752 Spindle motor speed at the switch point between gear 2 and gear 3
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
Set a spindle motor speed at each gear switch point when gear switch
method B is used (when bit 2 (SGB) of parameter No. 3705 is set to
1).
Spindle motor speed at gear switch point
Setting = ×4095
Maximum spindle motor speed

3736 Upper limit of the output to the spindle motor

3735 Lower limit of the output to the spindle motor

Spindle speed (upper limit/lower limit)

Setting = ×4095
Maximum spindle speed

• T series
3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

3742 Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

3743 Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

3744 Max. spindle speed of gear 4 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

- 402 -
B-63945EN/01 10.AC SPINDLE

10.2.1.3 Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter)

(1) For M series, change the upper and lower limits as follows:
- When gear change method A is used: Parameter 3736 =
4095, parameter 3735 = 0
- When gear change method B is used: Parameter 3751 =
4095, parameter 3735 = 0
☞ For T series, these changes are not required.

(2) Tuning the D/A converter offset

Specify zero as the spindle speed. Then, by using a digital
multimeter, adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at
the test pin DA2 on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is
0 mV.

1 For M series
S0; (Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)

2 For T series (in case of G-code system A)

G97 S0; (Specify the command by MDI in the same manner as for M series.)

3731 Spindle speed (D/A converter) offset compensation value

(3) Tuning the D/A converter gain

Specify the maximum spindle speed of gear 1. Then, by using a
digital multimeter, adjust the following parameter so that the
voltage at the test pin DA2 on the spindle amplifier printed
circuit board is 10.0 V.

1 For M series
Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.)
(Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)

3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

2 For T series (in case of G-code system A)

G97 Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.)
(Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)

3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [min-1]

☞ Usually a voltage is output from the D/A converter by
only executing an S command. However, the
clockwise rotation command (M03) may be required
on some machines.

- 403 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/01

(4) If the output voltage is not correct, perform the following

calculation, and change the value of parameter 3730 to adjust the
gain of the D/A converter:
10V
Setting = Measured × (Current value of parameter No. 3730)
voltage

(5) Execute an S command again and confirm that the output voltage
is correct.

Restore the original parameter values.

- 404 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.

11.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES.......................... 406

11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED ................................... 408
11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE............................. 412
11.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE.................... 416
11.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ............ 420
11.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF .......... 427
11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE
POWER IS TURNED ON ..................................................... 429
11.8 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES
CANNOT BE PERFORMED INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT
BE PERFORMED PROPERLY ............................................ 431
11.9 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT
TO AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS ..................................... 433
11.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS
OUTPUT TO AN EXPANSION UNIT................................. 434
11.11 ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 (READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ALARM)......................................................... 435
11.12 ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS
ABNORMAL) ....................................................................... 439
11.13 ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN) ........................................................... 441
11.14 ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF) ..................................... 442
11.15 ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON)....................................... 444
11.16 ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) ALARM
SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED) ........................... 445
11.17 ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS
ABNORMAL) ....................................................................... 446
11.18 ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT).......... 447
11.19 ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR)................ 448
11.20 ALARM SV5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)
ALARM SV5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT) ..................... 449
11.21 ALARM SV5136
(FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) ........................... 450
11.22 SERVO ALARMS................................................................. 451
11.23 SPC ALARMS....................................................................... 454
11.24 SPINDLE ALARMS ............................................................. 455
11.25 SYSTEM ALARMS .............................................................. 456

- 405 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES

When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of

failure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the
machine.
Check for the failure according to the following procedure :

When? With what operation? What failure?

Grasp the kind of failure

↓
Appropriate action
↓
Recovery

11.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred

(1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)

(2) With what operation
(3) What failure occurred

1 When did the failure occur?

- Date and time?
- Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)
- Occurred when the power was turned on?
- Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other
disturbances to the power supply?

How many times has it occurred

- Only once?
- Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day,
or per month?)

2 With what operation did it occur ?

- What was the NC mode when the failure occurred?
Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference
position return mode
- If during program operation,
Where in the program ?
Which program No. and sequence No. ?
What program ?
Occurred during axial movement ?
Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ?
Failure specific to the program ?
- Does the same operation cause the same failure ?
(Check the repeatability of the failure.)
- Occurred during data input/output ?

- 406 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

<Feed axes and spindles>

- For a failure related to feed axis servo
(1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ?
(2) Ocurred only for a certain axis ?
- For a failure related to spindles
When did the failure occur ? (during power-on, acceleration,
deceleration, or constant rotation)

3 What failure occurred ?

- Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen?
(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for
alarms SV alarms, OT alarms, or SP alarms.)
- Is the screen correct ?
- If machining dimensions are incorrect
(1) How large is the error ?
(2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?
(3) Are the offsets correct ?

4 Other information
- Is there noise origin around machine?
If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be
external noise to the power supply or inductive noise on
machinery cables.
Operate other machines connected to the same power line
and see if noise come from the relays or compressors.
- Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?
- Check the following for the input power supply voltage :
(1) Is there variation in the voltage ?
(2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ?
(3) Is the standard voltage supplied ?
- How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit?
Refer to manual about noise.
- Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit?

5 When you contact our service center, specify the following

items :
(1) Name of the NC unit
(2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine
(3) Software series/version of the NC
(4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor
(for a failure related to the servo)
(5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor
(for a failure related to a spindle)
- See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for
the locations of the NC unit and servo/spindle
amplifiers.
- We use the following specification codes :
Servo /spindle amplifier : A06B-xxxx-Hxxx
Servo/spindle amplifier : A06B-xxxx-Bxxx
NOTE
The mark ‘x’ represents a number.

- 407 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION

CAN BE EXECUTED

Points
(1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position
(3) Check CNC status display
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnostic function

Causes and Countermeasures

1 Position display (relative, absolute, machine coordinate) does not change

(1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 CNC STATUS
DISPLAY for detail.)

(a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on)

If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is
input. Check the following signal using the PMC's
diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0008 *ESP

G0008 *ESP
*ESP : ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.

(b) It is a reset status

When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned.
Check the following signal using the PMC's diagnostic
funciton (PMCDGN).

(i) An input signal from the PMC functions

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS RRW
ERS : When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input.
RRW : When RRW is 1, reset & rewing signal is input.

(ii) RESET key on the MDI keyboard functions

When the signals in 1) are 0, <RESET> key may be
functioning. Check the contact of <RESET> key using
a tester.
When it is abnormal, change the keyboard.

- 408 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

(c) Confirm the status of modes

Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of
screen as follows :
If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input.
Check mode select signal using PMC's diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
For details, refer to section 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY.

(Example of display)
JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode
HND: Manual handle (MPG) mode
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode
MEM : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT : EDIT (Memory edit) mode

<Mode select signal>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
Manual handle (MPG) mode 1 0 0
Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0
Automatic operation (Memory) mode 0 0 1
EDIT (Memory edit) mode 0 1 1

(2) Check diagnostic data 002 to 014 of the CNC Check an item for
which 1 is displayed
No. Message Display
002 DWELL :0
a. 003 IN-POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1 (Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK : 0
011 READING :0
c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET,ESP,RRW OFF : 0
* Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation
and its detail is shown below.

(a) In-position check is being done

It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the
contents of the following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the
following condition)
DGN0300 Position Error > PARAM1826 In-position width

- 409 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

(i) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.

1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)

(ii) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm

SV0400, SV0410, and SV0411.

(b) Interlock or start lock signal is input

There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which
interlock signal is used by the machine tool builder at the
parameters shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)

Check state of effective interlock signals using the

diagnostic function (PMCDGN) of the PMC.

(i) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.

(ii) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.

c. Jog feedrate override is 0%

Check the signals using PMC's diagnostic function
(PMCDGN)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address
becomes
1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . 0000.

*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

- 410 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

2 When machine coordinate value does not update on position display

Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0044 MLK

G0108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1

MLK : All axes machine lock
MLKn : Each axis machine lock
When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal is input.

d. The NC is in the reset state.

In this state, "RESET" is display as the state indication of
the previous item (b). So, not only manual operation (b) but
also all automatic operations are disabled. So, referring to
the item "Manual and automatic operations are disabled",
make an investigation.

- 411 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE

Points
(1) Check whether position display is operating.
(2) Check CNC status display.
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic funciton.

Causes and Countermeasures

1 Position display (relative, absolute, machine cooordinate) does not change

(1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected).

When status display shows JOG, it is normal.
When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is
not selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using
PMC's diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

<Mode select signal>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1

(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the
signal using PMC's diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1

G0102 -J8 -J7 -J6 -J5 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1

When a bit is "1", the corresponding feed axis direction selection
signal has been entered.

+ J
g : Both X- and Y-axes simultaneously (feed along a
straight line or circle)
a : Both X- and Y-axes simultaneously (feed in the
normal direction)
+ : Feed in the + direction
- : Feed in the - direction

- 412 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

Example)
In the normal state, pressing the "+X" button on the
operator's panel causes the signal +Jn to be displayed as
"1".
* This signal becomes effective when the rise of the signal is
detected. If, therefore, the direction selection signal has
been entered before jog mode selection, axis movement is
not performed; set the bit "0" and then re-check the signal.
* By defining a straight line or arc in the CNC beforehand
using the R area of the PMC, +Jg and ±Ja allow the tool to
move along both X- and Y-axes simultaneously. The
exchange of information with the R area of the PMC is
performed by the macro software or PMC sequence
program created by the MTB.

(3) Check CNC's diagnostic function 002 to 014. Check the items
for which 1 is displayed at right side.
No. Message Display
002 DWELL :0
a. 003 IN-POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1 (Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK : 0
011 READING :0
c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET,ESP,RRW OFF : 0
* Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic
operation and its detail is shown below.

(a) In-position check is being done

It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the
contents of the following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the
following condition)
DGN0300 Position Error>Parameter No.1826 In-position width

(i) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.

1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)

(ii) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm

SV0400, SV0410, and SV0411.

- 413 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

(b) Interlock or start lock signal is input

There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which
interlock signal is used by the machine tool builder at the
parameters shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PARAM 3003 ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the
diagnostic function (PMCDGN) of the PMC.

(i) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.

(ii) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.

(c) Jog feedrate override is 0%

Check the signals using PMC's diagnostic function
(PMCDGN)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes
1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . 0000.

*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

d. NC is in a reset state
In this state, not only manual operation but also automatic
operation is disabled. Make an investigation according to
the item of "Manual operation and automatic operation are
disabled."

- 414 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct.

1423 Jog feedrate per axis

(5) Manual feed per revolution is selected

This funciton feeds an axis synchronized with spindle rotation
and whether this function is used or not is selected by the
following parameter:

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV
JRV Jog feed and incremental feed are :
0 : Of feed per minute
1 : Of feed per revolution

(a) When parameter JRV is set to 1, feed rate of the axis is

calculated by synchronizing with rotation of the spindle.
Therefore, rotate the spindle.

(b) If the axis does not move even when the spindle is rotated,
check the detector of the spindle (position coder) and the
cable between the position coder and the CNC if it is short-
circuited or ungrounded.

(6) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <M series>
For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental
feed, and manual handle feed cannot be performed.

- 415 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE

Causes and Countermeasures

If manual handle operation cannot be performed, the probable causes
include the following:
• The servo is not activated.
• Manual pulse generators are not connected properly to the I/O
module.
• The I/O link of the I/O module is not allocated, or is not allocated
properly.
• A related input signal is not input due to a parameter setting error.

1 The servo is not activated

Check that the LED on the servo amplifier indicates "0". If a number
other than "0" is indicated, the servo is not activated. In this state,
even JOG operation and automatic operation cannot be operated.
Check the servo-related parameters and the wiring.

2 Checking the manual pulse generators

(1) Cable failures (such as breaks)

Examine the cables for faults such as breaks and short-circuits,
referring to the figure below.
CNC Distributed I/O module
(motherboard) Operator's panel I/O module
First manual pulse
JA3 #1
generator
IOLINK
(JD1A) JD1B
Second manual
#2
pulse generator

Third manual pulse

#3
generator

CNC Distributed I/O module

Manual pulse
(motherboard) Operator's panel I/O module
generators
JD1A Shield JD1B JA3 Shield

SIN(01) (03)SOUT HA1(01) HA1

*SIN(02) (04)*SOUT HB1(02) HB1 First
SOUT(03) (01)SIN +5V(09) +5V
*SOUT(04) (02)*SIN 0V(12) 0V
0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V HA2(03) HA2
0V(13) (13)0V HB2(04) HB2
Second
0V(14) (14)0V +5V(18) +5V
0V(14) 0V

HA3(05) HA3
HB3(06) HB3
Third
+5V(20) +5V
0V(16) 0V

- 416 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Manual pulse generator failures

When rotated, a manual pulse generator generates the signals shown
below.
Using an oscilloscope, measure the signals from the screw terminal
block located at the rear of a manual pulse generator. If no signals are
output, measure the +5 V voltage.

Rear of a manual pulse generator

Screw terminal
block
HA: Manual pulse generator phase A signal
HB: Manual pulse generator phase B signal

+5V 0V HA HB

When rotated in the plus direction When rotated in the minus direction
1:1

+5V
HA On Off On Off
0V
+5V
HB On Off On Off
0V

1:1
1/4 1/4 (phase difference)

Check the on/off ratio and the phase difference between HA and HB.

- 417 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

3 Checking the parameters and input signals

See Section “CNC STATE DISPLAY.”

(1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the screen.

When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.

If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMC's diagnostic function(PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manuale handle mode 1 0 0

(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input.

Check the signals using PMC's diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A

G0019 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A

G0411 HS3E HS2E HS1E

When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the
machine operator's panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is
normal.

Selected axis HSnE HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA

no selection 0 0 0 0 0
1st axis 0 0 0 0 1
2nd axis 0 0 0 1 0
3rd axis 0 0 0 1 1
4th axis 0 0 1 0 0
5th axis 0 0 1 0 1
6th axis 0 0 1 1 0
7th axis 0 0 1 1 1
8th axis 0 1 0 0 0
9th axis 0 1 0 0 1
10th axis 0 1 0 1 0
11th axis 0 1 0 1 1
12th axis 0 1 1 0 0
13th axis 0 1 1 0 1
14th axis 0 1 1 1 0
15th axis 0 1 1 1 1
16th axis 1 0 0 0 0
17th axis 1 0 0 0 1

- 418 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

Selected axis HSnE HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA

18th axis 1 0 0 1 0
19th axis 1 0 0 1 1
20th axis 1 0 1 0 0
21st axis 1 0 1 0 1
22nd axis 1 0 1 1 0
23rd axis 1 0 1 1 1
24th axis 1 1 0 0 0

NOTE
In the above table, n is the number of the manual
pulse generator (MPG) and up to 3 MPGs can be
used. A feed axis is selected by 4-bit code of A to D.

(3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct

Check the following signals using PMC's PCDGN. Also confirm the
following parameters based on the parameter list.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0019 MP2 MP1

In handle mode, the travel distance per step can be changed.

MP2 MP1 Step feed Handle feed

0 0 × 1 × 1
0 1 × 10 × 10
1 0 × 100 × Mn
1 1 × 1000 × Nn

(4) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <M series>

For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental feed,
and manual handle feed cannot be performed.

- 419 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE

Points
(1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator's
manual.
(3) Check status of CNC.

Causes and Countermeasures

When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure,
based on the previous item "Jog operation cannot be done".
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select
status of CNC status display. Also, by confirming the automatic
operation status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold
and cycle stop state.

1 When cycle operation is not started (Cycle start LED does not light)

"****" is displayed at status display on screen.

(1) Mode select signal is not correct.

When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status
display is done.
MDI : Manual data input mode (MDI)
MEM : Memory operation mode
RMT : Remote operation mode
If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode
signal with following diagnosis function of PMC side
(PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 Mode select

- 0 0 0 Manual data input mode
0 0 0 1 Automatic operation (memory) mode
1 0 0 1 Remote operation mode

(2) Cycle start signal is not input

This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0
when it is released. The cycle start actuates when it changes
from 1 to 0. Check the state of the signal using PMC's diagnostic
function(PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 ST
ST : Cycle start signal

- 420 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Feed hold signal is input

Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold
button is not pressed.
Check the state of this signal using the PMC's diagnostic
function (PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
*SP : Feed hold signal

2 When an automatic operation is in progress (Cycle start LED is lit)

CNC's status display shows "STRT" on the screen.

(1) Check the contents of diagnostic nos. 002 to 014. Check the
items for which 1 is displayed at right side.
No. Message Display
a. 002 DWELL : 1 (Example)
b. 003 IN-POSITION CHECK :0
c. 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK :0
e. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK : 0
011 READING :0
f. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
g. 014 WAITING FOR RESET,ESP,RRW OFF : 0

* Items with a to g relate with an automatic operation and

their details are as follows :

(a) A dwell command is being executed

CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and
is executing the dwell command.

(b) In-position check (confirming positioning) is being done

Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis
is not completed.
Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the
servo position error amount. Check it CNC's diagnostic
function as follows:
DGN 300 Position error > PARAM1826 In-position width
Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning
of an axis completes and when the amount becomes within
the in-posiiton width, it is assumed that positioning
completes and the next block is exected.
If position error amount does not become within the in-
position width, refer to alarm SV0410 or SV411.

(c) Feedrate override is at 0%

Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a
programmed feedrate. Check the override signals using the
PMC's diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

- 421 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

• Normal override signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
*FVn : Feedrate override
<2nd override signal (option)>
Feed rate is overridden more finely using the signals below:
See MTB's manual whether this feature is equipped.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
*AFVn : 2nd feed rate override

• State of override signal

*FV7 . . . . . *FV0 *AFV7 . . . *AFV0
11111111 0% 11111111 0%
11111110 1% 11111110 1%
: : : :
10011011 100% 10011011 100%
: : : :
00000001 254% 00000001 254%
00000000 0% 00000000 0%

(d) Interlock signal is input

• Common to T series and M series

There are a plural number of interlock functions.
Parameters are set by machine tool builders for which
interlock function is used.
Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first:

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
ITL 0: Interlock signal(*IT) is valid.
ITX 0: Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid.
Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMC's
diagnostic function (PMCDGN) .

(i) Interlock signal (*IT) is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
When this bit is 0, interlock signal is input.

- 422 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

(ii) Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis's interlock
signal is input.

(iii) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached

axis is specified for travelling.
* This function is valid when CNC parameter
No.1005#7=1. For whether this function is running or
not, confirm the following signal using PMC's
diagnostic function (PMCDGN). Check the axis
concerned.

1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
DTCHn If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached.

2) The following parameter enables the control axis

detach function to the corresponding axis.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx
RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis
0: Not released
1: Released
(Equivalent to the control axis detachment signals DTCH1,
DTCH2, and so forth)

(e) CNC is waiting for spindle speed arrival signal to be input

Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in
a program.
Confirm the signal state using the PMC's diagnostic
function (PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0029 SAR
When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified
speed.
* This function is valid when PARAM 3708#0=1.

(f) Manual feedrate override is 0% (dry run)

Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog
feed.
But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an auomatic
operation,override values set with these signals become
valid to the following speed set by a parameter.

- 423 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 DRN
Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.

1410 Dry run rate

The rate when the following override value is 100%.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is
[1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000].

*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

(g) NC is in a reset state

In this case, the CNC's status display shows RESET. Refer
to item 1.

(2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function

Confirm the following parameter and signals from the PMC.

(a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate

1420 Rapid traverse rate per axis

(b) Rapid traverse override signals

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0014 ROV2 ROV1

G0096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0

(HROV-0) (HROV=1)
ROV1 ROV2 Override *HROV6 . . . *HROV0 Override
0 0 100% 1111111 0%
1 1 50% 1111110 1%
0 1 25% : :
1 1 Fo 0011011 100%

1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate

- 424 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Only feed (other than G00) does not function

(a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect.

Feedrate (other than G00) is clamped at this upper feedrate.

1430 Maximum feedrate in each axis

(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev)

(i) Position coder does not rotate

Check the connection between spindle and position
coder
The following failure is considered:
- T iming belt is broken
- Key is removed
- Coupling is loose
- Connector of signal cable is loosened

(ii) Position coder is faulty

(c) Thread cutting does not operate

(i) Position coder does not rotate

Check the connection between spindle and position
coder
The following failure is considered:
- Timing belt is broken
- Key is removed
- Coupling is loose
- Connector of signal cable is loosened

(ii) Position coder is faulty

Position coder is connected to the spindle amplifier
when serial interface spindle is used or connected to
the CNC when analog interface spindle is used.
For details of connection, refer to the following.

Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read
correctly, can be judged also by the spindle speed display
on the screen (position screen).
(However, it is not displayed when parameter DPS (No.
3105#2) is se to 0).

- 425 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

• αi series spindle amplifier

CNC Position coder

JA7B JYA3
JA41 SPM
JA7A Spindle motor

Position coder
JA7B JYA3
SPM
JA7A Spindle motor

(d) A cutting feed block containing a feedrate command (F

command) with a feedrate of 0 is specified.
If FCO (bit 7 of parameter No. 1404) is set to 1, alarm
PS0011 is not issued even if a feedrate command (F
command) with a feedrate of 0 is issued.

- 426 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF

Points
(1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator's panel.
(3) Confirm CNC's diagnostic function.

Causes and Countermeasures

The reason why cycle start LED signal (STL) has turned off are
displayed on CNC's diagnostic numbers 020 to 025 as follows:

020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

021 REST BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

a. Emergency stop signal

b. External reset signal
c. Reset button on MDI
d. Reset & rewind signal
e. Servo alarm
f. Feed hold by switching mode
g. Single block stop

* Details of signals a to g are as follows:

Confirm the signals concerned using diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).

a. Emergency stop is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0008 *ESP

G0008 *ESP
*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :

b. External reset signal is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS
#7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input.

* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02

when an M02 is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input.

c. Reset button on the MDI is pressed

An automatic operation is put into a reset status when <RESET> key
on the MDI panel is pressed.

- 427 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

d. Reset & rewind signal is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 RRW
#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input.

* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30

when an M30 is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input.

e. Servo alarm has generated

When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the
reset state and operation stop.

f. Cycle operation is in a feed hold state

The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases:
(1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a
manual operation mode.
(2) Feed hold signal is input.

• Mode select signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Memory edit(EDIT) 0 1 1
Automatic
operation Automatic operation (AUTO) 0 0 1
Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 0
Manual Handle/step 1 0 1
operation TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0

• Feed hold signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
#5(*SP) : When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input.

g. It become single block stop during automatic operation

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 SBK
#1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input.

- 428 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE

POWER IS TURNED ON

Causes and Countermeasures

If nothing is displayed on the LCD at power-up or if the LCD is
locked with "GRAPHIC IS READY." or the slot status screen
displayed, the probable causes include the following:

• For the LCD-mounted type

- The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
- The necessary software is not installed.
- The motherboard, display control card, CPU card, or inverter
board is defective.

• For the stand-alone type

- The LCD unit is not connected to the power supply.
- The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
- The LCD unit is not connected to the CNC with the optical cable
or the cable is broken.
- The necessary software is not installed.
- The main CPU board, display control card, or LCD unit is
defective.
If "GRAPHIC IS READY.BOOT START". is displayed, this
indicates that the display control circuit has started up normally but
that the CNC has not started up.

• LCD display
Referring to the Section “LED display”, check the LCD on/off status
of the main board.
If the motherboard has started up normally and the LCD display
indicates normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display
system, such as a cable not connected or a defective inverter board.
If the LCD display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the
probable causes include defective hardware (or installation failure)
and the necessary software not installed.

• Connection of the LCD and backlight cables

Check that the LCD and backlight cables are connected firmly to the
corresponding connectors.
These cables are connected before shipment from FANUC. This
check is, however, required because the cables may be disconnected
during maintenance.

• The necessary software is not installed

If necessary software is not stored in the FROM module, the CNC
may not start up.

- 429 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

• Defective printed circuit board

If the motherboard or display control card is defective or is not
correctly installed, the CNC may not start up.
Check that the card PCBs are engaged firmly with the connectors on
the motherboard.
If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
display control card, CPU card, and motherboard.

• Installation positions of the display control card and CPU card

Referring to the chapter for card installation, check the installation
status.

- 430 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.8 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE

PERFORMED INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED
PROPERLY

Causes and Countermeasures

If the I/O Link is not established, if the signals from an I/O device
cannot be input normally to the CNC, or if the signals from the CNC
cannot be output to an I/O device, the probable causes include the
following:
- The I/O device is not turned on, or the power supply is not at the
appropriate voltage.
- The I/O Link cable is not connected correctly or appropriately.
- The input/output signals are not connected correctly.
- I/O Link allocation is not performed, or is not performed properly.

• PMC alarm
NO I/O DEVICE
If "NO I/O DEVICE" is displayed on the alarm screen of the PMC, no
I/O devices are recognized.

• IOCHK screen of the PMC

By selecting [PMCDGN], [IOCHK], and [IOLNK] in this order from
the PMC screen, the I/O devices recognized by the CNC are displayed.
From this screen, the devices that are connected normally can be
determined.

Screen display example

GROUP ID KIND OF UNIT00
00 A9 I/O MODULE01
01 A8 OTHER UNIT

This example indicates that the I/O Link is as shown in the figure
below.

I/O module for

Control unit connector panel
Group 0

Operator's panel I/O

module
Group 1

- 431 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

• Checking the power supplies of the I/O devices

Check that the connected I/O devices are connected properly to the
power supplies and that the voltages are as prescribed.
Check that the power-on sequence is correct.
Time at which an I/O device is to be turned on
Before the CNC is turned on or within 500 ms after the
CNC is turned on
When the CNC is turned off, the I/O devices must also be turned off.
(Otherwise, the I/O Link may not be established the next time the NC
is turned on.)

• Connection of cables
As in the example shown on the previous page, I/O Link cables are
used to connect JD1As and JD1Bs.
JD1A represents an upper unit while JD1B represents a lower unit.
Check that the cables are connected correctly.

• Connection of I/O signals

Check that the input/output signals to be connected to each I/O device
are connected correctly.
For operator's panel I/O modules and for connector panel I/O modules,
also check that the 0 V or +24 V input signal is connected to the
common pin and that the +24 V output signal is connected to the DO
common pin.

• I/O Link allocation

Check that I/O Link allocation has been performed correctly.
Selecting [EDIT] and then [MODULE] from the PMC screen causes
the allocation edit screen to be displayed.
After editing allocation, write the changes to the FROM on the [I/O]
screen. Otherwise, the changes will be lost when the power is turned
off.
The checking of allocation requires a Ladder editing card.

- 432 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.9 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT TO AN

UNEXPECTED ADDRESS

If data is input to an invalid address in a connector panel I/O unit (for

example, data that should be input to X004 is actually input to X010
in a connector panel I/O unit), the most likely causes are as follows:

(1) The I/O Link allocation is wrong.

→ Perform the check described in Section 11.8.

(2) The unit-to-unit cables (CA52-to-CA53) are not connected

correctly.
If the connection is wrong, expansion unit 1 is allocated the
address of expansion unit 3, as shown below.
→ Connect the unit-to-unit cables as shown below:

Correct connection (the allocation starts with X0)

CA52 CA53 CA52 CA53 CA52 CA53

Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3

X0-2 X3-5 X6-8 X9-11

Incorrect connection (the allocation starts with X0)

CA52 CA52 CA53 CA53 CA52 CA53

Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3

X0-2 X9-11 X6-8 X3-5

(3) The setting of the rotary switch on an expansion unit is wrong

If the rotary switch is set to 1, one unit number is skipped. If set
to 2, two unit numbers are skipped. Usually, the setting must be
0. (For those units without a rotary switch, unit numbers cannot
be skipped.)
→ See the following example and refer to the Connection
Manual (Hardware) (B-63943EN).

Example) Rotary switch setting on expansion unit 1=1

CA52 CA53

Basic Expansion 1

X0-2 X6-8 ⇐ X3 to X5 are skipped.

- 433 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS OUTPUT

TO AN EXPANSION UNIT

The most likely cause is that power is not being supplied to the
expansion unit.
→ Check whether 24-V power is supplied to 18P and 50P of the
expansion unit, DI and DO signals are not input and output.
→ Check whether 24-V power is supplied to 1P and 3P of the
expansion unit, when DI signals are input and DO signals are not
output.

- 434 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.11 ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 (READER/PUNCHER

INTERFACE ALARM)

START

YES
Alarm SR0085?

NO - Check baud rate and

other I/O parameters
YES - I/O device is faulty
Alarm SR0086?

NO
NO
Is I/O parameter
correct?

YES - Reset the parameter

according to the item of
data I/O.

OFF
Is power of I/O ?

ON
- Turn on I/O device

NO
Is cable connection
right?

YES
- Connect the cable
- I/O device is faulty
- Mother board or serial
communication board
is faulty
Alarm SR0087?

- I/O device is faulty

- Mother board or serial
communication board
is faulty

Causes
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.
Check the following setting data and parameters.
(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty.
(c) Mother board or serial communication board is faulty.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.

- 435 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

Countermeasures
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.
Check the following setting data and parameters:

• Setting
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO)
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device.
If punch code does not match, alarm SR0086 will generate.

• Parameter
Value of parameter 0020
0 1 2
Function
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0
Type of I/O device 102 112 122
Baud rate 103 113 123
0135#3 - - -
Communication method
RS-232C
MOTHER BOARD
Connector
JD56A JD36A

NOTE
Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit
numbers.
Example) 0101#7: bit7 of parameter No. 0101.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
0111
0121
NFD 0: Feed is output before and after data in data output
(FANUC PPR)
1: Feed is not output (standard).
ASI 0: Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition)
1: Data input code is ASCII.
SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
1: No. of stop bits is 2.

- 436 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

0102 Type of I/O devie

0112
0122 Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE
0 RS-232-C (if the following units are not used)
1 FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2 (bubble cassette)
FANUC CASSETTE F1 (Old type FLOPPY CASSETTE
2
ADAPTOR)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate,
FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR,
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H,
FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G,
6
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

0103 Baud rete

0113
0123 Value Baud rete 11 9600
7 600 12 19200
8 1200
9 2400
10 4800

(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble

(i) Check whether the setting on communication of external

I/O device or host computer is the same as that of the CNC.
(baud rate, stop bits,etc.)
If they are not the same, change the setting.

(ii) When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is

possible to realize communication using the spare I/O
device.

(c) Main board or serial communication control module is faulty

(i) When parameter No.0020 is 0, 1, or 2 (JD56A, JD36A of

Main board)
Replace the module since main board may be faulty.

(d) Cable between CNC and I/O device is faulty.

Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection.

- 437 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

• Connection

Main board
RS232C (JD56A)
Punch panel

RS232C (JD36A)
Tape reader

• Cable connection
RS232C (JD56A)
(JD36A)
Punch panel

RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
Connector : Half-pitch Connector :DBM-25S
G G
20-pins (PCR)

- 438 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.12 ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS

ABNORMAL)

Contents
Reference position return was executed when the following condition
is not satisfied:
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis
is moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed
equivalent to 128 pulses of position error amount (DGN300).

Countermeasures
START

Check whether position gain is greater than 128

pulses (DGN 300) before or during reference position Position error amount :
return. DGN 300

YES
128 or more (1) Next page

NO

Raise the speed

Check feed rate command:

PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate [mm/min]
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate [mm/min]
PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain [0.01sec-1]
F×5000/3
Position error =
G × detection unit [µm/PLUSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1µm)
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is
4 on the position display screen, detection unit is 0.1 µm.

Check rapid traverse override signals : Override

ROV1 ROV2
ROV1 DGN 014.0
0 0 100%
ROV2 DGN 014.1 0 1 50%
1 0 25%
PRM 1421 Fo rate 1 1 Fo rate

Check reference position return deceleration signal

*DEC1 to *DEC8 DGN 009.0 to 009.7
When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed
rate becomes FL rate.
PRM 1425 FL rate

- 439 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

(1)

Check whether the motor rotated more than one

rotation (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than
128 pulses of position error amount.

NO Return start position is too close

Rotated ?
- Change the return start position.
- Move the machine at faster that 128
YES
pulses for more than one rotation to
wards RP.

Check that voltage of Pulsecoder is higher than 4.75 V.

To measure Pulsecoder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on
pulse coder PCB at across + and - or +5V and 0V terminals.

NO
More than 4.75V

YES

Hardware failure Pulse coder power voltage is low

- Pulse coder is faulty
Change Pulsecoder or motor

CAUTION
(1) After the Pulsecoder or motor is exchanged,
reference position or machine's standard point may
be different from former one. Please set it correctly.
Reference
A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if
speed is lower that this, one-rotation signal does not
function stably, causing improper position detection.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed
corresponding to a positional deviation of 1280
pulses or more is required.
Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as
the minimum positional deviation with which
reference position return is possible. (If the
parameter is set to 0, 128 is assumed as the
minimum positional deviation. If bit 0 of parameter
No. 2000 is set to 1, a value equal to ten times the
set value is used for checking.)

- 440 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.13 ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION

RETURN)

Absolute position data in the serial Pulsecoder was lost.

(This alarm will be generated when serial Pulsecoder is exchanged or
position feedback signal cable of the serial Pulsecoder is
disconnected).

Countermeasures
Machine position must be memorized using the following method:

• When reference position return function is present

1 Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for
which this alarm was generated.When manual reference position
return cannot be executed because of an another alarm, set
parameter No. 1815#5 to 0 and release the alarm and perform
manual operation.
2 Press RESET key at the end of reference position return to release
the alarm.

• When reference position return function is not present

Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference
position.

• When serial Pulsecoder is changed

Since the reference position is different from the former one, change
the grid shift value (parameter No. 1850) to correct the position.

Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx
APCx Position detector
0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute Pulsecoder)
APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the
absolute position detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding

- 441 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.14 ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF)

Causes and Countermeasures

This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo
amplifier does not turn on or if the signal turns off during operation.
There are cases in which this alarm is issued because another servo
alarm is issued. If this occurs, first take the action for the first alarm.
Check the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier. The servo
amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be defective.

• VRDY

CNC Servo amplifier

MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier

(Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)

VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC

(Notifies that the servo is ready)

The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).

• Example of connection around the amplifier (Typical example)

(Servo (Servo
amplifier) amplifier) Control
power
supply
Emergency stop
circuit
Serial spindle

Servo Servo Servo

motor motor motor

3-phase AC
Circuit
breaker reactor
Single-
phase Circuit
breaker

- 442 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

Check items
- Is the PSM control power supply on?
- Has an emergency stop been canceled?
- Is a terminating connector connected to the JX1B connector of
the terminating amplifier?
- Is MCC on? If there is an external MCC sequence in addition to
the MCC contact of the PSM, check that sequence also.
- Is the power for driving MCC supplied?
- Is the breaker on?
- Has some alarm been issued in the PSM or SPM?

• Replacing the servo amplifier

If no problem is found in the power magnetic circuit around the
amplifier, replace the servo amplifier.

• Replacing the axis control cards

If the above action does not solve the problem, replace the axis
control cards.

- 443 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.15 ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON)

Causes and Countermeasures

This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo
amplifier remains on.
The servo amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be
defective.

• VRDY

CNC Servo amplifier

MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier

(Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)

VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC

(Notifies that the servo is ready)

The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).
This alarm is issued if VRDY remains on when the CNC turns
MCON off or if VRDY turns on before the CNC turns MCON on.

• Replacing the servo amplifier

The servo amplifier may be defective. Replace the servo amplifier.

• Replacing the axis control cards

If replacing the servo amplifier does not solve the problem, replace
the axis control cards.

- 444 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.16 ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED)

ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED)

Causes and Countermeasures

Alarm SV0462 is issued if a slave (servo amplifier) cannot receive
correct data due to an FSSB communication error.
Alarm SV0463 is issued if the CNC cannot receive correct data due to
an FSSB communication error.
If these alarms are issued, the alarm message indicates the number of
the defective axis (axis name).

• Servo amplifier or optical cable

Any of the optical cables between the CNC control unit and the
amplifier corresponding to the axis number indicated in the alarm
message may be defective.
Or, any of the first amplifier to the amplifier corresponding to that
axis number may be defective.

• Axis control cards

The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.

- 445 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.17 ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS

ABNORMAL)

Digital servo parameters are abnormal.

(Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.)

Causes
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:
Parameter No. 2020 : Motor format number
Parameter No. 2022 : Motor rotation direction
Parameter No. 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
Parameter No. 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
Parameter No. 1023 : Servo axis number
Parameter No. 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Parameter No. 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.

2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0.

Parameter No. 2047 : Observer parameter

3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters.

Refer to setcion 9.1 "Initial Setting of Servo Parameters" .

- 446 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.18 ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT)

Causes and Countermeasures

This alarm is issued if the ambient temperature of the CNC control
unit is abnormally high. As an installation condition, the ambient
temperature of the CNC must not exceed 58°C (for LCD-mounted
type CNC) or 55°C (for stand-alone type CNC).

• Ambient temperature
A temperature monitoring circuit is installed on the main board, and
causes this alarm to be issued if the ambient temperature is
abnormally high.
Take appropriate action to the cabinet that houses the CNC control
unit so that the temperature falls within the proper temperature range
(0 to 58°C (for LCD-mounted type CNC) or 0 to 55°C (for stand-
alone type CNC)).
If it is obvious that the ambient temperature is not abnormal, the main
board may be defective.

- 447 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.19 ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR)

Causes and Countermeasures

This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the fan motors, such as
the stoppage of a fan motor during the operation of the CNC.

• Fan motors
Fan motors are installed in the uppermost portion of the CNC control
unit. Each fan motor is attached with an alarm detector circuit, which
notifies the CNC of a fault such as the stoppage of the fan motor,
thereby issuing this alarm.
If this alarm is issued, replace the fan motor according to "Replacing
the fan motor".

- 448 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.20 ALARM SV5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)

ALARM SV5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT)

Causes and Countermeasures

These alarms are issued due to a failure in the optical cable, axis
control card, or a slave such as a servo amplifier connected to the
FSSB.

No. Message Description

SV5134 FSSB:OPEN In the initialization, the FSSB could not be
READY TIME in an open ready sate. The axis card is
OUT thought to be defective.
SV5137 FSSB:CONFIGUR An FSSB configuration error occurred.
ATION ERROR The connecting amplifier type is
incompatible with the FSSB setting value.
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME The initialization of the FSSB was
OUT completed, but it could not be opened.
Or, the connection between the CNC and
the amplifier in is incorrect.

• Checking the parameter settings

Check that the FSSB-related parameters are set correctly.

• Power supplies of the servo amplifiers

Check the power supplies of the servo amplifiers connected to the
FSSB.

• Replacing the axis control cards, optical cables, and servo amplifiers
Replace the axis control cards on the CNC.
Replace the optical cables and servo amplifiers connected to the
FSSB, one at a time, to identify the defective item.

- 449 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.21 ALARM SV5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL)

Causes and Countermeasures

The number of servo amplifiers recognized by the FSSB is
insufficient, compared with the number of controlled axes.

• FSSB setting screen

If this alarm is issued, display the amplifier setting screen from the
FSSB setting screen. Only the servo amplifiers recognized on the
FSSB are displayed.

• Optical cable or servo amplifier

The optical cable that connects together the last recognized amplifier
and the next one may be defective.
Or, either of the amplifiers connected together with that optical cable
may be defective. Check the power supplies of the amplifiers.

• Power fault of a servo amplifier

This alarm may be issued if a power fault occurs in a servo amplifier.
A power fault occurs if the amplifier control power supply voltage
drops, if the +5 V conductor of the Pulsecoder cable is ground, or for
other reasons.

• Axis control cards

The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.

- 450 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.22 SERVO ALARMS

For an explanation of the following servo alarms, refer to the FANUC

SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual (B-65285EN) or
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance Manual (B-65165E).

Number Message Contents

SV0417 n AXIS : ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
SV0420 n AXIS : SYNC TORQUE EXCESS In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of torque between a master and slave axes
exceeded the parameter (No. 2031) setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master axis.
SV0421 n AXIS : EXCESS ERROR(SEMI-FULL) The difference between the feedback from the semi and full
sides exceeded the setting of parameter No.1729.
SV0422 n AXIS : EXCESS VELOCITY IN In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
TORQUE exceeded.
SV0423 n AXIS : EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified
as a parameter was exceeded.
SV0430 n AXIS : SV MOTOR OVERHEAT The servo motor has overheated.
SV0431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD PSM : Overheat
β series SVU : Overheat
SV0432 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT CONTROL PSM : The control power supply voltage has dropped.
PSMR : The control power supply voltage has dropped.
β series SVU : The control power supply voltage has
dropped.
SV0433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK PSM : Low DC link voltage
PSMR : Low DC link voltage
α series SVU : Low DC link voltage
β series SVU : Low DC link voltage
SV0434 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM : Low control power voltage
SV0435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM : Low DC link voltage
SV0436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL(OVC) The digital servo software detected a software thermal
(OVC).
SV0437 n AXIS : CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER PSM : Overcurrent on input circuit section.
SV0438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT SVM : Motor overcurrent
α series SVU : Motor overcurrent
β series SVU : Motor overcurrent
SV0439 n AXIS : CNV. OVER VOLT DC LINK PSM : The DC link voltage is too high.
PSMR : The DC link voltage is too high.
β series SVU : The DC link voltage is too high.
SV0440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECELERATION PSMR : Excessive generative discharge
POW. α series SVU : Excessive generative discharge, or abnormal
error in generative power circuit
SV0441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the
motor current detection circuit.
SV0442 n AXIS : CNV. CHARGE FAILURE PSM : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abnormal.
PSMR : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abnormal.
SV0443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE PSM : Internal cooling fan failure.
PSMR : Internal cooling fan failure.
β series SVU : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM : Internal cooling fan failure.

- 451 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

Number Message Contents

SV0445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a disconnected
Pulsecoder.
SV0446 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT ALARM The hardware detected a disconnected built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0447 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT(EXT) The hardware detected a disconnected separate detector.
SV0448 n AXIS : UNMATCHED FEEDBACK The sign of the feedback signal from the standalone detector
ALARM is opposite to that from the feedback signal from the built–on
Pulsecoder.
SV0449 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM SVM : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an alarm.
α series SVU : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected
an alarm.
SV0453 n AXIS : SPC SOFT DISCONNECT Software disconnection alarm of the α Pulsecoder.
ALARM Turn off the power to the CNC, then remove and insert the
Pulsecoder cable. If this alarm is issued again, replace the
Pulsecoder.
SV0456 n AXIS : ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP An attempt was made to set the current loop that could not be
set.
The amplifier pulse module in use does not comply with HIGH
SPEED HRV. Or, requirements to control are not satisfied in
the system.
SV0457 n AXIS : ILLEGAL HI HRV(250US) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for
use when the current loop was set to 250 µs.
SV0458 n AXIS : CURRENT LOOP ERROR The specified current loop differs from the actual current loop.
SV0459 n AXIS : HI HRV SETTING ERROR For two axes whose servo axis numbers (parameter No.
1023) are consecutively even and odd numbers, HIGH
SPEED HRV control is possible for one axis and impossible
for the other.
SV0460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT The FSSB connection was discontinued. Or, the FSSB
connection cable was disconnected or broken.
The amplifier was turned off .
In the amplifier, the low-voltage alarm occurred.
SV0461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP. INTERFACE Both axes of a 2-axis amplifier were assigned to Fast type
interface. Or, axis setting is in error.
SV0462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received on a slave side
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received in the servo software
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA FAILED An attempt was made to write maintenance information on
the amplifier maintenance screen, but it failed.
SV0465 n AXIS : READ ID DATA FAILED A read of the ID information for the amplifier has failed at
power-on.
SV0466 n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP. COMBINATION The maximum current of an amplifier is different to that of a
motor. Or, the connection command for an amplifier is
incorrect. The parameter setting is incorrect
SV0467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF AXIS When functions that require hardware for two axes are
incorporated with one axis, the setting is incorrect.
SV0468 n AXIS : HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for
use when the controlled axis of an amplifier for which HIGH
SPEED HRV control could not be used.
SV0600 n AXIS : INV. DC LINK OVER CURRENT SVM : DC link overcurrent.
β SVU : DC link overcurrent.
SV0601 n AXIS : INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE SVM : Radiator cooling fan failure.
β SVU : Radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0602 n AXIS : INV. OVERHEAT SVM : The servo motor has overheated.

- 452 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

Number Message Contents

SV0603 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM(OH) SVM : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
overheat alarm.
β SVU : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
overheat alarm.
SV0604 n AXIS : AMP. COMMUNICATION The communication between SVM and PSM is in error.
ERROR
SV0605 n AXIS : CNV. EX. DISCHARGE POW. PSMR : The motor regenerative power is too much.
SV0606 n AXIS : CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE PSM : External radiator cooling fan failure.
PSMR : External radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0607 n AXIS : CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE PSM : The input power supply has a missing phase.
PSMR : The input power supply has a missing phase.

If the hardware on the CNC is suspected to be defective as a result of

examination, replace the axis control cards.

- 453 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.23 SPC ALARMS

For an explanation of the following SPC alarms (serial Pulsecoder

alarms), refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance
Manual (B-65285EN) or FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series
Maintenance Manual (B-65165E).

Number Message Contents

SV0360 n AXIS: ABNORMAL CHECKSUM (INT) A checksum error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0361 n AXIS: ABNORMAL PHASE DATA (INT) A phase data error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0364 n AXIS: SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the built-in
Pulsecoder.
SV0365 n AXIS: BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0366 n AXIS: PULSE MISS (INT) A pulse error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0367 n AXIS: COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0368 n AXIS: SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT) Communication data from the built-in Pulsecoder cannot be
received.
SV0369 n AXIS: DATA TRANS. ERROR (INT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data
being received from the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0380 n AXIS: BROKEN LED (EXT) An LED error occured in the separate detector.
SV0381 n AXIS: ABNORMAL PHASE (EXT LIN) A phase data error occurred in the separate linear scale.
SV0382 n AXIS: COUNT MISS (EXT) A pulse error occurred in the separate detector.
SV0383 n AXIS: PULSE MISS (EXT) A count error occurred in the separate detector.
SV0384 n AXIS: SOFT PHASE ALARM (EXT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the separate
detector.
SV0385 n AXIS: SERIAL DATA ERROR (EXT) Communication data from the separate detector cannot be
received.
SV0386 n AXIS: DATA TRANS. ERROR (EXT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data
being received from the separate detector.
SV0387 n AXIS: ABNORMAL ENCODER (EXT) An error occurs in the separate detector. For details, contact
the manufacturer of the scale.

- 454 -
B-63945EN/01 11.TROUBLESHOOTING

11.24 SPINDLE ALARMS

For an explanation of the following spindle alarms, refer to the

FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual (B-
65285EN) or FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series Maintenance
Manual (B-65165E).

Number Contents
SP9001 to later: Spindle_n n-th spindle alarm (SPM display 01 or larger)

- 455 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/01

11.25 SYSTEM ALARMS

If an error that disables the CNC from continuing its normal operation
is detected, the screen display as shown below appears and the
operation stops.

If a system alarm is issued, note down the states of the alarm and 7-
segment LEDs on the main board, and the LEDs on the option board,
then contact FANUC.

- 456 -
APPENDIX
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

A ALARM LIST
A.1 ALARM LIST (CNC).............................................................. 460
A.2 ALARM LIST (PMC).............................................................. 505
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE)....................................... 525
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) ................................... 532

- 459 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

A.1 ALARM LIST (CNC)

(1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm)

Number Message Description

PS0003 TOO MANY DIGIT Data entered with more digits than permitted in the NC
instruction word.
The number of permissible digits varies according to the function
and the word.
PS0004 INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORDS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format. This
alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not contain
a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
PS0005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format. This
alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not contain
a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
PS0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or
system variable where no minus signal may be specified.
PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
PS0009 IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS An illegal address was specified, or parameter 1020 is not set.
PS0010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code is specified.
PS0011 FEED ZERO ( COMMAND ) The cutting feedrate instructed by an F code has been set to 0.
This alarm is also generated if the F code instructed for the S
code is set extremely small in a rigid tapping instruction as the
tool cannot cut at the programmed lead.
PS0014 CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading /
synchronous feed. Modify the program.
PS0015 TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS AXES A move command was specified for more axes than can be
controlled by simultaneous axis control.
Either add on the simultaneous axis control extension option, or
divide the number of programmed move axes into two blocks.
PS0020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS An arc was specified for which the difference in the radius at the
start and end points exceeds the value set in parameter No.
2410. Check arc center codes I, J and K in the program.
The tool path when parameter No. 2410 is set to a large value is
spiral.
PS0021 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not specified
simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation or involute interpolation.
To enable programming of 3 or more axes, the helical
interpolation option must be added to each of the relevant axes.
PS0022 R OR I,J,K COMMAND NOT FOUND The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or
coordinate I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to the
center of the arc.
PS0025 CIRCLE CUT IN RAPID (F0) F0 (rapid traverse in inverse feed or feed specified by an F code
with 1–digit number) was specified during circular interpolation
(G02, G03) or involute interpolation (G02.2, G03.2).

- 460 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS0027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length
offset type C.
Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool
length offset type C.
Multiple axes were specified for the same block when the tool
length compensation type is C.
PS0028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not specified
simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation or involute interpolation.
To enable programming of 3 or more axes, the helical
interpolation option must be added to each of the relevant axes.
PS0029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE Illegal offset No.
PS0030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER An illegal offset No. was specified.
This alarm is also generated when the tool shape offset No.
exceeds the maximum number of tool offset sets in the case of
tool offset memory B.
PS0031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 The relevant data input or option could not be found for the L No.
of G10.
No data setting address such as P or R was specified.
An address command not concerned with data setting was
specified. An address varies with the L No.
The sign or decimal point of the specified address is in error, or
the specified address is out of range.
PS0032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount
by system variables, the offset amount was excessive.
PS0033 NO INTERSECTION AT CUTTER The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection
COMPENSATION calculation in cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify
the program.
PS0034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP/EXT In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, a startup or
BLK cancellation is performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the
program.
PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of
group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the
PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override by
address Q.
PS0037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during
G41/G42 cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
PS0038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc
BLOCK start point or end point coincides with the arc center. Modify the
program.
PS0039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a cancel,
G41,G42 or switching between G41 and G42 in G41 and G42 commands
(cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation). The
program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner
R. Modify the program.
PS0041 INTERFERENCE IN CUTTER In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, excessive cutting
COMPENSATION may occur. Modify the program.

- 461 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS0042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in tool compensation or
three-dimensional cutter compensation. Modify the program.
PS0044 G27-G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode. Modify
CYC the program.
PS0045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83) In a high-speed peck drilling cycle (G73) or peck drilling cycle
(G83), the amount of each-time cutting is not specified by
address Q, or Q0 is specified. Modify the program.
PS0046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN A command for a return to the second, third or fourth reference
COMMAND position is error. (The address P command is in error.)
Although an option for a return to the third or fourth reference
position was not set, 3 or 4 was specified in address P.
PS0047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Two or more parallel axes (in parallel with a basic axis) have
been specified upon start-up of three-dimensional tool
compensation or three-dimensional coordinate conversion.
PS0048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND Start-up of three-dimensional tool compensation or three-
dimensional coordinate conversion has been attempted, but the
three basic axes used when Xp, Yp, or Zp is omitted are not set
in parameter No. 1022.
PS0049 ILLEGAL COMMAND(G68,G69) When three-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68 or G69)
was specified, the tool compensation was not canceled. Or,
programs of three-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68,
G69) and tool compensation (G43, G44 or G49) were not
nested. Or, the three-dimensional coordinate conversion was
specified during the tool length compensation and another tool
length compensation was specified.
PS0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK block. Modify the program.
PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
PS0052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01 (or
vertical line). Modify the program.
PS0053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, J, K
and R are specified.
PS0054 NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner
CHF/CNR R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program.
PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than
chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.
PS0056 NO END POINT & ANGLE IN In direct dimension drawing programming, both an end point and
CHF/CNR an angle were specified in the block next to the block in which
only an angle was specified (Aa). Modify the program.
PS0057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension
drawing programming. Modify the program.
PS0058 END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing
programming. Modify the program.

- 462 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS0060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data input/output]
The specified number could not be found for program number
and sequence number searches.
Although input/output of a pot number of tool data or offset
input was requested, no tool number was input after power on.
The tool data corresponding to the entered tool number could
not be found.
[External workpiece number search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece
number could not be found.
PS0061 P OR Q COMMAND IS NOT IN THE Address P or Q is not specified in multiple repetitive cycle (G70,
MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES G71, G72, or G73) command.
BLOCK
PS0062 THE CUTTING AMOUNT IS ILLEGAL A zero or a negative value was specified in a multiple repetitive
IN THE ROUGH CUTTING CYCLE canned rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72) as the depth of cut.
PS0063 THE BLOCK OF A SPECIFIED The sequence number specified by addresses P and Q in
SEQUENCE NUMBER IS NOT multiple repetitive cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) command
FOUND cannot be searched.
PS0064 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned rough-
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(FIRST cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command for the first plane axis
AXES) was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
PS0065 G00/G01 IS NOT IN THE FIRST In the first block of the shape program specified by P of the
BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73), G00
or G01 was not specified.
PS0066 UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN THE An unavailable command was found in a multiple repetitive
MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) command block.
BLOCK
PS0067 THE MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES A multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73)
IS NOT IN THE PART PROGRAM command is not registered in a tape memory area.
STORAGE
PS0069 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70,
IS AN ILLEGAL COMMAND G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or corner R in
the last block is terminated in the middle.
PS0070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.
Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
PS0071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with
specified program number was not found in program number
search. Check the data.
PS0072 DATA NOT FOUND The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125
(option), 200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option). Delete
unnecessary programs and execute program registration again.
PS0073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs
and execute program registration again.
PS0074 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the
USE program number.
PS0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was
protected.

- 463 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS0076 PROGRAM NOT FOUND The specified program is not found in the subprogram call,
macro call or graphic copy.
The M, G, T or S codes are called by a P instruction other than
that in an M98, G65, G66, G66.1 or interrupt type custom macro,
and a program is called by a No. 2 auxiliary function code.
This alarm is also generated when a program is not found by
these calls.
PS0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the
permissible range.
Another subprogram call was executed during an external
memory subprogram call.
PS0078 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The specified sequence No. was not found during sequence
number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in GOTO––
and M99P–– was not found.
PS0079 PROGRAM NOT MATCH The program in memory does not match the program stored on
tape.
Multiple programs cannot be matched continuously when
parameter No. 2200#3 is set to “1”.
Set parameter No. 2200#3 to “0” before executing a match.
PS0080 G37 MEASURING POSITION The measurement position arrival signal became “1” before or
REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT after the area specified by parameter No. 7331 in automatic tool
PROPERLY INPUT length measurement (G37).
PS0081 G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED No H code was specified in the automatic tool measurement
instruction (G37) block.
PS0082 G37 SPECIFIED WITH H CODE H code and automatic tool length measurement (G37) were
specified in the same block.
PS0083 G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND No axis or 2 or more axes were specified in the automatic tool
measurement instruction (G37) block.
PS0090 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE 1. The reference position return cannot be performed normally
because the reference position return start point is too close
to the reference position or the speed is too slow. Separate
the start point far enough from the reference position, or
specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference position return.
2. An attempt was made to set the zero position for the
absolute position detector by return to the reference position
when it was impossible to set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the zero
position of the absolute position detector after turning the
CNC and servo amplifier off and then on again.
PS0091 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION Manual return to the reference position cannot be performed
RETURN IS NOT PERFORMED IN when automatic operation is halted. Perform the manual return
FEED HOLD to the reference position when automatic operation is stopped or
reset.
PS0092 ZERO RETURN CHECK (G27) The axis specified in G27 has not returned to zero.
ERROR Reprogram so that the axis returns to zero.
PS0094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After
CHG) the automatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system
setting operation was performed.) Perform the correct operation
according to the User's manual.
PS0095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After
CHG) the automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece
offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation
according to the User's manual.

- 464 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS0096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After
CHG) the automatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset
amount changed.) Perform the correct operation according to
the User's manual.
PS0097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (AUTO P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After
EXEC) power ON, after emergency stop or alarms PS0094 to 0097
reset, no automatic operation is performed.) Perform automatic
operation.
PS0098 G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE RETURN A command of the program restart was specified without the
reference position return operation after power ON or
emergency stop, and G28 was found during search. Perform the
reference position return.
PS0099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. After completion of search in program restart, a move command
SEARCH is given with MDI.
PS0101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit
operation. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while
pressing <PROG>, and only the program being edited will be
deleted. Register the deleted program.
PS0109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the G08 code,
or no value was specified.
PS0110 OVERFLOW :INTEGER An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations.
PS0111 OVERFLOW :FLOATING A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out of
range during arithmetic calculations.
PS0112 ZERO DIVIDE An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro.
PS0113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is
commanded. Modify the program.
PS0114 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The format used in an expression in a custom macro statement
is in error. The parameter tape format is in error.
PS0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE An illegal No. was specified in a local variable, common variable
or a system variable in a custom macro.
PS0116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left side
of an expression a variable that can only be used on the right
side of an expression.
PS0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro.
The nesting level including function brackets is 5.
PS0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of
range.
PS0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro.
PS0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the
GOTO/WHILE/DO main program in the MDI or DNC mode.
PS0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
PS0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in
ERROR error.
PS0126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed the
permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3).
PS0127 DUPLICATE NC,MACRO An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the
STATEMENT same block.
PS0128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The specified sequence No. could not be found for sequence
NUMBER number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in GOTO--
and M99P-- could not be found.

- 465 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS0129 USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT G is used as an argument in a custom macro call. G can be
specified as an argument only in an every-block call (G66.1).
PS0130 NC AND PMC AXIS ARE The NC command and the PMC axis control command were
CONFLICTED conflicted. Modify the program or ladder.
PS0136 SPOS AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME The spindle positioning axis and another axis are specified in the
TIME same block.
PS0137 M-CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME BLK. The spindle positioning axis and another axis are specified in the
same block.
PS0138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA OVERFLOW The total distribution amount of the CNC and PMC is too large
during superimposed control for PMC axis control.
PS0139 CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC axis
AXIS is being controlled.
PS0140 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete the
USE program being selected in the foreground. Perform the correct
operation for the background edition.
PS0141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN 3-D G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the three-dimensional tool
OFFSET offset mode. Modify the program.
PS0142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more.
Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ … or G51I_J_K_
… or parameter (No. 5411 or 5421))
PS0143 COMMAND DATA OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the storage length of the CNC internal
data. This alarm is also generated when the result of internal
calculation of scaling, coordinate rotation and cylindrical
interpolation overflows the data storage. It also is generated
during input of the manual intervention amount.
PS0144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C
plane must be the same. Modify the program.
PS0145 ILLEGAL USE OF G12.1/G13.1 The axis No. of plane selection parameter No. 5460 (linear axis)
and No. 5461(axis of rotation) in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode is out of range (1 to number of controlled
axes).
PS0146 ILLEGAL USE OF G-CODE The modal G code group contains an illegal G code in the polar
coordinate interpolation mode or when a mode was canceled.
Only the following G codes are allowed: G40, G50, G69.1
An illegal G code was specified while in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
The following C codes are not allowed: G27, G28, G30, G30.1,
G31 to G31.4, G37 to G387.3, G52, G92, G53, G17 to G19, G81
to G89, G68
In the 01 group, G codes other than G01, G02, G03, G02.2 and
G03.2 cannot be specified.
PS0148 SETTING ERROR Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable
range of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to
No.1714).
PS0160 MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE A waiting M-code is in error.
PS0161 ILLEGAL P OF WAITING M-CODE P in a waiting M-code is incorrect.
PS0163 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G68/G69 G68 and G69 are not independently commanded in balance cut.
An illegal value is commanded in a balance cut combination
(address P).
PS0169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA Incorrect tool figure data in interference check. Set correct data,
or select correct tool figure data.

- 466 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS0175 ILLEGAL G07.1 AXIS An axis which cannot perform cylindrical interpolation was
specified. More than one axis was specified in a G07.1 block. An
attempt was made to cancel cylindrical interpolation for an axis
that was not in the cylindrical interpolation mode.
For the cylindrical interpolation axis, set not “0” but one of 5, 6 or
7 (parallel axis specification) to parameter No. 1022 to instruct
the arc with axis of rotation (ROT parameter No. 1006#1 is set to
“1” and parameter No. 1260 is set) ON.
PS0176 ILLEGAL G-CODE USE(G07.1 MODE) A G code was specified that cannot be specified in the cylindrical
interpolation mode. This alarm also is generated when an 01
group G code was in the G00 mode or code G00 was instructed.
Cancel the cylindrical interpolation mode before instructing code
G00.
PS0179 PARAM. (NO.7510) SETTING ERROR The number of controlled axes set by the parameter No. 7510
exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter setting
value.
PS0190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED (G96) An illegal value was specified in P in a G96 block or parameter
No. 5844.
PS0194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN SYNCHRO- A Cs contour control mode, spindle positioning command, or
MODE rigid tapping mode was specified during the spindle
synchronous control mode or simple spindle synchronous
control mode.
PS0197 C-AXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Cs-axis when the
MODE Cs contour control switching signal was off.
PS0199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
PS0200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value was out of range or was not specified.
The parameter (Nos. 5241 to 5243) setting is an S value which
can be specified for the rigid tap.
Correct the parameters or modify the program.
PS0201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID The command F code for a cutting feedrate is a zero.
TAP If the value of F command is much smaller than that of the S
command, when a rigid tap command is specified, this alarm is
generated. This is because cutting is not possible by the lead
specified by the program.
PS0202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (System
error)
PS0203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S
command is incorrect. Modify the program.
PS0204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid
M code (M29) block and G84 (or G74) block. Modify the
program.
PS0205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF Although a rigid M code (M29) is specified in rigid tapping, the
rigid mode DI signal (DGN G061.0) is not ON during execution of
the G84 (or G74) block. Check the PMC ladder diagram to find
the reason why the DI signal is not turned on.
PS0206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (RIGID Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode. Modify the
TAP) program.
PS0207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH The specified distance was too short or too long in rigid tapping.

- 467 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS0210 CAN NOT COMMAND M198/M99 1 The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted
during scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an
M198 command was attempted during DNC operation. Modify
the program.
2 The execution of an M99 command was attempted by an
interrupt macro during pocket machining in a multiple
repetitive canned cycle.
PS0212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawing dimensions programming is commanded for
the plane other than the Z-X plane. Correct the program.
PS0213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRO- In feed axis synchronization control, the following errors
MODE occurred during the synchronous operation.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual operation to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position return
command without specifying the manual reference position
return after the power was turned on.
PS0214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRO- Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type is
MODE executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program.
PS0217 DUPLICATE G51.2(COMMANDS) G51.2 is further commanded in the G51.2 mode. Modify the
program.
PS0218 NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND P or Q is not commanded in the G51.2 block, or the command
value is out of the range. Modify the program. For a polygon
turning between spindles, more information as to why this alarm
occurred is indicated in DGN No. 471.
PS0219 COMMAND G51.2/G50.2 G51.2 and 50.2 were specified in the same block for other
INDEPENDENTLY commands. Modify the program in another block.
PS0220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHR- In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the
MODE NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous
axis. Modify the program or check the PMC ladder.
PS0221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHR- Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or
MODE balance cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program.
PS0222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG-EDIT Input and output are executed at a time in the background
edition. Execute a correct operation.
PS0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED Reference position return has not been performed before the
automatic operation starts. Perform reference position return
only when the parameter ZRNx (No. 1005#0) is set to 0.
PS0231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 L52 Errors occurred in the specified format at the programmable-
parameter input.
PS0232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS Three or more axes were specified as helical axes in the helical
COMMAND interpolation mode. Five or more axes were specified as helical
axes in the helical interpolation B mode.
PS0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that
connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were using it.
PS0239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function for
controlling external I/O units ,background editing was
performed.
PS0240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation.
PS0241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.2/G03.2 The end point of an involute curve on the currently selected
plane, or the center coordinate instruction I, J or K of the
corresponding basic circle, or basic circle radius R was not
specified.

- 468 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS0242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.2/G03.2 An illegal value was specified in the involute curve.
The coordinate instruction I, J or K of the basic circle on the
currently selected plane or the basic circle radius R is “0”, or the
start and end points are not inside the basic circle.
PS0243 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The end point is not positioned on the involute curve that passes
through the start point, and this error exceeds the permissible
error limit (parameter No. 2510).
PS0244 P/S ALARM In torque control, the total permissible move value specified as a
parameter is exceeded.
PS0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS One of the G codes, G50, G10, and G04, which cannot be
BLOCK specified in the same block as a T code, was specified with a T
code.
PS0247 THE MISTAKE IS FOUND IN THE When an encrypted program is output, EIA is set for the output
OUTPUT CODE OF DATA. code. Specify ISO.
PS0250 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL Z AXIS A Z-axis move command was performed in the same block for
COMMAND M06 command.
PS0251 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL T An unusable T code was specified in M06Txx.
COMMAND
PS0253 G05 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED A binary operation was specified during advanced preview
control mode.
PS0300 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING An illegal G code was specified during scaling. Modify the
program. For the T system, one of the following functions is
specified during scaling, this alarm is generated.
- finishing cycle (G70 or G72)
- outer surface rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G73)
- end side rough-cutting cycle (G72 or G74)
- closed loop cutting cycle (G73 or G75)
- end side cutting-off cycle (G74 or G76)
- outer surface or inner surface cutting-off cycle (G75 or G77)
- multiple repetitive threading cycle (G76 or G78)
- face drill cycle (G83 or G83)
- face tap cycle (G84 or G84)
- face boring cycle (G85 or G85)
- side drill cycle (G87 or G87)
- side tap cycle (G88 or G88)
- side boring cycle (G89 or G89)
- outer surface turning cycle or inner surface boring cycle (G77
or G20)
- threading cycle (G78 or G21)
- end side turning cycle (G79 or G24)
(Specify G codes for systems B and C in that order.)
PS0301 RESETTING OF REFERENCE Although parameter No. 1012#0 (IDGx) was set to 1 to inhibit the
RETURN IS INHIBITED reference position from being set again for a return to the
reference position without a dog, an attempt was made to
perform a manual return to the reference position.
PS0302 SETTING THE REFERENCE The reference position could not be set for a return to the
POSITION WITHOUT DOG IS NOT reference position without a dog. Possible causes are:
PERFORMED - The axis was not moved in the direction of a return to the
reference position for jog feeding.
- The axis was moved in the direction opposite to the direction of
a manual return to the reference position.

- 469 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS0303 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS When the setting of a reference position at any position was
NOT PERFORMED possible in Cs contour control (parameter CRF (No. 3700#0) =
1), a G00 command was issued for the Cs contour axis without a
return to the reference position after the serial spindle was
switched to Cs contour control mode.
PS0304 G28 IS COMMANDED WITHOUT Although a reference position was not set, an automatic return to
ZERO RETURN the reference position (G28) was commanded.
PS0305 INTERMEDIATE POSITION IS NOT Although a G28 (automatic return to the reference position), G30
ASSIGNED (return to the second, third, or fourth reference position), or
G30/1 (return to the floating reference position) command was
not issued after power-up, G29 (return from the reference
position) was commanded.
PS0306 MISMATCH AXIS WITH CNR/CHF The correspondence between the moving axis and the I, J, or K
command is incorrect in a block in which chamfering is
specified.
PS0307 CAN NOT START REFERENCE An attempt was made to set a butt-type reference position for an
RETURN WITH MECHANICAL axis for which to use the function to set a reference position
STOPPER SETTING without a dog.
PS0308 G72.1 NESTING ERROR G72.1 was specified again during G72.1 rotation copying.
PS0309 G72.2 NESTING ERROR G72.2 was specified again during G72.2 parallel copying.
PS0310 FILE NOT FOUND The specified file could not be found during a subprogram or
macro call.
PS0311 CALLED BY FILE NAME FORMAT An invalid format was specified to call a subprogram or macro
ERROR using a file name.
PS0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an
DRAWING DIMENSIONS invalid format.
PROGRAMMING An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during direct
input of drawing dimensions.
Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive
commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions.
Although non-use of commas (,) (parameter No. 3405#4 = 1)
was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a comma
was specified.
PS0313 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND The variable-lead threading increment specified in address K
exceeds the specified maximum value in variable-lead
threading. Or, a negative lead value was specified.
PS0314 ILLEGAL SETTING OF POLYGONAL An axis was specified invalidly in polygon turning.
AXIS For polygon turning:
A tool rotation axis is not specified.
(Parameter No. 7610)
For polygon turning between spindles:
Valid spindles are not specified.
(Parameter Nos. 7640 to 7643)
- A spindle other than the serial spindle.
- A spindle is not connected.
PS0315 ILLEGAL NOSE ANGLE COMMAND An invalid tool tip angle is specified in a multiple repetitive
IS IN THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE canned threading cycle (G76).
PS0316 ILLEGAL CUTTING AMOUNT IS IN An minimum depth of cut higher than the thread height is
THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE specified in a multiple repetitive canned threading cycle (G76).
PS0317 ILLEGAL THREAD COMMAND IS IN A zero or a negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive
THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE canned threading cycle (G76) as the thread height or the depth
of cut.

- 470 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS0318 ILLEGAL RELIEF AMOUNT IS IN THE Although an escape directions is set in a multiple repetitive
DRILLING CYCLE canned cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75), a negative value is
specified for ∆d.
PS0319 THE END POINT COMMAND IS Although the ∆i or ∆k travel distance is set to 0 in a multiple
ILLEGAL IN THE DRILLING CYCLE repetitive canned cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75), a value other
than 0 us specified for a U or W.
PS0320 ILLEGAL MOVEMENT A negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive canned
AMOUNT/CUTTING AMOUNT IS IN cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75) as ∆i or ∆k (travel distance/the
THE DRILLING CYCLE depth of cut).
PS0321 ILLEGAL REPEATED TIME IS IN THE A zero or a negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive
PATTERN REPEATING CYCLE canned closed loop cycle (G73) as a repeated time.
PS0322 FINISHING SHAPE WHICH OVER OF An invalid shape which is over the cycle starting point is
STARTING POINT specified in a shape program for a multiple repetitive canned
rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72).
PS0323 THE FIRST BLOCK OF SHAPE Type II is specified in the first block of the shape program
PROGRAM IS A COMMAND OF TYPE specified by P in a multiple repetitive canned rough-cutting cycle
II (G71 or G72). Z (W) command is for G71.
X (U) command is for G72.
PS0324 THE INTERRUPTION TYPE MACRO An interruption type macro was issued during the multiple
WAS DONE IN THE MULTIPLE repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73).
REPETIVE CYCLES
PS0325 UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN An usable command was issued in a shape program for a
SHAPE PROGRAM multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73).
PS0326 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70,
IS A DIRECT DRAWING G71, G72, or G73), a command for direct input of drawing
DIMENSIONS dimensions in the last block is terminated in the middle.
PS0327 MODAL THAT MULTIPLE REPETIVE A multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) was
CYCLES CANNOT BE DONE commanded in a modal state in which a multiple repetitive
canned cycle could not be commanded.
PS0328 ILLEGAL WORK POSITION IS IN THE The specification for the blank side for a tool-nose radius
TOOL NOSE RADIUS compensation (G41 or G42) is incorrect in a multiple repetitive
COMPENSATION canned cycle (G71 or G72).
PS0329 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned rough-
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(SECOND cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command of the second plane
AXES) axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
PS0330 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IS IN THE An axis other than the plane is specified n a canned cycle(G90,
TURNING CANNED CYCLE G92, or G94).
PS0331 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER IN AX[] An illegal value is specified for an AX[] axis number.
PS0332 ILLEGAL AXIS ADDRESS IN AXNUM[] An illegal value is specified for an AXNUM[] axis address.
PS0333 TOO MANY SPINDLE COMMANDS Multiple spindle commands could be found in the same block in
using an expansion spindle name.
Only one spindle could be commanded in the same block.
PS0334 OFFSET IS OUT OF EFFECTIVE An offset data which was out of the effective range was
RANGE specified. (malfunction prevention function)
PS0335 PLURAL M CODE Multiple M codes are commanded simultaneously in a block for
a wait function with peripheral devices by an M code.
PS0336 TOOL COMPENSATION For a tool length compensation C, an attempt was made to
COMMANDED MORE TWO AXES command the offset to other axes without canceling the offset.
Or, for a tool length compensation C, multiple axes are specified
in G43 or G44 block.
PS0337 EXCESS MAXIMUM INCREMENTAL The command value exceeded the maximum amount of
VALUE incremental. (malfunction prevention function)

- 471 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS0338 CHECK SUM ERROR An incorrect value was detected in a check sum.
(malfunction prevention function)
PS0340 ILLEGAL RESTART(NANO With manual absolute turned on, an attempt was made to restart
SMOOTHING) the operation in nano smoothing mode after performing the
manual interaction.
PS0341 TOO MANY COMMAND BLOCK There are more blocks than can be commanded consecutively
(NANO SMOOTHING) in nano smoothing mode.
PS0342 CUSTOM MACRO INTERRUPT A custom macro interrupt was enabled in nano smoothing mode.
ENABLE IN NANO SMOOTHING Or, nano smoothing mode was commanded with a custom
macro interrupt enabled.
PS0343 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN NANO G43, G44, or G49 was commanded during a nano smoothing.
SMOOTHING
PS0344 CANNOT CONTINUE NANO An illegal command or operation by which a nano smoothing
SMOOTHING could not be continued was performed.

PS0345 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL Z AXIS POS A tool change position on the Z-axis is incorrect.
PS0346 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL TOOL NUM A tool change position is not set.
PS0347 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL COMMAND Tool changing is commanded twice or more in the same block.
IN SAME BLK.
PS0348 TOOL CHANGE Z AXIS POS NOT A tool change spindle on the Z-axis is not set.
ESTABLISHED
PS0349 TOOL CHANGE SPINDLE NOT STOP A tool change spindle stop is not stopped.
PS0350 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF THE An illegal synchronization control axis number (parameter No.
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS 8180) is set.
SET ERROR.
PS0351 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to synchronization control was
THE SYNC CONTROL IS CAN'T BE moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the
USED. synchronization control by a synchronization control axis
selection signal.
PS0352 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when:
COMPOSITION ERROR. 1) An attempt was made to perform synchronization control for
the axis during a synchronization, composition, or
superposition.
2) An attempt was made to synchronize a further great-
grandchild for a parent-child-grandchild relation.
3) An attempt was made to operate synchronization control
although a parent-child-grandchild relation was not set.
PS0353 THE INSTRUCTION WAS DONE FOR This error occurred when:
THE AXIS WHICH WAS NOT ABLE - For synchronization
TO MOVE. 1) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8163#7NUMx is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the slave axis.
- For composition
1) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8163#7NUMx is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8162#7MUMx is set to 1.
PS0354 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN This error occurred when G28 was specified to the master axis
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN being parking during synchronization control, but an axis
SYNC MODE reference position is not set for the slave axis.
PS0355 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal composite control axis number (parameter No. 8183)
THE COMPOSITE CONTROL AXIS is specified.
SET ERROR.

- 472 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS0356 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to composite control was moving,
THE COMP CONTROL IS CAN'T BE an attempt was made to start or cancel the composite control by
USED. a composite control axis selection signal.
PS0357 COMPOSITE CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when an attempt was made to perform
COMPOSITION ERROR. composite control for the axis during a synchronization,
composition, or superposition.
PS0359 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN This error occurred when G28 was specified to the composite
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN axis during composite control, but a reference position is not set
COMP MODE to the other part of the composition.
PS0360 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF THE An illegal superposition control axis number (parameter No.
SUPERPOS CONTROL AXIS SET 8186) is specified.
ERROR.
PS0361 While the axis being subject to superposition control was
BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL IS CAN'T superposition control by a superposition control axis selection
BE USED. signal.
PS0362 SUPERPOSITION CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when:
COMPOSITION ERROR. 1) An attempt was made to perform superposition control for the
axis during a synchronization, composition, or superposition.
2) An attempt was made to synchronize a further great-
grandchild for a parent-child-grandchild relation.
PS0363 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN TO This error occurred when G28 was specified to the superposition
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL SLAVE control slave axis during superposition control.
AXIS.
PS0364 THE G53 WAS INSTRUCTED IN TO This error occurred when G53 was specified to the slave axis
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL SLAVE being moved during superposition control.
AXIS.
PS0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS The maximum control axis number or maximum control spindle
NUMBER number which could be used within a path was exceeded.
PER PATH
PS0366 IMPROPER G-CODE IN TURRET When the turret change tools method was selected (parameter
METHOD No. 5040#3 (TCT) = 0), G43, G43.1, G43.4, G43.5, or G43.7
was commanded.
PS0367 3-D CONV. WAS COMMANDED IN A three-dimensional coordinate conversion was commanded
SYNC MODE AS THE PARAMETER during synchronization control when the parameter PKUx
PKUx(NO.8162#2) IS 0. (No.8162#2) was 0.
PS0368 OFFSET REMAIN AT OFFSET When the ATC change tools method was selected (parameter
COMMAND No. 5040#3 (TCT) = 1) during G43, G43.1, G43.4, or G43.5
mode, G43.7 was commanded. Or, G43, G43.1, G43.4, or
G43.5 was commanded during G43.7 mode.
PS0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR - No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in the
torque limit switch instruction (G31P98/P99).
- The specified torque Q value in the torque limit switch
instruction is out of range. The torque Q range is 1 to 99.
PS0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The
address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The
address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
Or, P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.

- 473 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS0371 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 In a command format for a programmable parameter input, an
attempt was made to change the parameter for an encryption
(No. 3220), key (No. 3221), or protection range (No.3222 or
No.3223) as a "the encryption function for the key and program."
Modify the program.
PS0372 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE An attempt was made to perform an automatic return to the
reference position on the orthogonal axis before the completion
of a return to the reference position on the angular axis.
However, this attempt failed because a manual return to the
reference position during angular axis control or an automatic
return to the reference position after power-up was not
commanded. First, return to the reference position on the
angular axis, then return to the reference position on the
orthogonal axis.
PS0405 ZERO RETURN END NOT ON REF The axis specified in automatic zero return was not at the correct
zeropoint when positioning was completed. The position control
system is in error.
A return to the reference position might not be performed
correctly because of an abnormality inside the CNC or servo
system.
Restart from a manual return to the reference position.
PS1001 AXIS CONTROL MODE ILLEGAL Illegal axis control mode
PS1013 ILLEGAL POS. OF PROGRAM NO. Address O or N is specified in an illegal location (e.g. after a
macro statement).
PS1014 ILLEGAL FORMAT OF PROGRAM Address O or N is not followed by a number.
NO.
PS1016 EOB NOT FOUND EOB (End of Block) code is missing at the end of a program
input in the MDI mode.
PS1018 M99 IN MAIN PROGRAM A M99 was commanded during main program when the
parameter AMM (No. 7712#4) = 1 was set.
PS1059 COMMAND IN BUFFERING MODE The manual intervention compensation request signal MIGET
became “1” when a advanced block was found during automatic
operation.
To input the manual intervention compensation during automatic
operation, a sequence for manipulating the manual intervention
compensation request signal MIGET is required in an M code
instruction without buffering.
PS1077 PROGRAM IN USE An attempt was made in the foreground to execute a program
being edited in the background.
The currently edited program cannot be executed, so end editing
and restart program execution.
PS1079 PROGRAM FILE NOT FOUND The program of the specified file No. is not registered in an
external device. (external device subprogram call)
PS1080 DUPLICATE DEVICE SUB PROGRAM Another external device subprogram call was made from a
CALL subprogram after the subprogram called by the external device
subprogram call.
PS1081 EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL The external device subprogram call is not possible in this
MODE ERROR mode.
PS1091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in the
same block.
PS1092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD More than one macro call instruction was specified in the same
block.
PS1093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same
block as M99 during the macro modal call state.

- 474 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in the
type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom macros.
PS1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be
specified as a variable name was specified. [#_OFSxx] does not
match the tool offset memory option configuration.
PS1097 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name is too long.
PS1098 NO VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not
registered.
PS1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range.
PS1100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro
continuous–state call mode (G66) was not in effect.
PS1101 ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro interrupt
containing a move instruction could not be executed.
PS1115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right side
of an expression a variable that can only be used on the left side
of an expression.
PS1120 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT FORMAT The specified argument in the argument function (ATAN, POW)
is in error.
PS1124 MISSING DO STATEMENT The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
PS1128 SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro
RANGE statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1 to
99999999).
PS1131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right
brackets (]) in a custom macro statement.
PS1132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left
brackets ([) in a custom macro statement.
PS1133 MISSING '=' An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation
instruction in a custom macro statement.
PS1134 MISSING ',' A delimiter (,) is missing in a custom macro statement.
PS1137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in
error.
PS1138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is in
ERROR error.
PS1139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro is
ERROR in error.
PS1141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a character
NAME that cannot be used in a variable name.
PS1142 TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom
macro exceeds 8 characters.
PS1143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT statement
FORMAT ERROR is in error.
PS1144 G10 FORMAT ERROR The G10 L No. contains no relevant data input or corresponding
option.
Data setting address P or R is not specified.
An address not relating to the data setting is specified. Which
address to specify varies according to the L No.
The sign, decimal point or range of the specified address are in
error.

- 475 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS1145 G10.1 TIME OUT The response to a G10.1 instruction was not received from the
PMC within the specified time limit.
PS1146 G10.1 FORMAT ERROR The G10.1 instruction format is in error.
PS1152 G31.9/G31.8 FORMAT ERROR The format of the G31.9 or G31.8 block is erroneous in the
following cases:
- The axis was not specified in the G31.9 or G31.8 block.
- Multiple axes were specified in the G31.9 or G31.8 block.
- The P code was specified in the G31.9 or G31.8 block.
PS1153 CANNOT USE G31.9 G31.9 cannot be specified in this modal state. This alarm is also
generated when G31.9 is specified when a group 07 G code
(e.g. cutter compensation) is not canceled.
PS1180 ALL PARALLEL AXES IN PARKING All of the axis specified for automatic operation are parked.
PS1196 ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTED An illegal axis was specified for drilling in a canned cycle for
drilling.
If the zero point of the drilling axis is not specified or parallel
axes are specified in a block containing a G code in a canned
cycle, simultaneously specify the parallel axes for the drilling
axis.
PS1200 PULSCODER INVALID ZERO The grid position could not be calculated during grid reference
RETURN position return using the grid system as the one–revolution
signal was not received before leaving the deceleration dog.
This alarm is also generated when the tool does not reach a
feedrate that exceeds the servo error amount preset to
parameter No. 1841 before the deceleration limit switch is left
(deceleration signal *DEC returns to “1”).
PS1202 NO F COMMAND AT G93 F codes in the inverse time specification mode (G93) are not
handled as modal, and must be specified in individual blocks.
PS1215 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G10.6 The retract command was specified in the long axis for threading
when retract was started by the threading block.
PS1223 ILLEGAL SPINDLE SELECT An attempt was made to execute an instruction that uses the
spindle although the spindle to be controlled has not been set
correctly.
PS1282 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 3-D OFFSET An illegal G code was specified in the three–dimensional tool
offset mode.
PS1283 ILLEGAL IJK IN 3-D OFFSET When bit 0 (ONI) of parameter No. 6029 is set to 1, I, J, and K
commands are specified without the decimal point in three–
dimensional tool compensation mode.
PS1298 ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC An error occurred during inch/metric switching.
CONVERSION
PS1300 ILLEGAL ADDRESS The axis No. address was specified even though the parameter
is not an axis–type while loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape or by entry of the G10
parameter.
Axis No. cannot be specified in pitch error compensation data.
PS1301 MISSING ADDRESS The axis No. was not specified even though the parameter is an
axis–type while loading parameters or pitch error compensation
data from a tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
Or, data No. address N, or setting data address P or R are not
specified.

- 476 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS1302 ILLEGAL DATA NUMBER A non–existent data No. was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape or by entry of the G10
parameter.
An invalid address R value is specified in a pattern program for
each machining purpose on the high–speed high–precision
setting screen.
This alarm is also generated when illegal word values are found.
PS1303 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER An axis No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled axes was found while loading parameters from a tape
or by entry of the G10 parameter.
PS1304 TOO MANY DIGIT Data with too many digits was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape.
PS1305 DATA OUT OF RANGE Out–of–range data was found while loading parameters or pitch
error compensation data from a tape.
The values of the data setting addresses corresponding to L
Nos. during data input by G10 was out of range.
This alarm is also generated when NC programming words
contain out–of–range values.
PS1306 MISSING AXIS NUMBER A parameter which requires an axis to be specified was found
without an axis No. (address A) while loading parameters from a
tape.
PS1307 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN Data with an illegal sign was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape, or by entry of the
G10 parameter. A sign was specified to an address that does
not support the use of signs.
PS1308 MISSING DATA An address not followed by a numeric value was found while
loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a
tape.
PS1329 ILLEGAL MACHINE GROUP NUMBER An machine group No. address exceeding the maximum number
of controlled machine groups was found while loading
parameters from a tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
PS1330 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER An spindle No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled spindles was found while loading parameters from a
tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
PS1331 ILLEGAL PATH NUMBER An path No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled path was found while loading parameters from a tape
or by entry of the G10 parameter.
PS1332 DATA WRITE LOCK ERROR Could not load data while loading parameters, pitch error
compensation data and work coordinate data from tape.
PS1333 DATA WRITE ERROR Could not write data while loading data from tape.
PS1360 PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE (TLAC) Illegal parameter setting. (Set value is out of range.)
PS1361 PARAMTER SETTING ERROR 1 Illegal parameter setting. (axis of rotation setting)
(TLAC)
PS1362 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR 2 Illegal parameter setting (tool axis setting)
(TLAC)
PS1370 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR Out–of–range data was set during setting of the three–
(DM3H-1) dimensional handle feed parameter.
PS1371 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An illegal axis of rotation was set during setting of the three–
(DM3H-2) dimensional handle feed parameter.
PS1372 PARAMETAR SETTING ERROR An illegal master axis was set during setting of the three–
(DM3H-3) dimensional handle feed parameter.
PS1373 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An illegal parallel axis or twin table was set during setting of the
(DM3H-4) three–dimensional handle feed parameter.

- 477 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS1509 DUPLICATE M-CODE A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists.
(SPOS AXIS ORIENTATION) (spindle positioning, orientation)
PS1510 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists.
POSITIONING) (spindle positioning, positioning)
PS1511 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists.
RELEASE) (spindle positioning, mode cancel)
PS1531 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT When the feedrate instruction contains valid data below the
(F-CODE) decimal point, the alarm is set and the F code contains valid
data below the decimal point.
PS1532 When the feedrate instruction contains valid data below the
ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT decimal point, the alarm is set and the E code contains valid
(E-CODE) data below the decimal point.
PS1533 ADDRESS F UNDERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the F and S
codes is too slow in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
PS1534 ADDRESS F OVERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the F and S
codes is too fast in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
PS1535 ADDRESS E UNDERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the E and S
codes is too slow in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
PS1536 ADDRESS E OVERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the E and S
codes is too fast in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
PS1537 ADDRESS F UNDERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the F instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too slow.
PS1538 ADDRESS F OVERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the F instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too fast.
PS1539 ADDRESS E UNDERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the E instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too slow.
PS1540 ADDRESS E OVERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the E instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too fast.
PS1541 S-CODE ZERO “0” has been instructed as the S code.
PS1542 FEED ZERO (E-CODE) “0” has been instructed as the feedrate (E code).
PS1543 ILLEGAL GEAR SETTING The gear ratio between the spindle and position coder, or the set
position coder number of pulses is illegal in the spindle
positioning function.
PS1544 S-CODE OVER MAX The S command exceeds the maximum spindle rotation
number.
PS1548 ILLGAL AXIS MODE The spindle positioning axis/Cs contour control axis was
specified during switching of the controlled axis mode.
PS1580 ENCODE ALARM (PSWD&KEY) When an attempt was made to read a program, the specified
password did not match the password on the tape and the
password on tape was not equal to 0.
When an attempt was made to punch an encrypted tape, the
password was not in the range 0 to 99999999.
The password parameter is No. 2210.
PS1581 ENCODE ALARM (PARAMETER) When an attempt was made to punch an encrypted tape, the
punch code parameter was set to EIA. Set EIA parameter No.
0000#4 to “0”. An incorrect instruction was specified for program
encryption or protection. This alarm is also generated when the
protected range is edited or deleted in a program–locked state.
The protected range is defined from the program No. preset by
parameter No. 2212 up to the program No. preset to parameter
No. 2213. When both parameters are set to “0”, the protected
range becomes O9000 to O9999.

- 478 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS1590 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics
screen.
PS1591 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No.
0000#0 to “0”.
PS1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND [I/O Device]
An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O
processing on an I/O device.
[G30 Zero Return]
The P address Nos. for instructing No. 2 to No. 4 zero return
are each out of the range 2 to 4.
[Single Rotation Dwell]
The specified spindle rotation is “0” when single rotation dwell
is specified.
[Three–dimensional Tool Offset]
A G code that cannot be specified was specified in the three–
dimensional tool offset mode.
Scaling instruction G51, skip cutting G31 and automatic tool
length measurement G37 were specified.
PS1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently
selected in the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed even
though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
PS1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was
specified.
The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol
selection settings are erroneous.
PS1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.
PS1809 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G41/G42 Specified direction tool length compensation parameters are
incorrect.
A move instruction for a axis of rotation was specified in the
specified direction tool length compensation mode.
PS1889 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G54.3 An illegal command was issued in G54.3 block.
(1) An attempt was made to command G54.3 in a mode in which
it cannot be accepted.
(2) The command was not issued in a single block.
PS1894 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G54.3 An illegal parameter (parameter (Nos. 6068 to 6079) ) was
specified for the coordinate system rotation function of the rotary
table dynamic fixture offset.
PS1898 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G54.2 An illegal parameter (Nos. 6068 to 6076) was specified for
fixture offset.
PS1899 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G43.2 An illegal parameter was specified for dynamic tool offset.
Set the controlled axis number in order from the 1st to the 3rd
set in parameter Nos. 6059 to 6067. If setting up to the 3rd set is
not required. Set parameter No. 6056 to “0”.
PS1912 V-DEVICE DRIVER ERROR (OPEN) An error occurred during device driver control.
PS1990 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND The axis specified by the smooth interpolation (G5.1Q2) is
illegal.
PS1993 SPL:CAN'T MAKE VECTOR The end point and the 2 previous point are the same in
generation of the 3–dimensional tool offset vector by the end
point for smooth interpolation.

- 479 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS1995 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN The parameter settings (parameter Nos. 6080 to 6089) for
G41.2/G42.2 determining the relationship between the axis of rotation and the
rotation plane are incorrect.
PS1999 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G41.3 The parameter settings (parameter Nos. 6080 to 6089) for
determining the relationship between the axis of rotation and the
rotation plane are incorrect.
PS2002 NO KNOT COMMAND (NURBS) Knot has not been specified, or a block not related to NURBS
interpolation was specified in the NURBS interpolation mode.
PS2003 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND (NURBS) An axis not specified as a control point was specified in the No. 1
block.
PS2004 ILLEGAL KNOT There is an insufficient number of knot individual blocks.
PS2005 ILLEGAL CANCEL (NURBS) The NURBS interpolation mode was turned OFF even though
NURBS interpolation was not completed.
PS2006 ILLEGAL MODE (NURBS) A mode that cannot be paired with the NURBS interpolation
mode was specified.
PS2007 ILLEGAL MULTI-KNOT Nested knots for each level can be specified for the start and
end points.
PS2060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN The parameter for the pivot tool length compensation is
G43.4/G43.5 incorrect.
PS2061 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control.
- A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point
control (type 2) mode.
- With a table rotary type or mixed-type machine, a I, J, or K
command was specified in the tool center point control (type
2) command (G43.5) block.
- A command that does not move the tool center point (only a
rotation axis is moved) was specified for the workpiece in the
G02 mode.
- G43.4 or G43.5 was specified in the tool center point control
mode.
- When the workpiece coordinate system is set as the
programming coordinate system (bit 5 (WKP) of parameter
No. 19696 is 1), G02 or G03 was specified while the rotation
axis was not perpendicular to the plane.
PS4010 ILLEGAL REAL VALUE OF OBUF : The real value for a output buffer is in error.
PS5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words in a block exceeds the maximum. The
maximum is 26 words. However, this figure varies according to
NC options. Divide the instruction word into two blocks.
PS5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation,
interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that
exceeds the maximum permissible distance was specified.
Check the programmed coordinates or compensation amounts.
PS5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The dry run feedrate parameter No. 1410 or maximum cutting
feedrate parameter No. 1422 for each axis has been set to 0.
PS5010 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block. This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the
end of the NC program is read.
PS5011 PARAMETER ZERO (CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate parameter No. 1430 has been
set to 0.
PS5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND A transfer could not be made because of no trace data.
PS5015 NO ROTATION AXIS No rotation axis was found in a handle feed in the tool axis
direction or in the tool axis right angle direction.

- 480 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in a
CODES block. Alternatively, an M code which must be specified without
other M codes in the block was specified in a block with other M
codes.
PS5018 POLYGON SPINDLE SPEED ERROR In G51.2 mode, the speed of the spindle or polygon
synchronous axis either exceeds the clamp value or is too small.
The specified rotation speed ratio thus cannot be maintained.
For polygon turning between spindles:
More information as to why this alarm occurred is indicated in
DGN No. 471.
PS5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING Three-dimensional coordinate conversion has been specified
three or more times.
To perform another coordinate conversion, perform cancellation,
then specify the coordinate conversion.
PS5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR Errors for three-dimensional coordinate conversion command
are:
(1) No I, J, or K command was issued in three-dimensional
coordinate conversion command block. (without coordinate
rotation option)
(2) All of I, J, or K command were 0 in three-dimensional
coordinate conversion command block.
(3) No rotation angle R was not commanded in three-
dimensional coordinate conversion command block.
PS5058 G35/G36 FORMAT ERROR A command for switching the major axis has been specified for
circular threading. Alternatively, a command for setting the
length of the major axis to 0 has been specified for circular
threading.
PS5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN The axis parameter setting to perform an exponential
G02.3/G03.3 interpolation is in error.
Parameter No. 5641:
A liner axis number for performing an exponential interpolation
Parameter No. 5642:
A rotation axis number for performing an exponential
interpolation
The settable value is 1 to the number of control axes, but it must
not be duplicated.
PS5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.3/G03.3 The exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3) has a
format error.
The command range for address I or J is -89.0 to -1.0 or +1.0 to
+89.0. No I or J is specified or out-of -range value is specified.
No address R, or 0 is specified.
PS5062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.3/G03.3 The value specified in an exponential interpolation command
(G02.3/03.3) is illegal. A value that does not allow exponential
interpolation is specified. (For example, the value for In is 0 or
negative.)
PS5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting of
axes having different increment systems.
PS5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC AXIS) Axes having different increment systems have been specified in
the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the setting of
parameter No. 8010.
PS5066 RESTART ILLEGAL SEQUENCE A sequence number from 7000 to 7999 was read during the
NUMBER search for the next number in a restart program for the back or
restart function.

- 481 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS5068 FORMAT ERROR IN G31P90 No travel axis was specified. Two or more travel axes were
specified.
PS5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring a
decimal point.
PS5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a
single block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same
group have been specified in a single block.
PS5085 SMOOTH IPL ERROR 1 A block for specifying smooth interpolation contains a syntax
error.
PS5115 ILLEGAL ORDER (NURBS) There is an error in the specification of the rank.
PS5116 ILLEGAL KNOT VALUE (NURBS) Monotone increasing of knots is not observed.
PS5117 ILLEGAL 1ST CONTROL POINT The first control point is incorrect.
(NURBS) Or, it does not provide a continuity from the previous block.
PS5118 ILLEGAL RESTART (NURBS) After manual intervention with manual absolute mode set to on,
NURBS interpolation was restarted.
PS5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command has an
error. Specifically, this error is caused by one of the following:
1) L = 0 is specified.
2) Q = 0 is specified.
3) R/, R/, C is specified.
4) Zero is specified as height increment.
5) Zero is specified as height difference.
6) Three or more axes are specified as the height axes.
7) A height increment is specified when there are two height
axes.
8) Q is specified when radius difference = 0.
9) Q < 0 is specified when radius difference > 0.
10) Q > 0 is specified when radius difference < 0.
11) A height increment is specified when no height axis is
specified.
PS5123 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The difference between a specified end point and the calculated
IN SPIRAL end point exceeds the allowable range (parameter 3471).
PS5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in any
of the following modes:
1) Scaling
2) Polar coordinate interpolation
3) In cutter compensation C mode, the center is set as the end
point.
PS5130 NC AND SUPERIMPOSE AXIS In the PMC superposition axis control, the NC command and
CONFLICT The PMC axis control command were conflicted. Modify the
program and the ladder.
PS5131 NC COMMAND IS NOT COMPATIBLE The PMC axis control and three-dimensional coordinate
conversion or a polar coordinate interpolation were specified
simultaneously.
PS5132 CANNOT CHANGE SUPERIMPOSED The superposition axis was selected for the axis for which the
AXIS PMC superposition axis is being controlled.
PS5196 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION During HPCC or during the execution of a 5-axis-related
function, an unavailable function was used.
PS5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI Cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation was
MODE specified in MDI mode. (Depending on the setting of the
parameter MCR (No. 5008#4))

- 482 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

PS5305 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER In a spindle select function by address P for a multiple spindle
control,
1) Address P is not specified.
2) Parameter No.3781 is not specified to the spindle to be
selected.
3) An illegal G code which cannot be commanded with an
S_P_; command is specified.
4) A multi spindle cannot be used because the parameter EMS
(No. 3702#1) is 1.
PS5312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G10 One of formats in G10L75, G10L76, or G10L77 to G11
L75/76/77 commands is in error, or the command value is out of data
range. Modify the program.
PS5316 TOOL TYPE NUMBER NOT FOUND A tool with the specified tool-type number could not be found.
Modify the program or register the tool.
PS5317 ALL TOOL LIFE IS OVER The lives of all tools with the specified tool-type number have
expired.
Replace the tool.
PS5329 M98 AND NC COMMAND IN SAME A subprogram call which is not a single block was commanded
BLOCK during canned cycle mode.
PS5406 G41.3/G40 FORMAT ERROR (1) The G41.3 or G40 block contains a move command.
(2) The G41.3 block contains a G or M code that suppresses
buffering.
PS5407 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G41.3 (1) In the G41.3 mode, a G code of group 01 other than G00 and
G01 is specified.
(2) In the G41.3 mode, an offset command (a G code of group
07) is specified.
(3) The block next to G41.3 (startup) specifies no movement.
PS5408 G41.3 ILLEGAL START_UP (1) In a mode of group 01 other than G00 and G01, G41.3
(startup) is specified.
(2) The included angle between the tool vector and move vector
is 0 or 180 degrees at the time of startup.
PS5420 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN A parameter related to tool center point control is illegal.
G43.4/G43.5
PS5421 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control.
- A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point
control (type 2) mode.
- With a table rotary type or mixed-type machine, a I,J,K
command was specified in the tool center point control (type
2) command (G43.5) block.
- A command that does not move the tool center point (only a
rotation axis is moved) was specified for the workpiece in the
G02 mode.
- G43.4 or G43.5 was specified in the tool center point control
mode.
- When the workpiece coordinate system is set as the
programming coordinate system (bit 5 (WKP) of parameter
No. 19696 is 1), G02 or G03 was specified while the rotation
axis was not perpendicular to the plane.
PS5422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN G43.4/G43.5 An attempt was made to make a movement at an axis feedrate
exceeding the maximum cutting feedrate by tool center point
control.
PS5425 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset number is incorrect.

- 483 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

PS5430 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 3-D CIR In a modal state in which three-dimensional circular interpolation
cannot be specified, a three-dimensional circular interpolation
(G02.4/G03.4) is specified. Alternatively, in three-dimensional
circular interpolation mode, a code that cannot be specified is
specified.
PS5432 G02.4/G03.4 FORMAT ERROR A three-dimensional circular interpolation command
(G02.4/G03.4) is incorrect.
PS5433 MANUAL INTERVENTION IN In three-dimensional circular interpolation mode (G02.4/G03.4),
G02.4/G03.4 (ABS ON) manual intervention was made when the manual absolute switch
was on.
PS5445 CAN NOT COMMAND MOTION IN Corner circular interpolation (G39) of cutter compensation or tool
G39 nose radius compensation is not specified alone but is specified
with a move command.
PS5446 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 Because there is no interference evade vector, the interference
check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius
compensation cannot evade interference.
PS5447 DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT The interference check evade function of cutter compensation or
G41/G42 tool nose radius compensation determines that an evade
operation will lead to danger.
PS5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT In the interference check evade function of cutter compensation
G41/G42 or tool nose radius compensation, a further interference occurs
for an already created interference evade vector.
PS5456 TOO MANY G68.2 NESTING Tilted working plane command G68.2 was specified more than
once.
To perform another coordinate conversion, perform cancellation,
then specify the coordinate conversion.
PS5457 G68.2 FORMAT ERROR A G68.2 format error occurred.
PS5458 ILLEGAL USE OF G53.1 G53.1 was specified before the G68.2 command.
PS5459 MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT A machine configuration parameter (parameter No. 19665 to
No.19667 or 19680 to 19744) is illegal.
PS5460 ILLEGAL USE OF TRC FOR 5-AXIS (1) A move command other than G001 and G01 was specified in
MACHINE the mode for cutter compensation for 5-axis machining
(except the tool side offset in tool rotation type machines).
(2) G39 was specified in the mode for cutter compensation for
5-axis machining.
(3) At the start of cutter compensation for 5-axis machining with
a table rotation type machine, an axis other than the basic
three axes is specified for plane selection.
PS5461 ILLEGAL USE OF A move command other than G00 or G01 was performed during
G41.2/G42.2/G41.5/G42.5 cutter compensation for 5-axis machining in a mixed-type
machine.

- 484 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

(2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm)

Number Message Description
BG0085 OVERRUN ERROR The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 1 before it could read a
previously received character.
BG0086 DR OFF The data set ready input signal DR of the I/O device connected
to reader/punch interface 1 turned OFF.
BG0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW The NC received more than 10 characters of data from the I/O
device connected to reader/punch interface 1 even though the
NC sent a stop code (DC3) during data reception.
BG1590 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the
diagnostics screen.
BG1591 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter
No. 0000#0 to “0”.
BG1592 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block.
This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end of
the NC program is read.
BG1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O
processing on an I/O device.
BG1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently
selected in the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed
even though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
BG1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was
specified.
The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol
selection settings are erroneous.
BG1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.
BG1823 FRAMING ERROR(1) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 1 was not detected.
BG1830 DR OFF(2) The data set ready input signal DR of the I/O device connected
to reader/punch interface 2 turned OFF.
BG1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 2 before it could read a
previously received character.
BG1833 FRAMING ERROR(2) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 2 was not detected.
BG1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) The NC received more than 10 characters of data from the I/O
device connected to reader/punch interface 2 even though the
NC sent a stop code (DC3) during data reception.
BG1960 ACCESS ERROR (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card accessing
This alarm is also generated during reading when reading is
executed up to the end of the file without detection of the EOR
code.
BG1961 NOT READY (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is not ready.
BG1962 CARD FULL (MEMORY CARD) The memory card has run out of space.
BG1963 CARD PROTECTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is write–protected.
BG1964 NOT MOUNTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card could not be mounted.
BG1965 DIRECTORY FULL (MEMORY CARD) The file could not be generated in the root directory for the
memory card.

- 485 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

BG1966 FILE NOT FOUND (MEMORY CARD) The specified file could not be found on the memory card.
BG1967 FILE PROTECTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is write–protected.
BG1968 ILLEGAL FILE NAME (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card file name
BG1969 ILLEGAL FORMAT (MEMORY CARD) Check the file name.
BG1970 ILLEGAL CARD (MEMORY CARD) This memory card cannot be handled.
BG1971 ERASE ERROR (MEMORY CARD) An error occurred during memory card erase.
BG1972 BATTERY LOW (MEMORY CARD) The memory card battery is low.
BG1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory
card.

- 486 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

(3) Communication alarms (SR alarm)

Number Message Description
SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the
diagnostics screen.
SR0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter
No. 0000#0 to “0”.
SR0075 PROTECT During the program reference, the password for encrypted
program is incorrect.
SR0085 OVERRUN ERROR During a read by reader/punch interface 1, an overrun, parity,
or framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data
was not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device
specification number was incorrect.
SR0086 DR OFF During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible
causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a
defective printed circuit board.
SR0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW During a read by reader/punch interface 1, although a read
stop command was issued, more than 10 characters were
input. The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.
SR0177 CHECK SUM ERROR (G05) A check sum error was occurred. (remote buffer binary input
operation)
SR0178 ILLEGAL COMMAND G05 G05 that could not be specified was commanded.
SR1125 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The description in a custom macro statement expression is in
error.
The format of parameter tape is in error.
The screen displayed for input of periodical maintenance data
or item select menu (machine) data is not compatible with the
data type.
SR1160 COMMAND DATA OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the position data inside the CNC.
Or, this overflow also occurs when the target position
command excesses the maximum stroke as a result of
calculating the amount of coordinate conversion, offset, or
manual intervention-capture.
SR1580 ENCODE ALARM (PSWD&KEY) With encryption (PSW) <> 0 and encryption (PSW) <> [the
password on the tape] an attempt was made to read a
program.
An encryption (PSW) is not from 1 to 99999999.
SR1581 ENCODE ALARM (PARAMETER) A punch code parameter is the EIA command during punching
an encrypted tape.
An attempt was made to perform the specified range punch out
in a lock state.
The program other than the protect range is specified for the
specified range punch out in an unlock state.

SR1592 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block.
This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end of
the NC program is read.
This alarm is also generated when the specified block is not
found by the program restart function.

- 487 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

SR1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O
processing on an I/O device.
SR1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently
selected in the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed
even though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
SR1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was
specified.
The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol
selection settings are erroneous.
SR1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.
SR1823 FRAMING ERROR(1) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 1 was not detected.
SR1830 DR OFF(2) During I/O process by reader/punch interface 2, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible
causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a
defective printed circuit board.
SR1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) During a read by reader/punch interface 2, an overrun, parity,
or framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data
was not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device
specification number was incorrect.
SR1833 FRAMING ERROR(2) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 2 was not detected.
SR1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) During a read by reader/punch interface 2, although a read
stop command was issued, more than 10 characters were
input. The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.
SR1960 ACCESS ERROR (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card accessing
This alarm is also generated during reading when reading is
executed up to the end of the file without detection of the EOR
code.
SR1961 NOT READY (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is not ready.
SR1962 CARD FULL (MEMORY CARD) The memory card has run out of space.
SR1963 CARD PROTECTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is write–protected.
SR1964 NOT MOUNTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card could not be mounted.
SR1965 DIRECTORY FULL (MEMORY CARD) The file could not be generated in the root directory for the
memory card.
SR1966 FILE NOT FOUND (MEMORY CARD) The specified file could not be found on the memory card.
SR1967 FILE PROTECTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is write–protected.
SR1968 ILLEGAL FILE NAME (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card file name
SR1969 ILLEGAL FORMAT (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card format
SR1970 ILLEGAL CARD (MEMORY CARD) This memory card cannot be handled.
SR1971 ERASE ERROR (MEMORY CARD) An error occurred during memory card erase.
SR1972 BATTERY LOW (MEMORY CARD) The memory card battery is low.
SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory
card.
SR2050 #200-#999ILLEGAL INPUT The settings of parameters MV0 through MVA (No. 8503#0 to
(UNMATCHED P-CODE MACRO No. 8504#3) do not match the common variable data to be
COMMON) entered.
SR2051 #200-#499ILLEGAL P-CODE MACRO An attempt was made to enter a custom macro common
COMMON INPUT(NO OPTION) variable that is not used with the system.
SR2052 #500-#549P-CODE MACRO COMMON Variable names cannot be entered.
SELECT(CANNOT USE SETVN) SETVN cannot be specified for P–code macro common
variables #500 to #549.

- 488 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

SR2053 THE NUMBER OF #30000 IS An attempt was made to enter a P–code–dedicated variable
UNMATCH that is not used with the system.
SR2054 THE NUMBER OF #40000 IS An attempt was made to enter an extended P–code–dedicated
UNMATCH variable that is not used with the system.
SR5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART ERROR The parameter No. 7110 setting value to specify the axis order
to move to the machining restart position in dry run is incorrect.
The setting range is from one to the number of control axes.

(4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm)

Number Message Description
SW0100 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON The parameter setting is enabled (PWE, one bit of parameter
No. 8000 is set to “1”).
To set the parameter, turn this parameter ON. Otherwise, set
to OFF.

- 489 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

(5) Servo alarms (SV alarm)

Number Message Description
SV0001 SYNC ALIGNMENT ERROR In feed axis synchronization control, the amount of
compensation for synchronization exceeded the parameter
(No. 8325) setting value.
This alarm occurs only for a slave axis.
SV0002 SYNC EXCESS ERROR ALARM 2 In feed axis synchronization control, the amount of
synchronization error exceeded the parameter (No. 8332)
setting value. When the synchronization is not completed
after power-up, the determination is made by the parameter
value (No. 8332) multiplied by the parameter (No. 8330)
multiplier.
This alarm occurs only for a slave axis only.
SV0003 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE/SUPERI Since as axis in synchronization, composition, or
MPOSED CONTROL MODE CAN'T BE superposition mode caused a servo alarm, the mode could
CONTINUED not be continued, If one of the axes in a mode causes a servo
alarm, all axes relating to the axis enter the servo-off state.
This alarm is generated to enable the cause of the servo-off
state to be checked.
SV0004 EXCESS ERROR (G31) The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip
command operation exceeded the limit value of the
parameter No.6287.
SV0005 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN) In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of the machine coordinate between a master
and slave axes exceeded the parameter (No. 8314) setting
value.
This alarm occurs for a master or slave axis.
SV0301 APC ALARM: COMMUNICATION ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a
communication error, the correct machine position could not
be obtained. (data transfer error)
The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo interface
module is thought to be defective.
SV0302 APC ALARM: OVER TIME ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused an overtime
error, the correct machine position could not be obtained.
(data transfer error)
The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo interface
module is thought to be defective.
SV0303 APC ALARM: FRAMING ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a framing error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo interface
module is thought to be defective.
SV0304 APC ALARM: PARITY ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a parity error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo interface
module is thought to be defective.
SV0305 APC ALARM: PULSE ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a pulse error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained.
The absolute-position detector, or cable is thought to be
defective.
SV0306 APC ALARM: OVER FLOW ERROR Since the amount of positional deviation overflowed, the
correct machine position could not be obtained.
Check to see the parameter No. 2084 or No. 2085.

- 490 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

SV0307 APC ALARM: MOVEMENT EXCESS Since the machine moved excessively, the correct machine
ERROR position could not be obtained.
SV0360 ABNORMAL CHECKSUM(INT) The checksum alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0361 ABNORMAL PHASE DATA(INT) The phase data abnormal alarm occurred on the built–in
Pulsecoder.
SV0362 ABNORMAL REV. DATA(INT) The speed count abnormal alarm occurred on the built-in
Pulsecoder.
SV0363 ABNORMAL CLOCK(INT) The clock alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0364 SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT) A digital servo soft detected an abnormality on the built in
Pulsecoder.
SV0365 BROKEN LED(INT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0366 PULSE MISS(INT) A pulse error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0367 COUNT MISS(INT) A count error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0368 SERIAL DATA ERROR(INT) The communications data could not be received from the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0369 DATA TRANS. ERROR(INT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0380 BROKEN LED(EXT) Separate detector error
SV0381 ABNORMAL PHASE (EXT) An abnormal alarm in the position data occurred on the
separate linear scale.
SV0382 COUNT MISS(EXT) A count error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0383 PULSE MISS(EXT) A pulse error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0384 SOFT PHASE ALARM(EXT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
separate detector.
SV0385 SERIAL DATA ERROR(EXT) The communications data could not be received from the
separate detector.
SV0386 DATA TRANS. ERROR(EXT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the standalone detector.
SV0387 ABNORMAL ENCODER(EXT) An abnormality occurred on a separate detector. For more
information, contact the scale manufacturer.
SV0401 IMPROPER V_READY OFF Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
ON, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was OFF.
SV0404 IMPROPER V_READY ON Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
OFF, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was ON.
SV0407 EXCESS ERROR The difference value of the amount of positional deviation for
the synchronization axis exceeded the setting value. (during
synchronization control only)
SV0409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load was detected on the servo motor, or during
Cs axis or spindle positioning.
The alarm can be canceled by RESET.
SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The amount of positional deviation during stopping exceeded
the parameter (No. 1829) setting value.
In a dual check safety function, an alarm occurs during safety
monitoring (when the safety monitoring start signal SEV or
SEP is 1), but the alarm cannot be canceled by a reset.
SV0411 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The amount of positional deviation during traveling became
excessive than the parameter setting value. (Generally, in the
parameter No.1828, the dual check safety function during
safety monitoring (when he safety monitoring start signal
SEV or SEP is 1) is the parameter No. 1838.)
In a dual check safety function, an alarm occurs during safety
monitoring, but the alarm cannot be canceled by a reset.

- 491 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

SV0413 LSI OVERFLOW The counter for the amount of positional deviation overflowed
SV0415 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW The velocity exceeding the travel velocity limit was
commanded.
The travel velocity limits are:
When acceleration/deceleration mode before pre-read
interpolation is in progress:
When fine acceleration/deceleration (FAD) is disabled in
other than acceleration/deceleration mode before pre-read
interpolation and feed forward is disabled:
32767 pulses/msec (detection unit)
When fine acceleration/deceleration (FAD) in other than
acceleration/deceleration mode before pre-read interpolation
is enabled:
16383 pulses/msec (detection unit)
When fine acceleration/deceleration (FAD) in other than
acceleration/deceleration mode before pre-read interpolation
is disabled and feed forward is enabled:
4095 pulses/msec (detection unit)
When the parameter FFN (No.1801#1) is set to 1, feed
forward is enabled only in acceleration/deceleration mode
before pre-read interpolation.
The travel velocity limit can be fixed to 32767pulses/msec.
SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
SV0420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of torque between a master and slave axes
exceeded the parameter (No. 2031) setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master axis.
SV0421 EXCESS ERROR(SEMI-FULL) The difference between the feedback from the semi and full
sides exceeded the setting of parameter No.1729.
SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
exceeded.
SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified
as a parameter was exceeded.
SV0430 SV MOTOR OVERHEAT The servo motor has overheated.
SV0431 CNV. OVERLOAD PSM : Overheat
β series SVU : Overheat
SV0432 CNV. LOW VOLT CONTROL PSM : The control power supply voltage has dropped.
PSMR : The control power supply voltage has dropped.
β series SVU : The control power supply voltage has
dropped.
SV0433 CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK PSM : Low DC link voltage
PSMR : Low DC link voltage
α series SVU : Low DC link voltage
β series SVU : Low DC link voltage
SV0434 INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM : Low control power voltage
SV0435 INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM : Low DC link voltage
SV0436 SOFTTHERMAL(OVC) The digital servo software detected a software thermal
(OVC).
SV0437 CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER PSM : Overcurrent on input circuit section.
SV0438 INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT SVM : Motor overcurrent
α series SVU : Motor overcurrent
β series SVU : Motor overcurrent

- 492 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

SV0439 CNV. OVER VOLT DC LINK PSM : The DC link voltage is too high.
PSMR : The DC link voltage is too high.
β series SVU : The DC link voltage is too high.
SV0440 CNV. EX DECELERATION POW. PSMR : Excessive generative discharge
α series SVU : Excessive generative discharge, or abnormal
error in generative power circuit
SV0441 ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the
motor current detection circuit.
SV0442 CNV. CHARGE FAILURE PSM : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abnormal.
PSMR : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abnormal.
SV0443 CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE PSM : Internal cooling fan failure.
PSMR : Internal cooling fan failure.
β series SVU : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0444 INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0445 SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a disconnected
Pulsecoder.
SV0446 HARD DISCONNECT ALARM The hardware detected a disconnected built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0447 HARD DISCONNECT(EXT) The hardware detected a disconnected separate detector.
SV0448 UNMATCHED FEEDBACK ALARM The sign of the feedback signal from the standalone detector
is opposite to that from the feedback signal from the built–on
Pulsecoder.
SV0449 INV. IPM ALARM SVM : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an alarm.
α series SVU : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected
an alarm.
SV0456 ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP An attempt was made to set the current loop that could not be
set.
The amplifier pulse module in use does not comply with HIGH
SPEED HRV. Or, requirements to control are not satisfied in
the system.
SV0457 ILLEGAL HI HRV(250US) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for
use when the current loop was set to 250 µs.
SV0458 CURRENT LOOP ERROR The specified current loop differs from the actual current loop.
SV0459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR For two axes whose servo axis numbers (parameter No.
1023) are consecutively even and odd numbers, HIGH
SPEED HRV control is possible for one axis and impossible
for the other.
SV0460 FSSB DISCONNECT The FSSB connection was discontinued. Or, the FSSB
connection cable was disconnected or broken.
The amplifier was turned off .
In the amplifier, the low-voltage alarm occurred.
SV0461 ILLEGAL AMP. INTERFACE Both axes of a 2-axis amplifier were assigned to Fast type
interface. Or, axis setting is in error.
SV0462 SEND CNC DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received on a slave side
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0463 SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received in the servo software
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0465 READ ID DATA FAILED A read of the ID information for the amplifier has failed at
power-on.
SV0466 MOTOR/AMP. COMBINATION The maximum current of an amplifier is different to that of a
motor. Or, the connection command for an amplifier is
incorrect. The parameter setting is incorrect

- 493 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

SV0468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for
use when the controlled axis of an amplifier for which HIGH
SPEED HRV control could not be used.
SV0600 INV. DC LINK OVER CURRENT SVM : DC link overcurrent.
β SVU : DC link overcurrent.
SV0601 INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE SVM : Radiator cooling fan failure.
β SVU : Radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0602 INV. OVERHEAT SVM : The servo motor has overheated.
SV0603 INV. IPM ALARM(OH) SVM : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
overheat alarm.
β SVU : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
overheat alarm.
SV0604 AMP. COMMUNICATION ERROR The communication between SVM and PSM is in error.
SV0605 CNV. EX. DISCHARGE POW. PSMR : The motor regenerative power is too much.
SV0606 CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE PSM : External radiator cooling fan failure.
PSMR : External radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0607 CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE PSM : The input power supply has a missing phase.
PSMR : The input power supply has a missing phase.
SV1025 V_READY ON (INITIALIZING ) The ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control which should
be OFF is ON while the servo control is ON.
SV1026 ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE The parameter for servo axis arrange is not set correctly.
A negative value, duplicate value, or greater value than the
number of control axes was set to the parameter No. 1023
"The servo axis number of each axis."
SV1055 ILLEGAL TANDEM AXIS In tandem control, the setting of the parameter No. 1023 is
incorrect.
SV1056 ILLEGAL TANDEM PAIR In tandem control, the setting of the parameter No. 1020 or
TDM (No.1817#6) is incorrect.
SV1100 S-COMP. VALUE OVERFLOW The amount of compensation for the straightness exceeded a
maximum value of 32767.
SV5134 FSSB:OPEN READY TIME OUT In the initialization, the FSSB could not be in an open ready
sate. The axis card is thought to be defective.
SV5135 DFS:ILLEGAL SETTING(HI-SPEED With DFS, a high-speed current control axis is set when
MODE) F5MODE is invalidated.
SV5136 FSSB:NUMBER OF AMP. IS The number of amplifier identified by the FSSB is insufficient
INSUFFICIENT than the number of control axes. Or, the setting of the number
of axes or the amplifier connection is in error.
SV5137 FSSB:CONFIGURATION ERROR An FSSB configuration error occurred.
The connecting amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB
setting value.
SV5138 FSSB:AXIS SETTING NOT COMPLETE The axis setting has not completed yet, in an automatic
setting mode.
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME OUT The initialization of the FSSB was completed, but it could not
be opened. Or, the connection between the CNC and the
amplifier in is incorrect.
SV5198 FSSB:ID DATA NOT READ FSSB assignment cannot be performed, so that amplifier
information cannot be read. Alternatively, the connection
between the CNC and amplifiers is incorrect.

- 494 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

SV5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION 1. This alarm is issued if axes, whose servo axis numbers
(parameter No. 1023) are even and odd numbers, are
allocated to the amplifiers connected to the FSSBs of
different paths.
2. This alarm is issued if an attempt is made to set up for use
of the pulse modules connected to the FSSBs of different
paths. And the system did not satisfy the requirements for
performing HIGH SPEED HRV control.

- 495 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

(6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm)

Number Message Description
OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 1.
OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 1.
OT0502 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 2. Or, in the
chuck tail stock barrier, an entry to the inhibited area was
made during movement in the positive direction.
OT0503 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 2. Or, in the
chuck tail stock barrier, an entry to the inhibited area was
made during movement in the negative direction.
OT0504 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 3.
OT0505 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) Exceeded the - side stored stroke check 3.
OT0506 + OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the
stroke end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
during automatic operation.
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the
stroke end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
during automatic operation.
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0508 INTERFERENCE:+ A tool moving in the positive direction along the n axis has
fouled another tool post.
OT0509 INTERFERENCE:- A tool moving in the negative direction along the n axis has
fouled another tool post.
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the negative direction during
the stroke check before movement.
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the positive direction during the
stroke check before movement.
OT1710 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER The permissible acceleration parameter for the optimum
(OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC) torque acceleration/deceleration is in error. A possible cause
is either of the following:
(1) The ratio of a negative acceleration to a positive
acceleration is not more than the limit value.
(2) The time to reduce to a velocity of 0 exceeded the
maximum time.

- 496 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

(7) Memory file alarms (IO alarm)

Number Message Description
IO1001 FILE ACCESS ERROR The resident–type file system could not be accessed as an
error occurred in the resident–type file system.
IO1002 FILE SYSTEM ERROR The file could not be accessed as an error occurred in the CNC
file system.
IO1030 CHECK SUM ERROR The checksum of the CNC part program storage memory is
incorrect.
IO1032 MEMORY ACCESS OVER RANGE Accessing of data occurred outside the CNC part program
storage memory range.

- 497 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

(8) Alarms requiring power to be turned off (PW alarm)

Number Message Description
PW0000 POWER MUST BE OFF A parameter was set for which the power must be turned OFF
then ON again.
PW0001 X-ADDRESS(*DEC) IS NOT ASSIGNED. The X address of the PMC could not be assigned correctly.
This alarm may occur in the following case:
- During the setting of parameter No. 3013, the X address
could not be assigned correctly for the deceleration dog
(*DEC) for a return to the reference position.
PW0002 PMC address is not correct(AXIS). The address to assign the axis signal is incorrect.
This alarm may occur in the following case:
- The parameter No.3021 setting is incorrect.
PW0003 PMC address is not correct(SPINDLE). The address to assign the spindle signal is incorrect.
This alarm may occur in the following case:
- The parameter No.3022 setting is incorrect.
PW0004 SETTING THE LOADER SYSTEM PATH The loader system could not be assigned correctly.
IS NOT CORRECT. The parameter No. 984 setting is incorrect.
- The number of loader systems and the number of systems
specified to the loader system in the parameter No.
984#0(LCP) does not match.
- The parameter No. 984#0 of the system 1 is set to 1.
PW0005 IMPROPER X-ADDRESS(F RATE The X address of the PMC for a feedrate switching could not
CHANGE) be assigned correctly. This alarm occurs in the following
case: The parameter No.3015 setting is incorrect.
PW0006 POWER MUST BE OFF (ILL-EXEC-CHK) The malfunction prevention function detected an alarm to
require the power off.

PW0007 X-ADDRESS(SKIP) IS NOT ASSIGNED The X address of PMC could not be assigned correctly.
Possible causes are:
- During the set of parameter No. 3012, the skip signal of the
X address was not assigned correctly.
- During the set of parameter No. 3019, the address other
than the skip signal of the X address was not assigned
correctly.
PW1102 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP.) The parameter for setting slope compensation is incorrect.
This alarm occurs in the following cases:
- When the number of pitch error compensation points on the
axis on which slope compensation is executed exceeds 128
between the most negative side and most positive side
- When the size relationship between the slope
compensation point Nos. is incorrect
- When the slope compensation point is not located between
the most negative side and most positive side of pitch error
compensation
- When the compensation per compensation point is too
small or too great.
PW1103 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP.128) The parameter for setting 128 straightness compensation
points or the parameter compensation data is incorrect,
PW5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP.) The parameter for setting straightness compensation is
incorrect.

- 498 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

(9) Spindle alarms (SP alarm)

Number Message Description
SP0740 RIGID TAP ALARM : EXCESS ERROR The positional deviation of the stopped spindle has exceeded
the set value during rigid tapping.
SP0741 RIGID TAP ALARM : EXCESS ERROR The positional deviation of the moving spindle has exceeded
the set value during rigid tapping.
SP0742 RIGID TAP ALARM : LSI OVERFLOW An LSI overflow has occurred for the spindle during rigid
tapping.
SP0752 SPINDLE MODE CHANGE ERROR This alarm is generated if the system does not properly
terminate a mode change. The modes include the Cs contour
control, spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control unit does
not respond correctly to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
SP0754 ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load was detected in a spindle motor.
The alarm can be canceled by RESET.
SP0755 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR The CNC CPU detected that the safely function of the n-th
spindle was not executed.
SP0756 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA The CNC CPU detected that the connection state and the
hardware setting of the spindle amplifier were incompatible
on the n-th spindle. If an alarm occurs because of the
configuration change of the spindle amplifier , set the spindle
amplifier correctly.
SP0757 SAFETY SPEED OVER The CNC CPU detected that during safety monitoring (the
safety monitoring start signal SEV or SEP is 0), the spindle
motor speed was greater than the safety speed (parameter
No. 4372, 4438, 4440, or 4442) on the n-th spindle. Operate
within the safety speed.
SP1202 SPINDLE SELECT ERROR In a multi spindle control, the spindle number other than the
valid spindle number was selected by a position coder select
signal. An attempt was made to select the spindle number of
the system having no valid spindle.
SP1210 TOOL CHANGE SP MOTION The amount of distribution to a spindle is too much.
OVERFLOW (specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL)
SP1211 TOOL CHANGE SP ORTN EXCESS During a tool change, a too much orientation error was
ERROR detected for the spindle.
(specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL)
SP1212 TOOL CHANGE SP MOVE EXCESS During a tool change, a too much moving error was detected
ERROR for the spindle.
(specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL)
SP1213 TOOL CHANGE SP STOP EXCESS During a tool change, a too much stop error was detected for
ERROR the spindle.
(specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL)
SP1214 TOOL CHANGE SP ILLEGAL During changing tools, an abnormal spindle sequence was
SEQUENCE detected.
(specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL)
SP1220 NO SPINDLE AMP. Either the cable connected to a serial spindle amplifier is
broken, or the serial spindle amplifier is not connected.
SP1221 ILLEGAL MOTOR NUMBER The spindle No. and the motor No. are incorrectly matched.
SP1224 ILLEGAL SPINDLE-POSITION CODER The spindle–position coder gear ratio was incorrect.
GEAR RATIO
SP1225 CRC ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A CRC error (communications error) occurred in
communications between the CNC and the serial spindle
amplifier.

- 499 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

SP1226 FRAMING ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A framing error occurred in communications between the
CNC and the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1227 RECEIVING ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A receive error occurred in communications between the
CNC and the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1228 COMMUNICATION ERROR (SERIAL A communications error occurred between the CNC and the
SPINDLE) serial spindle amplifier.
SP1229 COMMUNICATION ERROR SERIAL A communications error occurred between serial spindle
SPINDLE AMP. amplifiers (motor Nos. 1 and 2, or motor Nos. 3–4).
SP1231 SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The position deviation during spindle rotation was greater
than the value set in parameters.
SP1232 SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The position deviation during spindle stop was greater than
the value set in parameters.
SP1233 POSITION CODER OVERFLOW The error counter/speed instruction value of the position
coder overflowed.
SP1234 GRID SHIFT OVERFLOW Grid shift overflowed.
SP1240 DISCONNECT POSITION CODER The analog spindle position coder is broken.
SP1241 D/A CONVERTER ERROR The D/A converter for controlling analog spindles is
erroneous.
SP1243 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The setting for the spindle position gain is incorrect.
SETTING(GAIN)
SP1244 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW The amount of distribution to a spindle is too much
SP1245 COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR A communication data error was detected on the CNC.
SP1246 COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR A communication data error was detected on the CNC.
SP1247 COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR A communication data error was detected on the CNC.
SP1969 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1970 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR Initialization of spindle control ended in error.
SP1971 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1972 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1974 ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1975 ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An position coder error was detected on the analog spindle.
SP1976 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION The amplifier No. could not be set to the serial spindle
ERROR amplifier.
SP1977 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION An error occurred in the spindle control software.
ERROR
SP1978 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION A time–out was detected during communications with the
ERROR serial spindle amplifier.
SP1979 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION The communications sequence was no longer correct during
ERROR communications with the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1980 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR Defective SIC–LSI on serial spindle amplifier
SP1981 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR An error occurred during reading of the data from SIC–LSI on
the analog spindle amplifier side.
SP1982 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR An error occurred during reading of the data from SIC–LSI on
the serial spindle amplifier side.
SP1983 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR Could not clear on the spindle amplifier side.
SP1984 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR An error occurred during re–initialization of the spindle
amplifier.
SP1985 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR Failed to automatically set parameters
SP1986 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1987 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR Defective SIC–LSI on the CNC
SP1988 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1989 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.

- 500 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

SP1996 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The spindle was assigned incorrectly. Check to see the
SETTING following parameter. (No.3716 or 3717)
SP1998 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1999 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.

(10) Overheat alarms (OH alarm)

Number Message Description
OH0700 LOCKER OVERHEAT CNC cabinet overheat
OH0701 FAN MOTOR STOP PCB cooling fan motor abnormality

- 501 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

(11) Other alarms (DS alarm)

Number Message Description
DS0001 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (POS DEV) In feed axis synchronization control, the difference in the
amount of positional deviation between the master and slave
axes exceeded the parameter (No. 8323) setting value.
This alarm occurs only for the slave axis.
DS0002 SYNC EXCESS ERROR ALARM 1 In feed axis synchronization control, the difference in the
amount of synchronization between the master and slave
axes exceeded the parameter (No. 8331) setting value.
This alarm occurs only for the slave axis.
DS0003 SYNCHRONIZE ADJUST MODE The system is in the synchronize adjust mode.
DS0004 EXCESS MAXIMUM FEEDRATE The malfunction prevention function detected the command
in which a value exceeding the maximum speed was
specified.
DS0005 EXCESS MAXIMUM ACCELERATION The malfunction prevention function detected the command
in which a value exceeding the maximum acceleration was
specified.
DS0014 TOOL CHANGE DETECT MACHINE A machine lock is turned on for the Z axis for which the tool is
LOCK being changed.
DS0015 TOOL CHANGE DETECT MIRROR A mirror image is turned on for the Z axis for which the tool is
IMAGE being changed.
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data I/O]
The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No.
search could not be found.
There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset (tool
data), but either no tool numbers have been input since
power ON or there is no data for the entered tool No.
[External workpiece No. search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece No.
could not be found.
DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator
message or external alarm message, but five or more
displays were required simultaneously.
DS0132 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT FOUND An attempt to cancel an external operator message or
external alarm message failed because the specified
message number was not found.
DS0133 TOO LARGE NUMBER A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external
operator message or the external alarm message number.
DS0300 APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN A setting to zero position for the absolute position detector
(association with reference position and the counter value of
the absolute position detector) is required. Perform the return
to the reference position.
This alarm may occur with other alarms simultaneously.
In this case, other alarms must be handled first.
DS0306 APC ALARM: BATTERY VOLTAGE 0 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which data can no longer be held. Or,
the power was supplied to the Pulsecoder for the first time.
The battery or cable is thought to be defective. Replace the
battery with the machine turned on.
DS0307 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 1 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which a replacement is required.
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.

- 502 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message Description

DS0308 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 2 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector dropped
to a level at which a replacement was required in the past.
(including during power off)
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.
DS0309 APC ALARM: REF RETURN An attempt was made to set the zero point for the absolute
IMPOSSIBLE position detector by MDI operation when it was impossible to
set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the zero
position of the absolute position detector after turning the
CNC and servo amplifier off and then on again.
DS0405 ZERO RETURN END NOT ON REF The axis specified in automatic zero return was not at the
correct zero point when positioning was completed.
Perform zero return from a point whose distance from the
zero return start position to the zero point is 2 or more
revolutions of the motor.
Other probable causes are:
- The positional deviation after triggering the deceleration
dog is less than 128.
- Insufficient voltage or malfunctioning Pulsecoder.
DS1120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (HIGH) The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address
(high bits).
DS1121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW) The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address (low
bits).
DS1124 OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR An output request was issued
during external data output, or an output request was issued
for an address that has no output data.
DS1127 DI.EIDHW OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals
EID32 to EID47 has exceeded the permissible range.
DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals EID0
to EID31 has exceeded the permissible range.
DS1130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a
sequence No. search as the system is not in the memory
mode or the reset state.
DS1131 EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER) [External Data I/O]
An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a
tool No. during loading by the G10 code.
DS1132 NOT ON RETURN_POINT The tool did not arrive at the stored return position along the
axis, or the position may have deviated by machine lock or
mirror image operation during zero return.
DS1150 A/D CONVERT ALARM A/D converter malfunction
DS1184 PARAMETER ERROR IN TORQUE An invalid parameter was set for torque control.
The torque constant parameter is set to “0”.
DS1185 OVER MAXIMUM FEED The maximum cutting feedrate or rapid traverse feedrate was
exceeded in G54.3.
DS1450 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED 1st reference position return (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 17h (Hex))
was specified when the manual reference position return was
not executed with the reference position return function
enabled (parameter ZRN (No. 1005#0) set to “0”).
DS1451 IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND The PMC axes cannot be controlled in this state.
DS1512 EXCESS VELOCITY The feedrate of the linear axis during polar coordinate
interpolation exceeded the maximum cutting feedrate.

- 503 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message Description

DS1514 ILLEGAL MOTION IN G12.1 MODE In a hypothetical axis direction compensation during the polar
coordinate interpolation mode, an attempt is made to travel to
the area in which the travel cannot be made.
DS1553 EXCESS VELOCITY IN G43.4/G43.5 The axis rate was attempt to exceed the maximum cutting
feedrate and travel by the pivot tool length compensation.
DS1710 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER There are errors in the parameters of permissible
(OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC) acceleration for Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration.
One of the following is the cause.
1) The ratio of the acceleration for deceleration to the
acceleration for the acceleration is lower than the limited
value.
2) The time to decelerate to 0 is larger than the maximum.
DS1930 THERMAL DATA ERROR [thermal displacement data error]
An attempt was made to enter the out- of range
compensation data.
DS1931 THRMAL INDEX ERROR An illegal axis data is specified.
DS1932 THRMAL FUNCTION CARRING OUT The thermal displacement compensation function is
operable.
No parameter can be rewritten.
DS1933 NEED REF RETURN(SYNC:MIX:OVL) The relation between a machine coordinate of an axis in
synchronization, composition, or superposition control, and
the absolute, or relative coordinate was displaced.
Perform the manual return to the reference position.

(12) Malfunction prevention function alarms (IE alarm)

Number Message Description
IE0001 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 1 on the positive side was exceeded.
IE0002 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 1 on the negative side was exceeded.
IE0003 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 2 on the positive side was exceeded.
IE0004 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 2 on the negative side was exceeded.
IE0005 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 3 on the positive side was exceeded.
IE0006 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 3 on the negative side was exceeded.
IE0007 EXCESS MAXIMUM REV. DATA The malfunction prevention function detected the command in
which a value exceeding the maximum speed was specified.
IE0008 ILLEGAL ACC/DEC The malfunction prevention function detected the
acceleration/deceleration error.
IE0009 ILLEGAL MCN COODINATE The malfunction prevention function detected the displacement of
a machine coordinate in the check point.

- 504 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

A.2 ALARM LIST (PMC)

A.2.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen

The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be
displayed on the PMC alarm screen.

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR <1> Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is invalid.
<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program is too large.
program. The sequence program is invalid.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program exceeds the
ERROR(OPTION) program. size specified by the ladder step
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step count option.
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH Change the sequence program so that it The PMC type specified in the
specifies the adequate PMC type, by using sequence program does not match
the programmer. the type of the PMC actually in use.
ER07 NO OPTION(LADDER <1> Restore the backup CNC parameter No ladder step count option is found.
STEP) data.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH Contact us. An unsupported function is used in
the sequence program.
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK <1> Turn on the power of the CNC again, The nonvolatile memory of the PMC
ERROR by holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at system needs to be initialized in such
the same time. cases as when you have changed
<2> Replace the backup batteries. the PMC model.
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY <1> Enter the sequence program again. The parity of the sequence program
<2> If this error recurs even after you have is invalid.
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Enter the sequence program again. An interrupt was specified while the
BY I/O sequence program was being read.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR A function key was pressed during
screen again, and terminate the editing the editing of the ladder program,
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key. causing a switch to the CNC screen.
ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT Display the SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITOR A function key was pressed during
DATA ERROR screen again, and terminate the editing the editing of the symbol/comment
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key. data, causing a switch to the CNC
screen.

- 505 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Display the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR A function key was pressed during
screen again, and terminate the editing the editing of the message data,
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key. causing a switch to the CNC screen.
ER22 NO PROGRAM Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is empty.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS Correct the sequence program; change the An out-of-range parameter number is
OUT OF RANGE parameter number specified in a functional specified in the TMR, TMRB, CTR,
instruction to a value that is within the CTRB, DIFU, or DIFD functional
allowable range. instruction.
ER28 NO OPTION(I/O LINK CHx) Contact us; specify the I/O Link point count The I/O Link point count expansion
expansion option for the indicated channel. option is not specified for CHx.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE <1> Check whether the power of each I/O None of the I/O devices, such as the
device is on. I/O Link, connection unit, and Power
<2> Check whether the power of each I/O Mate, is connected.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Check cable connections.
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR Contact us; replace the faulty hardware. The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.
or
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn)
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(xx) <1> Check the cable connections to the An I/O device communication error
or devices of group xx. occurred on the slave side of group
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn xx) <2> Check whether the power of each I/O xx.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Replace any device of group xx in
which the PMC control module is
embedded.
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT Reduce the output data count of group xx. The output data count of I/O Link
DATA IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT regarded as invalid.
DATA IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA Reduce the input data count of group xx. The input data count of I/O Link
IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA regarded as invalid.
IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or The slot number for the I/O Link
BASE less. exceed the upper limit (10). The slot
or number larger than 11 is regarded as
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN invalid.
BASE(CHn)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT Reduce the total amount of output data of all The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT and later on the output side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT Reduce the total amount of input data of all The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT and later on the input side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)
ER50 PMC EXECUTION ORDER Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to The set execution order of the multi-
ERROR 11902. PMC function is invalid.

- 506 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER51 PMC EXECUTION Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to The set execution percentage of the
PERCENTAGE ERROR 11907. multi-PMC function is invalid.
ER52 IOLINK CHANNEL Check CNC parameter Nos. 11910 to The I/O Link channel assignment to
ASSIGNMENT ERROR 11913. the PMC system is invalid.
ER53 IOLINK CHANNEL DEVIDE Check CNC parameter Nos. 11915 to The I/O Link channel division function
ERROR 11918. setting is invalid.
ER54 NC-PMC I/F ASSIGNMENT Check CNC parameter Nos. 11920 to The interface assignment between
ERROR 11929. NC and PMC is invalid.
ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION Check CNC parameter No. 11930. The set ladder level 1 execution cycle
CYCLE ERROR is invalid.
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE(CHx <1> Check the cable connections to the I/O The I/O module assignment of group
yyGROUP) devices of group yy. yy does not match the number of the
<2> Check the power of each I/O device. I/O devices that are actually
<3> Check the parameter settings for the connected.
selectable I/O Link assignment No I/O device that is connected to the
function. channel associated with this alarm
will be linked.
The ladder program runs regardless
of the occurrence of this alarm.
WN02 OPERATE PANEL Correct the Series 0 operator's panel The Series 0 operator's panel
ADDRESS address that is set in the PMC system address that is set in the PMC
ERROR parameter. system parameter is invalid.
WN03 ABORT NC- <1> Check the ladder program to verify that The ladder program was stopped
WINDOW/EXIN it is free from errors, and then restart while communication was in progress
the ladder program (press the RUN between CNC and PMC.
key). This alarm may cause the WINDR,
<2> Turn on the power of the CNC again. WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB functional
instructions to malfunction.
WN07 LADDER SP Correct the sequence program so that the There are too many levels of nesting
ERROR(STACK) subprogram has eight or fewer levels of (levels more than 8) for the CALL or
nesting. CALLU functional instruction to call
the subprogram.
WN09 SEQUENCE PROGRAM If you want to use a changed sequence You have changed the sequence
IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH program again next time you power on the program using the LADDER
ROM system, write the sequence program to flash DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or DATA
ROM. If you have made any unwanted I/O screen, but you have not yet
change to the sequence program by written the changed sequence
mistake, read the original sequence program to flash ROM. If you shut
program from flash ROM. down the system without writing the
changed sequence program to flash
ROM, the changes you have made
will be nowhere next time you turn on
the power.
WN10 NO OPTION(STEP <1> Add the step sequence option. No step sequence option was found
SEQUENCE) <2> Arrange so that the step sequence when the system attempted to
subprogram will not be called. execute a step sequence.

- 507 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

A.2.2 PMC System Alarm Messages

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware A CPU error occurred in the PMC
PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy fault; contact us with information on the system.
PC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy circumstances under which the alarm xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are internal
PC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy occurred (displayed message, system error codes.
PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM parity error occurred in the
fault; contact us with information on the PMC system.
circumstances under which the alarm aa and bb are internal error codes.
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC050 IOLINK CHn aabb:xxyy <1> Check whether the I/O assignment An I/O Link communication error
data matches the actual I/O device occurred.
connections. n is a channel number.
<2> Check whether all the cables are aabb and xxyy are internal error
connected properly. codes.
<3> Check the cable specifications. The possible causes of this alarm are
<4> Replace the interface module, as follows:
cable, master printed circuit board,(1) No base is connected even if data
and/or other components of the I/O is assigned for base extension
device, as appropriate. when I/O Unit-Model A is used.
(2) One or more cables are
connected improperly.
(3) One or more cables are faulty.
(4) One or more I/O devices (I/O Unit,
Power Mate, etc.) are faulty.
(5) The power of the master and/or
slave I/O Link device is faulty.
(6) The DO output of the I/O device is
short-circuited.
(7) The master printed circuit board is
faulty.
PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware A bus error occurred in the PMC
PC061 FL-R xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy fault; contact us with information on the system.
circumstances under which the alarm
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) Check the correspondence between the A stack error occurred with the CALL
CALL or CALLU instruction and the or CALLU functional instruction of the
SPE instruction. ladder program.

- 508 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

PC090 NMI(___) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware An NMI event occurred in the PMC
fault; contact us with information on the control software for an unknown
circumstances under which the alarm reason.
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC092 USER TRAP aa:xxxxxxxx This alarm may be due to a hardware An attempt was made to execute a
fault; contact us with information on the TRAP instruction that was not used in
circumstances under which the alarm the PMC control software.
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC093 INT(SYS) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware An interrupt occurred in the PMC
PC094 INT(TRAP) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy fault; contact us with information on the control software for an unknown
PC095 INT(EX) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy circumstances under which the alarm reason.
PC096 INT(IN) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC087 PARITY ERR (LADDER-2) This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM check error occurred.
PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER) fault; contact us with information on the
PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM) circumstances under which the alarm
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERR Contact us with information on the The read or write operation between
PATH_ circumstances under which the alarm CNC and PMC failed.
occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.).
PC502 ILLEGAL FUNCTION (SUB xx) Correct the sequence program so that The sequence program uses the xx
the xx functional instruction will not be functional instruction that is not
used. supported.

- 509 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

A.2.3 Operation Errors

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

VIEWER screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Input a valid address or numeric value. The input address or numeric value is
invalid.
PROGRAM IS PROTECTED BY Enter the password. The screen cannot be displayed because
PASSWORD the program is protected by the password.
ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME Input a existent subprogram number or A nonexistent subprogram number or
symbol. symbol is specified.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Input a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string is
specified.
THE NET IS NOT FOUND The specified net is not found.
THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND The specified address is not found.
THE FUNCTIONAL The specified functional instruction is not
INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND found.
WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT Specify a bit address for the write coil You entered a byte address when
ADDRESS search. specifying an address used for the write
coil search.
SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED The system cannot pick up all the nets. The system failed to pick up all the nets
Choose the nets to pick up, by using because there were 128 nets or more to
the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER be picked up.
display screen, and then perform the
net pickup operation manually.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The ladder data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the ladder FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
data. another application is accessing the ladder
data.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

- 510 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

THIS NET IS PROTECTED When you are editing data on a per-
subprogram basis, you cannot edit the
subprogram frame nets (END1, END2,
END3, SP, and SPE).
TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY Reduce the range of data to copy. The selected range of data exceeds the
Perform the copy operation several size of the copy buffer.
times, copying a smaller range of data
at a time.
TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE Reduce the size of data to paste. An attempt was made to paste data whose
size exceeded the free space of the
sequence program.
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a bit address
match for the alteration operation. to a byte address.
BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a byte
match for the alteration operation. address to a bit address.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Check the address to be input, and • A character string was entered that was
then enter it correctly. unacceptable as a PMC address.
• A wildcard (*) was specified in an
inappropriate manner.
• Ether "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" was not entered.
THE ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY Enter a write-permitted address. • An attempt was made to alter a write coil
address to a write-prohibited bit
address.
• An attempt was made to alter an
address set in an output parameter of a
functional instruction to a write-
prohibited bit address.
THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE Check the types of the address in The type of the addresses in "OLD
MISMATCHED "OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW ADDRESS" does not match that in "NEW
ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter ADDRESS".
the correct address or addresses.
***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL Define symbol data in "OLD No symbol data is defined in "OLD
ADDRESS". ADDRESS".
***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL Make sure that the address types Symbol data is already defined in "NEW
match for the alteration operation. ADDRESS".

- 511 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen (when updating)

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper There is no COME that corresponds to this
position. If the COM is unnecessary, COM.
remove it.
END IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN COM position. If COM is unnecessary, remove between COM and COME.
END2 IN COM it.
JMPE IN COM JMPE and corresponding JMP must have JMPE is found between COM and COME,
same COM/COME status. Review JMP and JMP and corresponding JMPE have
range and COM range, to adjust not to different COM/COME status.
overlap with each other: it is possible that
one range includes the other completely.
SP/SPE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between COM and
position. If the COM is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
COME WITHOUT COM If COM is missing, add it in proper There is no COM that corresponds to this
position. If the COME is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, remove Plural CTRs have the same number as
(WARNING) them. If all of them are necessary, assign their parameter. (This is warning.)
other number to parameter of them to
make them unique. (If two or more
instructions with same parameter number
will never be active simultaneously at one
time, the Ladder program has a
possibility to work correctly, however, it is
recommended from safety and
maintenance points of view, that all these
instructions should have different
parameter number with each other.)
ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct CTR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
number defined by each PMC model.
DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD If some of them are unnecessary, remove Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same
NUMBER them. If all of them are necessary, assign number as their parameter. (This is
(WARNING) other number to parameter of them to warning.)
make them unique. (If two or more
instructions with same parameter number
will never be active simultaneously at one
time, the Ladder program has a
possibility to work correctly, however, it is
recommended from safety and
maintenance points of view, that all these
instructions should have different
parameter number with each other.)
ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct DIFU or DIFD has parameter number that
number not to exceed the maximum is out of range.
number defined by each PMC model.

- 512 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

NO END Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in END, END1, END2 or END3 is not found.
NO END1 proper position.
NO END2
NO END3
DUPLICATE END1 Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are found.
DUPLICATE END2
DUPLICATE END3
GARBAGE AFTER END Remove unnecessary nets, and move There are some nets after END, END2 or
GARBAGE AFTER END2 necessary nets to proper position so that END3, which will not be executed.
GARBAGE AFTER END3 they will be executed.
OVERLAPPED JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper There is no JMPE that corresponds to this
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMP.
remove it.
JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM JMP and corresponding JMPE must have JMP and corresponding JMPE have
LEVEL same COM/COME status. Review JMP different COM/COME status.
range and COM range, to adjust not to
overlap with each other: it is possible that
one range includes the other completely.
COME IN JMP COME and corresponding COM must COME is found between JMP and JMPE,
have same JMP/JMPE status. Review and COM and corresponding COME have
COM range and JMP range, to adjust not different JMP/JMPE status.
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.
END IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN JMP position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove between JMP and JMPE.
END2 IN JMP it.
END3 IN JMP
SP/SPE IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between JMP and
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
JMPB OVER COM BORDER JMPB and its destination must have JMPB and its destination differ in
same COM/COME status. Review range COM/COME status.
of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not to
overlap with each other: it is possible that
one range includes the other completely.
JMPB OVER LEVEL JMPB can only jump to the same JMPB jumps to different program level.
program level, or within a subprogram. If
the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC,
correct it.
LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.
is missing, add it in proper position.
JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a subprogram JMPC is used in other than subprogram.
to level 2. If the JMPC is unnecessary,
remove it. If it should be JMPB or JMP,
correct it.
LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
is missing, add it in proper position:
JMPC jumps into level 2.

- 513 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a subprogram Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
to level 2. If the JMPC is unnecessary,
remove it. If another LBL of same L-
address that the JMPC is intended to
jump exists in the subprogram, assign
different L-address to these two LBLs. If it
should be JMPB or JMP, correct it.
JMPC INTO COM LBL for JMPC must be located out of any JMPC jumps to LBL between COM and
COM and COME pair. If the JMPC is COME.
unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is
located wrong, move it to correct position.
If the L-address of JMPC is wrong,
correct it.
JMPE WITHOUT JMP If JMP is missing, add it in proper There is no JMP that corresponds to this
position. If the JMPE is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
TOO MANY LBL Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error There are too many LBLs.
still occurs, adjust the construction of
program to use less LBLs.
DUPLICATE LBL If some of these LBLs are unnecessary, Same L-address is used in plural LBLs.
remove them. If all of these LBLs is
necessary, assign other L-addresses to
them to make all LBLs unique.
OVERLAPPED SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper There is no SPE that corresponds to this
position. If the SP is unnecessary, SP.
remove it.
SPE WITHOUT SP If SP is missing, add it in proper position. There is no SP that corresponds to this
If the SPE is unnecessary, remove it. SPE.
END IN SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper END is found between SP and SPE.
position. If END is in wrong place, move it
to proper position.
DUPLICATE P ADDRESS If some of these SPs are unnecessary, Same P-address is used in plural SPs.
remove them. If all of these SPs is
necessary, assign other P-addresses to
them to make all SPs unique.
DUPLICATE TMRB NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, remove Plural TMRBs have the same number as
(WARNING) them. If all of them are necessary, assign their parameter. (This is warning.)
other number to parameter of them to
make them unique. (If two or more
instructions with same parameter number
will never be active simultaneously at one
time, the Ladder program has a
possibility to work correctly, however, it is
recommended from safety and
maintenance points of view, that all these
instructions should have different
parameter number with each other.)
ILLEGAL TMRB NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMRB has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
number defined by each PMC model.

- 514 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, remove Plural TMRs have the same number as
(WARNING) them. If all of them are necessary, assign their parameter. (This is warning.)
other number to parameter of them to
make them unique. (If two or more
instructions with same parameter number
will never be active simultaneously at one
time, the Ladder program has a
possibility to work correctly, however, it is
recommended from safety and
maintenance points of view, that all these
instructions should have different
parameter number with each other.)
ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
number defined by each PMC model.
NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If Subprogram that is called by CALL/CALLU
the subprogram is missing, create it. is not found.
UNAVAILABLE INSTRUCTION Confirm that this ladder program is Unsupported instruction for this PMC
correct one. If this program is correct one, model is found.
all these unsupported instructions have
to be removed.
SP IN BAD LEVEL SP can be used at top of a subprogram. SP is found in wrong place.
Correct it so that no SP exists in other
place.
LADDER PROGRAM IS This ladder program must be all cleared Ladder program may be broken by some
BROKEN once, and remake ladder program. reason.
NO WRITE COIL Add proper write coil. Write coil is necessary, but is not found.
CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2 or CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
SP IN LEVEL3 If END3 is located wrong, move it to SP is found in level 3.
correct position. If the SP is unnecessary,
remove it.

- 515 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL Specify the name of an available The entered name of functional instruction
INSTRUCTION NAME functional instruction. is invalid.
TOO MANY FUNCTIONAL Only one functional instruction is Too many functional instructions are in
INSTRUCTIONS IN ONE NET allowed to constitute a net. If one net.
necessary, divide the net into plural
nets.
TOO LARGE NET Divide the net into plural nets so that Net is too large. When a net is converted
step number in a net may become into the object, the net exceeds 256 steps.
small.
NO INPUT FOR OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to No signal is provided for logical operation.
output of functional instruction that has
no output, causes this error. If coil is
not necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
OPERATION AFTER FUNCTION Output of functional instruction can not No logical operation with functional
IS FORBIDDEN be connected to a contact, nor to instruction output is permitted, except write
conjunction with other signal that will coils.
be implemented by logical-or
operation.
WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED Write coil is not found even if it is Write coil is expected, but not found.
expected. Add proper write coil to the
net.
BAD COIL LOCATION Coil can be located only at rightmost Coil is located in bad position.
column. Any coil located at other place
must be erased once, and place
necessary coils in correct place.
SHORT CIRCUIT Find contact with terminals connected Some contacts are connected with short
by short circuit, and correct circuit. CTR has a parameter number
connections. that is out of the range.
FUNCTION AFTER Functional instruction can not be used Functional instruction is used in output
DIVERGENCE IS FORBIDDEN in output section of net. If necessary, section of net.
divide the net into plural nets.
ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME Left terminals of all coils in a net must When a net contains more than one coil,
INPUT be connected to same input point. the coils should not have any contact
beside them affects only of the coils.
BAD CONDITION INPUT Check the connection of all condition Some condition input of functional
inputs of the functional instruction. instruction is not connected correctly.
Especially for functional instruction that
has more than one condition input,
check if connections to condition inputs
interfere with each other.
NO CONNECTION Find gap that is expected to be There is signal connected to nowhere.
connected, and correct the connection.
NET IS TOO COMPLICATED Examine every connection, and find Net is too complicated to analyze.
unnecessarily bending connection, or
coils that are connected to different
point.
PARAMETER IS NOT SUPPLIED Enter all of the relay addresses, and Relay with blank address, or blank
parameters of functional instructions. parameter of functional instruction, is
found.

- 516 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

TOO MANY CHARACTERS Make sure that the entered character The number of characters in the entered
string is within the allowable input length. character string exceeds the allowable input
length. Some of the characters are discarded.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication The title data cannot be displayed because
MODIFIED with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other online communication with FANUC LADDER-
applications from accessing the title data. III is in progress or another application is
accessing the title data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

TOO MANY CHARACTERS Make sure that the entered address is The number of characters in the entered
within the allowable input length. address exceeds the allowable address input
length.
ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Enter data in a batch correctly, as No address was entered during the batch
instructed in "Editing a set of symbol and input of address, symbol, and comment data
comment data" in Subsection 9.2.2. using the SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITOR
screen.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Enter an address correctly. The specified address is invalid, or the
entered address character string contains a
space or spaces.
THE ADDRESS ALREADY Specify another address. An already registered address was entered.
HAS AN ENTRY
THE SYMBOL NAME IS Specify another symbol. An already registered symbol was entered.
ALREADY USED
PMC ADDRESS MUST BE Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS No PMC address was entered when new
ENTERED field. symbol/comment data is registered.
TOO LONG SYMBOL NAME Make sure that the symbol consists of 16 The entered symbol exceeds the specified
characters or less. number of characters.
TOO LONG COMMENT Make sure that the comment consists of The entered comment exceeds the specified
STRING 30 characters or less. number of characters.
BAD SYMBOL NAME Define a symbol that contains no space. The entered symbol contains a space or
spaces.
THE STRING IS NOT Specify another character string for the The search was done for the specified
FOUND search. character string but did not find it.
OUT OF SPACE Create free space for the sequence The symbol/comment editing area has no free
program, by deleting unnecessary ladder space.
or message data.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication The symbol/comment data cannot be
MODIFIED with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another
symbol/comment data. application is accessing the symbol/comment
data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.

- 517 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the The delimiter code - semicolon (;) - was
batch message input process. not entered in the batch message input
process.
ILLEGAL NUMBER Enter a four-digit number as the The entered message number contains
message number. any nonnumeric character, or a number
shorter than four digits was entered.
THE NUMBER IS OUT OF Make sure that the entered message The entered message number is out of the
RANGE number is in the range between 1000 1000-9999 range.
and 9999.
CLOSING "@" IS NOT FOUND When entering kana or other Japanese One of the @ sign pair is missing.
characters, make sure that they are
enclosed within a pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF CHARACTERS Enter a character string correctly The number of characters entered
IN "@-@" between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs is not even.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN "@-@" Enter a character string correctly One or more invalid character codes exist
between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF CHARACTERS Enter a two-byte code correctly The number of characters in the two-byte
FOR 2-BYTE CODE between @02 and 01@. code (characters entered between @02
and 01@) is not a multiple of four.
ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE Enter a two-byte code correctly The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@. between @02 and 01@) contains one or
more characters other than the JIS codes.
CLOSING CONTROL CODE "01" Enter the closing control code. The two-byte code (characters entered
IS NOT FOUND between @02 and 01@) lacks the closing
control code (01).
CONTROL CODE "XX" IS Remove any repeated control code. The starting control code (02), closing
REPEATED control code (01), and/or umlaut code (0D)
is repeated.
CLOSING "]" IS NOT FOUND Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes are The delimiter codes for numerical data are
entered in pairs. not entered in pairs.
BAD NUMERICAL DATA Specify the numerical data correctly. The format of the numerical data is invalid.
FORMAT
BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR Enter an available address. The address section of the numerical data
NUMERIAL DATA is invalid.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The message data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
message data. another application is accessing the
message data.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

- 518 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

GROUP NUMBER IS TOO Specify 15 or a smaller value as the The entered group number is too large.
LARGE group number.
BASE NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B The entered base number is too large.
(##, #1 - #10).
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot The entered slot number is too large.
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 10 or a
smaller value.
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO SMALL Specify 0 or a large value as the slot The entered slot number is too small.
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 1 or a larger
value.
I/O UNIT NAME MISMATCH Check the I/O unit name or address. The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y
address, or the output I/O unit is
assigned to the X address.
ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables The entered I/O unit name is invalid.
3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.
NOT ENOUGH SPACE Enter the data again after creating free There is not enough free address space
space by deleting the data allocated for the size of the I/O unit you are going
behind the current cursor position or by to assign.
other adequate means. This error also occurs if you attempt to
assign the I/O unit to an already
allocated address space.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The I/O module data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the I/O FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
module data. another application is accessing the I/O
module data.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-
level protection function. level protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input
instructed in Section 9.8. format is invalid.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The system parameter data cannot be
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication
applications from accessing the with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
system parameter data. another application is accessing the
system parameter data.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

- 519 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input
instructed in "Screen operations using format is invalid.
other keys" in Subsection 7.1.2.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as The entered numerical value or its input
instructed in Section 7.3. format is invalid.
THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
programmer protection function or 8- programmer protection function or 8-level
level protection function. protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

TRACE FUNCTION IS ALREADY Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or some FANUC LADDER-III or some other
IN USE other application finishes using the application is currently using the trace
trace function before executing it. function.
NO SAMPLING ADDRESS Specify a bit address as a sampling No sampling address is specified in the
address in the trace parameter. trace parameter.
NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS Specify a bit address as the stop The stop trigger address is not specified in
trigger address in the trace parameter. the trace parameter.
NO SAMPLING TRIGGER Specify a bit address as the sampling The sampling trigger address is not
ADDRESS trigger address in the trace parameter. specified in the trace parameter.

Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value that is within A nonnumeric value or an out-of-range
the specified data range of the relevant parameter value was entered.
trace parameter.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Specify a bit address as the stop or A byte address was specified as the stop
sampling trigger address. or sampling trigger address.
INVALID STOP TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the stop trigger
ADDRESS be used as the stop trigger address. address is invalid.
INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the sampling
ADDRESS be used as the sampling trigger trigger address is invalid.
address.

- 520 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

A.2.4 I/O Communication Error Messages

The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their
meanings and actions are listed below.

Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY Check whether a memory card is No memory card is installed.
installed.
MEMORYCARD IS FULL Delete files to create available space. There is no available space in the memory
card.
MEMORYCARD IS WRITE Release the write protection of the The memory card is write-protected.
PROTECTED memory card.
MEMORYCARD IS NOT Format the memory card. The memory card cannot be recognized.
FORMATTED
TOO MANY FILES IN Delete unnecessary files to reduce the There are too many files.
MEMORYCARD number of files.
FILE NOT FOUND On the list screen, check the file name The specified file cannot be found.
or file number.
FILE IS READ-ONLY Check the attributes of the file. Write to the specified file is not permitted.
FILE NAME IS INVALID Specify the file name in MS-DOS form. The file name is illegal.
COULD NOT FORMAT MEMORY The NC cannot format this memory The memory card cannot be formatted.
CARD card. Use another unit such as a
personal computer to format the
memory card.
UNSUPPORTED MEMORYCARD Replace the memory card with another This memory card is not supported.
one.
CAN NOT DELETE FILE Check the attributes of the file. An error occurred when a file was deleted
from the memory card.
MEMORYCARD BATTERY Replace the battery of the memory The battery of the memory card has
ALARM card. become weak.
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY Change the file name to another one. The file name is already used.
USED
MEMORYCARD ACCESS Replace the memory card with another The memory card cannot be accessed.
ERROR one.
DIFFERENCE FOUND File comparison detected a mismatch.
MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the memory
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry. card.
MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FILE NUMBER CAN NOT If the file does not exist, the key entry is The file number cannot be selected.
SELECTED invalid. If this error occurs even when
the cursor is placed at a file name,
contact the FANUC service center.
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT Check the total number of files on the The entered file number is not present.
EXIST list screen. The entered number exceeds the total
number of files.
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED Enter a numeric value not exceeding A value up to 128 can be entered as the
TO "128" 128. file number.
MEMORY CARD IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other Some other function is currently using the
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the memory card.
memory card.

- 521 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

MEMORY CARD IS WRITE Cancel the write protection of the The memory card is write protected.
PROTECTED memory card, or use another memory
card that is not write protected.
UNSUPPORTED MEMORY Use another memory card. This is an unsupported type of memory
CARD card.
COULD NOT DELETE FILE Check the read/write permission The file cannot be deleted.
attribute of the file.
TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER Delete unnecessary old trace result file No more trace result file can be created
or files. because the maximum trace result file
number (file extension) has been reached.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.

Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operation

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

NOT IN EMG STOP MODE Place the system in the emergency The system is not in the emergency stop
stop state. state.
INVALID LADDER PROGRAM Check the program. The transfer program is illegal.
DIFFERENCE FOUND A file comparison detected a mismatch.
FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the flash ROM.
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry.
FLASH ROM HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FLASH ROM IS USED BY OTHER This file cannot be read. Check the The ROM data ID of the file you attempted
FUNCTION type of the file. to read is invalid.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.

- 522 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O

operation.

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER Specify a file of the PMC parameter The specified file is not of the PMC
FORMAT format. Also, check the specified file parameter format.
to see whether its content is not
disrupted.
ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT Specify a file of the handy file format. The specified file is not of the handy file
Also, check the specified file to see format.
whether its content is not disrupted.
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT Specify file of recognizable format such Can not recognize the format of specified
as PMC parameter format, or check file.
the contents of the file.
FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER IS Specify file name or file number for the Need file name or file number to identify
REQUIRED operation. file to read, compare, or delete.
COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT Check the communication parameters Communication with the I/O device has
such as baud rate, and retry to been timeout.
communicate.
I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED Check the power of I/O device is ON. Any I/O device is not connected, or some
OR IN ERROR STATUS Check the I/O device is connected. error has occurred in it.
Check the cable that connects I/O
device with PMC is correct one. If
some error has occurred in I/O device,
solve it.
RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK Check the PMC's communication Invalid data has been received.
THE COMMUNICATION parameters such as baud rate match
PARAMETERS the ones of I/O device.
RECEIVED DATA HAS Check the communication parameters Too many data have received at once.
OVERRUN about flow control.
OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING Use the other channel, or stop the Others function is using this channel.
THIS CHANNEL function.
BAD COMMUNICATION Check the communication parameters Setting parameters of communication are
PARAMETER such as baud rate. not correct.
OTHER FUNCTION IS USING I/O Wait until function that using I/O Another function such as FANUC
FUNCTION function do finish, or stop the function. LADDER-III is using I/O function.
UNKNOWN HANDY FILE Check the file. The received data is not a program of the
FORMAT DATA PMC system or is a program of some other
incompatible type.
ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING Set a valid baud rate. The set baud rate is invalid.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER Set a valid channel number. The set channel number is invalid.
ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING Set a valid parity bit. The set parity bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING Set a valid stop bit. The set stop bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL WRITE CODE SETTING Set a valid output code. The set output code is invalid.
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN Wait until On-line function, do finish the Can not input/output of sequence
USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION using I/O function. In general, both of program, because On-line function is
I/O function and On-line function using sequence program.
should not be used at the same time.

- 523 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during

the I/O operations

Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ERROR OCCURS IN LADDER Check the PMC alarm screen and Data cannot be output because there is an
PROGRAM correct the indicated program error error in the ladder program.
accordingly.
UNKNOWN DATA TYPE Check the file. The PMC type of the input data is
unknown.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT Check the related settings. There are not all the settings that are
ALLOWED needed to use this function.
PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
BY OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the PMC some other function and cannot be
parameter. referenced by this function.
THIS DEVICE IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other The specified device is currently used by
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be used
specified device. by this function.
PMC PARAMETER IS Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
PROTECTED BY OTHER function that is currently using the PMC some other function and cannot be
FUNCTION parameter. changed by this function.
LADDER TYPE UNMATCH Specify a program of a valid type. The specified program is of a different type
and cannot be read.
TOO LARGE LADDER Check the file. Or, change to a step The ladder program is too large to read.
PROGRAM number option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
LADDER PROGRAM IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other The ladder program is currently used by
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently displaying the some other function and cannot be
ladder program. referenced by this function.

- 524 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE)

When a serial spindle alarm occurs, the following number is displayed

on the CNC.
n is a number corresponding to the spindle on which an alarm occurs.
(n=1 : First spindle, n=2 : Second spindle...)

NOTE
* Note that the meanings of the SPM indications
differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow
LED, is on. When the red LED is on, the SPM
indicates a 2-digit alarm number. When the yellow
LED is on, the SPM indicates an error number that
designates a sequence problem (for example,
when a rotation command is entered with the
emergency stop state not released).
See "Error Codes (Serial Spindle)."

Number Message SPM Faulty location and remedy Description

indication
(*1)
SP9001 SSPA:01 MOTOR 01 1 Check and correct the The thermostat embedded in the motor
OVERHEAT peripheral temperature and winding operated.
load status. The internal temperature of the motor
2 If the cooling fan stops, exceeds the specified level.
replace it. The motor is used in excess of the
continuous rating, or the cooling
component is abnormal.
SP9002 SSPA:02 EX 02 1 Check and correct the The motor speed cannot follow a
DEVIATION SPEED cutting conditions to specified speed.
decrease the load. An excessive motor load torque is
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. detected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 is insufficient.
SP9003 SSPA:03 DC-LINK 03 1 Replace the SPM unit. The PSM becomes ready (00 is
FUSE IS BROKEN 2 Check the motor insulation indicated), but the DC link voltage is
status. too low in the SPM.
3 Replace the interface cable. The fuse in the DC link section in the
SPM is blown. (The power device is
damaged or the motor is ground-
fault.)
The JX1A/JX1B connection cable is
abnormal.
SP9004 SSPA:04 POWER 04 Check the state of the input The PSM found a missing power
SUPPLY ERROR power supply to the PSM. supply phase. (PSM alarm 5)
SP9006 THERMAL SENSOR 06 1 Check and correct the The temperature sensor of the motor
DISCONNECT parameter. is disconnected.
2 Replace the feedback cable.

- 525 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message SPM Faulty location and remedy Description

indication
(*1)
SP9007 SSPA:07 OVER 07 Check for a sequence error. The motor speed has exceeded
SPEED (For example, check whether 115% of its rated speed. When the
spindle synchronization was spindle axis was in position control
specified when the spindle mode, positional deviations were
could not be turned.) accumulated excessively (SFR and
SRV were turned off during spindle
synchronization.)
SP9009 SSPA:09 09 1 Improve the heat sink Abnormal temperature rise of the
OVERHEAT MAIN cooling status. power transistor radiator
CIRCUIT 2 If the heat sink cooling fan
stops, replace the SPM
unit.
SP9011 SSPA:11 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of
OVERVOLT POWER 2 Check the input power the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm
CIRCUIT voltage and change in power indication: 7)
during motor deceleration. PSM selection error. (The maximum
If the voltage exceeds 253 output specification of the PSM is
VAC (for the 200-V system) exceeded.)
or 530 VAC (for the 400-V
system), improve the power
supply impedance.
SP9012 SSPA:12 12 1 Check the motor insulation The motor output current is
OVERCURRENT status. abnormally high.
POWER CIRCUIT 2 Check the spindle A motor-specific parameter does not
parameters. match the motor model.
3 Replace the SPM unit. Poor motor insulation
SP9015 SSPA:15 SPINDLE 15 1 Check and correct the ladder The switch sequence in spindle
SWITCHING FAULT sequence. switch/output switch operation is
2 Replace the switching MC. abnormal.
The switching MC contact status
check signal and command do not
match.
SP9016 SSPA:16 RAM 16 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
ERROR printed circuit board. component is detected. (RAM for
external data is abnormal.)
SP9018 SSPA:18 18 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
SUMCHECK ERROR printed circuit board. component is detected. (Program
PROGRAM ROM ROM data is abnormal.)
SP9019 SSPA:19 EXCESS 19 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
OFFSET CURRENT detected. (The initial value for the U
U phase current detection circuit is
abnormal.)
SP9020 SSPA:20 EXCESS 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
OFFSET CURRENT detected. (The initial value of the V
V phase current detection circuit is
abnormal.)
SP9021 POS SENSOR 21 Check and correct the The polarity parameter setting of the
POLARITY ERROR parameters. position sensor is wrong.
(No. 4000#0, 4001#4)

- 526 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message SPM Faulty location and remedy Description

indication
(*1)
SP9024 SSPA:24 SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC-to-spindle The CNC power is turned off (normal
TRANSFER ERROR cable away from the power power-off or broken cable).
cable. An error is detected in
2 Replace the cable. communication data transferred to
the CNC.
SP9027 SSPA:27 27 1 Replace the cable. 1 The spindle position coder
DISCONNECT 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor (connector JY4) signal is abnormal.
POSITION CODER signal. 2 The signal amplitude (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
abnormal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment
error, etc.)
SP9029 SSPA:29 29 Check and correct the load Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD status. continuously for a certain period of
time. (This alarm is issued also when
the motor shaft has been locked in
the excitation state.)
SP9030 SSPA:30 30 Check and correct the power Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
OVERCURRENT supply voltage. circuit input. (PSM alarm indication:
INPUT CIRCUIT 1)
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selection error (The maximum
PSM output specification is
exceeded.)
SP9031 SSPA:31 MOTOR 31 1 Check and correct the load The motor cannot rotate at a
LOCK OR status. specified speed. (A level not
DISCONNECT 2 Replace the motor sensor exceeding the SST level for the
DETECTOR cable (JY2 or JY5). rotation command has existed
continuously.)
Abnormality in the speed detection
signal.
SP9032 SSPA:32 SIC-LSI 32 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
RAM FAULT printed circuit board. component is detected. (The LSI
device for serial transfer is
abnormal.)
SP9033 SSPA:33 33 1 Check and correct the power Charging of direct current power
SHORTAGE supply voltage. supply voltage in the power circuit
POWER CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. section is insufficient when the
magnetic contractor in the amplifier
is turned on (such as open phase
and defective charging resistor).
SP9034 SSPA:34 ILLEGAL 34 Correct a parameter value Parameter data exceeding the
PARAMETER according to the manual. allowable limit is set.
If the parameter number is
unknown, connect the spindle
check board, and check the
indicated parameter.
SP9036 SSPA:36 36 Check whether the position An error counter overflow occurred.
OVERFLOW gain value is too large, and
ERROR COUNTER correct the value.

- 527 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message SPM Faulty location and remedy Description

indication
(*1)
SP9037 SSPA:37 ILLEGAL 37 Correct the value according to The setting of the parameter for the
SETTING VELOCITY the parameter manual. number of pulses in the speed
DETECTOR detector is incorrect.
SP9041 SSPA:41 ILLEGAL 41 1 Check and correct the 1 The 1-rotation signal of the spindle
1REV SIGN OF parameter. position coder (connector JY4) is
POSITION CODER 2 Replace the cable. abnormal.
3 Re-adjust the BZ sensor 2 The 1-rotation signal (connector
signal. Re-adjust the BZ JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
sensor signal. abnormal.
3 Parameter setting error
SP9042 SSPA:42 NO 1REV 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1-rotation signal of the spindle
SIGN OF POSITION 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor position coder (connector JY4) is
CODER signal. disconnected.
2 The 1-rotation signal (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
disconnected.
SP9043 SSPA:43 43 Replace the cable. The differential speed position coder
DISCONNECT signal (connector JY8) in SPM type 3
POSITION CODER is abnormal.
DEF. SPEED
SP9046 SSPA:46 ILLEGAL 46 1 Check and correct the An abnormality equivalent to alarm
1REV SIGN OF parameter. 41 was detected during thread
SCREW CUT 2 Replace the cable. cutting operation.
3 Re-adjust the BZ sensor
signal.
SP9047 SSPA:47 ILLEGAL 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the spindle
SIGNAL OF 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor position coder (connector JY4) is
POSITION CODER signal. abnormal.
3 Correct the cable layout 2 The A/B phase signal (connector
(vicinity of the power line). JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
abnormal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1-rotation signal is
incorrect (Pulse interval mismatch).
SP9049 SSPA:49 DEF. 49 Check whether the calculated In differential speed mode, the speed
SPEED IS OVER differential speed value of the other spindle converted to the
VALUE exceeds the maximum motor speed of the local spindle has
speed. exceeded the allowable limit (the
differential speed is calculated by
multiplying the speed of the other
spindle by the gear ratio).
SP9050 SSPA:50 50 Check whether the calculated In spindle synchronization, the speed
SYNCRONOUS value exceeds the maximum command calculation value
VALUE IS OVER motor speed. exceeded the allowable limit (the
SPEED motor speed is calculated by
multiplying the specified spindle
speed by the gear ratio).
SP9051 SSPA:51 LOW VOLT 51 1 Check and correct the power Input voltage drop was detected. (PSM
POWER CIRCUIT supply voltage. alarm indication: 4) (Momentary power
2 Replace the MC. failure or poor MC contact)

- 528 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message SPM Faulty location and remedy Description

indication
(*1)
SP9052 SSPA:52 ITP FAULT 52 1 Replace the SPM control NC interface abnormality was
1 printed circuit board. detected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle
interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9053 SSPA:53 ITP FAULT 53 1 Replace the SPM control NC interface abnormality was
2 printed circuit board. detected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle
interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9054 SSPA:54 54 Review the load state. An overload current was detected.
OVERCURRENT
SP9055 SSPA:55 ILLEGAL 55 1 Replace the magnetic The power line state signal of the
POWER LINE contactor. magnetic contactor for selecting a
2 Check and correct the spindle or output is abnormal.
sequence.
SP9056 COOLING FAN 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control
FAILURE circuit stopped.
SP9057 CONV. EX. 57 1 Decrease the An overload was detected in the
DECELERATION acceleration/deceleration regenerative resistance. (PSMR alarm
POW. duty. indication: 8)
2 Check the cooling condition Thermostat operation or short-time
(peripheral temperature). overload was detected.
3 If the cooling fan stops, The regenerative resistor was
replace the resistor. disconnected, or an abnormal
4 If the resistance is abnormal, resistance was detected.
replace the resistor.
SP9058 CNV. OVERLOAD 58 1 Check the PSM cooling The temperature of the radiator of
status. the PSM has increased abnormally.
2 Replace the PSM unit. (PSM alarm indication: 3)
SP9059 CNV. COOLING FAN 59 Replace the PSM unit. The cooling fan in the PSM stopped.
FAILURE (PSM alarm indication: 2)
SP9066 COM. ERROR 66 1 Replace the cable. An error was found in communication
BETWEEN SP 2 Check and correct the between amplifiers.
AMPS connection.
SP9073 MOTOR SENSOR 73 1 Replace the feedback cable. The motor sensor feedback signal is
DISCONNECTED 2 Check the shield processing. not present.
3 Check and correct the
connection.
4 Adjust the sensor.
SP9074 CPU TEST ERROR 74 Replace the SPM control An error was detected in a CPU test.
printed-circuit board.
SP9075 CRC ERROR 75 Replace the SPM control An error was detected in a CRC test.
printed-circuit board.
SP9079 INITIAL TEST 79 Replace the SPM control An error was detected in an initial
ERROR printed-circuit board. test operation.
SP9081 1-ROT MOTOR 81 1 Check and correct the The one-rotation signal of the motor
SENSOR ERROR parameter. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
2 Replace the feedback cable.
3 Adjust the sensor.
SP9082 NO 1-ROT MOTOR 82 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one-rotation signal of the motor
SENSOR 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.

- 529 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Number Message SPM Faulty location and remedy Description

indication
(*1)
SP9083 MOTOR SENSOR 83 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a
SIGNAL ERROR 2 Adjust the sensor. motor sensor feedback signal.
SP9084 SPNDL SENSOR 84 1 Replace the feedback cable. The spindle sensor feedback signal
DISCONNECTED 2 Check the shield processing. is not present.
3 Check and correct the
connection.
4 Check and correct the
parameter.
5 Adjust the sensor.
SP9085 1-ROT SPNDL 85 1 Check and correct the The one-rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR ERROR parameter. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
2 Replace the feedback cable.
3 Adjust the sensor.
SP9086 NO 1-ROT SPNDL 86 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one-rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
SP9087 SPNDL SENSOR 87 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a
SIGNAL ERROR 2 Adjust the sensor. spindle sensor feedback signal.
SP9088 COOLING RADI FAN 88 Replace the SPM external The external cooling fan stopped.
FAILURE cooling fan.
SP9110 AMP b0 1 Replace the communication Communication error between
COMMUNICATION cable between amplifier and amplifier and module
ERROR module.
2 Replace the SPM or PSM
control printed circuit board.
SP9111 CONV. LOW VOLT b1 Replace the PSM control Low converter control power supply
CONTROL printed circuit board. voltage (PSM indication = 6)
SP9112 CONV. EX. b2 1 Check the regenerative Excessive converter regenerative
DISCHARGE POW. resistance. power (PSM indication = 8)
2 Check the motor selection.
3 Replace the PSM
SP9113 CONV. COOLING b3 Replace the cooling fan. Stopped cooling fan of the converter
FAN FAILURE radiator (PSM indication = A)
SP9120 COMMUNICATION C0 1 Replace the communication Communication data alarm
DATA ERROR cable between CNC and
SPM.
2 Replace the SPM control
printed circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC side
spindle interface printed
circuit board.
SP9121 COMMUNICATION C1 1 Replace the communication Communication data alarm
DATA ERROR cable between CNC and
SPM.
2 Replace the SPM control
printed circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC side
spindle interface printed
circuit board.

- 530 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

Number Message SPM Faulty location and remedy Description

indication
(*1)
SP9122 COMMUNICATION C2 1 Replace the communication Communication data alarm
DATA ERROR cable between CNC and
SPM.
2 Replace the SPM control
printed circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC side
spindle interface printed
circuit board.

- 531 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE)

NOTE
*1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications
differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow
LED, is on. When the yellow LED is on, an error
code is indicated with a 2-digit number. An error
code is indicated in the CNC diagnosis, No.712.
When the red LED is on, the SPM indicates the
number of an alarm generated in the serial spindle.
→ See “(10) Serial spindle alarms (SP alarm).”

SPM
indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
01 Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. (For Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there are two
MRDY, pay attention to the parameter setting types of signals including the PMC signal and PSM contact
regarding the use of the MRDY signal signal(*2)) nor MRDY (machine ready signal) is input, SFR
(parameter No. 4001#0).) (forward rotation signal)/SRF (reverse rotation signal)/ORCM
(orientation command) is input.
03 Check the parameters for the detector for Cs Although use of a high-resolution magnetic Pulsecoder
contour control (parameter No. 4001#5 and (parameter No. 4001#5 = 1) or use of the Cs contour control
parameter No. 4018#4). function by the α sensor (parameter No. 4018#4 = 1) is not
set, a Cs control command is input. In this case, the motor is
not excited.
04 Check the position coder signal parameter Although use of the position coder signal (parameter No.
(parameter No. 4001#2). 4001#2 = 1) is not set, a servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle
positioning) or spindle synchronization command is input. In
this case, the motor is not excited.
05 Check the orientation software option. Although the orientation option is not set, an orientation
command (ORCM) is input.
06 Check the spindle output switching software Although the output switching option is not set, the low-
option and power line status signal (RCH). speed winding is selected (RCH = 1).
07 Check the sequence (CON, SFR, SRV). Although the Cs contour control mode is specified, SFR/SRV
is not input.
08 Check the sequence (SFR, SRV). Although the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning)
is specified, SFR/SRV is not input.
09 Check the sequence (SPSYC, SFR, SRV). Although spindle synchronization mode is specified, SFR/SRV is
not input.
10 During execution of the C-axis control Although Cs contour control mode is set, another operation
command, do not specify another operation mode (servo mode, spindle synchronization, or orientation)
mode. Before entering another mode, cancel is specified.
the Cs contour control command.
11 During execution of the servo mode Although servo mode (rigid tapping, or spindle positioning) is
command, do not specify another operation set, another operation mode (Cs contour control, spindle
mode. Before entering another mode, cancel synchronization, or orientation) is specified.
the servo mode.
12 During execution of the spindle Although spindle synchronization is being performed,
synchronization command, do not specify another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or
another operation mode. Before entering orientation) is specified.
another mode, cancel the spindle
synchronization command.

- 532 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST

SPM
indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
13 During execution of the orientation command, Although the orientation command is being executed,
do not specify another operation mode. Before another operation mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or
entering another mode, cancel the orientation synchronization) is specified.
command.
14 Input the SFT or SRV signal. The SFT and SRV signals are both input at the same time.
15 Check parameter No. 4000#5 and PMC When parameter No. 4000#5 is set to 1 to indicate the
signal (CON). presence of the differential speed mode function, Cs contour
control is specified.
16 Check parameter No. 4000#5 and PMC When parameter No. 4000#5 is set to 0 to indicate the
signal (DEFMD). absence of the differential speed mode function, the
differential speed mode command (DEFMD) is input.
17 Check parameter No. 4011#2, #1, and #0. Setting of the speed detector parameter (No. No. 4011#2,
#1, and #0) is invalid. (The corresponding speed detector is
not present.)
18 Check parameter No. 4001#2 and PMC Although parameter No. 4001#2 is set to 0 not to use the
signal (ORCM). position coder signal, a command for orientation by a
position coder (ORCMA) is input.
19 During execution of the orientation command, Although orientation by a magnetic sensor is being
do not specify another operation mode. Before performed, another operation mode is specified.
entering another mode, cancel the orientation
command.
24 Check the PMC signal (INCMD). Perform Orientation is performed in incremental operation mode
orientation by specifying an absolute position (INCMD = 1) first, then the absolute position command
first. (INCMD = 0) is input.

*2
*2 PSM contact signal
Between ESP1 and ESP2 on the PSM
Contact open: Emergency stop
Contact closed: Normal operation

- 533 -
B.LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS

Item Ordering information
Fuse LCD–mounted type control unit A02B-0236-K100
(without PC)
CNC display unit for Series 300is
LCD–mounted type Series 300is A02B-0236-K101
control unit
I/O module for operator’s panel A03B-0815-K001
Connector panel I/O module A03B-0815-K002
Interface unit of machine A02B-0120-K107
operator’s panel
Connection unit of operator’s panel A02B-0163-K111
Battery For control unit memory backup A02B-0200-K102
For separate absolute pulse coder A06B-6050-K061
Fan motor For no-slot case A02B-0303-K120
For two-slot case A02B-0303-K121
Touch panel For 10.4” LCD A02B-0236-K110
protection sheet For 15.0” LCD A08B-0082-K020
Pen for touch panel A02B-0236-K111

- 534 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

C BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................536
C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE ..........................................................................539
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS..............554

- 535 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

C.1 OVERVIEW

The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAM →
DRAM), then starts it so that software can be executed.
The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:

(1) Registering a file in Flash ROM

Reads a file from a Memory card, in FAT format, into Flash
ROM.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in Flash ROM
(3) Checking a file (series and edition) in Memory card
(4) Deleting a file from Flash ROM
(5) Deleting a file from Memory card
(6) Saving a file in Flash ROM to a Memory card
(7) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a Memory card
(8) Formatting of a Memory card

This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.

CAUTION
1 This control unit supports the use of a Memory card as an input/output device. The
following Memory cards are available:
SRAM Memory card
Flash card
Flash ATA card
See the order list for details of the supported Memory card types.
2 On a Memory card, only those files that are in the root directory can be accessed for
display, reading, and writing. Those in subdirectories cannot be used.
3 The time required to read or write each data item varies depending on the Memory
card type, the status of use, and other factors.
4 For flash cards, only those recommended by FANUC can be accessed for writing.
For reading, they can be usually be used in the same way as SRAM cards as long as
the FAT format is used.
When using a flash card, note that the card capacity decreases by 128 KB.
A flash Memory card does not allow deletion of files one at a time. It is necessary to
delete all files on the card at a time.
5 For flash ATA cards, only those recommended by FANUC are available.
6 When formatting a flash ATA card, use the quick formatting method, which clears
the file allocation table and the directory information on the root directory. An
unformatted flash ATA card cannot be used without being formatted with a personal
computer.

- 536 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

C.1.1 Displaying the Power ON Sequence

(1) RAM TEST :END

(2) ROM TEST :END [60W1A]
(3) DRAM ID :xxxxxxxx
(4) SRAM ID :xxxxxxxx
(5) FROM ID :xxxxxxxx

*** MESSAGE ***

(7) LOADING CNC DATA-1 xxxxxx/xxxxxx
END

RAM TEST :END

(2) ROM TEST :ERROR Processing is stopped in the event of an
error

*** MESSAGE ***

(6) ROM PARITY ERROR:NC BASIC. HIT SELECT. SELECT key → SYSTEM MONITOR

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Details of display items

(1) WORK RAM test results are displayed. In the event of an error,
however, the sequence is not displayable, and LED indication is
conducted without error display.
(2) BOOT ROM parity test results are displayed. During normal
operation, the series and edition are displayed. In the event of an
error, processing is stopped.
(3) The ID of the DRAM MODULE installed in the CNC is
displayed.
(4) The ID of the SRAM MODULE installed in the CNC is
displayed.
(5) The ID of the FROM MODULE installed in the CNC is
displayed.
(6) The CNC BASIC software in flash memory is checked for
validity and, in the event of an error, an error is displayed. In the
event of an error, clicking the [SELECT] soft key allows you to
select the SYSTEM MONITOR screen.
(7) This message indicates that the CNC BASIC software is being
transferred to flash memory to DRAM.

- 537 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

C.1.2 Starting the Boot System

In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers

files from Flash ROM to DRAM in the background.
The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system
must be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is
to be carried out or when the Flash ROM does not contain a required
file.
(1) In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM
Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the
two soft keys at the right end. If no soft keys are provided as
with a touch panel, use MDI numeric keys 6 and 7.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

After an FROM ID and other items are displayed on the CNC

screen, releasing the key brings you to the SYSTEM MONITOR
screen.

(2) When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start
the CNC
Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts
transferring files from Flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason,
a file required to start the CNC (NC BASIC) is not in Flash
ROM or has been destroyed, the boot system is automatically
started.

C.1.3 System Files and User Files

The boot system organizes files in Flash ROM into two main groups :
system files and user files. These two file types have the following
characteristics :

System files
CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC

User files
PMC sequence program (ladder), P-CODE macro program, and other
user-created files

- 538 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING

PROCEDURE

When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is
displayed. This screen is described below :

MAIN MENU screen

(1) SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60W1 - 01 (1) Screen title. The series and edition of
the BOOT SYSTEM are displayed at
(2) 1.END the right end.
(3) 2.USER DATA LOADING (2) Function for terminating the boot
(4) 3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING system and starting the CNC.
(5) 4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK (3) Function for writing data to Flash ROM.
(6) 5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE (4) Function for writing data to Flash ROM.
(7) 6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE (5) Function for checing the edition of a file
(8) 7.SRAM DATA BACKUP in ROM.
(9) 8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT (6) Function for deleting a file from Flash
ROM or Memory card.
(7) Function for making a backup copy of
*** MESSAGE *** the data stored on the Memory card.
(10) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. (8) Function for backing up and restoring
the SRAM area
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ] (9) Function for formatting a Memory card.
(10) Simple operating instructions and error
messages are displayed.

Operating procedure
Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function.
After positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the
[SELECT] soft key. Before executing a function, the system my
request confirmation from the operator by having him/her press the
[YES] or [NO] soft key.

Basic operation

Position the cursor. Select a function Check the selection

[ UP ] [SELECT] [ YES ]
[ DOWN ] [ NO ]

Execute the Return to original

function Select END state

- 539 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

C.2.1 USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen

Description
This screen is used to read a system or user file from a Memory card
into Flash ROM.
The USER DATA LOADING screen is used to load ROM data from
a Memory card to flash memory.
The SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen is used to check the contents
of the ROM card installed in a Memory card and then load ROM data
from the Memory card to flash memory.

Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA LOADING (1) Screen title.

(2) MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123) (2) The size of the free space of the
(3) 1 G001A_B1.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 Memory card is displayed.
2 G001A_B2.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 (3) A list of files in the Memory card is
(4) 3 END displayed.

*** MESSAGE *** (4) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

(5) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ] (5) Message

Operating procedure
(1) Position the cursor to the file to be read from the Memory card
and written to Flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
- A single page can list up to ten file names.
- If the Memory card contains ten or more files, the
remaining files are displayed on another page.
To display the next page, press the soft key.
To display the previous page, press the soft key. The
END option is displayed on the last page.
The END option is displayed on the last page.

(2) When you select a file from the USER DATA LOADING screen,
you are prompted for confirmation.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123)
1 G001A_B1.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00
2 G001A_B2.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00
3 END

*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 540 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

(3) When you select a file from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING
screen, a ROM data confirmation screen is displayed for
confirmation.
SYSTEM DATA CHECK & DATA LOADING
G001A_B1.MEM
1 G001 001A
2 G001 021A
3 G001 041A
4 G001 061A
5 G001 081A
6 G001 0A1A
7 G001 0C1A
8 G001 0E1A

*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(4) To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the
[NO] key.

*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD xxxxxx/xxxxxx

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(5) When loading terminates normally, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error
occurs, see C.3

*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING COMPLETE.
HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 541 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

C.2.2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen

Description
This screen is used to list files in Flash ROM or Memory card,
together with the corresponding numbers of management units in each
file and the series and edition of the software.

Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK (1) Screen title.

(2) 1.FROM SYSTEM (2) Select the FROM SYSTEM screen.

(3) 2.MEMORY CARD SYSTEM (3) Select the MEMORY CARD SYSTEM
(4) 3.END screen.
(4) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

*** MESSAGE ***

(5) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. (5) Message

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Screen configuration (FROM SYSTEM screen)

(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK (1) Screen title.

FROM DIRECTORY
(2) 1 NC BAS-1(0008) (2) Names of files in Flash ROM The
2 NC BAS-2(0008) number of management units
3 NC BAS-3(0008) constituting each file appears in
4 NC BAS-4(0008) parentheses to the right of the filename.
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B (0006)
(3) 7 END (3) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

*** MESSAGE ***

(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. (4) Message

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 542 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

Screen configuration (MEMORY CARD SYSTEM screen)

(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK (1) Screen title.

(2) MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123) (2) The size of the free space of the
(3) 1 G001A_B1.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 Memory card is displayed.
2 G001A_B2.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 (3) A list of files in the Memory card is
(4) 3 END displayed.
(4) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

*** MESSAGE ***

(5) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. (5) Message

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Operating procedure
(1) Select either the FROM SYSTEM or MEMORY CARD
SYSTEM screen.
(2) Select the file that you want to confirm (for example, "NC BAS-
1 (0008)").
(3) For the selected file, the management unit numbers are listed,
together with the series and editions of the management units.
After checking the listed data, select the [SELECT] soft key to
return to the file selection screen.

(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK (1) Screen title.

NC BAS-1(0008)
(2) 1 G001 001A 0000 (2) The following items are displayed for
2 G001 021A 0001 each management unit:
3 G001 041A 0002 - Series
4 G001 061A 0003 - ROM number and edition
5 G001 081A 0004 - Internal management-unit number
6 G001 0A1A 0005 If a check result cannot be displayed, a
7 G001 0C1A 0006 "@" is displayed.
8 G001 0E1A 0007

*** MESSAGE ***

HIT SELECT KEY.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 543 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Others (Parity information for the system file and user file)
The NC BAS-1, DGD0SRVO, and other system files in Flash ROM
contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name
field or parity field on the check screen contains a non-ASC II
character or an "@", the Flash ROM may have been destroyed or a
damaged file may have been read. Re-read the data from the Memory
card.
The PMC1, and other user files do not contain parity information in
each management unit. A non-ASCII character or an "-" may appear
in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not indicate that
the file has been damaged.

- 544 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

C.2.3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen

Description
This screen is used to delete a user file from Flash ROM or Memory
card.

Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA DELETE (1) Screen title.

(2) 1.FROM SYSTEM (2) Select the FROM SYSTEM screen.

(3) 2.MEMORY CARD SYSTEM (3) Select the MEMORY CARD SYSTEM
(4) 3.END screen.
(4) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

*** MESSAGE ***

(5) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. (5) Message

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Screen configuration (FROM SYSTEM screen)

(1) SYSTEM DATA DELETE (1) Screen title.

FROM DIRECTORY
(2) 1 NC BAS-1(0008) (2) Names of files in Flash ROM
2 NC BAS-2(0008) The number of management units
3 NC BAS-3(0008) constituting each file appears in
4 NC BAS-4(0008) parentheses to the right of the filename.
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B (0006)
7 PMC1 (0001)
(3) 8 END (3) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

*** MESSAGE ***

(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. (4) Message

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 545 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

Screen configuration (MEMORY CARD SYSTEM screen)

(1) SYSTEM DATA DELETE (1) Screen title.

(2) MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123) (2) The size of the free space of the
(3) 1 G001A_B1.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 Memory card is displayed.
2 G001A_B2.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 (3) A list of files in the Memory card is
(4) 3 END displayed.
(4) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

*** MESSAGE ***

(5) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(5) Message
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Operating procedure
(1) Select either the FROM SYSTEM or MEMORY CARD
SYSTEM screen.

(2) Select the file you want to delete.

(3) The following message is displayed for confirmation.

*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(4) Click the [YES] soft key to start reading. Click [NO] to cancel
reading.

*** MESSAGE ***

EXECUTING
ADDRESS xxxx:
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(5) Upon normal termination, a message such as that shown below is

displayed. Click the [SELECT] soft key. In the event of an error,
see the list of error messages and corrective actions, given later.
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Others (System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen)
The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,
however, are not protected. Protected system files can be overwritten
from the USER DATA LOADING / SYSTEM DATA LOADING
screen.

- 546 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

C.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen

Description
This screen is used to write a user file in Flash ROM to a Memory
card. Only user files can be saved from Flash ROM to a Memory card.
System files cannot be saved.

Screen configuration

(1) SYSTEM DATA SAVE (1) Screen title.

FROM DIRECTORY
(2) 1 NC BAS-1(0008) (2) Names of files in Flash ROM
2 NC BAS-2(0008) The number of management units
3 NC BAS-3(0008) constituting each file appears in
4 NC BAS-4(0008) parentheses to the right of the filename.
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B (0006)
7 PMC1 (0001)
(3) 8 END (3) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

*** MESSAGE ***

(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. (4) Message

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Operating procedure
(1) Select the file you want to save.

(2) The system displays the following confirmation message :

*** MESSAGE ***

SYSTEM DATA SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(3) To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
*** MESSAGE ***
STORE TO MEMORY CARD

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 547 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

(4) When saving terminates normally, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files
written to the Memory card are listed. Check the file names by,
for example, making a note of the list.

*** MESSAGE ***

FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC1.000
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Others (System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen)
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against
free copying of the system files.
User files, however, are not protected.
Files saved from Flash ROM to a Memory card have the following
names :

Header ID in Flash ROM File name in Memory card

PMC1 → PMC1.xxx
PD010.5M → PD0105M.xxx
PD011.0M → PD0110M.xxx

"xxx" is replaced by one of 32 numbers "000", "001", ,,, and "031".

For example, if you attempt to save the file "PMC1 " from Flash
ROM to a Memory card, it will be saved with a name of "PMC1.000"
if no file with a name of "PMC1.000" is found on the Memory card. If,
however, that file is saved to a Memory card that already contains a
file named PMC1.000, the saved file is named PMC1.001. As files are
added, the extension is incremented up to a maximum of PMC1.031.
Any no-longer used numbers in the sequence of the extension
numbers are used in as cending order. If two or more files having
identical names but different extension numbers are normally saved to
the Memory card, check the file names displayed subsequently.

- 548 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen

Description
This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, tool
compensation memories, and other data, retained after the CNC
power in SRAM is turned off, to and from a Memory card.

Screen configuration

(1) SRAM DATA BACKUP (1) Screen title.

(2) 1.SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD ) (2) Menu

2.RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC )
(3) 3.END (3) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

(4) SRAM FILE SIZE : 1MBYTE (4) The SRAM file size is displayed.
(Displayed after a processing option is
selected.)
(5) SRAMBAK.001 (5) The name of the file currently being
saved or loaded is displayed. (Displayed
*** MESSAGE *** after a processing option is selected.)
SET MEMORY CARD NO.001
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

*** MESSAGE ***

(6) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. (6) Message

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Operating procedure (Backing up data)

(1) Select "1.SRAM BACKUP" The following confirmation
message is displayed. Click [YES] to start backup.

(2) If the data cannot be saved entirely onto a single Memory card, a
message such as that shown below is displayed. With the power
still on, insert the second Memory card and click the [YES] key.
Press the [NO] key to cancel saving.

*** MESSAGE ***

SET MEMORY CARD NO.002
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(3) In this way, you can divide SRAM data onto a maximum of 999
Memory card for backup.

- 549 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

(4) Upon the termination of backup, a message such as that shown

below is displayed. Click the [SELECT] key to terminate the
operation.
*** MESSAGE ***
SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Operating procedure (Restoring the data)

(1) Select "2.RESTORE SRAM" The following confirmation
message is displayed. Click [YES] to start restoration.

(2) A message such as that shown below is displayed. Insert the first
Memory card containing SRAMBACK.001 and click the [YES]
key. Click the [NO] key to cancel restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
SET MEMORY CARD INCLUDING SRAMBAK.001
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(3) If another Memory card is required, a message such as that

shown below is displayed. With the power still on, insert the
second Memory card and click the [YES] key. Press the [NO]
key to cancel restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
SET MEMORY CARD INCLUDING SRAMBAK.002
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(4) Replace the second card with another, if required. Repeat this
step until backing up all data.

(5) Upon the termination of restoration, a message such as that

shown below is displayed. Click the [SELECT] key to terminate
the operation.
*** MESSAGE ***
SRAM RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 550 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

CAUTION
1 Backup files will be created with a file name of
SRAMBAK.xxx, where xxx is replaced with a
number between 001 and 999 sequentially.
On the first Memory card, a backup file is created
with a name of SRAMBAK.001. If all data is not
contained on the single card, a backup file
containing the excess data is created with a name
of SRAMBAK.002 on the second Memory card.
In this way, you can divide data onto a maximum of
999 Memory card for saving.
2 Check that the Memory card used for backup does
not contain a file with a name of SRAMBAK.xxx
before performing a BACKUP operation. You can
check a list of file names on a Memory card by
using the SYSTEM DATA LOADING function.
3 For backup, use a formatted Memory card for
backup.

- 551 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Screen

Description
This function is used to format a Memory card. Memory cards must
be formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they
can be re-used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of,
for example, battery failure.

Operating procedure
(1) From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select
8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT."

(2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press

the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(3) The system displays the following message asking whether to

delete all data on the Memory card. To format the Memory card,
press the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
ALL DATA IN THE MEMORY CARD IS LOST.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(4) The system displays the following message during formatting :

*** MESSAGE ***
FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(5) When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the
following message.
Press the [SELECT] key.
*** MESSAGE ***
FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 552 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

C.2.7 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM

Description
The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the
CNC.

Operating procedure
From the MAIN MENU screen, select "1. END." The system displays
the "ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO" message. To terminate the
boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the
[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu.

*** MESSAGE ***

ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

- 553 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS

The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical

order.

Message Description and required action

D DEVICE ERROR (xxxx) An attempt to write data to Flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Turn the power off and back on again. If the second attempt
also fails, the Flash ROM may have been damaged or
destroyed. Replace the Flash ROM module.
F FILE CLOSE ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
FILE DELETE ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
FILE OPEN ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
FILE READ ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
FILE SAVE ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE. There is insufficient free Flash ROM to store the selected file.
HIT SELECT KEY. Delete any unnecessary files from Flash ROM. Alternatively,
replace the Flash ROM module with another with a larger
size.
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE. The selected file cannot be read into flash memory. The
HIT SELECT KEY. selected file or the header information for Flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed.
ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE. The SRAM module ID is illegal. Check the drawing No. of the
HIT SELECT KEY. SRAM module.
M MAX EXTENSION OVER. HIT SELECT KEY. The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.
Either replace the Memory card or delete any unnecessary
backup files.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. The Memory card's battery is exhausted. Replace the
HIT SELECT KEY. battery.
MEMORY CARD DISMOUNT ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT ERROR Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.

- 554 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM

Message Description and required action

M MEMORY CARD FULL. The Memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from
HIT SELECT KEY. the Memory card. Alternatively, replace the Memory card
with another card having sufficient free space.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. The Memory card could not be accessed. Check that the
HIT SELECT KEY. Memory card has been FAT-formatted.
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. The Memory card is not inserted into its slot. Check that the
HIT SELECT KEY. Memory card is pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED. HIT SELECT Although writing to the Memory card was selected, the write
KEY. inhibit switch is set. Disable the write inhibit switch.
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
R ROM PARITY ERROR:NC BASIC. HIT NC BASIC data is not correct. Use SYSTEM DATA CHECK
SELECT. to check that CNC system software is installed.
S SRAM TEST ERROR (ECC) An error was detected in the SRAM module. You can start up
the system because data has been automatically restored.
Replace the SRAM module, however, just in case that the
data may be disarranged in the future.

- 555 -
D.MEMRY CARD SLOT B-63945EN/01

D MEMRY CARD SLOT

D.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 557
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) ............................ 558
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION......................................... 560

- 556 -
B-63945EN/01 D.MEMRY CARD SLOT

D.1 OVERVIEW

Whether a memory card slot is provided or not depends on the

hardware configuration. See the following table:

Hardware
Card slot on LCD unit Card slot on control unit
configuration
Type 1 Provided No card slot
Provided
Type 2 Provided (This slot, however, cannot be
used.)
No card slot
Type 3 Provided
(See NOTE given below.)

(Supplementary)
- Types 1 to 3 indicate hardware configuration. See Section D.3.
- When both the LCD unit and control unit have a memory card
slot, only the memory card slot on the LCD unit can be used.

NOTE
When the hardware configuration is type 3, software
write operation and other operations are
implemented by open CNC functions.

- 557 -
D.MEMRY CARD SLOT B-63945EN/01

D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS)

Flash ATA card (Data I/O)

Compact flash card (Data I/O)
Modem card (for remote diagnosis)

NOTE
For details of the types of usable memory cards, see
the CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B-
63943EN).

Using the compact flash card adapter

1. Insertion
- Set a compact flash card in the compact flash card adapter
(A02B-0303-K150) (hereinafter referred to as the CF
adapter).
- Check that lock lever A is lifted, then insert the CF adapter
into the memory card interface.
- Lower lock lever A.
- Close the memory card interface cover.

NOTE
1 For continuous operation with a CF adapter
inserted, be sure to lower lock lever A and close the
memory card interface cover.
2 The lock function is enabled only when a CF adapter
(A02B-0303-K150) is used.
3 Insert a CF adapter so that the plane bearing the
label faces the screen.

2. Extraction
- Open the cover of the memory card interface.
- Push up lock lever A.
- Push eject button B once. The button protrudes.
- Push eject button B again. The CF adapter is ejected.
- Hold the CF adapter with fingers and pull it out.
- Close the memory card interface cover.

NOTE
When the lock lever is lowered (locked), the eject
button cannot be pushed.

- 558 -
B-63945EN/01 D.MEMRY CARD SLOT

Lock lever A

Compact flash card

Eject button B

Compact flash card adapter

- 559 -
D.MEMRY CARD SLOT B-63945EN/01

D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

• Type 1
LCD-mounted type

LCD MDI

Card slot on LCD

unit
Control unit (LCD-mounted type)

• Type 2
Stand-alone type (with an LCD unit)

Optical cable
Card slot on control LCD MDI
unit LCD link
card
Card slot on LCD
LCD unit for
unit
stand-alone type

Control unit

• Type 3
Stand-alone type (with CNC display unit with PC functions, an
PANEL i, or PC)

Card slot on control

unit PC MDI/FA keyboard
Optical cable
HSSB
board
CNC display unit with PC functions,
PANEL i, or personal computer
Control unit

- 560 -
B-63945EN/01 E.LED DISPLAY

E LED DISPLAY
E.1 OVERIVIEW........................................................................... 562
E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) ............. 563
E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING) ................. 565

- 561 -
E.LED DISPLAY B-63945EN/01

E.1 OVERIVIEW

On the CNC, a 7-segment LED is installed.

The 7-segment LED indication changes according to the operating
status of the CNC.
The 7-segment LED indications provided after the power is turned on
until the CNC is ready for operation and when system errors occur are
described below.

- 562 -
B-63945EN/01 E.LED DISPLAY

E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON)

LED Display Meaning

Power not turned on (power-off state)

Initialization completed and ready for operation

CPU started up
(BOOT system)

Initialization of G/A
(BOOT system)

Initialization of various functions

Task initialization

System configuration parameter check

Additional board waiting 2

Installation of various drivers

All files cleared

Title display
System ROM test

State where the CPU is not started after the power is turned
on
(BOOT system)
BOOT system ended, NC system started
(BOOT system)

FROM initialization

Loading of embedded software

Loading of software for additional boards

IPL monitoring in progress

DRAM test error

(BOOT system, NC system)

BOOT system error

(BOOT system)

File cleared
Additional board waiting 1

- 563 -
E.LED DISPLAY B-63945EN/01

LED Display Meaning

Loading of basic system software
(BOOT system)

Additional board waiting 3

Additional board waiting 4

Final system operation check

Indicator initialization
(BOOT system)

FROM initialization
(BOOT system)
OPEN CNC BOOT (NCBOOT32) being executed
BOOT monitoring in progress
(BOOT system)

- 564 -
B-63945EN/01 E.LED DISPLAY

E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING)

LED Meaning
Display Action
An FROM file for program memory cannot be created.
The state of the file for program memory on the FROM is
checked with the BOOT system.
Rearrange the FROM.
Check the FROM size.
The resources for embedded software are insufficient.
Check the state of embedded software on the FROM with the
BOOT system.
Check the DRAM size.
The DRAM/SRAM/FROM ID is invalid.
(BOOT system, NC system)
Replace the CPU card and/or SRAM/FROM module.
A servo CPU timeout occurred.
Check the state of servo software on the FROM with the
BOOT system.
Replace the servo card.
An error occurred when embedded software is incorporated.
Check the state of embedded software on the FROM with the
BOOT system.
The indicator cannot be recognized.
Check the indicator.
Software for additional boards could not be loaded.
Check the state of software for additional boards on the
FROM with the BOOT system.
An error occurred in waiting for an additional board.
Replace the additional board.
The BOOT FROM was updated.
(BOOT system)
Turn on the power again.
DRAM test error
Replace the CPU card.
System error
Take action according to the situation.
The ID of the indicator is invalid.
Check the indicator.

- 565 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-

UP AND IPL)
F.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 567
F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES....................................... 569
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS............................................. 570
F.4 OTHER SCREENS.................................................................. 576

- 566 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

F.1 OVERVIEW

When the Series 300i/300is is used or the CNC is connected to the PC

over HSSB, Ncboot32.exe can be used for the maintenance of the
CNC.

NOTE
When the CNC is connected to the PC over
Ethernet, use the standard LCD/MDI for the
maintenance of the CNC.

Unless otherwise specified, the following examples assume the use of

Ncboot32.exe of the Windows 2000/XP version.
Ncboot32.exe provides the following functions:
- BOOT screen (for CNC system data maintenance, SRAM
backup, and so forth)
- IPL screen (for clearing SRAM, and so forth)
- Display of the CNC power-on screen
- Display of CNC alarm screen
- Re-connection in case of the occurrence of a communication
error
- Start of a registered application program
- Saving and restoration of auto backup data (for the Series 300is
only)
For Windows 2000/XP, Ncboot32.exe is copied to the System 32
folder of Windows during driver installation.
For Windows CE.NET (Series 300is), it has been installed in the
Storage Card\FANUC folder.
At the start of Windows, Ncboot32.exe starts automatically, and
resides in the system tray.

(Icon at the center)

Supplementary 1: Multi-connection (Windows 2000/XP only)

Ncboot32.exe supports HSSB multi-connection. The CNCs connected
by HSSB are managed as nodes. The boot, IPL, and system alarm
screens are displayed in windows that are opened independently for
each node.

Supplementary 2: Termination method

Normally, Ncboot32.exe need not be terminated. If you need to
terminate it, however, see the "System tray" explanation, below:
Display the popup menu and select "End".
When the Ncboot32.exe window is open, End cannot be selected.

- 567 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

System tray (Series 300i)

Right-click the icon in the system tray, and the popup menu, shown
below, appears at the lower left corner of the screen.

Selecting [Open] causes the status screen to open.

Selecting [About] causes the version information dialog box to
appear.
Selecting [End] causes Ncboot32.exe to terminate.

Double-clicking the icon in the system tray causes Open in the menu
to be automatically selected.

System tray (Series 300is)

Keep tapping the icon in the system tray for one second or longer, and
the popup menu, shown below, appears at the lower left corner of the
screen.

For equipment without a touch panel, the popup menu can be

displayed by restarting "\Storage Card\FANUC\Ncboot32.exe" with
the icon having been registered in the system tray.

Selecting [Open] causes the option setting screen to open.

Selecting [Save] causes the contents of the Registry to be stored and
causes the registered files to be saved in the "\Storage Card\Backup"
folder. If auto backup fails, the files in this folder are used for
recovery.
Selecting [About] causes the version information dialog box to
appear.
Selecting [End] causes Ncboot32.exe to terminate.

Double-clicking the icon in the system tray causes Open in the menu
to be automatically selected.

NOTE
Depending on when to tap, the popup menu may not
be displayed normally. If this occurs, repeat tapping
until it is displayed normally.

- 568 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES

By pressing the MDI keys 6 and 7 and turning the power ON or by

setting the rotary switch provided on the main board of the CNC main
unit (for the LCD-mounted type Series 300is) to the F position, you
can perform maintenance work using the BOOT and IPL screens.

During normal operation

1. The CNC starts without waiting for communication to be
established.
2. After communication is established, the PC performs
initialization described below.
3. Start FOCAS2.
4. Start a registered application program.
5. Perform monitoring for communication errors and CNC system
alarms.

During maintenance
1. Wait until communication with the CNC is established.
2. Display the boot screen.
3. Display the IPL screen.
4. Display the CNC power-on screen.
5. Start FOCAS2.
6. Start a registered application program.
7. Perform monitoring for communication errors and CNC system
alarms.

• Location of rotary switch

• LCD-mounted type Series 300is

Rear view

Power supply
module

Rotary switch

- 569 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS

NOTE
To open each screen of Ncboot32.exe, you are
recommended to use either the mouse or touch
panel.

F.3.1 BOOT Screen

The area where the file is to be placed can be changed by using the
[Setting...] button.

Select the memory card on the CNC or a PC folder. The file location
may be changed at any time.

- 570 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

F.3.1.1 System data manipulation

The following screen is used for manipulating system data (including

control software and ladder programs) on the NC.

[Load...] opens the file selection screen. Specify a file to be loaded.

[Save] saves the selected NC system data in a file.
[Check] checks the selected NC system data.
[Delete] deletes the selected NC system data.

- 571 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

F.3.1.2 SRAM operation

This screen is used to store and restore NC SRAM data.

[Backup] stores SRAM data, and [Restore] restores SRAM data. In

the center of the screen, the progress status is displayed. As with the
NC, the backup file name is determined automatically from the
SRAM size, and cannot be renamed.

- 572 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

F.3.1.3 File operation

The following screen is used for operating files on a memory card in

the CNC or in a folder of the PC.

[Delete] deletes a selected file.

[Format] formats the memory card. This button is valid when the
memory card is selected by [Setting...]
[Refresh] updates the file list to the latest state. After changing
memory cards or floppy disks, click this button.

- 573 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

F.3.2 IPL Screen

NOTE
The contents of the IPL screen vary depending on
the CNC model. Follow the instructions displayed in
the menu.

The CNC allows functions to be performed according to the key

status set at power-on.
The open CNC does not allow this operation. On the IPL screen,
however, equivalent functions can be executed.
For details of the menu on the IPL screen and supported functions, see
the table given in Section F.3.2.1.

- 574 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL screen

Corresponding MDI key operation

Title on IPL screen at power-on
(Operation with a standard CNC)
0. EXIT
1. IPL MONITOR <-> + <.>
2. BACK-UP CNC DATA ALL CLEAR <DELETE> + <RESET>
3. LOCKED PROGRAM ALL CLEAR <M> + <0>

- 575 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

F.4 OTHER SCREENS

F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen

This screen appears when a system alarm is issued in the CNC. (The
above screen is an example. The displayed information varies
depending on the system alarm issued in the CNC.)

- 576 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

F.4.2 Status Screen (Series 300i only)

To open the status screen, double-click the icon in the system tray.
Alternatively, in the menu popped up by right-clicking, click OPEN.

Node: Node number

Name: Node name. (Define the node name in advance by using the
HSSB applet on the control panel.)
Bus: Hardware communication status (0: Communication error, 1:
Communication established)
Status: Status (in hexadecimal)
Bit 1: Rotary switch position 1
Bit 2: End of boot processing
Bit 3: End of IPL processing
Bit 4: Rotary switch position 2
Bit 5: Display of 30 lines on IPL/system alarm screen
Bit 8: CNC system alarm
Pop up this window on communication error: By checking this item,
this screen is opened automatically when a communication error
occurs.

Clicking the [Close] button closes the screen.

Clicking the [Setting...] button opens the option setting screen.
Clicking the [About...] button opens the version information screen.

NOTE
The Series 300is does not provide a status screen.

- 577 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

F.4.3 Option Setting Screen

On the option setting screen, application programs can be registered.

Any programs for use with FOCAS2 will not run unless they are
started after FOCAS2 starts. By registering these programs in
Ncboot32.exe, they can be executed in synchronization with the start
of FOCAS2.

For the Series 300is, it is possible to perform auto backup and

configure MDI keys.

F.4.3.1 Option setting screen (Series 300i)

Clicking the [Settings...] button on the status screen causes the option
setting screen to open. On the option setting screen, an application
must be registered with each node that requires it.

[Node] selects a node. In the list box in the center of the screen, the
programs registered for the selected node are displayed.
[New...] registers a new program. When a blank character is included
in the path, it is enclosed with double quotation marks.
[Remove] deletes a selected line.
[Edit] allows editing of a selected line. This button is used to edit
arguments. The character string %d in the command line is replaced
by a node number. To represent % itself, describe %%.

Example: To start the CNC screen display function after FOCAS2

starts at that node, code the following:
“C:\Program Files\CNCScreen\CNCScrn.exe” /Node=%d

- 578 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

F.4.3.2 Option setting screen (Series 300is)

To open the option setting screen, double-tap the icon in the system
tray. Alternatively, select [Open] from the popup menu of the system
tray.

NOTE
For any changes made on the option setting screen
of the Series 300is to take effect, you must turn the
power off and back on.

CNC setting screen

[Status]-[CNC] : Status (in hexadecimal)

Bit1 : Rotary switch position 1
Bit2 : End of boot processing
Bit3 : End of IPL processing
Bit4 : Rotary switch position 2
Bit5 : Display of 30 lines on IPL/system alarm screen
Bit8 : CNC system alarm
[Status]-[Bus] :
Hardware communication status (0: Communication error, 1:
Communication established)

[MDI]-[Type] allows you to select an MDI key type.

Auto :
QWERTY MDI key type, M and T series standard MDI key
type
M series : MDI keyboard for M series
T series : MDI keyboard for T series

Selecting [MDI]-[Use sticky keys] allows you to use the functions of

the Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys without pressing these keys in
combination with other keys. For example, you can press Alt first and
then 'F' instead of pressing Alt and 'F' at the same time. If you remove
the check mark, you must press Alt and 'F' at the same time.

- 579 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

[MDI]-[Definition file] allows you to specify a customized MDI key

definition file.

Backup setting screen

Place a check mark next to [Enable battery backup unit] to

automatically save the contents of the Registry and files when the
power is turned off. A dedicated battery is used to supply power
during a saving operation after the power is turned off.
Place a check mark next to [Backup Windows registry] to
automatically save the contents of the Registry when the power is
turned off.

NOTE
Usually, the contents of the Registry are not
changed and, therefore, no problems will arise if
they are not automatically saved. You are
recommended to remove the check mark next to
Auto saving of Registry just in case.

[Battery life span] allows you to set the number of days after which a
message prompting you to save manually is to be displayed during
long-period operation.
[Battery alarm] indicates the state of the battery dedicated for backup
(in hexadecimal notation).
0000 : Normal
0001 : The previous auto saving not completed
Other : Battery hardware error value

Start/Load/Save setting screen

This screen allows you to edit save, restore, and start files and to
check execution results. Start allows you to select the file to be started
when the power is turned off. Save allows you to select the file to be
saved when the power is turned off. Load allows you to select the file
to be restored when the power is turned off.

- 580 -
B-63945EN/01 APPENDIX F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)

The following shows the Save screen as an example. The screen

layout and the main operating instructions are common to the Start,
Load, and Save screens.

The [New...] button is used to register a new file. Pressing the button
causes the following dialog box to appear, allowing you to specify a
file.
- Start screen

In the [File name] field, specify a full path name of the

file to be executed.
In the [Parameter] field, specify the program argument.

- Load/Save screen

[Type] is used to specify whether the file is on the Disk

(object store) or it is a memory mapped file.
In the [File name] field, specify the full path name if the
file is on the Disk; specify the name of the file mapping
object if it is a memory mapped file.

- 581 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/01

NOTE
The name of a file mapping object is used
as a temporary file for use during saving
and restoration. You must, therefore,
specify a string characters effective as a
file name.
In the [Memory size] field, specify the size of the
memory mapped file. For a file on the Disk, you need not
specify the size because it is calculated from the actual
file name.

The [Remove] button allows you to cancel the registration of the

selected line.
The [Edit...] button allows you to change the changes made with the
[New...] button.
The [Up] button is used to move a selected line up in the registration
sequence.
The [Down] button is used to move a selected line down in the
registration sequencer.

- 582 -
B-63945EN/01 INDEX

INDEX
Basic Unit ............................................................... 86, 142
<Number>
BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS ........ 193
7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING) ...... 565
Block diagram............................................................... 400
7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON)... 563
BOOT Screen................................................................ 570
<A> BOOT SYSTEM........................................................... 535
AC SPINDLE ............................................................... 382
<C>
Additional Axis Board.................................................. 157
Cable Clamping and Shielding ..................................... 190
Additional Spindle Board ............................................. 159
Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters 401
Addresses...................................................................... 230
CHANGING START SEQUENCES............................ 569
ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION
Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen) ....... 237
(DOG METHOD)......................................................... 372
CNC Alarm Screen ....................................................... 576
ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE
CNC STATE DISPLAY ................................................. 30
POSITION RETURN).................................................. 441
Collective Monitor Function......................................... 275
ALARM LIST .............................................................. 459
COLLECTIVE MONITOR function ............................ 276
ALARM LIST (CNC)................................................... 460
COLOR SETTING SCREEN ......................................... 55
ALARM LIST (PMC) .................................................. 505
CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE)............................ 525
CONNECTORS AND CARDS .............................. 65, 105
ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) . 447
Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output.. 202
ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) ....... 448
CONNECTOR AND CARD CONFIGURATIONS
ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION
OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS.............................. 136
RETURN IS ABNORMAL)......................................... 439
Contents Displayed......................................................... 20
ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 (READER/PUNCHER
CONVERSION CABLE FOR THE INVERTER......... 120
INTERFACE ALARM)................................................ 435
CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES................. 406
ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF) ............................ 442
Correspondence between operation mode and
ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON).............................. 444
parameters on spindle tuning screen ............................. 391
ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS
COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE................ 182
ABNORMAL) .............................................................. 446
CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF.. 427
ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED)
ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED) ... 445 <D>
ALARM SV5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT) Demounting a DIMM Module...................................... 167
ALARM SV5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR) DETAILS OF THE INVERTER .................................. 118
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT)............. 449 DHCP settings .............................................................. 328
ALARM SV5136 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................. 20
(FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) .................. 450 DIGITAL SERVO ........................................................ 344
ANALOG INTERFACE AC SPINDLE ....................... 400 DISPLAY AND OPERATION......................................... 1
AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE.... 420 Display Method ...................................................... 32, 385
Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters ................... 393 Display Unit.................................................................... 86
Automatic start of trace setting ..................................... 261 Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen).................. 264
Displaying Diagnosisc Screen ........................................ 20
<B>
Displaying I/O Link Connection Status ([I/O LINK]
BACKUP UNIT ........................................................... 128
Screen).......................................................................... 250
Basic Configuration of PMC ........................................ 210
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen .................................. 364
Basic Specifications...................................................... 227

i-1
INDEX B-63945EN/01

Displaying the Power ON Sequence............................. 537 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS
DISTRIBUTED I/O SETTING .................................... 174 OUTPUT TO AN EXPANSION UNIT........................ 434
DNS settings................................................................. 326 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS ............. 345
DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING ........ 375 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA .............................. 199
Drawing Waveform Diagnosis Data ............................... 51 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES
CANNOT BE PERFORMED INPUT/OUTPUT
<E>
CANNOT BE PERFORMED PROPERLY.................. 431
Editing Ladder Programs.............................................. 269
Input of Waveform Diagnosis Data ................................ 54
EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION...................... 315
Inputting CNC Parameters............................................ 205
EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE
Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values .................... 207
SCREEN....................................................................... 338
Inputting Part Programs................................................ 208
EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS ................. 333
Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount ............... 207
EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA
Inputting Tool Compensation Amount ......................... 207
ETHERNET CARD...................................................... 316
INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA .......................... 202
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE
INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT
CABINET..................................................................... 180
FLASH CARD ON THE DISPLAY CONTROL
ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) ........................ 532
CARD ........................................................................... 168
ERROR LOG SCREEN FOR THE EMBEDDED
INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB...... 160
ETHERNET.................................................................. 343
INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC................. 209
ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS... 554
Interface Between CNC and PMC ................................ 219
Execution of Trace........................................................ 258
Internal Relay (System Area) Addresses (R) ................ 221
Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage ........ 216
Inverter PCBs and Connector Units................................ 82
EXPLANATION OF SCREENS.................................. 570
INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS,
<F> AND FAN ADAPTER PCBS....................................... 117
Fast Data Server............................................................ 153 INVERTER PCBS, CONNECTOR UNITS,
File operation................................................................ 573 AND FAN ADAPTER PCBS....................................... 119
FTP File Transfer Function .......................................... 333 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure
FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ........................... 2 Occurred ....................................................................... 406
Functions on the IPL screen ......................................... 575 IPL Screen .................................................................... 574

<G> <J>
Grounding..................................................................... 184 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE .................... 412
GUI CARD ................................................................... 109 JUMPER PLUG SETTING .......................................... 116

<H> <L>
HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ........... 416 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION .............. 102, 130, 560 SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])..................................... 262
HARDWARE OVERVIEW ................................. 103, 131 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 300is
HARDWARE ............................................................... 101
<I>
LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 30i HARDWARE .... 59
I/O................................................................................... 88
LED DISPLAY............................................................. 561
I/O Communication Error Messages............................. 521
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) ........................ 172
I/O Signals of PMC ...................................................... 210
LIST OF ADDRESSES ................................................ 279
IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT
LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS............................. 534
TO AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS ............................ 433
List of Printed Circuit Boards....................................... 121

i-2
B-63945EN/01 INDEX

List of Units.................................................................. 121 Operation Errors ........................................................... 510

LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS Operations for Color Setting........................................... 56
........................................................................ 86, 121, 142 Option Setting Screen ................................................... 578
LOAD BASIC SYSTEM.............................................. 553 Option setting screen (Series 300i) ............................... 578
LOCATION OF THE ROTARY SWITCH .................. 115 Option setting screen (Series 300is) ............................. 579
OPTIONAL BOARD.................................................... 153
<M>
OTHER SCREENS ...................................................... 576
Main Board............................................................. 65, 105
Other Units ..................................................... 88, 143, 170
Main CPU Board of Series 30i/300i/300is ................... 136
Others ........................................................................... 121
MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC
Outline of Spindle Control ................................... 383, 400
(BOOT-UP AND IPL).................................................. 566
Output of Waveform Diagnosis Data.............................. 53
MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED
Outputting CNC Parameters ......................................... 203
TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE). 152
Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values.................. 204
MDI Unit ........................................................................ 86
Outputting Part Program............................................... 205
MEMORY CARD FORMAT Screen ........................... 552
Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount ............ 204
MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) ................. 558
Outputting Tool Compensation Amount....................... 204
MEMRY CARD SLOT ................................................ 556
OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE ..................................... 61
Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
Screen ........................................................................... 505 <P>
Method A of gear change for M series Parameter ........................................................................ 57
(Parameter No. 3705#2=0) ........................................... 384 Parameter Setting.................................................... 35, 364
Method B of gear change for M series Parameter Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function .. 317
(Parameter No. 3705#2=1) ........................................... 384 Parameters ...................................................................... 33
Method of Extraction.................................... 160, 163, 169 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS
Method of Insertion ...................................... 160, 165, 169 ([PMC MAINTE])........................................................ 235
Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen) ..... 266 PMC Signal Addresses ................................................. 211
Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen).... 235 PMC SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 227
Mounting a DIMM Module.......................................... 167 PMC System Alarm Messages...................................... 508
MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS..... 162 PREFACE...................................................................... p-1
MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES166 Printed Circuit Boards .................................................... 86
MULTI-PMC FUNCTION........................................... 214 Printed Circuit Boards of Control Unit......................... 142
PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen .............................. 274
<N>
NET EDITOR screen.................................................... 272 <R>
NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC Related Parameters ....................................................... 376
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED .......................... 408 Replacement Procedure ................................................ 122
Noise Suppressor .......................................................... 189 REPLACING A FAN UNIT......................................... 149
Notes......................................................................... 54, 58 REPLACING BATTERY............................................... 93
NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE REPLACING FAN MOTORS........................................ 98
POWER IS TURNED ON............................................ 429 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT................... 91
REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT .................................... 124
<O>
REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS ............. 177
OPERATING MONITOR .............................................. 32
Replacing Method......................................................... 127
OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN ............................. 232
REPLACING THE BATTERY ............................ 125, 145
Operation ...................................................................... 375
REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR ............................... 126
Operation after execution of trace................................. 259

i-3
INDEX B-63945EN/01

REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT 144 SRAM operation........................................................... 572
REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD ............................... 89 STAND-ALONE TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE ....... 129
REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD ............................. 122 Starting the Boot System .............................................. 538
REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION Status Screen (Series 300i only) ................................... 577
SHEET.......................................................................... 127 STRUCTURE ................................................................. 60
RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ......... 337 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED
ETHERNET DEVICES................................................ 332
<S>
SYSTEM ALARMS ..................................................... 456
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.............................................s-1
SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen ................................ 542
Sampling Waveform Diagnosis Data.............................. 53
SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen ............................... 545
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
System data manipulation ............................................. 571
PROCEDURE .............................................................. 539
SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen.................................... 547
Screen Display................................................................ 55
System Files and User Files .......................................... 538
Separate Detector Interface Unit................................... 170
Separation of Signal Lines............................................ 182 <T>
Sequence Program And PMC Parameter I/O T series.......................................................................... 384
([I/O] Screen) ............................................................... 248 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS........... 62, 104, 132
SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE.......................... 383 Transition of the PMC Screens..................................... 234
Series 30i/300i/300is .................................................... 131 TROUBLESHOOTING................................................ 405
SERVO ALARMS........................................................ 451 Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter) ..................... 403
SERVO TUNING SCREEN......................................... 364
<U>
Setting and Displaying Counter Values
USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING
([COUNTR] Screen)..................................................... 240
Screen ........................................................................... 540
Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen). 243
Setting and Displaying Keep Relays <W>
([KEEP RELAY] Screen)............................................. 242 Warning Interface for the αi Spindle ............................ 394
Setting and Displaying Variable Timers WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ......................... 34
([TIMER] Screen) ........................................................ 238 Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen.......................... 46
Setting I/O Address for I/O Link .................................. 218 WHAT IS PMC?........................................................... 210
Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen)253
<Number>
SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT..... 200
αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN........................ 378
Setting Parameters for The FTP File Transfer Function 322
αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE.......................... 377
Setting the DNS and DHCP Functions......................... 326
αi Spindle Information Screen...................................... 396
SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
FUNCTION .................................................................. 317
Signal Ground (SG) Connection of Control Unit ......... 187
Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen).................... 252
Soft Keys .......................................................................... 2
SPC ALARMS ............................................................. 454
SPINDLE ALARMS .................................................... 455
Spindle monitor screen ................................................. 389
Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen............................... 385
Spindle setting screen ................................................... 386
Spindle tuning screen ................................................... 387
SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen .................................. 549

i-4
 Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-63945EN)

01 May, 2003

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.